bun=new Array(628);
dai=new Array(628);
body=new Array(628);

body[0]='00-001.htm';
dai[0]='';
bun[0]=' ';

body[1]='01-001.htm';
dai[1]='EXTERIOR';
bun[1]='EXTERIOREXTERIOR This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the exterior of the machine.Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Automatic document feederThis automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time.- AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times;Front coverOpen this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.- TURNING ON THE POWER- REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE&times;Output tray (centre tray)Printed paper is output into this tray.&times;Operation panelThis panel hosts the [Power] button, [Power Save] button/indicator, [Home Screen] button, main power button and touch panel.Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions.- OPERATION PANEL &times;Right tray*Set so that paper is output into this tray as required.By setting originals received via fax or Internet fax to be output into this tray, you can separate them from paper output from copying.&times;Finisher*This staples paper.A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.- FINISHER&times;Saddle finisher (large stacker)*This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.- SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)&times;Paper pass unit*This unit sends printed paper to the finisher (large stacker), saddle finisher or saddle finisher (large stacker), or functions as a relay between the machine and the finisher (large stacker), saddle finisher or saddle finisher (large stacker).&times;USB port (A type)This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine.For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).&times;Keyboard*Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can be stored under the operation panel.&times;Tray 1Store paper in this tray.- LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY&times;Tray 2 (when a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY&times;Tray 3 (when a stand/2x500/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY&times;Tray 4 (when a stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY&times;Tray 5 (when a large capacity paper tray is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- LOADING PAPER INTO A LARGE CAPACITY TRAY&times;Bypass trayUse this tray to feed paper manually.When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, pull out the extension guide.- LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY&times;Tray 3 (when a stand/500&2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/500&2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER)&times;Tray 4 (when a stand/500&2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*Store paper in this tray.- TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/500&2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER)&times;Punch module*This is used to punch holes in output. Requires a saddle finisher, saddle finisher (large stacker), or finisher (large stacker).- PUNCH MODULE&times;Finisher (large stacker)*This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.- FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)&times;Saddle finisher*This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.- SADDLE FINISHER * OptionalBack to top';
body[2]='01-002.htm';
dai[2]='UPPER SIDE';
bun[2]='UPPER SIDEUPPER SIDE This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts inside the machine. &times; Toner cartridgeThis cartridge contains toner.When the toner in a cartridge runs out, replace with new one. - REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE &times; Fusing unitHeat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper. The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed. &times; Transfer rollerThe black toner image is transferred onto the transfer roller. Do not touch or damage the transfer roller.This may cause a defective image. &times; Right side coverOpen this cover to remove a misfeed. &times; Paper reversing section coverThis unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. &times; Main power switchUse this switch to turn on the power for the machine.When using the fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in the “” position. - TURNING ON THE POWER &times; Toner collection containerThis container collects excess toner that remains after printing.- REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER A service technician collects replaced toner collection containers. &times; Toner collection container release leverPress up this lever when you need to release the toner collection container lock to replace the toner collection container.- REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER &times; HandlePull this out and grasp it when moving the machine. &times; Paper tray right side coverOpen this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or 2. &times; Right side cover release leverTo remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover. &times; Bypass trayUse this tray to feed paper manually.When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, pull out the extension guide.- LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY &times; A stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&2000 sheet paper drawer right-side coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, 3 or 4. Tap the name to make its details pop up. Back to top ';
body[3]='01-003.htm';
dai[3]='TOP';
bun[3]='TOPTOP This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the upper side of the machine. Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times; Document feeding coverOpen this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.&times; Original guidesThese guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.Adjust the guides to the width of the original.- AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times; Document feeder traySet the original in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.- AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times; Original exit trayThe original is discharged to this tray after scanning. Back to top ';
body[4]='01-004.htm';
dai[4]='SIDE AND BACK';
bun[4]='SIDE AND BACKSIDE AND BACK This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the side and back of the machine. &times; USB port (A type)This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine.Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). &times; USB port (B type)A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). &times; LAN connectorConnect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.Use a shielded LAN cable. &times; Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians.Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.Important note for service technicians:The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 3 m (118") in length. &times; Power plug Tap the name to make its details pop up.&nbsp;When the fax expansion kit is installed. &times; Extension phone socketWhen the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket. &times; Telephone line socketWhen the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket. Back to top ';
body[5]='01-005.htm';
dai[5]='OPERATION PANEL';
bun[5]='OPERATION PANELOPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. &times; Touch panelMessages and keys appear on the touch panel display.Operate the machine by directly tapping the displayed keys. - TOUCH TYPES &times; Main power indicatorThis lamp lights up when the machine\'s main power switch is in the “” position.Blinks green during the time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on.Blinks green while print data is being received. - TURNING ON THE POWER &times; [Power] buttonUse this button to turn the machine\'s power on and off.- TURNING ON THE POWER &times; [Power Save] button/indicatorUse this button to set the machine to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer for energy saving.[Power Save] button blinks when the machine is in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer. - AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER &times; [Home Screen] buttonUse this button to display the home screen.- HOME SCREEN Tap the name to make its details pop up. [Home Screen] buttonUse your finger to touch the [Home Screen] button.If you use a pen or other tool to touch the button, it may not operate properly.Risk of malfunctioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories. You can change the angle of the touch panel. Adjust the angle for ease of viewing by pushing the movable part of the touch panel to the left. Back to top ';
body[6]='01-006.htm';
dai[6]='TOUCH TYPES';
bun[6]='TOUCH TYPESTOUCH TYPESIn addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine can be operated by long touching, flicking and sliding.Operation typesOperation on respective screensKey (tapping)List (tapping, sliding and flicking)Slider (sliding)Tab (tapping)Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread)Operation typesTapping Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box.Long touching Touch the panel with your finger and hold it for a while.Keep holding (long touching) it on the action panel or characters in the text box to display characters in a balloon.Flicking Flick the panel to scroll a preview image quickly.Dragging Drag (slide your finger touching the panel in a random direction) to replace a page in the original during preview.Sliding Slide the scroll bar (with your finger touching the panel) to scroll up and down a list with a large number of items.Double tapping Touch the screen twice. Use this operation to enlarge the image in the preview.Pinch Touch the screen with two fingers and move them toward each other. This is used to reduce the browser and preview display.Spread Touch the screen with two fingers and move them away from each other. This is used to enlarge the browser and preview display.Operation on respective screensKey (tapping)A. Tap to select an item. The selected key turns into a different colour.B. Tap numeric keys to enter numbers.C. Tap to increase or decrease the value. Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching.D. Activate to enable the setting.E. Tap here to close the screen.List (tapping, sliding and flicking)A. Tap to select an item. The selected item changes to a different colour.B. Drag the bar up and down. It appears when the item does not fit in the screen.C. Flick the key upwards or downwards. The item scrolls up or down.Slider (sliding)A. Slide the knob from side to side.Tab (tapping)A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed.Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread)A. When a preview screen is "pinched", the screen image is reduced. When "spread", the image is enlarged. When "Double tapping", the image is also enlarged.Back to top';
body[7]='01-007.htm';
dai[7]='HOME SCREEN';
bun[7]='HOME SCREENHOME SCREENOverview Pressing the [Home Screen] button on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions. For procedures for adding and deleting shortcut keys, see the operational steps. To set the home screen for each "favourite operation group list":In "Setting mode (Web version)", select [User Control] &#8594; [Favourite Operation Group List] &#8594; [Home Screen List]. Perform this setting when user authentication is used. Icon indicating the status of the machine The icon shows the status of the machine such as connecting to a USB device.IconMachine statusIconMachine statusPrinter data is being processed.A mirroring kit is installed. Out of order*Printer data is being printed.A mirroring kit is installed. Under configurationSend data exists.Enlarge display mode is enabled.Forward error data exists.Eco mode is enabled.Received data exists.A maintenance notification is issued.Received confidential fax data exists.A USB device is installed.Received data is held.Remote operation is in progress.Received preview data exists.Single-byte alphanumeric character entryOSA communication is in progress.A data security kit is installed.A mirroring kit is installed.The field support system is enabled.Connecting to the access point (Level 4)Not connected to the access pointConnecting to the access point (Level 3)Bad connection of the wireless LAN device in the machine*Connecting to the access point (Level 2)Waiting for the access pointConnecting to the access point (Level 1)&nbsp;&nbsp;*Consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Changing modesChanging mode from the Home screen[Home Screen] buttonTap the mode icon.Operate for each mode.Changing mode from the mode display Tap the mode switching key, and then operate in the mode display. &nbsp;Tap on the mode display.Tap for any mode desired.&nbsp;&nbsp; In image send mode, tap to change mode. OperationAdd a shortcut keyDelete a shortcut keyMove a shortcut keyChanging the name of a shortcut keyReturning the shortcut keys to the default layoutChanging an MFP display pattern Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel.If user authentication is not used, enter the administrator password.The screen changes to edit home mode. After editing the shortcut keys in the home screen, tap the [Exit Home Edit Mode] key on the action panel.Home edit mode is exited and you return to the home screen.Add a shortcut key Tap a place without a shortcut key in home edit mode. Tap the function you want to add.A shortcut key with the added function appears in the home screen. Delete a shortcut key Tap the shortcut key you want to delete in home edit mode. Tap the [Delete Key] key on the action panel.A confirmation screen appears. Tap the [Yes] key.The selected shortcut key is deleted from the home screen.After tapping the shortcut key you want to delete in step 1, you can also delete the shortcut key by dragging it to the trash can. Move a shortcut key In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key you want to move. Tap the [Move Key] key on the action panel. Tap the place where you want to move the shortcut key.The selected shortcut key moves.Changing the name of a shortcut key In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key whose name you want to change. Tap [Change Key Name] on the action panel.The soft keyboard appears.When the external keyboard is installed, the external keyboard can be entered the text. Enter the name and tap the [OK] key.The name of the selected shortcut key changes.Returning the shortcut keys to the default layout In home edit mode, tap the [Return Layout to Factory Default] key on the action panel.A confirmation screen appears. Tap the [Reset] key.The shortcut keys return to the default layout.Changing an MFP display pattern Tap [MFP Display Pattern Setting] on the action panel. Tap a display pattern to be changed.This changes the display pattern of the touch panel. Back to top';
body[8]='01-010.htm';
dai[8]='PREVIEW SCREEN';
bun[8]='PREVIEW SCREENPREVIEW SCREENOverview In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel.Keys used in the preview screenThis changes the mode to edit mode. Pages of the original can be changed, rotated, or deleted.This reduces the image.This displays the scroll bar for enlargement/reduction operations. Moving the slider to the left reduces the image, and moving the slider to the right enlarges the image.This enlarges the image.This rotates the preview image of whole page in the arrow\'s direction. The printing result is not rotated.This displays preview images of respective pages.This displays thumbnails of preview images.This displays pages in a 3D view.The display position of an image can be moved by dragging it while it is enlarged.To enlarge an image, double-tap it when the preview image is displayed by page.OperationDeleting a pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to deleteTap You can also delete the page by tapping the [Delete the Page] key on the action panel.You can also delete by dragging a page to .To undo the deletion, tap . To redo the deletion, tap .Tap the [Edit End] keyMoving a pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to moveDrag to move the page You can also move the page by tapping the [Move the Page] key on the action panel and then tapping of the destination.Tap the [Edit End] keyRotating a page 180 degreesIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to rotateDrag or to rotate the page You can also rotate the page by tapping the [Rotate 180 Degrees] key on the action panel.Tap the [Edit End] keySetting chapter insertsWhen Multi Shot or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with to the first page.In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to moveTap is displayed on the page. You can also set chapter inserts by tapping the [Specify Chapter Inserts] key on the action panel.To cancel the Chapter Inserts setting:Tap displayed on the page, or select the page and tap the [Cancel Chapter Inserts of Selected Page.] key on the action panel.Tap the [Edit End] keyInserting a blank pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap You can also insert a blank page by tapping the [Insert Blank Page] key on the action panel.Tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank pageTap the [Edit End] keyDeleting part of the original imageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the [Erase Specified Range] key on the action panelFollow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range Specify the erase range and then tap the [Execute] key. To delete the image outside the selected range, tap the [Reverse Erase Range] key on the action panel.On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.] or [Apply This Erase Position to This Page.]As necessary, repeat the steps to specify the erase range and the pages to which it is appliedTap the [Exit] keyChanging the settingsTapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the colour mode and other settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed.Back to top';
body[9]='01-011.htm';
dai[9]='TURNING ON THE POWER';
bun[9]='TURNING ON THE POWERTURNING ON THE POWERThis section describes how to turn on/off the machine\'s power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel. Turning on the powerTurn the main power switch to the "" position.After the main power indicator lights in green, press the [Power] button.Turning off the powerTurn off the power by pressing the [Power] button, then turn the main power switch to the "" position.Restart the machine.Turn off the power by pressing the [Power] button and then press it again to turn on the power.When turning off the main power switch, press the [Power] button on the operation panel and then turn the main power switch to the "" position.In a sudden case of main power outage , turn the power for the machine back on and then turn it off in the correct order.If the machine is left for a long time with the main power having been turned off prior to the [Power] button is turned off, abnormal noises, degraded image quality or other problems may result.Turn off both the [Power] button and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "" position.In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted. In some states of the machine, restarting with the [Power] button may not make the settings take effect. In this case, turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again.Back to top';
body[10]='01-012.htm';
dai[10]='PREHEAT MODE';
bun[10]='PREHEAT MODEPREHEAT MODEThis mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer, the amount of energy saved is less and the wakeup time is shorter. In the preheat mode, the [Home Screen] button is lit and the light goes off for the touch panel and the [Power Save Mode] button. The touch panel is cleared when it is tapped or the [Home Screen] button is pressed. To set preheat mode:In "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Preheat Mode Setting].A message appears 15 seconds before Preheat Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap [Continue].The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time.If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters preheat mode. To set display of the message:Set in [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power Management Setting] &#8594; [Display message for delay of entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shutoff] in "Setting mode (administrators) ".Back to top';
body[11]='01-013.htm';
dai[11]='AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER';
bun[11]='AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERAUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERThis mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state. Auto Power Shut-Off Timer will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing aAuto Power Shut-Off Timer is also activated by pressing the [Power Save] button while the [Power Save] button is not lit. This mode is cleared when print data is being received, fax data is being output, or when the [Power Save] button is pressed while it is blinking. To set Auto Power Shut-Off Timer:In "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Auto Power Shut-Off].A message appears 15 seconds before Auto Power Shut-Off Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap the [Continue] button.The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time.If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters auto power shutoff mode. To set display of the message:Set in [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power Management Setting] &#8594; [Display message for delay of entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shutoff] in " Setting mode (administrators) ".Back to top';
body[12]='01-014.htm';
dai[12]='AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE.';
bun[12]='AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE.AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE.Printing or outputting received fax data in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer immediately after completing the print job. To set "As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.":In "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power Management Setting] &#8594; [As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.].Back to top';
body[13]='01-015.htm';
dai[13]='ECO SCAN';
bun[13]='ECO SCANECO SCAN Non-print jobs such as sending a scanned original are performed with the fusing unit turned off. To set Eco scan:In "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Eco Scan Setting]. Back to top';
body[14]='01-016.htm';
dai[14]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTION';
bun[14]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTIONPOWER ON/OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTIONUse this function to set the times for turning the power on and off for the machine to reduce power consumption. Setting Power ON/OFF Scheduling FunctionIn "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting].Back to top';
body[15]='01-017.htm';
dai[15]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTING';
bun[15]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGPOWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGThis function controls transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for the use frequency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period. To enable the power management setting:In "Setting mode", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power Management Setting].Back to top';
body[16]='01-018.htm';
dai[16]='SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGS';
bun[16]='SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGSSPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGSOverview When you must have the machine perform exceptionally many print jobs or other special operation on a certain day, you can specify the day as a "Specific Date" and define an energy saving pattern only for that day. To specify operation for the specific date:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [Energy Save] &#8594; [Power Management Setting] &#8594; [Specific Date Operation Settings].Back to top';
body[17]='01-020.htm';
dai[17]='AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER';
bun[17]='AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBERAUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBEROverviewThe following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine. When starting the machine, the login screen appears.When controlled by user numberIf an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row:If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator to check the user number assignOperation Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys.Each entered digit will be displayed as "". Tap the [OK] key.If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed. To limit the number of pages that a user can use:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [Page Limit Group List].To hide the number of pages that can be used after login:In "Setting mode", disable [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Display Usage Status after Login].To change the message display time:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Message Time Setting]. When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. Login takes place automatically after the user number is entered. When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout]. Back to top';
body[18]='01-021.htm';
dai[18]='AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD';
bun[18]='AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORDAUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORDOverviewThis method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears. When controlled by login name and passwordDifferent items may appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used. If an incorrect login name or an incorrect password is entered three times in a row:If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect login name or password is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator to check the login n To release the operation panel lock:In "Setting mode (Web version)", select [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] to release the lock.To set [A Warning when Login Fails]:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [A Warning when Login Fails].When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. Tap the [E-mail Address] text box and enter your e-mail address. To store a user name:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User List]. Also register detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine. Operation Enter the login name.Entering using the soft keyboard If user name registration has not been performed in setting mode, a user only using LDAP authentication should tap the [Login Name] text box and enter the login name using the soft keyboard.When the external keyboard is inLDAP authentication is used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area network). Enter the password. Enter the password from the soft keyboard.When the external keyboard is installed, the external keyboard can be entered the text. If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that is stored with your LDAP server login name. Each entered cha To have the user name and password registered:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User List].When registering the LDAP server, change the information for [Authenticate to:] as required.When selecting from the User List screen: The LDAP server you are connecting to has been registered upon user registration, and so the target server to which authentication should be directed appears when the login name is selected. Go to step 3.When entering from the soft keyboard:Tap [Authenticate to:] and select the LDAP server to log in. Tap the [OK] key.If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed.When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed. To limit the number of pages that a user can use:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [Page Limit Group List].To hide the number of pages that can be used after login:In "Setting mode", disable [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Display Usage Status after Login].To change the message display time:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Message Time Setting]. When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout]. Back to top ';
body[19]='01-024.htm';
dai[19]='NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS';
bun[19]='NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYSNAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS Back to top ';
body[20]='01-025.htm';
dai[20]='THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE';
bun[20]='THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZETHE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZETo indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings.Paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientationPaper that can only be set in the landscape orientationA4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11"A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13"Paper set in the landscape orientationPaper set in the portrait orientationCan be placed only in the landscape orientation Back to top';
body[21]='01-026.htm';
dai[21]='APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES';
bun[21]='APPLICABLE PAPER TYPESAPPLICABLE PAPER TYPESThis section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media.Useable paperPaper that cannot be usedNon-recommended paperVarious type of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of Sharp standard paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authoThe use of non-recommended or non-usable paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper, check whether printing can be performed properly.Useable paperSpecifications of plain paper, heavy paper and thin paperPlain PaperSharp standard paper80 g/m2 (21 lbs). For paper specifications, see "SHARP STANDARD PAPER SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Quick Start Guide".Non-Sharp standard plain paper60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 28 lbs.)Heavy paper106 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (29 lbs. to 110 lbs. cover)Thin paper55 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 (13 lbs. to 16 lbs.)Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Types of paper that can be set in each trayFor detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into each tray of the machine, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Quick Start Guide" and "TRAY SETTINGS" in "Setting mode" "User\'s Manual&quRecycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Trays 1 - 4 (Tray 2 - 4 when a Stand/500/2x500/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed. Tray 2 when a Stand 500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is installed) Tray 3 - 4 (Stand/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer)BypassTray 5 (large capacity tray)Plain PaperPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedHeavy paper 1*Permitted-Permitted-Heavy paper 2*--Permitted- Heavy paper 3* - - Permitted - Thin paper--Permitted-Pre-printedPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedRecycle PaperPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedLetter headPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedPre-punchedPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedColourPermittedPermittedPermittedPermittedLabels--Permitted-Glossy paper--Permitted-Transparency film --Permitted-Tab Paper--Permitted-Envelope--Permitted-*"Heavy paper 1" is heavy paper up to 220 g/m2 (110 lbs. index), and "Heavy paper 2" is heavy paper up to 256 g/m2 (140 lbs. index), "Heavy paper 3" is heavy paper up to 300 g/m2 (110 lbs. cover).Setting orientation of the print sideThe setting orientation varies for the print side of paper , depending on the tray used. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper in the reverse orientation.TrayIn normal statusWith letter head or pre-printed paper setTrays 1 - 4Facing upFacing downBypass tray and tray 5:Facing downFacing upWhen [Disabling of Duplex] is set for "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", set the print side in the same orientation as for the ordinary operation. To set [Disabling of Duplex]:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Disabling of Duplex].Paper that cannot be usedSpecial media for an ink jet printer (fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)Carbon paper or thermal paperPasted paperPaper with clipsPaper with fold marksTorn paperOil-feed transparency filmThin paper less than 55 g/m2 (15 lbs.)Heavy paper as thick as 300 g/m2 (110 lbs. cover) overIrregularly shaped paperStapled paperDamp paperCurled paperPaper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by another printer or multifunction device.Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture absorptionNon-recommended paper Iron-on transfer paperJapanese paperPerforated paperBack to top';
body[22]='01-027.htm';
dai[22]='LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY';
bun[22]='LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAYLOADING PAPER INTO A TRAYOverviewLoading paper to Tray 1 - 4 (when a stand/500/2x500/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed. Tray 2 when a Stand/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is installed) A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size A5R to A3 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 11" x 17") can be loaded into trays 1 and 4.If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Setting mode". Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action. It may cause print failure, printing on paper of a wroDo not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. To check the type and size of paper:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings]. Operation Pull out the paper tray.Gently pull the tray out until it stops. To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go to the next step. Adjust guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded.The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate while squeezing its lock lever to adjust to the paper size. Insert the paper into the tray.Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets).Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed. Gently push the paper tray into the machine.Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Back to top ';
body[23]='01-028.htm';
dai[23]='LOADING PAPER INTO A LARGE CAPACITY TRAY';
bun[23]='LOADING PAPER INTO A LARGE CAPACITY TRAYLOADING PAPER INTO A LARGE CAPACITY TRAYOverviewUse the large capacity tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray. The tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of 8.5" x 11"size paper (80 g/m2 or 21 lbs). When changing the paper size, contact your dealer or authDo not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Setting mode". To check the type of paper to be set in the tray:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings].Operation Pull out the paper tray.Gently pull the tray out until it stops. Place the paper in the centre of the paper table.Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed. Gently push the paper tray into the machine.Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Back to top';
body[24]='01-029.htm';
dai[24]='LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY';
bun[24]='LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAYLOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAYOverview Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media.Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 106 g/m2 and 256 g/m2: 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 257 g/m2 and 300 g/m2: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays. How to place the originalLoading tab paperInserting transparency filmLoading envelopesWhen using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has been printed on one side, load paper one sheet at a time. Loading more than one Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.How to place the original Load paper up to A5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") size in landscape orientation. Loading tab paper To print on tab paper, load tab paper into the bypass tray with the print side facing down. Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.To print on the tabs of tab paper:In copy mode, use [Tab Copy] in "Others". In print mode, use the tab print function.Inserting transparency filmUse SHARP-recommended transparency film.When inserting transparency film into the bypass tray, the rounded corner should be at the front left when the film is placed in the landscape orientation, or at the far left when the film is oriented in the portrait orientation.When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading.When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may result in curling.Loading envelopes When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below. Loading envelopesOnly the front side of envelopes can be printed or copied on. Place the front side facing down. Important points when using envelopes Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.Do not use the following envelopes:Those with a metal piece, a plastic hook or a ribbon hookThose with a string for closingThose with a windowThose with a liningThose with an uneven surface, finished with titling or embossDuplex envelopes or those with adhesive or other synthetic material for sealingHand-made envelopesThose containing air insideThose damaged with a crease, fold mark or tearEnvelopes with the corner gluing position on the back not aligned with the corner edge should not be used as it may cause creasing.Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm (13/32") around the edges of the envelope.Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than three layers.Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the envelopes.Important points when using embossed paper/label sheetsThe effect of asperity surfaces of embossed paper may affect the print quality depending on the type of embossed paper.For more information, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions.If a form is already printed on the labels, and the print images and the preprinted form do not line up, adjust the application or printer driver settings to rotate the print images. Operation Open the bypass tray. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, pull out the extension guide.Pull the extension guide all the way out. Set the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper. Load the paper with the print side facing down. Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper with the print side up. However, when [Disabling of Duplex] is enabled, set the print side in the same orientation as in the regular mode (facing down). Do not force the paper in.If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased. Back to top ';
body[25]='01-029_1.htm';
dai[25]='LOADING PAPER INTO THE LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY';
bun[25]='LOADING PAPER INTO THE LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAYLOADING PAPER INTO THE LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAYThe steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below.Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray.Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray.Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray.Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray. Back to top ';
body[26]='01-030.htm';
dai[26]='AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER';
bun[26]='AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Overview This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder. Place originals of different sizes together, if needed, in the automatic document feeder. In that case, use the "Others" function in each mode to set mixed size originals.Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies. Otherwise the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result.Transparency film or other transparent material for backup copy, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the document feeder tray. Allowed original sizes Minimum original sizeMaximum original sizeStandard size(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)148 mm (longitudinal) x 210 mm, or A55-1/2" (longitudinal) x 8-1/2" (transversal)Non-standard size(Minimum size that can be specified manually)131 mm (longitudinal) x 140 mm (transversal)5-1/8" (longitudinal) x 5-1/2" (transversal)Standard size(Maximum size that can be automatically detected) 297 mm (longitudinal) x 420 mm (transversal) or A311" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal)A3W (12" x 18") cannot be used.Non-standard size(Maximum size that can be specified manually)Copy mode:297 mm (longitudinal) x 432 mm (transversal)11-5/8" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal)image send mode:297 mm (longitudinal) x 1000 mm (transversal)11" (longitudinal) x 39-3/8" (transversal)When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE"FAX "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES"IMAGE SEND "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES" Allowed original weights 1-sided scanning: 35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (9 lbs to 34 lbs) 2-sided scanning: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (15 lbs to 34 lbs)To scan originals from 35 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 (9 lbs to 14 lbs), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the "Others" function. Scanning without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible. Operation Make sure that there is no original on the document glass. Place the original. Up to 150 sheets can be inserted.After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray. Back to top ';
body[27]='01-031.htm';
dai[27]='DOCUMENT GLASS';
bun[27]='DOCUMENT GLASSDOCUMENT GLASSOverviewThis section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass.Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.When scanning a thick book or other thick original, push up the back of the automatic document feeder and then place the original. When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it.Allowed original sizesMaximum original sizeStandard size 297 mm (longitudinal) x 420 mm (transversal) or A3 11" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal) Non-standard size 297 mm (longitudinal) x 432 mm (transversal) 11-5/8" (longitudinal) x 17" (transversal) When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using. - COPY "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" - FAX "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES" - IMAGE SEND "SPECIFYOperation Open the automatic document feeder. Load the paper with the print side facing down.Place the original face down and align the top left corner of the original with back left (at the tip of the mark ) of the document glass.Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection of the original size.When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, the size can be detected easily if a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), or other standard size paper is placed on top of the original. Close the automatic document feeder.After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner.Back to top';
body[28]='01-036.htm';
dai[28]='PERIPHERAL DEVICES';
bun[28]='PERIPHERAL DEVICESPERIPHERAL DEVICES Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.(As of August 2013)Product nameProduct numberDescriptionStand/500 sheet paper drawerMX-DE12Additional tray. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be loaded into the tray.Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawerMX-DE13Additional tray. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be loaded into each tray. Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DE14 Additional tray. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be loaded into each tray. Stand/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawerMX-DE20Additional paper trays. Tray 2 can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of paper, Tray 3 can hold a maximum of 1150 sheets, and Tray 4 can hold a maximum of 850 sheets.Large capacity trayMX-LC11Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be loaded into the tray. To install, a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is required.Long paper feeding trayMX-LT10When using long paper, the long paper is loaded in the bypass tray. Exit tray unitMX-TR13 NThis can be added to the right side of the machine.Exit tray cabinetMX-TU12This can be added to the centre of the machine.FINISHERMX-FN17Output device that enables the use of the staple function and offset function.FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)MX-FN11Output device that enables the use of the staple function and offset function. To install, a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is required.SADDLE FINISHERMX-FN10Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset function and pamphlet copy function. To install, a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is required.SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)MX-FN18Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset function and pamphlet copy function. To install, a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is required.Paper pass unitMX-RB22This unit is required to install a finisher (large stacker) or saddle finisher.PUNCH MODULEMX-PN11A,MX-PN11B,MX-PN11C,MX-PN11DThis unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher is required.MX-PNX5A,MX-PNX5B,MX-PNX5C,MX-PNX5DThis unit punches holes in copies and other output. A saddle finisher is required.MX-PNX6A,MX-PNX6B,MX-PNX6C,MX-PNX6DThis unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle finisher (large stacker) is required.Barcode Font KitMX-PF10Adds barcode fonts to the machine.XPS expansion kitMX-PUX1This kit can be used as an XPS compatible printer. Please consult your dealer for details. A memory (1GB) is required.Facsimile expansion kitMX-FX11Enables Fax.Internet fax expansion kitMX-FWX1Enables Internet Fax.Data Security KitMX-FR44UAdds security function to the machine.Mirroring kitMX-EB12NStores a copy of data in a separate place.Application Integration ModuleMX-AMX1The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.Application Communication ModuleMX-AMX2This links the machine to an external application over a network.External Account ModuleMX-AMX3This is required to use an external account application on the machine.Scanner function expansion kitMX-EB11Saves a scanned document in the High Compression PDF format. High Compression PDF results in a smaller size than regular PDF.Sharpdesk 1 license kitMX-USX1This software enables integrated management of documents and computer files.Sharpdesk 5 license kitMX-USX5Sharpdesk 10 license kitMX-US10Sharpdesk 50 license kitMX-US50Sharpdesk 100 license kitMX-USA0Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 1 License KitMX-UN01AThis software efficiently scans a large number of documents and materials when used in conjunction with Sharp OSA.The number of licenses can be set from 1 to 100. Please consult your dealer for details. Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 5 License KitMX-UN05ASharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 10 License KitMX-UN10ASharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 50 License KitMX-UN50ASharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 100 License KitMX-UN1HAKeyboardMX-KB11NThis is a keyboard that is integrated with the machine. When not in use, it can be stored under the operation panel.Web browsing expansion kitMX-AM10Internet access is enabled for viewing Web pages.Stamp unitAR-SU1This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send mode.Stamp cartridgeAR-SV1Two stamp cartridges are included in a package.Some options may not be available in some countries and regions. Back to top ';
body[29]='01-037.htm';
dai[29]='FINISHER';
bun[29]='FINISHERFINISHEROverviewThis device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.Function namesSuppliesFinisher maintenanceFunction namesThe following describes the parts that appear when the finisher is open.&times;Output tray Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, A4R, B4, B5R, 8K, 16KR, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13&qu&times;Lever Use this lever to move the finisher in order to remove a paper misfeed, replace staples, or remove a staple jam.&times;Punch waste box (when a punch module is installed) This stores punch waste discharged from punching.&times;Front cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace staples, remove a staple jam, or remove the punch scrap case.&times;Staple case This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.&times;Staple case release lever Use this lever to remove the staple case.Tap the name to make its details pop up. A finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle finisher.Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the output tray may move up and down.SuppliesThe finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1Finisher maintenanceWhen the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.OperationReplacing the cartridge Open the cover. While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops.Gently slide the finisher until it stops. Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.Pull the staple case out to the right. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. Replace the staple case.Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Slide the finisher back to the right.Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position. Close the cover.Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Back to top';
body[30]='01-037_1.htm';
dai[30]='FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)';
bun[30]='FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) OverviewThis device outputs sorted paper whilestaggering each set of paper. As needed,it staples each set.To punch holes in printed paper, installan optional hole punch module.Function namesSuppliesFinisher (large stacker) maintenanceFunction names &times; Output tray (upper tray, lower tray)Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 13" sizes). &times; Top coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed. &times; Staple compilerThis temporarily stacks paper to be stapled. &times; Front coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.Tap the name to make its details pop up. A paper pass unit is required to install a finisher (large stacker) as well as a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer. Do not place heavy objects on the finisher (large stacker) or press down on the finisher (large stacker).A finisher (large stacker) cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher, saddle finisher or saddle finisher (large stacker).Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the output tray may move up and down.SuppliesThe finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge:Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges)AR-SC2 Finisher (large stacker) maintenanceWhen the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.OperationReplacing the cartridge Open the front cover. Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out. Remove the empty staple cartridge.Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then remove the staple cartridge.When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case. Pull the seal that holds the staples straight out. Push the staple case firmly back in.Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Back to top ';
body[31]='01-038.htm';
dai[31]='SADDLE FINISHER';
bun[31]='SADDLE FINISHERSADDLE FINISHEROverviewThis includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets iFunction namesSuppliesSaddle finisher maintenanceFunction names&times;Staple compilerThis temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.&times;Output trayStapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 13" sizes).&times;Side coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.&times;Saddle stitch traySaddle-stitched output is delivered to this tray.&times;Top coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Front coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam, or remove a paper misfeed.Tap the name to make its details pop up.A paper pass unit is required to install a saddle finisher as well as a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer.Do not place heavy objects on the saddle finisher or press down on the saddle finisher.Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.A saddle finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle finisher (large stacker).SuppliesThe saddle finisher requires the following staple cartridge:Finisher unitStaple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 Saddle stitch unitStaple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC3Saddle finisher maintenanceWhen the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.OperationReplacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit)Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit) Open the front cover. While pulling the lever, slide the saddle finisher to the left until it stops.Gently slide the finisher until it stops. Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.Pull the staple case out to the right. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. Replace the staple case.Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Push the saddle finisher back and latch it to the machine.Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position. Close the front cover.Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher. Do not replace removed output back in the output tray. Open the side cover. Remove the empty staple cartridge. Load new staple cartridges.Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge. Close the side cover.Back to top';
body[32]='01-038_1.htm';
dai[32]='SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)';
bun[32]='SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) OverviewThis includes the offset function thatoutputs sorted paper while staggeringeach set of paper, the staple sortfunction that staples each set of prints,the saddle stitch function thatautomatically staples the centre of thesheets and folds the sheets in half, andthe paper folding function that foldspaper in half.To punch holes in printed paper, installan optional hole punch module.Function namesSuppliesSaddle finisher (large stacker) maintenanceFunction names &times; Output trays (upper tray, lower tray)Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 13" sizes). &times; Saddle stitch tray guideThis guides the output as it is delivered to the tray. Before printing, attach the saddle stitch tray guide in the appropriate position below for the paper size to be used. &times; Staple compilerThis temporarily stacks paper to be stapled. &times; Saddle stitch trayThis guides the output as it is delivered to the tray. Before printing, attach the saddle stitch tray guide in the appropriate position below for the paper size to be used. &times; Top coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed. &times; Front coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove a staple jam, or remove a paper misfeed.Tap the name to make its details pop up.A paper pass unit is required to install a saddle finisher (large stacker) as well as a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer.Do not place heavy objects on the saddle finisher (large stacker) or press down on the saddle finisher (large stacker).Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.A saddle finisher (large stacker) cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle finisher.SuppliesThe saddle finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge:Finisher unitStaple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC2 Saddle stitch unitStaple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC3 Saddle finisher (large stacker) maintenanceWhen the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operationpanel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.Operation Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit)Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit) Open the front cover. Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out. Remove the empty staple cartridge.Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then remove the staple cartridge.When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case. Pull the seal that holds the staples straight out. Push the staple case firmly back in.Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray. Open the front cover. Grasp the handle on the saddle stitch unit and pull it slowly out until it stops. Pull the staple unit in the saddle stitch unit out and then rotate it up. Grasp the left and right side of each empty staple cartridge and remove the cartridges. Load new staple cartridges.Replace both staple cartridges. Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge. Pull the staple unit of the saddle finisher forward and then rotate it back to its original position. Push the saddle stitch unit in. Close the front cover of the saddle finisher. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Back to top ';
body[33]='01-039.htm';
dai[33]='PUNCH MODULE';
bun[33]='PUNCH MODULEPUNCH MODULE Overview This device can be installed on a finisher or saddle finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. Discarding punch waste Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box.Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste. OperationFinisher installedFinisher (large stacker) installedSaddle finisher installedSaddle finisher (large stacker) installedFinisher installed Open the cover. While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops. Gently slide the finisher until it stops. Grasp the punch waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the punch waste. Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Gently push the box back in. While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops. Gently slide the finisher until it stops. Close the cover. Finisher (large stacker) installedOpen the front cover of the punch module. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Replace the punch wastebox.If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible using the punch function. Close the cover of the punch module. Saddle finisher installed Open the front cover. Pull out the punch wasteDiscard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Replace the punch waste box. Close the front cover. Saddle finisher (large stacker) installedOpen the front cover of the punch module. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible using the punch function. Close the cover of the punch module. Back to top ';
body[34]='01-040.htm';
dai[34]='REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE';
bun[34]='REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINEREMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINEOverviewRemotely operate the machine on your computer. You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine\'s operation panel that is displayed on your PC, with the same feel as operating in front of the machine.The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.OperationBefore you can use the remote operation function, the following preparation is required.In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Remote Operation Settings] &#8594; [Remote Software Operation] and select [Allow] for [Operational Authority].Connect the machine to the network.Install a VNC application software (recommended VNC software: RealIVNC) in your computer.After the preparation is completed, follow the operation described below to set up the function.Example: RealVNC Start the VNC viewer. Enter the IP address of the machine in the "Server" entry box.Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address. Click the [OK] button. Follow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the connection.When the machine is connected to a VNC application software, appears on the system bar of the machine\'s touch panel. If you wish to disconnect, exit the VNC application software or tap .Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. However, you cannot enter values in series by continuously clicking the key. To set the operational authority for the remote operation function:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Remote Operation Settings].Back to top';
body[35]='01-042.htm';
dai[35]='APPLICATION COMMUNICATION';
bun[35]='APPLICATION COMMUNICATIONAPPLICATION COMMUNICATIONOverviewThe application communication module* is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.This module enables you to link the machine with a scanner application and other standard applications. Set a standard application in "Setting mode" and "Sharp OSA".*The application communication module will be a standard equipment in some countries and regions. To set a standard application in "Setting mode":In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [External Applications Settings] &#8594; [Standard Applications].Operation Tap the [Sharp OSA] key on the Home screen.If no standard applications have been stored, the key cannot be tapped. Select a standard application.If two or more standard applications have been stored, the screen for selecting a standard application will appear. Tap the standard application that you wish to use. If only one standard application has been stored, connection to the standard application Connect the machine to the standard application.The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard application.Back to top';
body[36]='01-043.htm';
dai[36]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNT';
bun[36]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNTEXTERNAL ACCOUNT The external account module* is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.The external account module enables you to use an "external account application" for centralized account management of a n MFP on a network.*The external account module module will be a standard equipment in some countries and regions.External account application setupOperation in external account modeAn "external account application" can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When "external authentication mode" is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machExternal account application setupAfter setting an external application in "Setting Mode", restart the machine to enable the setting. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER". To set up external account application:Operation in external account modeThe following describes operation in the two modes for using an external account application.External authentication modeWhen the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is tapped to run a job in the job status complete screen To enable external authentication mode:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Sharp OSA Settings] &#8594; [External Account Setting] and enable the [Enable Authentication by External Server] checkbox.The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode. However, "User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of UserThe mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.If login fails:If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating correctly. In that case, terminate external account mode forcibly. To forcibly terminate external account mode:In "Setting mode (Web version)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Sharp OSA Settings] &#8594; [External Account Setting].If termination in Setting mode (Web version) fails, terminate it forcibly on the operation panel of the machine. In "SExternal count modeUnlike in external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the external account application is not displayed after the machine has started up. Only the job result is sent to the external acc To enable external count mode:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Sharp OSA Settings] &#8594; [External Account Setting] and enable the [External Account Control] setting alone. Back to top';
body[37]='01-044.htm';
dai[37]='REMOVING MISFEEDS';
bun[37]='REMOVING MISFEEDSREMOVING MISFEEDSOverviewIf a paper misfeed occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear.&nbsp;The fusing unit and paper output area are hot.When removing a misfeed, do not touch the fusing unit. You may burn yourself.Back to top';
body[38]='01-054.htm';
dai[38]='NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS';
bun[38]='NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYSNAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYSDisplay the soft keyboard to register the name of a file, program, folder or user. The soft keyboard shown here is an image for your reference. Different keys may be enabled depending on the actual situation and condition under which you enter characters.If "External Keyboard Priority" is selected in [Setting mode] &#8594;[System Settings] &#8594;[Operation Settings] &#8594;[Set Keyboard Priority], the soft keyboard will not appear. To register words:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594;[Operation Settings] &#8594;[Soft Keyboard Template Setting].Back to top';
body[39]='01-057.htm';
dai[39]='SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL';
bun[39]='SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINALSELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINALPlace the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original. To place it in the automatic document feeder, see "AUTOIf originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies. Otherwise the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.Originals that can be placed in the automatic document feeder by changing the setting or the placing manner:Original containing pages of different sizesSet [Mixed Size Original] in "Others". An original cannot be detected if all pages are of the same size but some of them are set in a different orientation.Thin original 35 g/m2 - 49 g/m2 (9 lbs. to 14 lbs.)Set [Slow Scan Mode] in "Others". For this type, 2-sided scanning is disabled.Original with two or three filing holesPlace the original so that the punched edge does not fall on the feed slot of the document feeder tray. Specify the orientation of the original using [Original Setting].Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips. If they cannot be removed, use the document glass.Back to top';
body[40]='01-058.htm';
dai[40]='TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/500&amp;2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER)';
bun[40]='TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/500&amp;2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER)TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/500&amp;2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER)OverviewA maximum of 1,150 sheets of A4 (8-1/2"&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11") paper can be loaded into tray 3.A maximum of 850 sheets of A4 (8-1/2"&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11") paper can be loaded into tray 4. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Setting mode". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.To check the type and size of paper:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings]. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.OperationPull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops.Lift the feed roller, and place paper into the tray Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1,150 sheets for tray 3, or maximum of 850 sheets for tray 4). Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.Lower the feed roller, and gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Back to top';
body[41]='01-060.htm';
dai[41]='OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS';
bun[41]='OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYSOPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYSNumeric keys[Start] key[STOP] key ([Cancel Copy] key)[CA] keyNumeric keysTap a number to enter it. To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key.On the address screen, you can enter characters other than numbers, and a different key layout is provided. You can also move the cursor by using the [&#8592;] and [&#8594;] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor.[Start] keyTap to perform a print or send job.[STOP] key ([Cancel Copy] key)Tap to stop a print or send job.In copy mode, the [Cancel Copy] key is displayed.[CA] keyTap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode.Back to top';
body[42]='01-061.htm';
dai[42]='TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS';
bun[42]='TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENSTYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENSWhen you tap the job status display, the job status screen appears. Tap it again to return to the previous mode.The job status screen is divided into the following four tabs, enabling you to select a job list by tapping a desired tab.Print Lists print jobs such as copying, printing from a PC, USB direct print, and printing for faxed or other received data.Scanner Lists send jobs of converted images for e-mail messages and FTP/Desktop send jobs.Fax Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line.Internet Fax Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line.The background of the job status display changes as follows:Green: Job in progressYellow: Warming up/waitingRed: Waiting for error clearingGrey: No job On each tab, jobs are classified into three groups. Jobs move among the lists according to the processing status, from Spool, Job Queue and Complete, in that order.To switch the job list display to the display by processing sta Job Queue list Lists jobs in progress and in the queue for copying, printing from a computer and printing of received fax. This list also displays jobs in progress and in the queue for sending fax data or sending image data converted on the machine. The jComplete list Lists jobs through with copying, printing or sending. Back to top';
body[43]='01-062.htm';
dai[43]='STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED';
bun[43]='STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDSTOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete. Tap the [Job Queue] key. Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete, and then tap the [Stop/Delete] key on the action panel. Printing of a received fax or Internet fax cannot be stopped. A job set for transfer in "FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS" cannot be cancelled. Back to top';
body[44]='01-063.htm';
dai[44]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB';
bun[44]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOBPRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOBOverview Priority processing operation varies, as follows, depending on the job type. Operation Tap the job status display and tap the job for priority processing. Tap the [Job Queue] key. Tap the job for priority processing and then tap the [Raise Priority] key on the action panel. Back to top';
body[45]='01-064.htm';
dai[45]='CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS';
bun[45]='CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESSCHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Tap the [Job Queue] key. Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel. For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in "Status", see "READING THE JOB LIST". Back to top';
body[46]='01-065.htm';
dai[46]='CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS';
bun[46]='CHECKING COMPLETED JOBSCHECKING COMPLETED JOBS To check completed jobs, you need to be using document filing. SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Tap the [Complete] key. Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel. For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in "Status", see "READING THE JOB LIST". Back to top';
body[47]='01-066.htm';
dai[47]='READING THE JOB LIST';
bun[47]='READING THE JOB LISTREADING THE JOB LIST Icons indicating the job type Messages displayed in "Status" Icons indicating the job type Print job (RGB/CMYK) Copy job Scan to E-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job Fax transmission job Fax reception job PC-Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job (Including Direct SMTP) PC-I-Fax transmission job Scan to HDD file print job Internet fax reception job (Including Direct SMTP) Broadcast job* Inbound routing job Tandem copy/print job Reprinting of multiple files (as grouped into a single file) OSA scan job * This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job. Messages displayed in "Status" Job in progress DisplayStatus"Printing"Print job in progress"Copying"Copy job in progress"Connecting"Connecting"Sending"Sending"Receiving"Receiving"Tel"Speaking with the other party using an extension telephone"Stopped"The job has been stopped."FAST communications in progress"FAST communications in progress"Toner empty"Toner Empty"Paper empty"Paper Empty"Paper jam"Paper jam"Waiting"Waiting"Warming up"Warming up"Limit"Having reached the account limit"Error"An error occurred while the job was being executed. Reserved job DisplayStatus"Waiting"The job is waiting to be executed."Retry Mode"The job is being retried due to a communication error or other problem."Waiting for confirmation of the transmission"Waiting for confirmation of Internet fax transmissionA day and time is displayedTimer transmission job (the specified time is displayed) Completed job DisplayStatus"OK"Normal termination"Send OK"Transmission was completed.[In Memory]Reception completed but the fax has not been printed.The received data (each page) has not been printed or forwarded. (The received data has not been deleted.)"Received"Printed received fax data.The fax has been received.The received data (each file) was stored."Forward OK"The received data/received data (each file) has been forwarded."FAST communications in progress"FAST communications in progress"Stopped"The job was stopped."Delete"Deleted received data in the image check screen."Number of successful transmission destinations/Total destinations OK"Completion of a broadcast transmission, serial polling, or inbound routing operation.If transmission to 3 destinations was successful out of a total of 5, "003/005 OK" will appear."No response"An error occurred because there was no response from the destination."Busy"An error occurred because the other party was busy."OK REPORT"A "Successful reception" reply received"NG REPORT"A "Delivery error" reply received"NO REPORT"Delivery Confirmation Receive Timeout"E-mail received"E-mail other than Internet fax received"Rejected"A fax was sent from a party that has been blocked by the anti junk fax function."NGxxxxxx"Transmission/reception was not successful because a communication error occurred (a 6-digit error code appears in xxxxxx.)"Error"An error occurred while the job was being executed. Back to top';
body[48]='01-067.htm';
dai[48]='ECO FUNCTIONS';
bun[48]='ECO FUNCTIONSECO FUNCTIONSThese functions help save power consumption by managing operations of sections prone to high power consumption. The machine provides two power-saving modes.AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERIf no operations are taking place, this mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state.Although the power-saving rate is higher, the wakeup time is longer.PREHEAT MODEThis mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state.Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer, the power-saving rate is lower, but the wakeup time is shorter.In addition to these two modes, using the following functions in conjunction helps reduce even more power consumption.FunctionDescriptionAS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE.The machine returns from Auto Power Shut-Off and enters Auto Power Shut-Off mode as soon as printing is completed.ECO SCANThe machine is operated with the fusing unit turned off for non-printing operations (that do not use the fusing unit) such as fax and image transmission.POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTIONUse this function to set the times for turning the power on and off to reduce power consumption.POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGThis function controls transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for the use frequency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period. Priority is given to power on/off scheduling function.Eco Mode SettingThe eco function settings are set in a batch. "Normal Mode" and "Eco Mode" are available.Setting values applied by each mode is as follows.Energy SaveNormal ModeEco ModeEco ScanOn(Sending Modes Only)On(All Modes Except Copy)Auto Power Shut-Off TimerChange transition time by time of day.:AutoFix transition time.:On(1min.)As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.OffOnPreheat Mode Setting1min.1min.Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat modeOnOnEach Energy Save settings in the Power Management Setting is not applied when Nomal/Eco mode is used. Back to top';
body[49]='01-068.htm';
dai[49]='ACTION PANEL';
bun[49]='ACTION PANELACTION PANEL Overview Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel. Operation The functions displayed on the action panel vary depending on the mode or the functions that have been configured.If too many functions have been configured to be displayed on the action panel, you can slide the panel vertically or tap and to view all.In enlarge display mode, part of the text on the action panel may not be displayed. To display the whole text, long-touch the partially hidden key or slide the tab of the action panel to the left. To always display the action panelIn "Setting mode(administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Display Action Panel as default].Back to top';
body[50]='01-069.htm';
dai[50]='CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR FAVOURITE MENUS AND SETTINGS';
bun[50]='CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR FAVOURITE MENUS AND SETTINGSCONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR FAVOURITE MENUS AND SETTINGS When you register frequently used functions you have configured for copying or image sending in Favourite, you can quickly call them.OperationRegistering a function in FavouriteTap Tap the [Edit Favourite] key on the action panel Tap the [Register Key] keyAdministrator rights are required. Tap the key for the function you want to regisiterCalling a function from FavouriteTap Tap the key for the function you want to callFavourites can be registered or edited only by authenticated users and administrators.Unauthenticated users can call and use the favourites registered by administrators. Settings for calling Favourites and permitting/prohibiting editing can be configured in "User Control"&#8594;"Authority Group List" in "Setting mode (administrator)".To edit favourites, tap and then tap [Edit Favourite] on the action panel.Back to top';
body[51]='01-071.htm';
dai[51]='ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[51]='ADDRESS BOOKADDRESS BOOK"Contacts" and "Group" can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including fax, e-mail, Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses. Registering addresses stored as "Contacts" as well as directly entered addresses as "Group" enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group.Up to 2000 entries in all can be stored for "Contacts" and "Group".The address book can store up to 6000 addresses.One "Contacts" can store up to 500 addresses.One "Group" can store up to 500 addresses. Back to top';
body[52]='01-072.htm';
dai[52]='ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN';
bun[52]='ADDRESS BOOK SCREENADDRESS BOOK SCREENTo display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax, e-mail, or Internet fax. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon on the Home screen. "Contacts" and "Group" r When the [Address Book] key is tapped on the e-mail base screen, groups and contacts having e-mail addresses are displayed. If user authentication is enabled, registered contacts can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Selecting "Contacts" or "Group" After selection, tap .To add Contacts and Groups, refer to the following. Narrowing by category Tap the [Search by Category] key to select a category on the screen that appears. After selection, tap . The "Contacts" and "Group" in the selected category appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Search by Category] key. Narrowing by job type Tap the [Search by Job Type] key to select a job on the screen that appears.To narrow by "Group", tap the [Group] key.After the settings are completed, tap . The "Contacts" and "Group" for the selected job appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Search by Job Type] key. Narrowing by indexSearch by alphabet to narrow down addresses. For example, tap "A" on the index bar to display "Contacts" stored with search text starting with "A". Narrowing by keywordTap to display a search screen. Select a target for search, enter a keyword and then tap the [Start Search] key. The search results are listed. For example, if [Item] is [Name], search with a keyword "SH" lists contacts and groups starting with Displaying in the order of search numbersTapping the [Switch Display] key displays a list in ascending order, descending order, or in the order of search numbers.The display is switched in the order of [Switch Display] (&#9650;) (Up) &#8594;[Switch Display] (&#9660;) (Down) &#8594;[Search Number Order].Back to top ';
body[53]='01-073.htm';
dai[53]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY';
bun[53]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYStore new names or addresses in the address book by directly entering them.Operation In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Tap the [Add New] key on the action panel. Tap the [Contacts] key to enter basic information.Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. To register a category name: In "Setting mode", select [Address Book] &#8594; [Category Settings]. If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored "Contacts" and "Group" to be shared within a specified group or stored a SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Tap the [Enter Address Directly] key on the action panel. Enter an address by tapping the [E-mail], [Fax], [Internet Fax] or [Direct SMTP] tab.Check [Set to the address as usually used] to set that address as the preferred over the others if two or more addresses are stored for "Contacts".FTP, Desktop, and Network Folder addresses can be registered from [Address Book] in "Setting Mode (Web version)". Tap the [Add Address Below] key.Tap the [Finish Direct Input.] key on the action panel.Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel.If [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Back to top ';
body[54]='01-073_01.htm';
dai[54]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH';
bun[54]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHOverview Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server.Operation In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Tap the [Add New] key on the action panel. Tap the [Contacts] key to enter basic information.Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. To register a category name: In "Setting mode", select [Address Book] &#8594; [Category Settings]. If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored "Contacts" and "Group" to be shared within a specified group or stored a SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel. Tap [Search from] and select a server.If an authentication screen appears, enter your user name and password and then tap the [OK] key.AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD After selecting a server, tap . Tap the entry field to enter the search condition and then tap the [Start Search] key. To change the search target, tap for [Item]. You can select [Name] or [Address/Number]. Select one address from the search result list and tap the [Enter] key on the action panel.To check address information, select the address and tap the [Confirm Address Information] key on the action panel. Check to see that the selected address is displayed, and then tap the [Register Address Below] key. Tap the [Finish Direct Input.] key on the action panel. Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel.If [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Back to top ';
body[55]='01-073_1.htm';
dai[55]='STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS';
bun[55]='STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGSOverview As a new registration, add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book. FTP and desktop addresses cannot be stored in the address book from transmission logs.OperationIn fax or image send mode, tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panelSelect one address you want to register in the address book from the send logs, and then tap the [New Registration with Address Book] key on the action panel When you tap [Additional Registration with Address Book] on the action panel, you can add the address to a contact stored in the address book.&nbsp;Tap the [Contacts] key to enter basic informationBe sure to enter [Name] and [Initial].To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped.&nbsp; If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored "Contacts" and "Group" to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you aPUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSTo register a category name:In "Setting mode", select [Address Book] &#8594; [Category Setting]. Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel The address is registered in the address book and the transmission log screen is restored.If [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Tap the [OK] keyBack to top';
body[56]='01-074.htm';
dai[56]='STORING GROUPS';
bun[56]='STORING GROUPSSTORING GROUPSRegister "Group" by selecting addresses from those already stored as "Contacts". In this case of registration, only reference to addresses already stored takes place, and so, the total number of registered addresses (maximum 6000) in t In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Tap the [Add New] key on the action panel. Tap the [Group] key to enter basic information. Tap the [Select From Address Book] key on the action panel.To directly enter a new address for a "Group", tap the [Enter Address Directly] key on the action panel. On the contact list, tap the "Group" containing the address to be registered, and then tap the [Display Details] key on the action panel.If you have selected more than one address, tap the [Show Details of Address Selected Next] key on the action panel. Tap the address to be registered in the "Group", and then tap the [Execute] key.You can select more than one address.The selection is cleared and the screen closes if you tap the before tapping the [OK] key.Repeat steps 5 and 6 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap the [Enter and Return.] key on the action panel.Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel.Back to top';
body[57]='01-075.htm';
dai[57]='SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS';
bun[57]='SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPSSETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPSOverview"Contacts" and "Group" stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, stored "Contacts" and "GroUser authentication is required to set the scope for publicizing "Contacts" and "Group". Scope for publicizing addressesDescriptionPublicized to all"Contacts" and "Group" are published to all users of the machine.User"Contacts" and "Group" are published only to the user. Registered addresses are preferentially displayed as "personal contact" in the user\'s address book.User GroupPublication of "Contacts" and "Group" is limited to the specified group. Up to eight groups per "Contacts" or "Group" can be set as the publicity scope.OperationLimiting the scope to the userLimiting the scope to the specified user group Limiting the scope to the user In the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] key. Check that the [User List] is checked and your user name is selected.After the settings are completed, tap .If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list. To register a user:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User List] &#8594; [Register User]. Limiting the scope to the specified user group In the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] key. Tap the [Organization/Group] tab and select a user group to which you want to open addresses.After the settings are completed, tap . To register a user group:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User Group List].Back to top';
body[58]='01-076.htm';
dai[58]='EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[58]='EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOKEDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOKYou can edit or delete "Contacts" or "Group" information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under "Contacts" and "Group".Editing/deleting contacts and groupsEditing/deleting addresses Editing/deleting contacts and groups In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Select a "Contacts" or "Group" you wish to edit, and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel.To delete a "Contacts" or "Group", tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. Editing a "Contacts" or "Group"You can change basic information such as names and categories and also you can add addresses.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING GROUPSYou can change the publicity scope.SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Editing/deleting addresses In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Select a "Contacts" or "Group", and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel.Only one contact or group can be selected. If more than one is selected, the [Edit] key does not appear. Tap the [Registered Address Review] key on the action panel. Select an address from the list of registered addresses and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel.To delete an address, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. Edit an address.After editing, tap the [Enter and Return.] key on the action panel. Back to top';
body[59]='01-078_01.htm';
dai[59]='BILLING CODE';
bun[59]='BILLING CODEBILLING CODE OverviewA billing code, which is added to a recorded job log when a print or send job has been executed, is used to perform billing processing. Billing codes are classified into two types: main code and sub code. A billing code is recorded in the job log when it Downloading Billing Code information only from "Setting Mode (Web version)" of job log will facilitate the subsequent operations such as billing by Code classifications. Types of billing codesTypeDescriptionMain CodeUsed to categorize the results of the executed print and send jobs to enable efficient management. For example, you can assign a code by customer and collect cost information by customer from job logs. Code example: Issue of company ASub CodeAvailable when the main code alone is not sufficient to enable management of billing codes. For example, you can assign monthly cost information to a sub code and collect the total monthly cost information of all customers when the customer name is assignUse CodeAutomatically assigned when the main code or sub code has not been specified.Enable use of billing codeTo enable use of the billing code, select "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].Collecting billing codesSelect [System Settings] of "Setting Mode (Web version)" - [Data Backup] - [Storage Backup] and check the at [Billing Code] then click the [Execute] button. Billing Code information only will be stored in the USB memory and sum up the data by classifyinBack to top ';
body[60]='01-078_02.htm';
dai[60]='USING A BILLING CODE';
bun[60]='USING A BILLING CODE USING A BILLING CODE Overview If the use of billing code is enabled in "Setting Mode (Administrator", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode). Enter the main code or sub code as requTo enable the billing codeSelect "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].To retain the specified billing code at the time of mode transitionSelect "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Administration Settings], then set the [Take Over Billing Code at Mode Transition] check box to . This eliminateYou can assign billing codes to reprinting/resending of target files and sending of print jobs from "Setting Mode (Web version)" - [Document Operations].Specifying a billing code againTo change the specified billing code to another one, tap the [Switch Billing Code.] key on the action panel. When the billing code entry window is displayed, select a new billing code. OperationSelect a billing code from the listSelect the desired billing code from the list of registered billing codes. You need to register billing codes in advance.REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODEWhen the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. When not specifying a billing codeTap the [No Use of Billing Code] key.To select the previously used billing code (at the time of user authentication)Tap the [Use Previously-Used Billing Code.] key on the action panel at the time of user authentication; this displays the main code and sub code the authenticated user has entered previously.Tap and select the main code from the list To search for the main code or main code nameTap . When the search window is displayed, enter the main code and main code name, then tap the [Start Search] key. The search result list is displayed.Tap the [Enter] keyReturns the screen to the billing code entry window. To cancel the selection from the list Tap the [Cancel and Return] key on the action panel. This cancels the selected main code and returns the screen to the billing code entry window.To check the details of the main codeTap the [Display Details] key on the action panel. The detail window is displayed. Check the details, then tap .Tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code.The sub code list is displayed. Perform the procedure shown in steps 2 and 3, then specify the sub code. Tap the [OK] key To clear the value of the specified billing codeTap the [CA] key. Enter the billing code again.Directly entering a billing codeWhen the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the text box in [Main Code], then enter the main code.Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.When not specifying a billing codeTap the [No Use of Billing Code] key. The use code is set to the main code.Tap the text box of [Sub Code], then enter the sub code.Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. Tap the [OK] key To clear the value of the specified billing codeTap the [CA] key. Enter the billing code again.Back to top';
body[61]='01-078_03.htm';
dai[61]='REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE';
bun[61]='REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODEREGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE OverviewRegister a new billing code.A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Setting Mode".To register a billing code from Setting ModeSelect "Setting Mode" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List]. A total of up to 2,000 main and sub codes can be registered.Shared range of billing codeThe registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group at the time of user authentication. If the shared range is not specified, the registered billing codes are shared by all users.To register a groupSelect "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [User Control] - [Organization/Group List].OperationWhen the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code.To register a new sub code, tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code. The subsequent steps are the same as for the main code.Tap the [Add/Edit Billing Code] key on the action panelTap the [Add New] key on the action panel.To return to the billing code selection windowTap .Tap the text box of [Main Code], then type in the main code.Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.Tap the text box of [Main Code Name], then type in the main code name.Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters.If necessary, select the share range of billing code.Public to All: Registers the billing code as a public code for all users who use the machine. Specify Target Public Group: Limits the share range of billing code to be registered only to the specified group. Up to eight groups can be specified as a public destination.For details on how to specify a public destination, refer to "Shared range of billing code".The public destination of a billing code is not displayed if user authentication is not performed. The mode is automatically set to [Public to All].Tap and select a group as a public destinationUp to eight groups can be specified. After the setting has been completed, tap .To cancel the settingTap the [Clear] key on the action panel. This cancels the registered public destination and returns the screen to the previous window.To continuously register other billing codes, tap [Register Next Billing Code.].Execute steps 4 to 7 to register the main code.To cancel the registrationTap the [Cancel and Return] key on the action panel. This cancels all the registered billing codes and returns the screen to the previous window.Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel.This finalizes the registration and returns the screen to the previous window. Tap to finish the registration procedure.To return to the billing code entry windowTap the [CA] key. Back to top ';
body[62]='01-078_04.htm';
dai[62]='EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE';
bun[62]='EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODEEDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE Overview You can change or delete the registered billing code.Editing a billing codeDeleting a billing codeThe billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Setting Mode".To edit or register a billing code from Setting ModeSelect "Setting Mode" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Edit or register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List].OperationEditing a billing codeWhen the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code.To register a new sub code, tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code. The subsequent steps are the same as for the main code. Tap the [Add/Edit Billing Code] key on the action panel Tap and select the main code to be edited, then tap the [Edit] key on the action panel. To return to the billing code selection windowTap . Edit the main code as requiredFor information on how to correct the code, refer to steps 4 to 7 in "REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE". Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel.This finalizes the registration and returns the screen to the previous window. Tap to finish the registration procedure.To return to the billing code entry windowTap the [CA] key.Deleting a billing codeWhen the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code.To register a new sub code, tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code. The subsequent steps are the same as for the main code. Tap the [Add/Edit Billing Code] key on the action panel Tap and select the main code to be deleted, then tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. To return to the billing code selection windowTap .When the confirmation message appears, tap the [Delete] key. Back to top ';
body[63]='01-080.htm';
dai[63]='BROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANEL';
bun[63]='BROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANELBROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANELWhen the [Web Browse] key is displayed on the home screen, tapping the key will allow you to access the Internet and displays Web pages on the touch panel.To enable Web page browsing, the optional Web browsing expansion kit may be required depending on your country or region, or the type of your machine.Basic Screen of a Web pageMenu ListTap to display the menu list. The following shows the items of the menu list.PrintOpens the print dialog.Depending on the Web page, part of the page may not be printed.In this case, open the [Print] menu and set the [Only Display Area] checkbox to in the [Option] tab to print the display area on the touch panel.Add to FavouritesAdds the Web page currently displayed to the list of favourites.List of FavouritesDisplays the favourites list.Web pages can be selected and opened from the favourites list.HistoryDisplays the history list in the order of viewing date from oldest.Web pages can be selected and opened from the history list.Go Home PageOpens the home page.Font and MagnificationChanges the character size, the font type to be displayed, or the zoom ratio.Page InformationDisplays the information of the Web page currently displayed.Settings listTap to display the settings list. The following shows the items of the settings list.Display SettingsChanges the Web page display settings.The selected item with the checkbox set to can be displayed or enabled.The display settings of the following items can be changed.Image / GIF Animation / Table / Match Contents with Screen Width /Javascript /Word Wrap /Japanese Hyphenation / Auto Clear ** With the checkbox set to , when the auto clear function is activated in the machine, the display is cleared and the screen returns to that set in "Setting mode" &#8594; "Operation Settings" &#8594; "Various Setting" &#8594; "Default Display Settings".Home Page SettingsChanges the home page, or selects whether to show/hide the home page at the startup of the browser.Security - SSLChanges the settings of SSL communication to be used.SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of information transmitted over a network. Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive information safely.A Web page that uses both HTTPS and HTTP can also be displayed.Security - CertificatesDisplays the security certificate list.A certificate can be enabled or disabled. However, when the power to the machine is turned off, all certificates became enabled.ProxyDisplays the settings configured in "Setting Mode" &#8594; "Network Settings" &#8594; "Proxy Settings".PreferenceResets all environmental settings including the favourite, history, and cookie to the factory default settings.Home Screen For the model equipped with a Web browsing kit as standard, the Web browser icon is displayed in the home screen.Viewing PDF FilesWhen a Web page includes a link to a PDF file, you can display the PDF file by tapping the link.When you are opening an encrypted PDF file, a confirmation screen appears asking for the password entry. Note that, if you enter an incorrect password three times successively, the PDF file is blocked and cannot be opened.Menu ListTap to display the menu list. The following shows the items of the menu list.Fit WidthFits the PDF page to the width of the view area.Fit PageDisplays a whole PDF page.PrintOpens the print dialog.PropertyDisplays the PDF properties.ThumbnailWhen a PDF page is zoomed in, this menu can be switched to either show or hide the thumbnail showing the area of the page currently displayed.Specifications of the Web Browsing FunctionThe following lists the specifications of the Web browsing feature provided in the MFP.ItemsSpecificationSupported protocolsHTTP (0.9/1.0/1.1), HTTPS HTMLHTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1, XHTMLBasic CSSParts of 1.0 and 2.0ECMAScriptECMAScript (ECMA-262 3rd Edition)DOMParts of Level 1 and Level 2SSL2.0, 3.0TLS1CookieSupportedSupported imageGIF87a, GIF89a, JPEG, PNG, BMP, Animation-GIF, MNGPDFPDF 1.3/1.4/1.5/1.6Some formats may not be displayed or printed. FlashAdobe(R) Flash(R) Lite(TM) 3.1.7When displaying Web pages using this Web browsing function, Web pages will appear or be printed in a way that is slightly different compared to when they are viewed or printed using conventional PC browsers, and some features may be restricted. Back to top';
body[64]='02-001.htm';
dai[64]='BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE';
bun[64]='BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODEBASE SCREEN OF COPY MODEThe displayed contents of the above screen will vary depending on the devices installed.Back to top';
body[65]='02-001_1.htm';
dai[65]='SELECTING COPY MODE';
bun[65]='SELECTING COPY MODESELECTING COPY MODEFollow the steps below to change from the Home Screen or each mode to copy mode.OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the [Copy] mode iconThe initial copy mode screen is displayed.&nbsp;Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode display&nbsp;Tap [Copy]The initial copy mode screen is displayed.If the switch key of each mode is displayed, tap the [Copy] key to select the copy mode.&nbsp;Back to top';
body[66]='02-002.htm';
dai[66]='COPYING SEQUENCE';
bun[66]='COPYING SEQUENCECOPYING SEQUENCEFirst, tap the [Copy] icon on the home screen to enter the Copy mode.SELECTING COPY MODE Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Scan the original.Tap the [Preview] key to scan the original.To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original.When not checking the preview image, tap the [Start] key to start copying. Check the preview image.Display the preview image of the scanned original. in the preview screen, check the settings such as 2-sided copy or staple position. Start copying.Tap the [Start] key. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. To cancel copying:Tap the [STOP] key. Before starting copying, tap the [File] key or [Quick File] key on the action panel to save the scanned original as data. QUICK FILE FILE Back to top';
body[67]='02-003.htm';
dai[67]='COPY PREVIEW';
bun[67]='COPY PREVIEWCOPY PREVIEWIf you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen. While viewing the preview screen, you can adjust the exposure or colour, and configure the preview in your image.If you configure the preview, you can check the status of the configured preview such as the staple position or page layout. You can also drag the preview image to edit it, for example, changing, rotating, or deleting an original page.MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPEPREVIEW SCREENBack to top';
body[68]='02-004.htm';
dai[68]='CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE';
bun[68]='CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZECHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZECheck the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key. If the original size is set to [Auto], the automatically detected size (standard size *) is displayed on the [Original] key. If the original size is specified manually, it is displayed on the [Original] key.Standard sizesStandard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. To specify the standard size, select [System Settings] in "Setting mode"&#8594;[Device Control] &#8594; [Original Size Detector Setting].List of original size detector settingsSelectionsStandard sizes (detected original sizes)Document GlassDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"AB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm)AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")AB-5A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")Inch-111" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Inch-211" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Inch-311" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A3, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" In the size notation above, when the size is suffixed by "R" like "A4R", it indicates a case where a sheet available in both the vertical and horizontal orientations is set horizontally. Even when [Original] is set to [Auto], some original sizes may be detected as other one that is near the standard size. In this case, manually set the original size.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZEWhen placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), or other standard size of paper on top of the origOrientation of placed originalPlace the original as shown below. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On "Preview Screen", view the original orientation or preview image.COPY PREVIEW Document Glass Document feeder tray Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)If the orientation is different between the original and paper, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to match the paper. To set Rotation Copy:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Rotation Copy Setting]. The rotation copy function is available in the automatic paper selection or automatic ratio selection mode, or when the original or paper size iBack to top';
body[69]='02-005.htm';
dai[69]='SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING';
bun[69]='SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGSELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGOverviewThe machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (automatic paper tray selection). If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper, that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue. To change the initially selected tray:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Initial Status Settings] &#8594; [Paper Tray].Operation Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the required tray key. When selecting the bypass tray:Specify the paper type and size based on the paper loaded into the bypass tray.SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY You can also call the [Paper Select] screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen.After the settings are completed, tap .To automatically select the tray:Tap the [CA] key.Back to top';
body[70]='02-005_01.htm';
dai[70]='SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY';
bun[70]='SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAYSPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGYou can also call the [Paper Select] screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen. Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper. Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper. [Auto-AB] key: Automatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5.[Auto-Inch] key: Automatically detects the appropriate inch paper size when loading paper such as 8-1/2"x11".[Size Set] key: Tap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically.[Direct Entry] key: Tap this key to enter a numeric value for the size of the loaded paper.After the settings are completed, tap . To directly enter a paper sizeTap the [Inch] key to set a paper size in inches, or tap the [AB] key to set it in millimetres.After you have entered the paper size using the key, tap the [OK] key.Back to top';
body[71]='02-006.htm';
dai[71]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING';
bun[71]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYINGUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the paper to be used.Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected. To change the paper (tray), tap the [Paper Select] key.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGDepending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
body[72]='02-007.htm';
dai[72]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR COPYING';
bun[72]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR COPYINGUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR COPYING Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. DOCUMENT GLASS Set the next original, and tap the [Additionally Scan] key to scan the original.Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned. Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.To change the paper (tray), tap the [Paper Select] key.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[73]='02-008.htm';
dai[73]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING';
bun[73]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYINGOverview Dual-side copy helps to save paper. Operation Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key, and select the type of 2-sided copy. To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. After the settings are completed, tap . To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to the front side when copying a 2-sided original, set the [Rotate back face 180 deg] checkbox to . Place the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.To change the paper (tray), tap the [Paper Select] key.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGDepending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top';
body[74]='02-009.htm';
dai[74]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING';
bun[74]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYINGOverview Dual-side copy helps to save paper. To change the default 2-sided copy mode:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Initial Status Settings] &#8594; [2-Sided Copy]. Operation Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key, and tap the [1-Sided->2-Sided] key. After the settings are completed, tap . Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. DOCUMENT GLASS The [2-Sided->2-Sided] key and [2-Sided->1-Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass. Set the next original, and tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the original. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned. Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected. To change the paper (tray), tap the [Paper Select] key.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top ';
body[75]='02-011.htm';
dai[75]='AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE';
bun[75]='AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPEAUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPEAutomatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level as appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.) This function automatically adjusts the image during copying to obtain the most suitable copy. To change the default exposure:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Initial Status Settings] &#8594; [Exposure Type].To adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is used for the copy exposure:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Copy Exposure Adjustment].Back to top';
body[76]='02-012.htm';
dai[76]='MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE';
bun[76]='MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPEMANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPEOverviewThis section explains how to select the original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure. To change the default exposure:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Initial Status Settings] &#8594; [Exposure Type].To adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is used for the copy exposure:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Copy Exposure Adjustment].Operation Tap the [Exposure] key. Tap the required original image type key to specify the original type. Tap the key matching the original. Original image type select keysItemDescriptionTextUse this mode for regular text documents.Text/Printed PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.Text/PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.Printed PhotoThis mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.PhotoUse this mode to copy photos.MapThis mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps.Light originalUse this mode for originals with light pencil writing.When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original: When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original: Tap the [Copy of Copy] checkbox so that appears. [Copy of Copy] is available when [Auto], [Text], [Printed Photo], or [Text/Printed Photo] is selected as the original image type. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. If you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to [Auto], the original image type is automatically selected to [Text/Printed Photo].After the adjustment, tap . 1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper 3: Normal density originals 4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured textBack to top';
body[77]='02-013.htm';
dai[77]='AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION';
bun[77]='AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTIONAUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTIONOverviewThis section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original. For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Magnification Selection. To change the default ratio:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Initial Status Settings] &#8594; [Copy Ratio].Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYINGAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Auto Image] key on the action panel. The reduction or enlargement ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and the selected paper size. The automatically selected ratio will appear in the ratio display. To cancel the Auto Ratio Selection setting:Tap the [Auto Image] key on the action panel to clear the check box like .To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu, and then tap the [100%] key.Back to top';
body[78]='02-014.htm';
dai[78]='MANUAL RATIO SELECTION';
bun[78]='MANUAL RATIO SELECTIONMANUAL RATIO SELECTIONOverviewThis section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying.The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio.Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, for which the enlargement and reduction ratio values are pre-registered between the frequently used standard sizes, with the zoom key, which allows you to adjust the ratio i Specify the paper sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio. When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.To return the ratio to 100%: Tap the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu, and then tap the [100%] key. To add any ratio as a preset ratio:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios]. To select the added preset ratio, tap the [Other Ratio] key. Operation Using the preset ratio keySpecifying the paper sizeSpecifying the image dimensions Using the preset ratio key Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. Tap the preset ratio key or key to set the ratio.After the settings are completed, tap .Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.There are two setting screens. Use the [Other Ratio] key to switch between the screens. To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with . Up to two frequently used ratio values can be added to the preset ratio key, respectively for enlargement and reduction.Copy SettingsIf you tap the [Smaller] key on the action panel, the ratio will be set lower than the specified one by 3%.Specifying the paper size Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. Tap the [by Paper] key of the [Zoom] tab. Specify the original size (paper size of the loaded original) and the copy size (paper size of the output result).After the settings are completed, tap .In the preview screen, check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Specifying the image dimensions Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. Tap the [by Size] key of the [Zoom] tab. Specify the image size (dimensions of the image to be enlarged or reduced) and the output size (dimensions of the enlarged and reduced images). Tap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. After the settings are completed, tap .In the preview screen, check whether or not settings produce the required results. Tap the [C] key, and then enter the correct size. To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Back to top';
body[79]='02-015.htm';
dai[79]='ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY';
bun[79]='ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELYENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELYOverviewThis section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios.When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratioThe following two methods can be used to specify the ratio.Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, which is pre-registered, with the zoom key, which allows you to adjust the ratio in 1% units.Specifying the image dimensions Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio. Enter the vertical and horizontal sizes.When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.To cancel the XY zoom setting: Tap the [Zoom] tab or the [CA] key.OperationUsing the preset ratio keySpecifying the image dimensionsUsing the preset ratio key Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] key. Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio.To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one, then adjust it with .Tap each area of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. Tap the [Y] key, and set the Y (vertical) ratio in the same way as the [X] key.After the settings are completed, tap .Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. Specifying the image dimensions Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] key. Tap the [by Size] key. Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size and those of the output size. Tap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. After the settings are completed, tap .If you have entered an incorrect size:Tap the [C] key, and then enter the correct size.To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Back to top';
body[80]='02-017.htm';
dai[80]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE';
bun[80]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZEOverview When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.Set an original size before scanning the original. OperationSpecifying an inch original sizeSpecifying an AB original sizeSpecifying a non-standard original size Specifying an inch original size Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Inch] tab. Tap the appropriate original size key. Specifying an AB original size Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [AB] tab. Tap the appropriate original size key. Specifying a non-standard original size Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Direct Entry] tab. Specify the original size. It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size. Tap the [OK] key.On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. After the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
body[81]='02-018.htm';
dai[81]='STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES';
bun[81]='STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZESSTORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZESOverviewStore the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes.The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.Up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be stored.OperationStoring original sizes (editing/clearing)Retrieving a stored original size Storing original sizes (editing/clearing) Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Custom Size] tab. Tap the [Store/Delete] key. Tap a key () for storing a custom original size.Tap a key that does not show a size.To edit or clear a previously stored key:Tap the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear. To edit the key, tap the [Modify] key and go to the next step.To clear the key, tap the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and tap the key. Specify the original size. Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size. Tap the [OK] key.After the settings are completed, tap the key, and check that the key of the size stored on the original screen is added properly. After you have checked it, tap .To cancel the operationTap the [CA] key. Retrieving a stored original size Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Custom Size] tab. Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key.On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key.To cancel the operationTap the [CA] key. Back to top';
body[82]='02-020.htm';
dai[82]='SORT/GROUP SETTING';
bun[82]='SORT/GROUP SETTINGSORT/GROUP SETTINGOverviewThis section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original.AutoEnables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass. SortSorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them. GroupGroups the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them.Operation Tap the [Sort/Group] key. If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, tap the [Sort/Group] key in [Others]. Select the sorting method.After the settings are completed, tap .Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray.To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination.Back to top';
body[83]='02-021.htm';
dai[83]='MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY';
bun[83]='MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAYMAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAYOverviewIn addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES". For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY".Operation Load paper into the bypass tray.LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. Each tray key displays the size and type of the loaded paper.SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the [Type and Size] key, and select the size and type of the paper. SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[84]='02-023.htm';
dai[84]='ADDING MARGINS';
bun[84]='ADDING MARGINSADDING MARGINS(MARGIN SHIFT)OverviewThis function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edgeNot using the Margin ShiftUsing the Margin ShiftStaple positions Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with the margin shift function. To change the default margin shift setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Initial Margin Shift Setting].Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Margin Shift] key. Tap the image shift direction. Sets a margin shift width. Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys. To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with .If you set the [Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.] checkbox to , goes out and you can set sides 1 and 2 separately. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To cancel the margin shift setting: Tap the [Off] key. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[85]='02-024.htm';
dai[85]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING';
bun[85]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYINGERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING(ERASE)Overview The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books. If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. When a thick book is copied Not using the erase functionUsing the erase function Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.If the erase width setting is 20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2"). To change the default erase width setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Erase Width Adjustment].The factory default setting is 10 mm (2/5").The default margin shift setting can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") . The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").The changed setting is also applied to the Setting mode selection of [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Erase Width Adjustment]. Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Check that he tapped checkbox is set to .If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to .If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to . Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up, Down, Left, and Right on the front side to scan a 2-sided original. If the [Reverse erase position of back face.] checkbox is set to , the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.If the [Reverse erase position of back face.] checkbox is set to , the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased. Specify the erase width. Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To cancel the erase setting:Tap the [Clear] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top ';
body[86]='02-025.htm';
dai[86]='COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT';
bun[86]='COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENTCOPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT(DUAL PAGE COPY)OverviewThis function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. This function cannot be used in combination with Centre Erase. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Copy] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel dual page copy: Tap the [Dual Page Copy] key to clear the checkmark. Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark (&#9660;).DOCUMENT GLASS Selects A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper. SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[87]='02-026.htm';
dai[87]='MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT';
bun[87]='MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMATMAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT(PAMPHLET COPY)OverviewCopies made by "Pamphlet Copy" can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet. Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages Binding side When Pamphlet Copy is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end of pamWhen a saddle finisher is installed, you can select the [Staple Sort] and set the Saddle Stitch (Staple each set of copies at two positions in the centre of paper). To staple copies automatically when Pamphlet Copy is enabled:From the "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Automatic Saddle Stitch]. This is used to activate Saddle Stitch automatically when Pamphlet Copy is enabled when a saddle finisher is instOperation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSIf the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Pamphlet Copy] key. Select the binding edge. To cancel the pamphlet staple settings Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [1-Sided] or [2-Sided] key to meet the original. When not inserting a cover, go to step 6. When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING". If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[88]='02-027.htm';
dai[88]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE';
bun[88]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGECOPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE(PAMPHLET COPY 2IN1/4IN1)OverviewThis function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format. The following paper sizes and number of sheets are available for pamphlet copy 2in1 or 4in1. Paper size: A3W (When the saddle finisher (large stacker) is installed), A3, B4, A4R, 12"x 18" (When the saddle finisher (large stacker) is installed), 11"x 17", 8-1/2"x 14", 8-1/2"x 11"R, 8K, 16KR Number of sta Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. Eight or 16 original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSIf the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Pamphlet Copy] key. Select the binding edge.To cancel the pamphlet staple settings Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [1-Sided] or [2-Sided] key to meet the original. When not inserting a cover, go to step 6. When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. To change the cover input tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING".To make a copy on a cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that appears. If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Multi Shot] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the multi shot type sheets you wish to use.If needed, the images will be rotated.To cancel the 2in1, 4in1 setting: Tap the [Off] key. Select the layout. Select the border.A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[89]='02-028.htm';
dai[89]='COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS';
bun[89]='COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALSCOLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS(JOB BUILD)OverviewThis function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the nuThis function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals were divi The Job Build mode must be specified before scanning the original.If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder.The Job Build mode cannot be combined with other functions.Dual Page CopyBook CopyCard shotMulti-Page EnlargementA3 (12" x 18") full bleed copyRepeat layoutOperationCopying in job build modeChanging the copy settings for each set of originalsCopying in job build mode Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.To cancel the job build mode After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key to scan the first original.Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Change copy settings as required.When changing copy settings (Copy exposure, paper size/type etc.), tap the [Change the settings of the original to be scanned next] key. For more information, see "Changing the copy settings for each set of originals". When scanning the next ori Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] key.Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Print Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.To make two or more sets of copies: Changing the copy settings for each set of originalsAs necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next original in step 4 above. Tap [Change the settings of the original to be scanned next] on the action panel, and set the checkbox to . Change copy settings. Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additionally Scan] key.Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.Back to top';
body[90]='02-029.htm';
dai[90]='USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME';
bun[90]='USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIMEUSING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME(TANDEM COPY)OverviewThis function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time.Master machine and slave machineThe master machine performs only scanning, and a slave machine registered in the master machine performs only printing without scanning the original. To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network.Even if more machines are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.To configure the tandem connection setting, register IP address information of the slave machine in the master machine. For the port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change tIn this situation:A saddle finisher is installed in the master machine while not installed in a slave machine.Tandem Copy is enabled when specifying copies without stapling.Tandem Copy is disabled when specifying copies with stapling.As shown here, if Tandem Copy is enabled using a function provided in the master machine and not provided in a slave machine, a message will appear.If a machine runs out of paperIf either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.If user authentication is specifiedTandem Copy is enabled when user authentication is specified in the master machine.Tandem Copy is disabled when user authentication is specified in the slave machine while it is not specified in the master machine.If an odd number of sets is being made, one more set is output to the master machine. In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Tandem Connection Setting]. Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Additional Scan] key.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the tandem copy setting:Tap the [Tandem Copy] key to uncheck it. Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set. The specified number of copies are shared between the master and slave machines. If the number of copies is odd, the master machine makes more copies than the slave machine. If an incorrect number of copies is set Tap the [C] key and then enter the correct number. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. Tap the [STOP] keys on both the master and slave machines.Back to top';
body[91]='02-030.htm';
dai[91]='INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES';
bun[91]='INSERTING COVERS IN COPIESINSERTING COVERS IN COPIES(COVERS/INSERTS)OverviewThis function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed. When inserting insertion sheets, see "INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES". Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover Cover inserting examples The following shows the copy results when front and back covers are inserted into six 1-sided original pages or three 2-sided original pages in the four copy modes below. 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied 1-sided copy Not copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. 2-SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. Not copied 1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. Not copied 2-SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 1-sided copy 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 1-sided copy 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 2-SIDED COPY 1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-SIDED COPY 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied 1-sided copy Not copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies. 2-SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. Not copied 1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page. Not copied 2-SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 1-sided copy 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 1-sided copy 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 2-SIDED COPY 1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page. 2-SIDED COPY 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.1-sided copying of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied 1-sided copy Not copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. 2-SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. Not copied 1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. Not copied 2-SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 1-sided copy 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 1-sided copy 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 2-SIDED COPY 1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-SIDED COPY 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied 1-sided copy Not copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. * The second original page is not copied. 2-SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. Not copied 1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied. Not copied 2-SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. 1-sided copy 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. The second and the fifth original pages are not copied. 1-sided copy 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. * The second original page is not copied. 2-SIDED COPY 1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied. 2-SIDED COPY 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover. Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray. When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have b One sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers. When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original. This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function. This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in "Setting mode". Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. Tap the [Front Cover] key, and then tap the [On] key. When inserting a back cover, tap the [Back Cover] key, and then tap the [On] key. Tap the [Change] key, and configure copy setting of a front cover sheet. When only inserting a cover, tap the [Do not copy] key. To change the cover input tray: If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel cover sheet insertion:Tap the [Off] key.To cancel the front cover, back cover, and insertion sheet settings at the same time:Tap the [CA] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[92]='02-031.htm';
dai[92]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES';
bun[92]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIESINSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES(COVERS/INSERTS)OverviewThis function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. There are two types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified. Insert covers if needed. When inserting covers, see "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES". Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5. Sheet inserting examples The following examples show the copy results when insertion sheets are inserted into six 1-sided originals or three 2-sided originals using two copy modes described below. Copy modes 1-sided original copying 2-sided original copying 1-sided original copying Insertion sheet setting conditions Resulting copies Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. Not copied 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet. 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet. 2-sided original copying Insertion sheet setting conditions Resulting copies Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. Not copied 1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet. * The fourth original page is not copied. 2-SIDED COPY Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet. Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray. When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have b The insertion sheet size must be the same as the copy size. Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted. The document glass is not available for this function. Note that two insertion sheets cannot be inserted into the same page. When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original. This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function. This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in "Setting mode". Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab. Tap the insert page display key.The Insertion Type B settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings. Enter the number of the page you want to insert a sheet into using numeric keys, and then tap the [Enter] key.The total number of insertion sheets is displayed at the side of [Enter] key. Repeat these steps for the number of insertion sheets.If you have entered an incorrect insert page number: Tap the [Page Layout] key and change the page.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel inserting insertion sheets: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Change] key. When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key.When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key.To change an insertion sheet: Tap the [Paper Tray] key, and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded.When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet, you cannot use label sheets, transparency films, or tab paper for insertion. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.After the settings are completed, tap . Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[93]='02-032.htm';
dai[93]='CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS';
bun[93]='CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETSCHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS(PAGE LAYOUT)The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below.For the cover, you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided.For insertion sheet, you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. Tap the [Page Layout] key. If the settings for the covers or insertion sheets are not configured, the [Page Layout] key is disabled. Check the page layout.To exit this job after checking the page layout, tap the key. To edit or delete, tap the required key. When deleting, tap the [Delete] key. When editing, tap the [Modify] key. Change cover or insertion sheet settings.For the cover, you can change the copy mode. You can change the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into. After the settings are completed, tap the key multiple times to return to the [Others] screen. Then, tap the [Back] key.Back to top';
body[94]='02-033.htm';
dai[94]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS';
bun[94]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMSINSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS(TRANSPARENCY INSERTS)OverviewWhen copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. I When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-side to 1-side" mode can be used. The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.Transparency film can only be placed in the bypass tray.Operation Place the transparency film face down in the bypass tray, and load transparency film sheets. After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray settings.MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transparency Inserts] key. Tap the [On] key.When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the transparency inserts setting: Tap the [Off] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[95]='02-034.htm';
dai[95]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[95]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGECOPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE(2IN1)OverviewThis function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8in1 to copy eight original pages onto one sheet. Thi 2in1 copying 4in1 copyingWhen inserting a cover sheet, select Cover Setting to copy only a front sheet to one page and collectively copy the second and subsequent pages. Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Additionally Scan] key. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [2in1] key. Tap the key of the 2in1 sheets you wish to use.If needed, the images will be rotated. Select the layout. Select the border.A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To cancel the 2in1, 4in1 setting: Tap the [Off] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[96]='02-035.htm';
dai[96]='COPYING A PAMPHLET';
bun[96]='COPYING A PAMPHLETCOPYING A PAMPHLET(BOOK COPY)OverviewThis function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pampHow to place the originalBook Copy must be specified before scanning the original. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four. This function can be combined with saddle stitch or fold if a saddle finisher is installed. When the book copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the book copy function cannot be used. Operation Place the original on the document glass.Place the opened pages of the "front and last sheets".DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Copy] key. Select a binding position.When not inserting a cover, tap the and [Back] keys in sequence. Then, go to step 5.To cancel book copy: Tap the [Off] key. When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that appears. To change the cover input tray: This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in the setting mode. Tap the [Preview] key to scan the first original page. Scanning of the original starts. Place the next opened original pages, and tap the [Additional Scan] key.Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned. Scan the remaining original pages in the following order: Inside of the 2nd and 3rd pages (facing pages)...Inside of the last page and back cover (facing pages) Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Original Scan End] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[97]='02-036.htm';
dai[97]='COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER';
bun[97]='COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPERCOPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER(TAB COPY)OverviewLoad a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions. Relation between the originals and the tab paperTab copying with a left bindingOriginalsPlacing the originalsLoading tab paperTab copying with a right bindingOriginalsPlacing the originalsLoading tab paperTab Copy must be specified before scanning the original. To change the default image shift width for tab copying:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Initial Tab Copy Setting].The default image shift width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8"). The factory default setting is 10 mm ("1/2").Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tab Copy] key. Tap the [On] key. Sets an image shift width (tab width). Tap the numeric value display indicating the image shift width, and enter a shift width using numeric keys. To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the tag copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. Load the tab paper. When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side down. Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the machine last. After loading tab paper into the bypass tray, configure the bypass tray settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY". The width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8"). Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[98]='02-037.htm';
dai[98]='COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[98]='COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGECOPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE(CARD SHOT)OverviewThis function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper. To change the default original size during Card Shot:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Card Shot Settings].Operation Select the paper to be used for card shot.Set a paper by referring to the "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING". Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to , the original is enlarged or reduced with the ratio appropriate to the original size. To cancel the Card Shot setting: Tap the [Off] key. Place a card face down on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key.DOCUMENT GLASS Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the reverse side.Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[99]='02-038.htm';
dai[99]='PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS';
bun[99]='PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKSPRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS(STAMP)OverviewThis function prints information such as the date or stamp, which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following five types of information. Page number Stamp Text Watermark For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIORITY". You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text. Each of the items above can be printed on the header or footer of each sheet.If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the following order: watermark, right side, left side, centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.When [Stamp] is combined with other functions: Combined function nameResulting copiesMargin ShiftTogether with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.Tab CopyCentringUnlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.Dual Page CopyCard ShotStamp items are printed for each copy sheet.2in1Stamp items are printed for each original page.Pamphlet CopyBook CopyStamp items are printed for each page when compiling.Covers/InsertsUse the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and inserts.Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key. Tap a tab to be printed, and tap the [Format] key.The format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or soft keyboard. When you tap the tab, the display tab is switched. Tap a key of the desired print position. Tapping the [Layout] key allows you to check the printing position or detailed settings. To cancel the text settings:Tap the [Cancel All] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen.Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Setting using the [Text] tab Tap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters. Selecting the format from pre-set text Tapping the [Pre-Set Select] key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing. Tapping the [Store/Delete] key allows you to edit, delete, or store pre-set text. To edit or store pre-set text, use the soft keyboard. Back to top';
body[100]='02-046.htm';
dai[100]='MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY';
bun[100]='MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPYMAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY(MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT)OverviewThis function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets.Multi-Page Enlargement must be specified before scanning the original. Place an original on the document glass. Overlap of sections of imageThere will be a margin around the edges of each copy.Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size. (The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key. Select the [AB] or [Inch] tab to meet the original size for multi-page enlargement, and tap the key that meets the original size.Tapping the key of the original size displays the keys that show the available enlargement size, copy paper size, and number of sheets. Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to.The original orientation appears. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.When printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to .To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting:Tap the [Clear] key.Although the multi-page enlargement setting is cancelled, the ratio selected automatically is kept valid.To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key on the base screen to display the ratio menu, and then tap the [100%] key. Place the original on the document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen, and tap the [Preview] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top';
body[101]='02-047.htm';
dai[101]='COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE';
bun[101]='COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGECOPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE(MIRROR IMAGE)OverviewThis function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image.Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the mirror image setting: Tap the [Mirror Image] key to clear the checkmark. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[102]='02-048.htm';
dai[102]='COPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF';
bun[102]='COPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFFCOPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF(A3 (12" X 18") FULL BLEED COPY)OverviewThis feature lets you copy an entire A3 (11" x 17") size original at full size with no image cut-off at the edges.A3W (12" x 18") size paper is used, which is slightly larger than A3 (11" x 17") size.The A3W (12" x 18") full bleed copy must be specified before scanning the original.The staple and punch functions cannot be used.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [A3 (11 x 17) full bleed copy] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel A3W (12" x 18") full bleed copy setting: Tap the [A3 (11 x 17) full bleed copy] key to uncheck it. Place A3W (12" x 18") paper into the bypass tray. Pull out the extension guide, adjust it to the width of A3W (12" x 18") paper, and place the paper on the bypass tray. After loading A3W (12" x 18") paper into the bypass tray, configure the bypass tray settings as explained in "M Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[103]='02-049.htm';
dai[103]='COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER';
bun[103]='COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPERCOPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER(CENTRING)OverviewThis function centres the copied image on the paper.This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced.Not using the centring functionUsing the centring functionCentring must be specified before scanning the original. When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Centring] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the centring setting: Tap the [Centring] key to clear the checkmark. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[104]='02-050.htm';
dai[104]='REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY';
bun[104]='REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPYREVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY(B/W REVERSE)OverviewThis function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image.Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption.B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text". Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [B/W Reverse] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel B/W reverse: Tap the [B/W Reverse] key to uncheck it. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[105]='02-052.htm';
dai[105]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE';
bun[105]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGEADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE(SHARPNESS)OverviewThis function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image.Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the sharpness setting:Tap the [Off] key. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTo cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[106]='02-053.htm';
dai[106]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE';
bun[106]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGEWHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE(SUPPRESS BACKGROUND)Overview Suppresses light background areas of originals. Suppress Background must be specified before scanning the original. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Suppress Background] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. To cancel the background suppression settings:Tap the [Off] key. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top ';
body[107]='02-057.htm';
dai[107]='MAKING A PROOF COPY';
bun[107]='MAKING A PROOF COPYMAKING A PROOF COPY(PROOF COPY)OverviewThis function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the setting. Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scan Proof Copy must be specified before scanning the original.If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the job in progress is interrupted, and a proof copy is printed preferentially. The interrupted job will resume after proof copying has been completed. However, if proof copy is executedOperation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Proof Copy] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. To cancel the proof copy setting: Tap the [Proof Copy] key to uncheck it. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. As necessary, specify the required functions such as "Exposure" and "Copy Ratio". Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys.Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.If an incorrect number of copies is set Tap the [C] key, and enter the correct number. Tap the [Start] key.Make only one set of copies. Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] key.As necessary, change the settings and repeat proof copying until you are satisfied with the copy result. You can also change the number of copies. To change the number of copies, use the numeric keys. In Proof Copy, unavailable function keys are not displayed.Some available functions may be restricted. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key.Back to top';
body[108]='02-058.htm';
dai[108]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS';
bun[108]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETSCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS(ORIGINAL COUNT)OverviewThis function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making a copy. By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheetOriginal Count must be specified before scanning the original.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.To cancel the original count setting: Tap the [Original Count] key to uncheck it. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the number of original sheets. The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet wa If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets Tap the [Cancel] key to stop the job. Tap the [OK] key to start copying. If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Print Start] key has been tapped. Back to top';
body[109]='02-059.htm';
dai[109]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES';
bun[109]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZESSCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES(MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)OverviewThis feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection(Auto ratio selection and A3 (11" x 17") are selected)There are two settings for mixed size originals.Same WidthDifferent WidthUse this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.A3 and A4B4 and B5A4R and A511" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11"8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Use this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:A3 and B4A3 and B5B4 and A4A4 and B5B4 and A4RB4 and A5B5 and A4RB5 and A511" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14"11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13"11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Mixed Size Original must be specified before scanning the original. When [Different Width] is selected, "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1-Sided" of automatic two-sided copying can be used.When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.). [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594;[Device Control] &#8594; [Original Feeding Mode] Select this setting to always scan mixed-size originals.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Tap the [Same Width] key or the [Different Width] key as appropriate for the originals.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the mixed size original setting: Tap the [Off] key. Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[110]='02-060.htm';
dai[110]='SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS';
bun[110]='SCANNING THIN ORIGINALSSCANNING THIN ORIGINALS(SLOW SCAN MODE)OverviewWhen you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. To always scan the original in the slow scan mode:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Original Feeding Mode].Operation Touch the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel slow scan mode: Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[111]='02-061.htm';
dai[111]='ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL';
bun[111]='ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINALADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL(CUSTOM IMAGE)OverviewThis function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. There are following two types of custom images.Custom stampCustom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark) Custom Stamp Custom Watermark An image must be registered in advance from the printer driver to the machine. For information about how to register an image, see "REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE""REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE" (User\'s Manual)".A custom stamp image is copied by sheet, not by original. If 2in1, 4in1 is enabled, user stamps are copied for each set of pages.A custom stamp image is copied with the registered size. The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduced.A different custom image cannot be specified for each page.When you tap the [Start] key, a monochrome copy is made even if you have selected a custom stamp.If an image runs off of the specified paper depending on the registered size or position, the excess will not be copied.Custom Image can be combined with Tandem Copy. Stamp copy is performed when a custom image with the same file name is registered in both the master and slave machines. If it is not registered, a copy will be made without a custom image. The combination wiCombined functionCustom image operationsMargin ShiftShifts in the same way as for an original image.EraseMakes a stamp copy as normal.Dual Page CopyMakes a stamp copy by sheet.Pamphlet CopyMakes a stamp copy as normal.Job BuildMakes a stamp copy as normal.Covers/InsertsBased on the custom image setting.Transparency InsertsMakes a stamp copy as normal.2in1Makes a stamp copy by sheet.Book CopyMakes a stamp copy as normal.Tab CopyMakes a stamp copy as normal regardless of image shift setting.Card ShotMakes a stamp copy by sheet.Mirror ImageMakes a stamp copy as normal without mirror image reverse.B/W ReversePrints an image as normal without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background. Custom stamp: Printed in white Custom watermark: Printed without being whitenedA3 Wide PaperMakes a stamp copy as normal.CentringMakes a stamp copy as normal without centring.StampMakes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu.Photo RepeatCannot be combined.Multi-Page EnlargementCannot be combined.Pattern PrintMakes a stamp copy under a pattern print.Repeat LayoutCannot be combined.Position ImagePrints an image at the original position regardless of the Position Image setting.Book DivideMakes a stamp copy by sheet.Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Custom Image] key. Tap the [Custom Stamp] or [Custom Watermark] key. Tap the [Image] key to select an image. Select the required thumbnail image(s) from the available selection. Set [Print Page] or [Original]. For custom stampPrint PageSpecify a page(s) for stamp copy. First Page or All PagesPrint PositionSpecify a position for stamp copy.OriginalsORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATIONSpecify the original orientation.2-Sided Original TypeSpecify the binding edge for 2-sided original. Book or TabletAngleSpecify the corner of the image. 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, or 180 degreesFor custom watermarkPrint PatternSpecify the image watermark print pattern. Transparent: Makes an original image transparent for stamp copy. Overlap: Hides a watermark added to an original image for stamp copy.ExposureSelect the exposure of a watermark from nine levels.Print PageSpecify a page(s) for stamp copy. First Page or All PagesPrint PositionSpecify a position for stamp copy.OriginalsORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATIONSpecify the original orientation.2-Sided Original TypeSpecify the binding edge for 2-sided original. Book or TabletAngleSpecify the corner of the image. 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, or 180 degreesAfter the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To cancel the Custom Image setting:Tap the [Off] key. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[112]='02-062.htm';
dai[112]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA';
bun[112]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATAPADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA(PATTERN PRINT)OverviewCharacters to prevent unauthorised copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern. When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear. "Pattern Print" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised copying. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage.Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such a case, adjust the contrast by selecting the [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] from the "Setting mode".When copying an output sheet with a pattern print, the hidden pattern may not emerge depending on settings other than "Hidden Pattern Print".The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies in cases where certain types of devices or certain setting conditions are used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print.This function cannot be combined with Repeat Layout or Multi-Page Enlargement. To set a pattern print:In "Setting mode", select [Security Settings] &#8594; [Hidden Pattern Print Setting].Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Pattern Print] key. Tap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as required.We recommend you to select the [Character stand out] option for the "Print Method". Specify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as required.To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the pattern print setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tapping the [Function Rev.] key displays the settings of the [Print Contents Setting] tab. Check the preview image in the preview screen.The pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern colour checking. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[113]='02-063.htm';
dai[113]='REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET';
bun[113]='REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEETREPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET(REPEAT LAYOUT)Overview This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. You can set any of the following three (3) types of repeat copy. Repeat method Description Auto The maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio being selected from the base screen. Fixed Repeat When you select a repeat count, original size, and paper size to copy images on a sheet, the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the original is copied. Photo Repeat This function repeatedly copies on A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or A3 (11" x 17") papers without changing the copy ratio of the photo size original. You can select any of the following five types of original si Original sizes up to 70 mm x 100 mm (2-1/2" x 4") Original sizes up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 3-5/8") Original sizes up to 100 mm x 150 mm (5" x 7") Original sizes up to 65 mm x 70mm (2-1/2" x 2-1/2") Repeat Layout must be specified before scanning the original. If the copy ratio automatically obtained in [Fixed Repeat] exceeds 25 to 400%, it will result in an error. Select the number of faces to repeat again. Always place an original on the document glass for photo repeating. This function cannot be combined with Mixed Size Original or 2-Sided Copy. Operation Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto) Copy by specifying a repeat count (Fixed Repeat) Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat) Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto) Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. Tap the [Auto] key. Check the repeat faces which have been calculated automatically. Change the original size, paper size, or copy ratio by tapping the respective [Original], [Paper Select], or [Copy Ratio] key when necessary. SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE MANUAL RATIO SELECTION SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Specify the repeat partition line. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To cancel the automatic settings:Tap the [Off] key. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. tap the copies display key to set a number of copies. Copy by specifying a repeat count (Fixed Repeat) Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. Tap the [Fixed Repeat] key. Tap the [Original] and [Paper Select] keys to select an original size and a paper size, respectively. SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the [Repeat Number] key to set a repeat count. After the settings are completed, tap . The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio. If the calculated copy ratio exceeds the range from 25% to 400%, an error occurs. Specify the repeat partition line. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more copies, tap the copies display key to set a number of copies. Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat) Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Repeat Layout] key. Tap the [Photo Repeat] key. Tap the [Original] key and select an original size. When you tap the original size key, the original direction is indicated in the "Orientation". Place the original to meet the displayed orientation. After the settings are completed, tap . Tap the [Paper Select] key and select a paper size. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. When you tap the [Original sizes up to 130 mm x 90 mm (3" x 5")] key on the [Original] screen, you can select the A4 paper size only. To cancel the photo repeat setting:Tap the [Off] key. Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. You can check the original direction by reading the "Orientation" on the Original screen. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. tap the copies display key to set a number of copies. Back to top';
body[114]='02-064.htm';
dai[114]='SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION';
bun[114]='SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITIONSPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION(POSITION IMAGE)OverviewThis function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy. You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position.Position Image must be specified before scanning the original. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Position Image] key. Sets a movement distance. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[115]='02-065.htm';
dai[115]='SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL';
bun[115]='SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINALSKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL(BLANK PAGE SKIP)Overview If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original. If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not copied, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus copied. Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting:Tap the [Off] key. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Check the confirmation message, and tap the [Execute] key to start copying. On the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of copies excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by Back to top ';
body[116]='02-066.htm';
dai[116]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE';
bun[116]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGESPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE(BOOK DIVIDE)OverviewThis function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original.This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open.The scanned original is split in the centre. The document glass is not available for this function. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key. Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. Tap the [Off] key. Place the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key. Remove saddle stitches from the original.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Back to top';
body[117]='02-067.htm';
dai[117]='INTERRUPT COPY';
bun[117]='INTERRUPT COPYINTERRUPT COPYOverviewThis function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy. When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy. The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned.Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following functions: Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count, Proof Copy, Preview Setting, Book DivideWhen you place an original on the document glass, you cannot select the 2-sided copying, sort mode, and staple sort features to make an interrupt copy. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.Operation Tap the [Interrupt] key. The interrupt mode screen appears.If user authentication is enabled tap the [Interrupt] key to display the user authentication screen. Enter the user name and password to perform user authentication. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Configure copy settings.To cancel interrupt copy, tap the [Cancel] key. Tap the [Start] key to start interrupt copying. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original.Back to top';
body[118]='02-068.htm';
dai[118]='COPY JOBS';
bun[118]='COPY JOBSCOPY JOBSWhen you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab. PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Back to top';
body[119]='02-072.htm';
dai[119]='RETRIEVING A PROGRAM';
bun[119]='RETRIEVING A PROGRAMRETRIEVING A PROGRAM Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the program you want to retrieve. Select a program key, and tap the [Add to Bookmark] or [Register in Home] key on the action panel. You can then register the selected program as a shortcut in bookmark or home page. Back to top';
body[120]='02-073.htm';
dai[120]='STORING A PROGRAM';
bun[120]='STORING A PROGRAMSTORING A PROGRAMOverviewThis function collectively stores copy settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For information about how to retrieve a program, see "RETRIEVING A PROGRAM".For example, suppose A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the following settings: To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided copying is used.Margin shift is used to allow a margin to punch holes for filing. When a job program is not storedWhen a job program is stored Sets A3 (11" x 17") to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") reduction. Changes the exposure setting. Sets 2-sided copying. Sets margins. Sets punch hole settings. Selects copy settings. Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each month because the above settings must be selected. In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings, so some copies must be redone.The settings are stored in a program, so they can be selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time. In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting mistakes. Up to 48 programs can be stored.Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off.A program can also be stored in a home page or bookmark as a shortcut; therefore, it is helpful when retrieving it. Operation Specify the copy function to be stored.Using the base screen will display the [Program Registration] key. Tap the [Program Registration] key on the action panel. Tap a key not used yet for program registration.A key with a program stored is displayed in colour. Tap a key with no program stored.If a program is not named, a serial number is automatically assigned instead of a program name. Name the program, and tap the [OK] key. Select whether or not to register the program in home page or bookmark. If user authentication is disabled, the administrator password entry screen appears. When the administrator password is entered, the registration is completed. The number of copies cannot be stored.Back to top';
body[121]='02-074.htm';
dai[121]='DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM';
bun[121]='DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAMDELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAMOverviewThis section explains how to delete copy settings in a program and rename a program.A program that is already stored cannot be deleted.When [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594;[Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Setting] &#8594; [Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program] is selected, a registered program cannot be deleted or renamed.OperationDeleting a programRenaming a programDeleting a program Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap the [Delete] key. Renaming a program Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the [Change Name] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the required program, and rename the program. Then tap the [OK] key. After the settings are completed, tap . Back to top';
body[122]='02-075.htm';
dai[122]='FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION';
bun[122]='FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATIONFORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION(TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT)This function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorised copy. To configure print settings:In "Setting mode", select [Security Settings] &#8594; [Tracking Information Print]. If this function is specified together with another image compositing function, trace information is printed at the top.Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame.The information added at printing or the preview image of the account job ID and date/time are displayed as shown below. Account job ID: 00000 Date/time: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mmBack to top';
body[123]='02-076.htm';
dai[123]='ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING';
bun[123]='ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNINGADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING(RESOLUTION)This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling the high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application.Resolution must be specified before scanning the original. Touch the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] key. Select the resolution.The resolution can be set to both the document feeder and document glass.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Start] key to start copying.When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
body[124]='02-077.htm';
dai[124]='REDUCING THE IMAGE QUALITY FOR TONER SAVING';
bun[124]='REDUCING THE IMAGE QUALITY FOR TONER SAVINGREDUCING THE IMAGE QUALITY FOR TONER SAVINGThis function minimizes toner consumption when making copies such as in-house resources, which are not affected even if the image quality is reduced slightly. The toner saving level can be selected from up to three levels. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Toner Save Mode] key. Select the toner saving level.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.If user authentication is enabled, you can permit each user group to use the toner save mode.AUTHORITY GROUP LIST To change the toner save mode setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Energy Save] &#8594; [Toner Save Mode]. The toner save is cancelled for pattern printing. Back to top';
body[125]='02-085.htm';
dai[125]='STAPLE SORT SETTING';
bun[125]='STAPLE SORT SETTINGSTAPLE SORT SETTINGOverview Binding EdgeProcess imageOFFDoes not staple.1 staple in back1 staple in front2 StaplesPamphlet Copy You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN".A finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple sort function.A saddle finisher is required to use the saddle stitch function.OperationStaple ON (excluding pamphlet copy)Saddle stitchStaple ON (excluding pamphlet copy) Tap the [Staple Sort] key. Select a staple position(s).After the settings are completed, tap .To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination.If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Continue] or [Cancel] key. [Continue]: Continues sorting without stapling. [Cancel]: Cancels the staple sort setting.Saddle stitch Tap the [Staple Sort] key. Select [Pamphlet Copy]. Configure binding edge and cover settings.MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMATAfter the settings are completed, tap and check that the [Pamphlet Copy] key is enabled on the staple sort screen. After you have checked it, tap .If [Pamphlet Copy] is already specified in [Others], you do not need configure binding edge and cover settings.If [Pamphlet Copy] is specified in [Others], the saddle stitch screen appears.Confirm the message shown on the screen, and tap the [On] key.To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination. If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Divide], [Continue] or [Cancel] key. [Divide]: Divides the pages into sets that can be stapled and sorts them. You cannBack to top';
body[126]='02-086.htm';
dai[126]='PUNCH SETTING';
bun[126]='PUNCH SETTINGPUNCH SETTINGOverview You can view punch positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN". A punch module is required for paper punch. You cannot use A3W (12" x 18") size papers, and special media such as transparency film and tab papers. You cannot use heavy paper as thick as 129 g/m2 over. You cannot use a paper punch together with the staple and paper folding. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Punch] key. Tap the [On] key.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray.To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination.Back to top';
body[127]='02-088.htm';
dai[127]='SEND DATA WHILE COPYING';
bun[127]='SEND DATA WHILE COPYINGSEND DATA WHILE COPYINGOverviewThis function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e-mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder. STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH The facsimile and image transmission starts after the copy, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions. Operation Tap the [Send and Print] key on the action panel. Select a recipient from the address book.ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN You cannot use the soft keyboard to enter an address. If you cannot find the recipient in the address book, enter it in the address book.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Set each copy item as required. These copy settings are used for facsimile transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function.You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. After the copy, the transmission starts.After the copy, you cannot preview the settings before transmission.Back to top';
body[128]='03-001.htm';
dai[128]='PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE';
bun[128]='PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINEPRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINEThe machine is equipped with a printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.Windows environmentPrinter driver typePCL6The machine support the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages.PSThis printer driver supports the PostScript&reg; 3TM page description language developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.If it is desired to use the Windows standard PS printer driver, the PPD driver must be used.To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "2. SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.The User\'s Manual mainly uses PCL6 printer driver screens to explain how to print in a Windows environment.Macintosh environmentPrinter driver typePSThis printer driver supports the PostScript&reg; 3TM page description language developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.Back to top';
body[129]='03-002.htm';
dai[129]='PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT';
bun[129]='PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTPRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Settings]) may vary depending on the application.The machine name that normally appears in the [Printer] menu is [MX-xxxx]. ("xxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.)OperationThe following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory application in Windows. Click of WordPad and select [Print]. In Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, select [Print] from the [File] menu. Select the printer driver for the machine and click the [Preferences] button. If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list.Click a tab on the "Print" dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.<!-- Click the [Paper] tab and select the paper size.Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the application.You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the pull-down menu. To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User 1] to [User 7] from the pull-down menu and click the [Custom] button.To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings. Click the [OK] button to execute printing.Back to top';
body[130]='03-003.htm';
dai[130]='PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT';
bun[130]='PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTPRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.The machine name that normally appears in the "Printer" menu is [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.)OperationThe following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application "TextEdit" in Mac OS X. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and select the printer.If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list. Select the paper settings and click the [OK] button.Set the paper size, paper orientation, and copy ratio. Select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the correct printer is selected. Select the print settings and click the [Print] button.In Mac OS X 10.4, click next to [Copies &amp; Pages] and select the settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear. In Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8 if the settings do not appear, click next to the printer name.Back to top';
body[131]='03-004.htm';
dai[131]='PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)';
bun[131]='PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)OverviewThe user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Settings]) may vary depending on the application. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Options] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each print job.The machine\'s user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD driver* is installed and the Windows standard PS printer driver is used. For this reason, the machine can be configured to prohibit users from executing printing unless their user info To prohibit printing by users whose user information is not stored in the machine:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Disable Printing by Invalid User].Operation In the printer driver properties window of the application, select the printer driver of the machine and click the [Preferences] button. Click the [Job Handling] tab. Enter your user information.When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, click the [Login Name] and [Password] checkboxes so that the checkmark appears, and enter your login name and password. Enter the password using 1 to 32 characters.When authentication is carried out using the user number, select the [User Number] checkbox and enter your user number using 5 to 8 digits.If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Options] tab so that user authentication is always performed, user information cannot be entered here. User information must be entered in the dialog box that appears each time the user starts a p Enter the user name and job name as necessary.Click the [User Name] checkbox, and enter your user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.Click the [Job Name] checkbox, and enter a job name using up to 80 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear.To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox. Click the [OK] button to execute printing.Back to top';
body[132]='03-005.htm';
dai[132]='PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)';
bun[132]='PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)OverviewThe user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.The machine name that normally appears in the "Printer" menu is [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.) The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator. To prohibit printing by users whose user information is not stored in the machine:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Disable Printing by Invalid User].Operation In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the machine\'s printer name is selected. Select [Job Handling] and enter your user information.When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password".When authentication is carried out using the user number, enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User Number".In Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, v10.7, and 10.8, select [Job Handling] and click the [Login] tab. Enter the user name and job name as necessary.Enter your user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.Enter a job name using up to 32 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear. Click the [Print] button.In Mac OS X, you can click the (lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.Back to top';
body[133]='03-006.htm';
dai[133]='PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT';
bun[133]='PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTPAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTBefore printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine\'s trays. To check the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button in [Paper Selection] on the [Paper] tab. The relationships between the "Paper SWhen "Paper Tray" in "Paper Selection" is set to [Auto Select]The tray that contains paper of the size and type selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" is automatically selected.When "Paper Tray" in "Paper Selection" is set to anything other than [Auto Select]The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting. When you have set "Paper Tray" to [Bypass Tray], be sure to select "Paper Type". Check the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machWhen "Paper Type" in "Paper Selection" is set to [Auto Select]A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory default setting is plain paper only.)When "Paper Type" in "Paper Selection" is set to anything other than [Auto Select]A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY".When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Printer Set To exclude the bypass tray from the trays that can be selected when [Auto Select] is selected:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Printer Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Bypass Tray Settings] &#8594; [Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select]. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it Back to top';
body[134]='03-007.htm';
dai[134]='PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT';
bun[134]='PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTPAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTThis section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.When [Auto Select] is selected:A tray that is set for plain or recycled paper (only plain paper in the factory default setting) of the size specified in "Paper Size" on the page setup screen is automatically selected.When a paper tray is specified:The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting on the page setup screen. For the bypass tray, also specify the paper type. Check that the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machine, check that paperWhen a paper type is specified:A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" on the page setup screen is used for printing.Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY".When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Printer Set To exclude the bypass tray from the trays that can be selected when [Auto Select] is selected:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Printer Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Bypass Tray Settings] &#8594; [Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select].Back to top';
body[135]='03-009.htm';
dai[135]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT';
bun[135]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTPRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe bypass tray can be used for envelope printing.For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES".For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY".For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT".It is recommended that you carry out a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation, you can rotate the image 180 degrees. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) ".OperationSelect the envelope size in the settings of the application ("Page Setup" in many applications) and then perform the following steps. Click the [Paper] tab and select the envelope size from the "Paper Size" menu. Select [Bypass Tray] from the "Paper Source" menu of "Paper Selection". Select [Envelope] from the "Paper Type" menu.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and load an envelope into the bypass tray.Back to top';
body[136]='03-011.htm';
dai[136]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT';
bun[136]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTPRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe bypass tray can be used for envelope printing.For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES".For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY".For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT".When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation, you can rotate the image 180 degrees. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) ".It is recommended that you carry out a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.OperationSelect the envelope size in the settings of the application ("Page Setup" in many applications) and then perform the following steps. Select the envelope size from the "Paper Size" menu on the page setup screen and click the [OK] button. Select [Paper Feed] in the print settings window. Select [Bypass Tray (Envelope)] from the "All pages from" menu.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and load an envelope into the bypass tray.Back to top';
body[137]='03-012.htm';
dai[137]='VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP';
bun[137]='VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELPVIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELPOverviewWhen you want to view the explanations of the settings of the printer driver in a Windows environment, display the Help window of the printer driver. Pop-up help Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.To view Help for a setting in Windows XP/Server 2003, click the button in the upper right-hand corner of the printer driver properties window and then click the setting. Information icon Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.Operation Select the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Detail] button.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Click the [Help] button.The Help window will open to let you view explanations of the settings on the tab. To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the underlined text at the top of the Help window.Back to top';
body[138]='03-013.htm';
dai[138]='SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING';
bun[138]='SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTINGSAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTINGOverviewSettings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them. Settings cDeleting saved settings:In step 2 of "USING SAVED SETTINGS", select the user settings that you want to delete and click the [Delete] button.Operation Select the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Detail] button.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Configure the print settings on each tab and click the [Save] button. Check the displayed settings. Enter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters and click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[139]='03-014.htm';
dai[139]='USING SAVED SETTINGS';
bun[139]='USING SAVED SETTINGSUSING SAVED SETTINGSOverviewYou can specify the saved user settings through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated settings to your printing.Operation Select the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Detail] button.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Select the user settings that you wish to use, and click the [OK] button. Start printing.Back to top';
body[140]='03-015.htm';
dai[140]='CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS';
bun[140]='CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGSCHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGSOverview You can change the default settings of the printer driver.Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application. Operation Click the [Start] button and select [Devices and Printers]. In Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panels] and then [Printer].In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].In Windows 8, right-click in the startup window (or swipe upward from the bottom edge), then click the App Bar → [All apps] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Devices and Printers]. In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [Start] menu, select [Control Panels], select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes]. Right-click the icon of the printer driver of the machine. In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the icon of the printer driver of the machine. Click the [Printer properties]. In Windows Vista, click the [Organize] menu, and then click [Properties].In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [File] menu, and then click [Properties]. Click the [Default Settings] button on the [General] tab. In Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, click the [Printing Preferences] button on the [General] tab. Configure the settings and click the [OK] button. For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help. Back to top ';
body[141]='03-017.htm';
dai[141]='SELECTING THE RESOLUTION';
bun[141]='SELECTING THE RESOLUTIONSELECTING THE RESOLUTIONOverviewThe following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution):Normal:This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.&nbsp;&nbsp;High Quality:The print quality of photos and text is high.&nbsp;&nbsp;Fine:Select this mode to print photos more clearly or graphic gradation images more finely.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and select "Print Mode". Back to top';
body[142]='03-018.htm';
dai[142]='2-SIDED PRINTING';
bun[142]='2-SIDED PRINTING2-SIDED PRINTINGOverviewThe machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper.Paper orientationPrint resultsWindowsMacintoshWindowsMacintoshPortrait2-Sided(Book)Long-edged binding2-Sided(Tablet)Short-edged bindingLandscape2-Sided(Book)Short-edged binding2-Sided(Tablet)Long-edged binding The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side.The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.Operation Windows Click the [Main] tab and select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)]. If necessary, you can select the method of implementing 2-sided printing. Click the [Compatibility] button on the [Advanced] tab and select the mode from "2-Sided Printing Mode". Macintosh Select [Layout] and select [Long-edged binding] or [Short-edged binding]. Back to top';
body[143]='03-019.htm';
dai[143]='FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER';
bun[143]='FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPERFITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPEROverview This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine.This function is convenient when enlarging an A4 or letter size document to A3 or ledger size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document. When you are using the PCL6 printer driver, documents can be received so that they are printed to fit A0, A1, or A2 size paper. Select the size from "Paper Size" on the [Paper] tab. Operation The following example explains how to print a letter size document on ledger size paper. Windows Click the [Paper] tab and select the paper size for the print image (for example: Letter). Select [Fit To Paper Size] and select the actual paper size to be used for printing (for example: Legal). Macintosh Select [Paper Handling] and check the paper size for the print image (for example: Letter). To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size" menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected. Select [Scale to fit paper size] and select the actual paper size to be used for printing (for example: Ledger). Back to top ';
body[144]='03-020.htm';
dai[144]='PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE';
bun[144]='PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGEPRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGEOverview This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets. For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you want to conserve paper. When used in combination with 2-sided printing, this function saves more paper. N-Up (Pages per sheet)Print resultsLeft To RightRight To LeftTop To Bottom (When the print orientation is landscape)2-Up (2 pages per sheet) N-Up (Pages per sheet)Upper-Left To RightUpper-Left To BottomUpper-Right To LeftUpper-Right To Bottom4-Up (4 pages per sheet) Note the following when printing multiple pages on one sheet:The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16. Printing 8 pages on one sheet is not supported.The function for printing only the first page in the original size can be used only when the PCL6 printer driver is installed.Operation WindowsPrinting multiple pages on one page Click the [Main] tab and select the number of pages per sheet.If you wish to print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Select the order of the pages.When you are using the PCL6 printer driver, you can print multiple pages on one sheet without changing the original size. Click the [Compatibility] button on the [Advanced] tab and click the [100% N-Up] checkbox.Printing only the first page in the original size (for PCL6 only) Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Layout Print] and click the [Settings] button. Select [N-Up w/o 1st Page]. In "N-Up Printing", select the number of images per sheet and click the [OK] button. Macintosh Select [Layout] and select the number of pages per sheet. Select the order of the pages.If you wish to print borderlines, select the desired type of borderline.Back to top';
body[145]='03-020_1.htm';
dai[145]='PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES';
bun[145]='PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGESPRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES OverviewIf the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing.The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing.This function is available in Windows environments.Depending on the state of the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not printed, or some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus printed.In N-Up Print, blank pages are not excluded and are printed.OperationWindows Click the [Advanced] tab Click the [Disable Blank Page Print] checkbox to set it to . Back to top ';
body[146]='03-021.htm';
dai[146]='STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT';
bun[146]='STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUTSTAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUTOverviewStaple functionThe staple function staples the output. To create materials with a more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing.This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials.The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.StapleLeftRightTop1 Staple*2 Staples* The staple orientation ("" or "") varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper.Punch functionThe punch function punches holes in the output. The punch hole positions are set by selecting the binding edge.LeftRightTopA finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple function.To use the punch function, install a punch module in the finisher or saddle finisher.For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Quick Start Guide.The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLET (Pamphlet copy/saddle stitch) ".The staple and offset (shifting the position of the paper that is output for each job) functions cannot be used simultaneously.When the finisher is disabled in the machine\'s settings, the staple function and punch function cannot be used.When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine\'s settings, stapling or punching is not possible.Operation Windows Click the [Main] tab and select "Binding Edge". Select the staple function or the punch function.For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu.For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Macintosh Select [Printer Features] and select "Binding Edge". Select the staple function or the punch function.Select the number of staples. For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.Back to top';
body[147]='03-022.htm';
dai[147]='CREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLET';
bun[147]='CREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLETCREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLET(PAMPHLET COPY/SADDLE STITCH)OverviewThe pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet. If a saddle finisher is installed and if "Pamphlet Style" and "Staple" are selected, this functiOperation Windows Click the [Main] tab and select [Pamphlet Style]. Select the printing method for the pamphlet style from the pull-down menu. The selections are [Tiled Pamphlet], [Pamphlet Style (2-Up)], [Multiple Pamphlet Style (Actual Size)], and [Multiple Pamphlet Style (2-Up)].When [Multiple Pamphlet Style (Actual Size)] is selected, paper twice the size specified in the application is used for printing.When [Multiple Pamphlet Style (2-Up)] is selected, the paper size specified in the application is reduced as done in the 2-Up mode, and paper of the size specified in the application is used for printing. Select "Binding Edge".The [2 Staples] option in the "Staple" menu should be selected when a saddle finisher is installed. Macintosh Select [Printer Features] and select "Binding Edge".The [2 Staples] option in the "Staple" menu should be selected when a saddle finisher is installed. Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].Back to top';
body[148]='03-023.htm';
dai[148]='PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING';
bun[148]='PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTINGPRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING(MARGIN)OverviewThis function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper. If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together. This is convenient when yoOperation Windows Click the [Main] tab and select "Binding Edge". Select "Margin Shift".Select from the "Margin Shift" menu.If you wish to configure another numeric setting, select the setting from the pull-down menu and click the [Settings] button. Click buttons or directly enter the number. Macintosh Select [Printer Features] and select "Binding Edge". Select "Margin Shift".Back to top';
body[149]='03-024.htm';
dai[149]='CREATE A LARGE POSTER';
bun[149]='CREATE A LARGE POSTERCREATE A LARGE POSTER(POSTER PRINTING)OverviewOne page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheThis function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.Operation Windows Click the [Paper] tab. Click the [Poster Printing] checkbox so that the checkmark appears, and click the [Poster Settings] button. From the pull-down menu, select the number of sheets of paper to be used.If you wish to print borderlines and/or use the overlap function, click the corresponding checkboxes so that the checkmark appears. Back to top';
body[150]='03-025.htm';
dai[150]='ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES';
bun[150]='ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREESROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES(ROTATE 180 DEGREES)OverviewThis feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes).In Mac OS X, a portrait image cannot be rotated 180 degrees.Operation Windows Click the [Main] tab. Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox to set to . Macintosh Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and click the button. Click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[151]='03-026.htm';
dai[151]='ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE';
bun[151]='ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGEENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE(ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE)OverviewThis function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportion of the image (XY Zoom). This allows you to enlarge a small iOperation Windows Click the [Paper] tab. Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings] button.From the pull-down menu, select the actual paper size to be used for printing. Enter the percentage.By clicking the button, you can specify the value in increments of 1%. In addition, select [Upper Left] or [Centre] for the base point on the paper. Macintosh Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). Click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[152]='03-027.htm';
dai[152]='ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS';
bun[152]='ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESSADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS(LINE THICKNESS)OverviewThis function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary.This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab. Select a number from the [Line Width Settings] pull-down menu.The units of line-width adjustment can be set to "Fixed Width" or "Ratio". Click the [Compatibility] button and select the units from the "Line Width Unit" menu.To print all line data in the minimum line width, click the [Compatibility] button and click the [Print in the Minimum Line Width] checkbox.Back to top';
body[153]='03-028.htm';
dai[153]='PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE';
bun[153]='PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGEPRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE(MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS)OverviewThe image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium.In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab. If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically, select [Vertical]. Back to top';
body[154]='03-029.htm';
dai[154]='ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE';
bun[154]='ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGEADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE(IMAGE ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS)OverviewThis function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer.In a Macintosh environment, this function is only available when using Mac OS X 10.4.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Image Adjustment...] button. Drag the slide bar or click the and buttons to adjust the image. Back to top';
body[155]='03-030.htm';
dai[155]='PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK';
bun[155]='PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACKPRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK(TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK)OverviewWhen printing a colour image, text and lines that are drawn in faint colours are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out colour text and lines that are faint and difficult to see.Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.This function is available in a Windows environment.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab. Select the [Text To Black] checkbox and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox .When [Text To Black] is selected, all text other than white text is printed in black.When [Vector To Black] is selected, all vector graphics other than white lines and areas are printed in black.Back to top';
body[156]='03-032.htm';
dai[156]='ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES';
bun[156]='ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGESADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES(WATERMARK)OverviewThis function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size, exposure, and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list. When Operation Windows Click the [Watermarks] tab and select [Watermark].Click the [Edit] button to edit the font and select other detailed settings.To create a watermark, enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and click the [Add] button. Macintosh Select [Watermarks]. Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings.Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text and editing of the font.Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar .Back to top';
body[157]='03-033.htm';
dai[157]='PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA';
bun[157]='PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATAPRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA(IMAGE STAMP)OverviewThis function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data. This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjustThis function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.Operation Windows Click the [Watermarks] tab and select [Image Stamp].If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be selected from the pull-down menu.If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp, and click the [Add] button.Back to top';
body[158]='03-034.htm';
dai[158]='OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA';
bun[158]='OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATAOVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA(OVERLAYS)OverviewThis function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtThis function is available in a Windows environment.Operation WindowsCreating an overlay file Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for creating overlay data. Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Edit] button in [Overlays]. Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to create.The file will be created when the settings are completed and printing is started.When printing is started, a confirmation message will appear. The overlay file will not be created until the [Yes] button is clicked.When you click the [Store] button, the existing overlay file is registered.Printing with an overlay file Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. Click the [Advanced] tab and select [Overlays].A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected from the pull-down menu.Back to top';
body[159]='03-035.htm';
dai[159]='PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER';
bun[159]='PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPERPRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER(DIFFERENT PAPER)Overview In a Windows environment The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages.Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert coloured paper or a different paper type at specified pages.As necessary, paper can be inserted as insertion sheets where nothing is printed. In a Macintosh environment The front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from the other pages. This function can be used, for example, when you want to print only the front cover and last page on thick paper. Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Different Paper] and click the [Settings] button. Select the paper insertion settings. Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing method from the corresponding menus.Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in "Information".When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "Custom Settings" to save the settings.When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source", be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that type of paper in the bypass tray.When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position", specify the insert position by directly entering a page number. However, inserts cannot be successively inserted at the same page. When "Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided Print], t Macintosh Select [Printer Features] and select [Different Paper]. Select the cover insertion settings. Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the front and back covers. Back to top ';
body[160]='03-036.htm';
dai[160]='ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM';
bun[160]='ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILMADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM(TRANSPARENCY INSERTS)OverviewWhen transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparenTransparency film must be loaded in the bypass tray.Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the [Settings] button. Select the transparency insert settings.When the [Printed] checkbox is selected to set to , the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the bypass tray. Macintosh Select [Printer Features]. Select [Transparency Inserts] in [Feature Sets]. Select the transparency insert settings.When [Print] is selected from "Transparency Inserts", the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [OHP] and load transparency film into the bypass tray.Back to top';
body[161]='03-037.htm';
dai[161]='PRINTING A CARBON COPY';
bun[161]='PRINTING A CARBON COPYPRINTING A CARBON COPY(CARBON COPY)OverviewThis function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and coloured paper is loaded into tray 2, a This function is available in a Windows environment.Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Carbon Copy] and click the [Settings] button. Select the tray for the first copy from "Top Copy", and then select the tray for the carbon copy from "Carbon Copy".When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select the "Paper Type".Back to top';
body[162]='03-038.htm';
dai[162]='PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER';
bun[162]='PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPERPRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER(TAB PAPER SETTINGS/TAB PAPER PRINT)OverviewThere are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Paper Settings" and "Tab Paper Print".Tab Paper SettingsCreate the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the distance of shifting the text in [Tab Paper Settings] on the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver property window. The text is printed on the tabs.Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages. In [Tab Paper Print] on the [Special Modes] tab of the printer driver properties window, enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Specify the detailed settings such as theThese functions are available in a Windows environment.Tab paper must be loaded into the bypass tray.Operation WindowsTab Paper SettingsWhen you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps: Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Tab Paper Settings] button. Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. Select the paper source and type.Click the [Paper] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] for "Paper Source" and [Tab Paper] for "Paper Type".Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings. Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the [Settings] button. Select the tab position settings.For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in "User Settings". For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab, the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tab Select the page settings.Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Also select the font and adjust the layout.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored file can be opened from "User Settings".Back to top';
body[163]='03-039.htm';
dai[163]='TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE';
bun[163]='TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDETWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE(CHAPTER INSERTS)OverviewThis function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printedExample: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings. (Back is blank)This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.Operation WindowsYou need to set "Document Style" on the [Main] tab to [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)] in advance. For information on the "Document Style" setting, see "2-SIDED PRINTING". Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the [Settings] button. Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in "Page Setup" and click the [Add] button.Your settings will appear in "Information". When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User Settings" to save the settings.Back to top';
body[164]='03-040.htm';
dai[164]='FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF';
bun[164]='FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALFFOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF(FOLD)OverviewThis function folds printed paper in half when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine. You can choose whether the output is folded inward or outward.This function cannot be used when [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Disabling of Duplex] is selected.When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout, the "Multi-Sheet Fold - Staple" function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet.Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select the desired folding method from "Fold". Macintosh Select [Printer Features]. Select [Paper Folding Settings] and select the desired folding method.Back to top';
body[165]='03-041.htm';
dai[165]='PRINTING PATTERN DATA';
bun[165]='PRINTING PATTERN DATAPRINTING PATTERN DATA(HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)OverviewThis function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorised doThis function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab. Select the [Hidden Pattern Print] checkbox so that the checkmark appears, then click the [Settings] button.The hidden pattern printing function cannot be used when "Print Mode" is set to [Ultra Fine]. Configure the settings for hidden pattern printing and click the [OK] button. "Hidden Pattern Print" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage.Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Setting mode", select [Security Settings] &#8594; [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] &#8594; [Contrast] if this is the case.The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print.Back to top';
body[166]='03-042.htm';
dai[166]='USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB';
bun[166]='USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOBUSING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB(TANDEM PRINT)OverviewTo use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large copy job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints.To use the tandem print function, the IP address of the slave machine configured in [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Device Control&#8594;[Tandem Connection Setting] must be registered in the printer driver.In a Windows environment, this is accomplished automatically by clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the [Options] tab of the printer driver.In a Macintosh environment, this is accomplished automatically by clicking the [Tandem Settings] button.In a Macintosh environment, this function is only available when using Mac OS X.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab. Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using "Custom Installation" with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [Yes] checkbox selected for "Do you want to use th Macintosh Select [Tandem Print]. Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.To use the tandem print function, you must select the protocol to be used, in accordance with the message that appears on the screen when you add the printer driver in the "Printer Setup Utility".Back to top';
body[167]='03-043.htm';
dai[167]='SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES';
bun[167]='SAVING AND USING PRINT FILESSAVING AND USING PRINT FILES(FORCE RETENTION/DOCUMENT FILING)OverviewThis function stores a print job as a file on the machine\'s hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other userHold OnlyThis setting is used to hold a print job on the machine\'s hard drive without printing it.Hold After PrintThis setting is used to hold a print job on the machine\'s hard drive after it is printed.Sample PrintWhen a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of excessive mFor the procedure for printing files stored on the machine\'s hard drive, see "FILE PRINTING" in "DOCUMENT FILING".When printing from a PC, you can set a password (5 to 8 digits) to maintain the confidentiality of information in a stored file. When a password is set, the password must be entered to print data.Operation Windows Click the [Job Handling] tab. Click the [Retention] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Select how to save the print data in "Retention Settings".To enter a password (5 to 8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Select the folder to store the file in "Document Filing Settings".When you have selected [Custom Folder], click the [Stored to] button to select the folder.When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings" will be set to [Hold After Print].When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Retention Settings" is cleared.If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Click the [Compatibility] button on the [Advanced] tab and select the format from "Rip Format".To store a file in a custom folder, you must first create the custom folder using [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Document Filing Control]. If you have set a password for the custom folder, enter the password in "Folder PassworIf you have configured to always use the force retention function in "Printing Policy" on the [Options] tab, you cannot clear the [Retention] checkbox.When your network is IPv6, files are stored in the main folder. Macintosh Select [Job Handling]. Click the [Retention] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.Select how to save the print data in "Retention Settings". After you have entered a password (a 5 to 8-digit number), click the button to lock the password. This allows you to readily set the same password the next time you use it. Select the folder to store the file in "Document Filing Settings".When you have selected [Custom Folder], click the [Stored to] button to select the folder.When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings" will be set to [Hold After Print].When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Retention Settings" is cleared.If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Select [Advanced] in [Printer Features] and select the format from "Rip Format".To store a file in a custom folder, you must first create the custom folder using [System Settings] in "Settings" &#8594; [Document Filing Control]. If you have set a password for the custom folder, enter the password in "Folder Password&quIn Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8, if you wish to store the document filing settings in a custom folder, click the [Custom Folder] tab.Back to top';
body[168]='03-044.htm';
dai[168]='AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA';
bun[168]='AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATAAUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATAOverviewWhen user authentication is enabled on the machine, all retained (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted.To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].At the time of retention print, in addition to the user authentication information, enter the user name stored in the machine in "User Name" of "Default Job ID" in the printer driver.Using this function in a Windows environment: PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)Using this function in a Macintosh environment: PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED)Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.Operation Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine.At the time of retention print, in addition to the user authentication information, enter the user name stored in the machine in "User Name" of "Default Job ID" in the printer driver. A confirmation prompt will appear. Tap the [OK] key.The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.Back to top';
body[169]='03-045.htm';
dai[169]='EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES';
bun[169]='EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILESEXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILESWhen you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding exFile TypeTIFFJPEGPCLPDF/Encrypt PDF/High Compression PDFPSXPSExtensiontiff, tifjpeg, jpg, jpe, jfifpclpdfpsxps Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table. To print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit is required.Back to top';
body[170]='03-046.htm';
dai[170]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER';
bun[170]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVERDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVEROverviewWhen an FTP server is configured, you can directly select and print files on the FTP server from the touch panel of the machine. This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC To configure an FTP server:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)], and configure an FTP server. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEOperation Tap the [Document Filing] key. Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access. Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the FTP server. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level. When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen. Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending. Select the print conditions.If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 4, the settings will be applied.When the [Print on Glossy Paper] checkbox is selected, [Paper Select] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Output Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)]. Tap the [Start] key.Printing begins after the selected file is downloaded.Back to top';
body[171]='03-047.htm';
dai[171]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY';
bun[171]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORYDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORYOverviewFiles in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially availabUse a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.Printing from a USB memory device is not possible when [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Printer Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print] is selected.When you select a PDF file that has a password, enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEOperation Connect the USB memory device to the machine and tap the [Document Filing] key. Tap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the USB memory device. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level. When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen. Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending. Select the print conditions.If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 3, the settings will be applied.When the [Print on Glossy Paper] checkbox is selected, [Paper Select] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Output Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)]. Tap the [Start] key.Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. Remove the USB memory device from the machine.Back to top';
body[172]='03-048.htm';
dai[172]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER';
bun[172]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDERDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDEROverviewYou can specify and print a file in a network folder from the touch panel of the machine. Even if the network folder is not registered, you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup.Entering the network folder path directlyReferring to the network folder path To register a network folder:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Setting for Print from the MFP(SMB)] to store a network folder. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 network folders can be registered.When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEOperationPrinting a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings Tap the [Document Filing] key. Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access.If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.When you tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key, a screen appears to allow direct input of the network folder path. For details, see "Entering the network folder path directly".When you select the workgroup, server, and network folder in sequence, you can access the network folder. For details, see "Referring to the network folder path". Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel.When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the network folder. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level.To return to the network folder selection screen, tap .Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending. Select the print conditions.If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 4, the settings will be applied.When the [Print on Glossy Paper] checkbox is selected, [Paper Select] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Output Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)]. Tap the [Start] key.Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.Entering the network folder path directly Tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key in step 3 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings". Enter the path to the folder, user name and password.Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings".Referring to the network folder path Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings". Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access.If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password. Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access.Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings".Tap the icon and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. To enter text, see "NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS".Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.Tap to move up one folder level.To return to the workgroup selection screen, tap .Back to top';
body[173]='03-049.htm';
dai[173]='SUBMIT PRINT JOB';
bun[173]='SUBMIT PRINT JOBSUBMIT PRINT JOBBy selecting [Document Operations] &#8594; [Submit Print Job] from "Setting Mode (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be usedIf you print a file that includes print settings (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files), the settings will be applied.When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.Back to top';
body[174]='03-050.htm';
dai[174]='FTP PRINT';
bun[174]='FTP PRINTFTP PRINTYou can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine. To perform FTP print:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Setting for Print from the PC], set [FTP Print] to [Valid], and then configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)Performing FTP printType "ftp://" and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your PC\'s Web browser as shown below. Example: ftp://192.168.1.28Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "lp" folder that appears in your Web browser. Printing of the file automatically begins.If you print a file that includes print settings (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files), the settings will be applied.When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.Back to top';
body[175]='03-051.htm';
dai[175]='E-MAIL PRINT';
bun[175]='E-MAIL PRINTE-MAIL PRINTIf you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver. To perform e-mail print:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [E-mail Print Settings], and register your e-mail account. (Administrator rights are required.)Performing e-mail printUsing your PC\'s e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed.Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are entered in the format "command name = value" as shown in the example to the right.As an example, the control commands include the following:FunctionCommand nameValuesCopiesCOPIES1-999Staple *1STAPLEOPTIONNONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLEPunch *2PUNCHOFF, ONOUTPUTCOLLATEOFF, ON2-sided PrintDUPLEXOFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHTAccount Number *3ACCOUNTNUMBERNumber (5 to 8 digits)File TypeLANGUAGEPCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF, JPG, XPSPaperPAPERPaper that can be used (A4, LETTER, or others)DOCUMENT FILINGFILEOFF, ONFOLDERNAMEUp to 28 charactersQuick FileQUICKFILEOFF, ONOutput trayOUTTRAYCENTRE, RIGHT, FINISHERFit To PageFITIMAGETOPAGEOFF, ON *1 Enabled only when a finisher or a saddle finisher is installed.*2 Enabled only when a punch module is attached to the finisher or saddle finisher.*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.The mail text must be in a text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.If you enter "Config" in the mail text, a list of control commands is returned.If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the settings configured in "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Printer Condition Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings]. If you priEnter a file type only when you wish to specify the page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file type.Back to top';
body[176]='03-052.htm';
dai[176]='PRINTER JOBS';
bun[176]='PRINTER JOBSPRINTER JOBSWhen you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Back to top';
body[177]='03-054.htm';
dai[177]='PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE';
bun[177]='PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEPRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEOverviewPDF encryption is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, reset the password and begin prTo print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your PC.Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file.Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe&reg; Acrobat&reg; 7.0) and earlier.Operation Tap the Job status display and tap the [Print] tab. Tap the [Spool] key.When the list contains an encrypted PDF file, a message is displayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists. Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF file.You cannot select multiple encrypted PDF files. Tap the [Enter Password for Encrypted PDF] key on the action panel. Enter the password (32 characters or less) and tap the [Yes] key.When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master password.Back to top';
body[178]='03-059.htm';
dai[178]='CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT';
bun[178]='CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUTCHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUTOverviewIf printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run off the paper.Operation Tap the job status display. Tap the key of the job for which "Paper Empty" appeared. Tap the [Change Paper] key on the action panel. Tap the key for the tray containing the paper that you wish to use, and tap .Back to top';
body[179]='03-060.htm';
dai[179]='PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST';
bun[179]='PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LISTPRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LISTFunctionPCL6PSWindows PPD *1Macintosh PPD *1Frequently used functionsCopies1-9991-9991-9991-999 OrientationYesYesYesYes N-UpNumber of Pages2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 162, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 162, 4, 6, 9, or 162, 4, 6, 9, or 16 OrderYesYesYesYes BorderOn/OffOn/OffYesYes 2-Sided PrintYesYesYesYes Fit To PageYesYesNo Binding EdgeYesYesNoYes Staple *2YesYesYesYes Punch *2YesYesYesYesPaperPaper SizeYesYesYesYesCustom &nbsp;&nbsp;Paper7 size7 sizeYesYesPaper SelectionYesYesYesYesOutput trayYesYesYesYesConvenient printer functionsYesYesYesYesMargin Shift0 inch to 1.2 inch0 inch to 1.2 inchYesYesPoster PrintingYesYesNoNoAdjust the Print PositionYesYesNoNoRotate 180 DegreesYesYesYesYesZoom/XY ZoomYes*4YesYes*4Yes*4Line ThicknessYesNoNoNoMirror ImageNoYesYesNoSpecial functionsDifferent PaperYesYesYes*5Yes*5Transparency InsertsYesYesNoYesCarbon CopyYesYesNoNoTab PrintingYesYes*6NoNoChapter DividingYesNoNoNoPage interleaveYesNoNoNoFold *3Half Fold/Multi-Sheet FoldHalf Fold/ Multi-SheetFoldHalf FoldHalf Fold/ Multi-SheetFoldLayout printingYesNoNoNoPATTERN PRINTYesNoNoNoProcess JPEG images using the driverYesYesNoNoSmoothingYesYesNoNoTandem PrintYesYesNoYesRetentionYesYesNoYesDOCUMENT FILINGYesYesNoYesPrint and sendYesNoNoNoDisable Blank Page PrintYesNoNoNoImage AdjustmentYesYesNoYes*7 Text To Black/Vector To Black Yes Yes No No Billing code Yes Yes No Yes FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGESWatermarkYesYesYesYesImage StampYesYesNoNoOverlayYesYesNoNoResolutionPrint ModeNormal/High quality/Ultra fineNormal/High quality/Ultra fineNormal/High quality/Ultra fineNormal/High quality/Ultra fineGraphics Mode SelectionYesNoNoNoToner Save *8YesYesYesYesFontSelectable Downloadable FontNoBitmap, True Type, GraphicsNoNo*9Other functionsAuto ConfigurationYesYesNoNoUser AuthenticationYesYesNoNo*1&nbsp;The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system version and the application.*2&nbsp;If a finisher or a saddle finisher is installed (The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function.)*3&nbsp;If a saddle finisher is installed*4&nbsp;The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.*5&nbsp;Only covers can be inserted.*6&nbsp;Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the application is set.*7&nbsp;Cannot be used in Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 and 10.8.*8&nbsp;This setting may not operate in some applications and operating systems.*9&nbsp;TrueType and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.Back to top';
body[180]='03-062.htm';
dai[180]='REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE';
bun[180]='REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGEREGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGEOverviewThis function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine.This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. To prohibit the registration of custom images:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Prohibition of Custom Image Registration] and configure the setting.Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Custom Image Registration] and click the [Settings] button. Select the registration type and name of the custom image.When [Custom Stamp] is selected in "Registered Type", a non-transparent stamp image is registered. When [Custom watermark] is selected, a transparent watermark image is registered.If you have attempted to store multiple pages of data, only the first page will be stored.Back to top';
body[181]='03-062_1.htm';
dai[181]='SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER';
bun[181]='SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVERSPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER OverviewYou can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine. When using the printer, you can only enter a billing code by directly typing it in. For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE".Enable billing codeThis setting is required only in the Windows environment. (Always usable under Macintosh environment)Click the [Start] button, then select [Devices and Printers].In Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, then select [Control Panel] - [Printers].In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, then click [Printers and Faxes].In Windows 8, right-click on the Start window (or swipe up from the lower end of the window), then click the App Bar → [All apps] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Devices and Printers].In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] - [Printers and Other Hardware] - [Printers and Faxes]. Right-click the printer driver icon of the machineIn Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, click the printer driver icon of the machine.Click [Printer Properties].In Windows Vista, click the [Organize] menu, then click [Properties].In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [File] menu, then click [Properties].Click the [Configuration] tab, then click the [Printing Policy] button.Set the [Billing Code] check box to , then click the [OK] button.OperationWindowsStart printingEnter the main code and sub code, then click the [OK] button.To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to .If you select "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [Billing Code Setting] - [Administration Settings] and set [Use Billing Code] to Enable, the specified billing code is disabled, and it is not recorded in the job log.If you have started printing without specifying a billing code, a use code is recorded in the job log.MacintoshSelect [Billing Code].Enter the main code and sub code Back to top ';
body[182]='03-063.htm';
dai[182]='ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY';
bun[182]='ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELYADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY(PRINT POSITION)OverviewThis function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages.This function is available in a Windows environment.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] button. Click the [Print Position] button. Configure the print start positions for odd and even pages respectively, and click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[183]='03-064.htm';
dai[183]='INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE';
bun[183]='INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGEINSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE(PAGE INTERLEAVE)Overview This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing.You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page. This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.Operation Windows You have to create page data to be inserted in advance.For the procedure for creating page data, see "Creating an overlay file" in "OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA". Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Page Interleave] and click the [Settings] button. Set the overlay data to be inserted, and set its insertion position. Back to top ';
body[184]='03-066.htm';
dai[184]='CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES';
bun[184]='CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGESCHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES(PROCESS JPEG IMAGES USING THE DRIVER)OverviewIn some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered. When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the imageThis function is available in a Windows environment.When images are rendered in the printer driver, it may take time until the printing is completed.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] button. Click the [Use driver to render JPEGs] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[185]='03-067.htm';
dai[185]='PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN';
bun[185]='PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERNPRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN(REPEAT PRINT)OverviewThis function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers.This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.Operation Windows Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Layout Print] and click the [Settings] button. Select [Repeat Print]. In "N-Up Printing", select the number of images per sheet and click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[186]='03-068.htm';
dai[186]='PRINTING AT A PSEUDO-ENHANCED RESOLUTION';
bun[186]='PRINTING AT A PSEUDO-ENHANCED RESOLUTIONPRINTING AT A PSEUDO-ENHANCED RESOLUTION(SMOOTHING)OverviewResolution enhancement techniques (RETs) are used to smoothen the outlines of images. The images are printed at a pseudo-enhanced resolution.This function is available in a Windows environment.Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] button. Select the [Smoothing] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Click the [OK] button.Back to top';
body[187]='03-075.htm';
dai[187]='PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY';
bun[187]='PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLYPRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLYOverviewThis function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine.This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver.Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY" and " STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH".You must complete the preparatory steps for using each sending function of the machine. For more information, see the explanation of each sending function.This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the SPDL2-c printer driver is used.You cannot print and send data simultaneously when [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Printer Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Prohibit utilize sending function at print] is selected.Operation Windows Click the [Job Handling] tab and click the [Print and Send] button. Select the [Print and Send] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Click the [Get Address Book] button. From the "Address Book" list, select the address to which you wish to send the data, and click the [Add] button to add the address to the "Destination" list.If you wish to send the data to all addresses, click the [Add All] button.To delete an address from the "Destination" list, select the address and click the [Delete] button. If you wish to delete all addresses, click the [Delete All] button. Up to 50 destinations can be specified. Click the [OK] button.The printer driver settings are applied to sending settings.Back to top';
body[188]='04-001.htm';
dai[188]='BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX';
bun[188]='BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAXBEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAXConnect to the telephone line.Insert the plug on one end of the telephone line cord into the telephone line socket (LINE) of the machine as shown, and insert the other plug into a wall telephone socket. * Be sure to use the attached telephone line cord.In some countries, an adapter is required to connect the telephone line cable to the wall telephone socket. Make sure the main power switch is in the "|" position.When the main power indicator is lit up, the main power is in the "|" position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the "|" position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel. * If the faxIf the fax function will be used, and, in particular, if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, do not turn the main power off.Set the telephone line type.The machine\'s dial mode setting must be set to match the type of telephone line you are using. * If the setting is incorrect, it will result in dialling failures or cause calls to be made to the wrong destination.If you want to set the type of telephone line automatically: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Dial Mode Setting], then tap the [Auto Select] key.If necessary, you can set the type of telephone line manually. This setting can only be activated in Canada.Checking the date and timeVerify that the correct date and time are set in the machine. Set the data and time in the setting mode of the machine. To set the date and time of the machine:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Clock Adjust]. If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. In this case, select [System Settings] in "Setting mode" and select [Operation Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] setting.Store the sender fax number.Store a sender name in [Sender Name] and a fax number in [Fax No.]. Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication. To store the sender\'s name and address:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Own Number and Name Set] &#8594; [Sender Data Registration]. Storing destination addresses for each scan mode in the address bookIt is convenient to store addresses in the address book before using Fax mode.For how to use the address books and how to store addresses, see the following item.ADDRESS BOOKSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING GROUPSBack to top';
body[189]='04-002.htm';
dai[189]='SELECTING FAX MODE';
bun[189]='SELECTING FAX MODESELECTING FAX MODEYou can select the fax mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows:OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the [Fax] mode iconThe initial screen of fax mode is displayed.&nbsp;Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode display&nbsp;Tap [Image Send]The initial screen of fax mode is displayed.If the screen is not displayed, tap and tap [Fax].In "Setting mode", by selecting [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection] and setting the [Higher priority is given to the display of address book.] checkbox to , the Address Book in&nbsp;Back to top';
body[190]='04-007.htm';
dai[190]='BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE';
bun[190]='BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODEBASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE [R] key When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number insi This Setting can only be activated in Germany. The [R] key can be included in a fax number stored in an one-touch key. When the [Speaker] key is touched, the "PBX Setting" is temporarily cancelled and the [R] key does not appear. When the [R] key is touched before dialling, an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used. Likewise, an one-touch key in which an F-code (sub-address and passcode) is stored cannot be used. System Settings (Administrator): PBX SettingThis is used to enable PBX Setting. Back to top';
body[191]='04-015.htm';
dai[191]='FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE';
bun[191]='FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCEFAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCEFirst, tap the [Fax] icon on the home screen to enter fax mode.SELECTING FAX MODEPlace the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSEnter the destination fax number.Tap the numeric keys to enter the destination number directly, or search and retrieve the address book or number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGConfigure the scan settings.Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc.IMAGE SETTINGS If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting. SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELYSCANNING ORIGINALSAUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL(2-SIDED ORIGINAL)AUTO DETECTIONSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGECHANGING THE EXPOSURECHANGING THE RESOLUTIONSENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES(JOB BUILD)SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL(SLOW SCAN MODE)SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES(MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION(ORIGINAL COUNT)Set Others.Use Others other than the time when using scan settings such as sending two pages as a single page or sending originals of different sizes at the same time.Send the original.Tap the [Start] key. You can check the preview image by tapping the [Preview] key before tapping the [Start] key. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original.If you tap the [File] key or [Quick File] key on the action panel before starting fax transmission, you can save the scanned original as data. QUICK FILEFILEWhen the original is placed on the document glass: If you placed the original on the document glass, carry out the following procedure to send a fax. When sending a fax normally (memory transmission) Repeat the steps for placing and scanning the originals the same number of times as there are originals. After scanning all originals, tap the [Read-End] key. (After you have scanned an original by tapping When sending a fax in direct transmission modeMulti-page originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode. Tap the [Start] key to start transmission. When sending a fax in direct transmission mode Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode. Tap the [Start] key to start transmission.Back to top';
body[192]='04-016.htm';
dai[192]='ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS';
bun[192]='ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS Tap numeric keys to enter the destination fax number. If you want to cancel the PBX settings* temporarily when sending a fax:Tap the [R] key before entering a fax number.* This function is not available in some countries and regions. If you want to enter a pause between digits of the number:The [Pause] key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is entered.Tap the [Pause] key to enter a hyphen (-).If you want to specify multiple addresses, tap and enter the number of the next address. You can also tap [Pause] key to specify multiple destinations. If an incorrect number is entered:Tap the [C] key to clear the number and enter the correct number. ENTERING A PAUSE BETWEEN DIGITS OF THE NUMBER Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "0"), or after the country code when dialling an international number. Tap the [Pause] key. A hyphen "-" is entered when the [Pause] key is tapped once. The [Pause] key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is entered. If an incorrect number is entered:Tap the [C] key to clear the number and enter the correct number. Back to top ';
body[193]='04-018.htm';
dai[193]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[193]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK Overview A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialling) This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to (or poll) multiple fax destinations. When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations, an icon indicating the mode appears together with the name of the destination in each one-touch key. Fax Scan to E-mail Internet Fax (Direct SMTP) Scan to FTP Scan to Network Folder Scan to Desktop Group key in which multiple addresses are stored For the procedure for storing an address in the address book, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY", "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH" or "STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS". Operation Tap the [Address Book] key. Tap a one-touch key of contact or group that includes the fax destination.The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, job types, indexes, and keywords.Tapping [Switch Display] allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list.When adding a destination, tap another one-touch key.If two or more destinations are selected or specified, the total number of addresses appears next to .Even if only a single destination is selected, the number of addresses appears when the destination is a contact or group in which multiple addresses are stored.For more information, see "ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN".If you select an incorrect destination:Tap the key again to cancel the selection.To select a destination from the transmission log, tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panel.USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDTo retrieve a destination by using a search number, tap the [Call Search Number] key on the action panel. USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONTo retrieve a destination from a global address book, tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel. Retrieving a destination from a global address bookTo check the entered destinations, tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Tap the one-touch key, and then tap the [Show Details] key on the action panel to display the detailed information screen.The destination for transmission can be selected by tapping a stored destination. Back to top';
body[194]='04-019.htm';
dai[194]='THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS';
bun[194]='THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSOverviewWhen multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary.Operation Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. Confirm the destination.After the confirmation is completed, tap .To confirm detailed information such as the type or name of the specified destination, tap the one-touch key of the target destination, and then tap the [Confirm Destination Information] key. DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONSIn Step 2 of "CONFIRMING/DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONS" section, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.&nbsp;Back to top';
body[195]='04-020.htm';
dai[195]='USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION';
bun[195]='USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONThe search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. Tap the [Call Search Number] key. Enter a search number (4 digits) using the numeric keys and tap . When the search number is entered, the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination.If an incorrect search number is entered:Tap the [C] key to clear the number and enter the correct number.The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.If you do not know the search number, tap the [Print Individual List] key on the action panel to print and check the address list.When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "0001", enter "1" and tap the .Back to top';
body[196]='04-021.htm';
dai[196]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[196]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKOverviewIf an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode (Web version), you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission. Operation In the base screen or address book screen, tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel. Tap [Search from] and tap the LDAP server to be used.If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.If only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take step 2. In this case, start from step 3. After the settings are completed, tap . Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address/Number].How to searchEnter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters. An asterisk can be used as follows:XXX : Names beginning with "XXX" XXX: Names that end with "XXX" XXX : Names containing "XXX" AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".Enter a keyword and tap the [Search] key When you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard appears. The search results will appear after a brief interval.To add other destination continuously, tap the address and tap .To check the destination information:Tap the one-touch key of the target destination, and then tap the [Confirm Destination Information] key. Tap to close the address information screen.When a fax that was selected from the addresses sent recently has been resentA confirmation screen is displayed based on the method used to specify the destination during the previous transmission.Back to top';
body[197]='04-023.htm';
dai[197]='USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND';
bun[197]='USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDOverviewSelect a destination from a transmission log and resend the data.The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also sIf numeric keys were tapped during the previous transmission, the number may not be redialled correctly.The fax addresses below are not stored as addresses for which resend is possible.One-touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are stored.Broadcasting destinationsDestinations transmitted to using a programOperation Tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial.The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed.To cancel the resend setting:Tap the highlighted key.When you select the destination and tap the [Register New Address in Address Book], the destination can be stored in the address book. This is convenient if you have entered a destination directly.Back to top';
body[198]='04-024.htm';
dai[198]='SENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING';
bun[198]='SENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGNumber sequences entered using the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled as a single number. For example when dialling an international number, tap the [Pause] key between the identification number of an internaExample: Using chain dialling to dial an international number To set the length of pause:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Pause Time Setting].Back to top';
body[199]='04-025.htm';
dai[199]='FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS';
bun[199]='FAX TRANSMISSION METHODSFAX TRANSMISSION METHODSThe methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are described below. Select the method that best suits your needs.To fax a large number of sheet originals:To fax thick originals or pages of a book:If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax transmissions:To fax a large number of sheet originals:Use the automatic document feeder. The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission). When multiple original sheets are placed in line idle state, they will be sent in sequence from the scanned page in parallel with the USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION Storing a fax jobIf transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned and stored in memory. If you want to attempt to send a fax while another job is in progress, you can store the fax job. To check the stored fax job, display theFAX JOBS QUICK FILEFILE You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Original pages are then scanned and sent in sequence. This sending method may not be available depending on the function.SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES(JOB BUILD) In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission)When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled.WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURSThe line of the machine will be busy if another fax is being sent, received, or if the machine is in the busy state.Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.One of the following functions is being used for transmission.Broadcast transmission, F-code transmission, Timer transmission, Dual Page Scan, Book Divide, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original CountThe document glass is being used (except when the speaker is being used to dial). To disable the Quick On Line Sending setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Quick On Line Sending]. If you disable this setting, transmission will not begin until all pages have been scanned.To fax thick originals or pages of a book: Place the original on the document glass.USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSIONQuick On Line Sending is not available when a fax is being sent from the document glass.When the document glass is used, multiple original pages cannot be scanned at a time. In this case, the original pages can be separated into multiple times of scanning.If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax transmissions:Send the fax in direct transmission mode. The original is transmitted directly to the receiving fax machine without being scanned into memory. When direct transmission mode is used, transmission will begin as soon as the transmission in progress is comple USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODEUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODEWhen transmission in direct transmission mode ends, the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission mode.In direct transmission mode, the [Preview] key cannot be used for transmission.Back to top';
body[200]='04-026.htm';
dai[200]='ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATION';
bun[200]='ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATIONORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATIONWhen an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") original is placed in vertical orientation (), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation () (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation (), it isRotation sending is not available for originals with A4R, B5, or A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size. To cancel the rotation sending setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Rotation Sending Setting]. If this setting is disabled, the original will be transmitted in the orientation in whicBack to top';
body[201]='04-027.htm';
dai[201]='AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGE';
bun[201]='AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGEAUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGEIf the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine\'s paper width.Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratiosTransmitted image widthReceiving machine\'s paper widthReduced sizeRatioA3 (11" x 17")B4B40.000704167A3 (11" x 17")A4 (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11")A4R (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R)0.000702662B4A4 (8-1/2" x 11")A4R0.000704167 To cancel the Auto Reduction Sending setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Auto Reduction Sending Setting]. If this setting is disabled, the image will be sent at full size and part of the iBack to top';
body[202]='04-028.htm';
dai[202]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES';
bun[202]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESTRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESThe following original sizes can be transmitted&nbsp;Minimum original sizeMaximum original sizeUsing the automatic document feeder131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width)(5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width))297 mm (height) x 1000 mm (width)*(11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8" (width))Using the document glass-297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)(11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width))* A long original can be transmitted.Back to top';
body[203]='04-029.htm';
dai[203]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL';
bun[203]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALTHE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALWhen a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" in the base screen.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Standard sizesStandard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size Detector Setting" in setting mode.List of original size detector settingsSelectionsStandard sizes (detected original sizes)Document GlassDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"AB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x13")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm)AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")AB-5A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")Inch-111"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Inch-211"x17", 8-1/2"x13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Inch-311"x17", 8-1/2"x13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Back to top';
body[204]='04-030.htm';
dai[204]='WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY';
bun[204]='WHEN THE LINE IS BUSYWHEN THE LINE IS BUSYIf the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be attempted again automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the transmission will beTo cancel the transmission:Cancel it from the job status screen. To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be established because the line is busy, or for other reasons:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Recall in Case of Line Busy]. The factory default setting is two attempts at 3-minute intervals.Back to top';
body[205]='04-031.htm';
dai[205]='WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS';
bun[205]='WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURSWHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time, transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode, transmission will not automatically be attempted againTo cancel the transmission:Cancel it from the job status screen.STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Recall in Case of Communication Error]. The factory default setting is one attempt at 3-minute intervals.Back to top';
body[206]='04-032.htm';
dai[206]='FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODE';
bun[206]='FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODEFAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODEThis mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax is sent to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. Set it in setting mode. If a fax is sent while this function is enabled, an address confirmation message will appear when After tapping the [Speaker] key while "Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode" is enabled, the destination cannot be specified using the numeric keys, one-touch key, [Call Search Number] key, or [Select among addresses recently sent To display the destination confirmation message prior to fax transmission: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode]. To disable fax broadcast when Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode is enabled: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Disable Fax Broadcasting]. Destination specified by one-touch key/search numberTap the [Start] key to display all destinations in the destination confirmation screen. Check that the destinations are correct, and tap the [Send Confirmation] key to start scanning of the original. If the destination is not correct, tap the [Cancel] key Before tapping the [Send Confirmation] key, you can change scan or other settings. Destination specified using the numeric keys, [Select among addresses recently sent to] key, or [Global Address Search] keyTap the [Start] key to display the confirmation message. Tap the [OK] key, re-enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap the [Send Confirmation] key. If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will begin. If the re-entered destination iYou can use the numeric keys to enter fax numbers serially. In that case, tap to enter the destination fax number to be added.If the [Sub Address] key was tapped to enter a sub-address and passcode, the fax number must be re-entered during confirmation. After re-entering the fax number, tap the [Sub Address] key and enter the sub-address and passcode.If chain dialling was used, tap the [Pause] key to enter "-" during confirmation. Before tapping the [Send Confirmation] key, you can change scan or other settings. When a fax that was selected from the addresses sent recently has been resentA confirmation screen is displayed based on the method used to specify the destination during the previous transmission.Back to top';
body[207]='04-033.htm';
dai[207]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION';
bun[207]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSIONUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSIONOverviewStoring scanned originals in machine\'s memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and send the data by the memory transmission function.To fax a thick original or other original that cannot be placed in the automatic document feeder, open the automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass.If there is a fax job in progress when the transmission operation is performed, the fax is transmitted when the job in progress is finished.If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. When Quick On Line Sending is enabled for transmission, the scanned originals are sent. To set the scan complete sound:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Scan Complete Sound Setting].Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Start] key to begin transmission. When scanning is completed, the machine beeps.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number is recorded in the transaction report and image sending activity report and can be used to check fax jobs.PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSTo cancel scanning the original:Tap the [Cancel Scan] key.Back to top';
body[208]='04-034.htm';
dai[208]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODE';
bun[208]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODEUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODEOverviewSending a scanned original without saving it in the machine\'s memory is called "Direct TX".This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and directly send it.The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission: Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box, Book Divide, Poling, 2-Sided Scan, Search Global Address BookResending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will begiFAX JOBS In direct transmission mode, the [Preview] key cannot be used for transmission.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Tap the [Send Directly] key on the action panel. Specify the destination fax number. ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Start] key to begin transmission.Back to top';
body[209]='04-035.htm';
dai[209]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION';
bun[209]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSIONUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSIONOverviewStoring scanned originals in machine\'s memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission function.If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed.If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and transmission will be cancelled.Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.Operation Place the original on the document glass.DOCUMENT GLASSWhen faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page. Specify the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING If you have another page to scan, change pages and then tap the [Start] key.Repeat until all originals have been scanned.If no action is taken for one minute, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. Tap the [Read-End] key.A beep sounds. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. To cancel scanning:Tap the [STOP] key before the [Read-End] key is tapped.When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSIf no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.The [Change Setting] key can be tapped, if necessary, to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in Others, only the exposure can be chanBack to top';
body[210]='04-036.htm';
dai[210]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE';
bun[210]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODEUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODEOverviewSending a scanned original without saving it in the machine\'s memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data.When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box, Book Divide, Poling, 2-Sided Scan, Search Global Address BookResending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will begiFAX JOBSIn direct transmission mode, the [Preview] key cannot be used for transmission.Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.Operation Place the original on the document glass.DOCUMENT GLASSWhen faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page. Specify the destination fax number, and tap the [Send Directly] key on the action panel. Specify the destination fax number. ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Only one destination can be specified. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used. The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book. Tap the [Start] key to begin transmission.When the line has been connected to the destination, scanning of the original starts.If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will begiTYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENSTo cancel scanning the original:Tap the [Cancel Scan] key.Back to top';
body[211]='04-037.htm';
dai[211]='TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER';
bun[211]='TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKERTRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKEROverviewWhen the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established.If a person answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak.When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory.A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.A one-touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non-fax destination cannot be used.In speaker mode, the [Preview] key cannot be used for transmission. Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Speaker] key.When the connection is established, you will hear the dial tone through the machine\'s speaker. After tapping the [Speaker] key, use the slider that is displayed when you tap the [Speaker Volume] key or use key to adjust the volume of the speaker. Specify the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGA one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used. When the connection is made, tap the [Start] key to begin transmission.To cancel transmission:To stop transmission, tap the [Stop] key. To stop communication, tap the [Speaker] key.Back to top';
body[212]='04-038.htm';
dai[212]='SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS';
bun[212]='SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONSSENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)OverviewYou can send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation when, for example, sending a report to branch offices in different regions. This function is called "Broadcasting".One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.) It is convenient to store destinations you frequently use for broadcast transmission as contacts or groups. Maximum of 500 destinations can be stored in a contact. For broadcast transmission, the contact or group key can be simply tapped to retrieve multi When a one-touch key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialled is the number of destinations that are stored in the one-touch key. When a one-touch key that has 10 destinations is used, 10 fax numbers are dialled.Broadcast transmission is available only for memory transmission.If this function is combined with "Timer Transmission", broadcast transmission can be performed at any time, such as at night. A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions.The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations. If the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] checkbox is set to , the same image as that sent by the fax is sent even to the destination which supports the colour transmissionEven if a colour original is being used, it will be sent to fax and Internet fax destinations in black and white. A long original is also sent in black and white.If you wish to send the same image as fax to all destinations, tap the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] key on the action panel.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify all destinations.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGAfter entering a destination using the numeric keys, if you wish to enter another destination using the numeric keys, tap before entering the next destination. can be omitted before or after a destination entered using a one-touch key.However, if "Be sure to press Next Address Key () before selecting the next address" is enabled in setting mode, tap <> before selecting the next destination. Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. Confirm the destination.To cancel a specified destination:Tap the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel, and tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soBack to top';
body[213]='04-039.htm';
dai[213]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS';
bun[213]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSRESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSOverviewThe results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations.Operation Tap the job status display, and tapping the [Fax] tab. Tap the [Complete] key. After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission, tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel.If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes."Broadcast xxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx". After tapping the [Sending Failed] tab, tap the [Resending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations] key on the action panel to resend the image. The steps to follow after the [Resending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations] key is tapped differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is used.Using document filing:You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to re-scan the original.) If the job was stored in a confidential folderNot using document filing:You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the steps of the broadcast transmission.Back to top';
body[214]='04-040.htm';
dai[214]='SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER';
bun[214]='SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTERSENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER(PC-Fax) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.By using the "Log Viewer" application, faxes can be sent using the transmission log displayed in the Log Viewer. For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help. To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see "Software Setup Guide".This function can only be used on a Windows&reg; computer. Only transmission is available for this function. Faxes cannot be received by your computer. Back to top ';
body[215]='04-043.htm';
dai[215]='AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL';
bun[215]='AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINALAUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL(2-SIDED ORIGINAL)OverviewThe automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. 2-sided scanning automatically turns off after transmission has ended. 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.2-sided scanning is not possible when a mixed-size original is scanned.You cannot use 2-sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size. Operation After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [2-sided original type Book] key or the [2-sided original type Tablet] key. See the figure on the right to check the binding edge if the original and select the key to be tapped. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel 2-sided scanning:Tap the [2-sided original type Tablet] key or the [2-sided original type Book] key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display.Back to top';
body[216]='04-044.htm';
dai[216]='AUTO DETECTION';
bun[216]='AUTO DETECTIONAUTO DETECTIONWhen the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. The size of the placed original is indicated as the "Scan Size", and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the "Send size" in the base screen. In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. For example, if the scan size is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image will be reduced Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.Standard sizesWhen the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESBack to top ';
body[217]='04-045.htm';
dai[217]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE';
bun[217]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZEOverviewWhen the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only.When [Postcard], [Photo Size], or a standard size (direct entry) is selected, send size cannot be changed.Operation After tapping the [Original] key. Tap the [Scan Size] key. Tap the appropriate original size key.After the settings are completed, tap . If you are sending a long original, tap the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1,000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8")).TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESBack to top';
body[218]='04-046.htm';
dai[218]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES';
bun[218]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESOverviewWhen scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified.Operation Tap the [Original] key. After tapping the "Scan Size" key. Tap the [Direct Entry] key, and enter the scan size. It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size. Tap the [OK] key.After the settings are completed, tap twice. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. To cancel the specified size settings: Tap the [Auto] key. Back to top';
body[219]='04-047.htm';
dai[219]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE';
bun[219]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGESPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGEOverview Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numerical values. Operation Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Send Size] key. Tap the desired send size key. After the settings are completed, tap . Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" cannot be tapped. Tap the "Image Orientation" key with the same orientation as the original image. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted.After the settings are completed, tap . To configure the default setting of image orientation, select [System Settings] in "Setting mode", then [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Image Orientation]. The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size". Back to top ';
body[220]='04-048.htm';
dai[220]='CHANGING THE EXPOSURE';
bun[220]='CHANGING THE EXPOSURECHANGING THE EXPOSUREOverviewThe exposure can be changed to suit the darkness of the original.When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when "Job Build" or "Preview Setting" in "Others" is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of Exposure settingsExposureSuggestionAutoThis setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.Manual2013/1/2Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.3Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).2013/4/5Select this setting when the original consists of light text.Operation After tapping the [Exposure] key, tap the [Manual] key. Adjust the exposure with the slider or .When [Auto] is selected, the exposure will be set to [3].After the adjustment, tap .Back to top';
body[221]='04-049.htm';
dai[221]='CHANGING THE RESOLUTION';
bun[221]='CHANGING THE RESOLUTIONCHANGING THE RESOLUTIONOverviewThe resolution can be specified to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and the darkness of the image.Resolution settingsResolutionSuggestionStandardSelect this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual).FineSelect this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines. The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the [Standard] setting.Super FineSelect this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams. A higher-quality image will be produced than with the [Fine] setting.Ultra FineSelect this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams. This setting gives the best image quality. However, transmission will take longer than with the other settings.Half ToneSelect this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour (such as a colour original). This setting will produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone. Halftone cannot be selected when [Standard] isWhen using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when "Job Build" or "Preview Setting" in "Others" is used, the resolution can be changed each time a new seWhen a fax is sent at [Ultra Fine], [Super Fine], or [Fine] resolution, a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine does not have that resolution.Operation Tap the [Resolution] key. Tap the key of the desired resolution. When your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour (such as a colour original), and you wish to produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone, set the [Half Tone] checkbox to After the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
body[222]='04-050.htm';
dai[222]='CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED';
bun[222]='CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTEDCHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTEDCheck the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission.If you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a bett The settings and functions that can be changed while and after an image is scanned for preview are as follows: Exposure, Send Size, 2-Sided Booklet/Tablet, Resolution, Erase, Job Build, 2in1, Timer, Own Name Select, and Transaction Report.Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch panel.The preview function is not available when the original size is set to Long Size.Back to top';
body[223]='04-052.htm';
dai[223]='RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY';
bun[223]='RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLYRECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY Overview When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically.When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory transmission mode.FAX TRANSMISSION METHODSTo print received faxes, make sure that the required paper is loaded into the machine\'s paper trays. It is not necessary to load A4 (8-1/2" x 11") paper and B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") paper in both the vertical () and horizontal () orientatiIf a print job such as the copy or printer function has already been executed when printing the received data, the first reserved job is printed before the received data.Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed automatically when the error condition is cleared. (If the paper has run out, add You can check current fax reception mode in the system area at the top of the screen. To switch between auto reception and manual reception modes:Select [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Fax Data Receive/Forward] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings].Operation The machine rings and fax reception begins automatically.A beep sounds when reception ends. The faxes are printed automatically. If a password entry screen appears: A password is registered to print the received fax data. When the correct password is entered, the received fax is printed. PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) How to check the fax reception modeYou can check current fax reception mode in the system area at the top of the screen. &nbsp;Back to top';
body[224]='04-053.htm';
dai[224]='RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY';
bun[224]='RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLYRECEIVING A FAX MANUALLYOverviewA fax can be received manually using the touch panel (manually).When answering the telephone by tapping the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the voice of the caller, but you will not be able to speak.You can receive a fax after answering a call on an extension telephone. Remote reception can also be used to receive a fax.RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION)To switch between auto reception and manual reception modes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Receive/Forward Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings].Operation Tap the [Speaker] key or pick up the receiver of extension telephone while the telephone is ringing. When the [Speaker] key is tapped, the [Manual Reception] and appear. Adjust the volume by using the slider that is displayed when you tap the [Speaker Volume] key or using .If the received fax data remains unprinted, it will cause the fax memory to fill up, which may prevent some faxes from being received. If this function is enabled, you should print the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax memory Tap the [Manual Reception] key to receive a fax. Back to top';
body[225]='04-054.htm';
dai[225]='PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX';
bun[225]='PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAXPRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX(HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT)Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received. To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. To enable the hold setting for received data print: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594;[Image Send Settings] &#8594;[Operation Settings] &#8594;[Default Settings] &#8594;[Hold Setting for Received Data Print]. Important points when using this functionIf the received fax data is not printed or deleted, the fax memory will run low, and the machine will not be able to receive any faxes. When using this function, you should print the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax memory. The received faxes will be stored in memory regardless of whether they are received automatically or manually.When the received data is transferred to other machine, data stored in memory is also transferred. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing. Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered using the numeric keys, printing begins.When the [Cancel] key is tapped, the password entry screen closes. It will reappear when you tap or change modes. The data in memory key will blink in the touch panel. To display the received data list screen after entering the password:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting].Back to top ';
body[226]='04-055.htm';
dai[226]='PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME';
bun[226]='PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIMEPRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIMEYou can start printing the received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. The printed data is automatically deleted from memory.If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.This function is enabled if [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] are selected in "Setting mode (administrator)" and if [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled. If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled, this function is not available. In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Time Specified Output of Received Data].To disable the hold setting for received data print:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Hold Setting for Received Data Print]. Back to top';
body[227]='04-056.htm';
dai[227]='CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING';
bun[227]='CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTINGCHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTINGOverviewCheck the image of received data on the touch panel before printing.This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode". * The factory default setting is disabled.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. Important points when using this function If the received fax data is not printed or deleted, the fax memory will run low, and the machine will not be able to receive any faxes. When using this function, you should print the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax memory. Depending on the size of the received data, part of the check image on the touch panel may not appear.The received data list can be also shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap the job status display. The received data can be forwarded, deleted, or saved from the received data list. SAVING RECEIVED DATA OperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, select the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed. You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap the [Check Image] key on the action panelDisplays the received data image.Tap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.To delete a received image, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.To transfer the selected received image, tap the [Forward to Other Destination] key.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYTo save the selected received image, tap the [File] key.SAVING RECEIVED DATATo store the sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject Number Setting", tap the [Store to Unwanted Fax] key and, in the confirmation message screen, tap the [Store] key.Specify a sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject Number Setting" by selecting, in "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings] &#8594;Tap the image you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panelThe machine starts printing the image.[Select All]: Selects all displayed images.[Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All"./: Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image./: Rotates image counterclockwise or clockwise.A preview image is an image for the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.Tap the [Erase Specified Range] key to delete unwanted area of the image. Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Erase Specified Range screen.To forward the selected image, tap the [Forward to Other Address] key.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYTo save the selected image, tap the [File] key.SAVING RECEIVED DATA To delete the entire received data file, tap [Delete] on the Action Panel. Back to top';
body[228]='04-058.htm';
dai[228]='FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES';
bun[228]='FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXESFORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES(FAX DATA FORWARD)Overview When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is connected to a different line than the machine. If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received and stored in an F-code confidential memory box cannot be forwarded.Operation Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen. Select [System Settings] and tap the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key. Tap the [Fax Settings] key. Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding. If a password entry screen appears, the "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled. Enter the password using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT)Back to top';
body[229]='04-059.htm';
dai[229]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS';
bun[229]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONSFORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS(INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS)OverviewYou can have received faxes automatically forwarded to a fax address, Internet fax address, e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printedIn setting mode (Web version), you can configure the inbound routing settings for all received data. For the procedure for accessing the setting mode (Web version), see the Quick Start Guide. The following explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web ve Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set. In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Forward Received Data], and tap [Valid]/[Invalid] on the displayed forwarding tabl This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date &amp; Time Print" is disabled.)The received data is not forwarded to a hyperlink destination that is registered in the specified address.Like fax reception printing, the image is automatically reduced so that the page is not divided into multiple pages due to the header.Operation In "Setting mode", click [Application Settings] &#8594; [Inbound Routing Settings] &#8594; [Administration Settings]. In "Forward Received Data", select [Valid] and click the [Store] button. Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to .Disable Registration of Forward TableDisable Change/Delete of Forward TableDisable Change of Forward ApprovalSpecify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled. After the settings are completed, be sure to click the [Store] button. [Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding.[Save Only at Error]: Saves received data only when an error prevents forwarding. For the saved data, the error address can be confirmed and the data can be resent. From the [Scanner] or [Fax] tab in the job status screen, tap the [Check error box of forw * To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. Click [Sender Number/Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing Settings] menu in the "Setting mode". Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button.The entered address will be added to the "Entered sender address or fax number" list.Enter the address directly (maximum of 1500 characters) or select the address from a global address book by clicking the [Global Address Search] button.To store multiple sender addresses or fax numbers, repeat these steps.If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you store a forwarding table.A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button. When you have finished adding addresses, click the [Store] button. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the "Setting mode" menu and click the [Add] button. Enter a "Table Name". Select the forwarding conditions.Select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1-3]. Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded.To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data].To forward only data received from specific senders, select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender]. To forward all data except data from specific senders, select [Forward Received Data from Senders except Below]. Select the appropriate senders from theWhen selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders. Select the forwarding conditions.To always forward received data, select [Always Forward].To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day &amp; Time] and select the checkbox () of the desired day of the week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding Time] checkbox () and specify the timeUp to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the [Forwarding Destination List] tabs to access each setting. Select the file format.The format can be set separately for each forwarding address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in the table).Images forwarded in TIFF format may not be displayed correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file format to PDF.If the Internet fax address is selected as a recipient, data is forwarded in TIFF regardless of the specified format.If a fax number is selected as a recipient, the file format is ignored. Select the recipient from the address book.You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine. Up to 1,000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1, 2, and 3 in total. When you select the recipients from the address book, up to 400 recipien Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient. Specify this information if necessary.Enter an e-mail address, an Internet fax address, a direct SMTP address, or a fax number directly and tap the [Add] key.When you specify an e-mail address or a fax number, you can use the global address search.When you specify a fax number, also specify the sending line and international correspondence mode.When enter the recipients directly, up to 100 recipients can be registered for e-mail address, network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax. Click [Store]. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in "Setting mode". From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1-3]These settings are linked to the forwarding conditions set in Step 8. Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on Selected Day &amp; Time] from the forwarding table.The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 10, set the forwarding permission settings.To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected () and click [Delete]. Click [Store].Back to top';
body[230]='04-059_2.htm';
dai[230]='SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING)';
bun[230]='SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING)SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISK(INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine\'s hard disk.Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer.Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail.Received faxes are saved in the following directory:\\MFP\faxreceive Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.The "faxreceive" folder contains files of "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings".Received data is saved in the folder specified in "Specify folder" in "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings" in "Application Settings". If there is no specified folder, a folder is automatically created and the data saved.The file name for received data can be set in "File Name Setting" in "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings" in "Application Settings".How to save received faxes to the hard disk Click [Public Folder / NAS Setting] in "Network Settings". (Administrator rights required.) Select [Valid] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Save] button. Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk In Setting mode, click [Application Settings] &#8594;[Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings]. (Administrator rights required.) Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.Depending on the setting, received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box. Back to top ';
body[231]='04-060.htm';
dai[231]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY';
bun[231]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYFORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYOverviewReceived faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode". * The factory default setting is disabled.OperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed. You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap the [Forward to Other Address] keyTap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.Multiple sets of received data can be selected.When you select a single received data only, you can tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.To store the sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject Number Setting", tap the [Store to Unwanted Fax] key and, in the confirmation message screen, tap the [Store] key. Specify a sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject NumberSelect the destination from the Address Book screen, and tap the [Start] keyBack to top';
body[232]='04-061.htm';
dai[232]='SAVING RECEIVED DATA';
bun[232]='SAVING RECEIVED DATASAVING RECEIVED DATAOverviewYou can save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode".* The factory default setting is disabled. OperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed. You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to save, and tap the [File] key on the action panelTap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.Multiple sets of received data can be selected.When you select a single received data only, you can tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.To store the sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject Number Setting", tap the [Store to Unwanted Fax] key and, in the confirmation message screen, tap the [Store] key. Specify a sender fax number as a number for "Allow/Reject NumberSet the file information, and tap the [Save] keyBack to top';
body[233]='04-062.htm';
dai[233]='STORING FAX OPERATIONS';
bun[233]='STORING FAX OPERATIONSSTORING FAX OPERATIONS(PROGRAM)OverviewThis function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation.For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month.(1)The same documents are faxed to each branch office(2)To save paper, two document pages are faxed as a single page(3)Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmissionWhen a job program is not storedWhen a job program is storedEnter the fax number for each branch. Specify 2in1. Specify Erase. Tap the [Start] key. Scan and send the original.Call the registered program. Tap the [Start] key. Scan and send the original.Considerable time is required to send the documents each month because the above settings must be selected. In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings.When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by simply tapping the key of the program. In addition, transmission takes place according to the stored settings so there are no chances for mistakes. To configure a program:Tap the [Store Program - Set Current Store] key that appears on the action panel when you operate any mode screens. The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission.The following contents cannot be stored in programs:Tapping the [Speaker] key, Custom Size, Card Shot, page move and unspecified erase during preview, Metadata Entry, Send Settings, and Own Name Select.Up to 48 programs can be stored.Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.A program in which sub addresses and passcodes are specified as an F-code destination records all sub addresses and passcodes.Operation Place the original.According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the desired program key. Configure additional settings.For the called program, additionally configure the following settings:Image settings: Original scan size Send sizeOthers: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick File, Own Name Select, Transaction ReportSome settings cannot be added depending on the contents of the called program. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more inform Back to top';
body[234]='04-063.htm';
dai[234]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE';
bun[234]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGEERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE(ERASE)Overview The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books.This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.Scanning a thick bookNot using the erase functionUsing the erase function Shadows appear in the image.No shadows appear. Erase modesIf a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. F To change the default erase width setting:Select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Erase Width Adjustment]. The width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2")Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number. ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position.Check that he tapped checkbox is set to . If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to . If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to . Specify the erase width. To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the erase settings:Tap the [Clear] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[235]='04-064.htm';
dai[235]='SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES';
bun[235]='SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGESSENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES(DUAL PAGE SCAN)OverviewThe left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.Original scan sizeTransmitted imageA3 (11" x 17") x 1 pageA4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pageWhen using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].Note that "Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.Operation Place the original on the document glass. Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting:Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[236]='04-065.htm';
dai[236]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY';
bun[236]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELYSPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY(BOOK DIVIDE)OverviewThe opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].The document glass is not available for this function.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key. Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original.Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the Book Divide setting:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[237]='04-066.htm';
dai[237]='SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION';
bun[237]='SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATIONSPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION(TIMER)OverviewSpecify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low. A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch "". Transmission will not take place if the status is "" at the specified time.When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmUp to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once.This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial. If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission is finished.Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. To receive data from multiple destinations by polling, specify Timer for serial polling.Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, other functions, etc.) are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored in theIf a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen, the timer will be cancelled. The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOBThe time can be specified up to a week in advance.Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up. A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen. Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key. Tap the [On] key. Specify the date. Specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format.Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys.It is convenient to use to finely adjust the time.The setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CA] key to cancel the operation. Correct the time in setting mode and then perform the timer transmission procedure.BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAXTo cancel the Timer Transmission settings:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.Back to top';
body[238]='04-067.htm';
dai[238]='SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[238]='SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGESENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE(Multi Shot)OverviewReduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass. Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.The 2in1 is only available for originals with A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size.This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values, this function cannot be used.This function cannot be used together with Dual Page Scan or Card Shot.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi Shot] key. To cancel the Multi Shot setting:Tap the [Multi Shot] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted.After the settings are completed, tap . Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informatIf you tap the [Function Rev.] key on the scan confirmation screen, you can change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be changed.)Back to top';
body[239]='04-068.htm';
dai[239]='SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[239]='SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGESENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE(CARD SHOT)Overview Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. When using this function, the original must be placed on the document glass. If the original size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure. Check the original size once more, and specify it again.The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.Operation Place a card face down on the document glass. DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number. ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size, set the [Fit to Send Size] checkbox to .After selecting Card Shot, tap the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you tap the scan size key. For the procedure for setting the send size, see "SP To cancel the Card Shot settings:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key, and scan the front side. Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side. Before scanning the back of the card, tap the [Change Setting] key on the touch panel to change the exposure. Tap the [Read-End] key. If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. Back to top ';
body[240]='04-069.htm';
dai[240]='SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES';
bun[240]='SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGESSENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES(JOB BUILD)OverviewThis function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic docuWhen scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets. Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.The scan settings can be changed for each set of originals.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray. The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line on the tray. Originals can also be placed on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Job Build] key. To cancel the Job Build setting:Tap the [Job Build] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to scan the first set.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additionally Scan] key. Set the [Change Setting of Following Original] checkbox on the action panel to before tapping [Additional Scan] key as required, and then change the scan or send settings of the next original.To cancel scanning the original:Tap the [Cancel Scan] key. Tap the [Start Sending] key.If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.The [Change Setting] key can be tapped to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with "Multi Shot" in "Others", only the exposure can be Back to top';
body[241]='04-070.htm';
dai[241]='SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES';
bun[241]='SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZESSENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES(MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)OverviewThis feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals.When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original. This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, A4 and B5A4R and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, B5 and A511" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13", 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.Once the original scan size has been selected, Mixed Size Original cannot be specified.Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.This function is not available if [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Original Size Detector Setting] is set to "AB-3" in "Setting mode". Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder.Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting:Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[242]='04-071.htm';
dai[242]='SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL';
bun[242]='SENDING A THIN ORIGINALSENDING A THIN ORIGINAL(SLOW SCAN MODE)OverviewUse this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERAdjust the original guides slowly.If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed. Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting:Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[243]='04-072.htm';
dai[243]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[243]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSIONCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION(ORIGINAL COUNT)OverviewCount the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes. Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder. Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Original Count] key. To cancel the Original Count setting:Tap the [Original Count] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. When scanning is completed, check the number of original sheets. Tap the [OK] key to start transmission.If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Read-End] key has been tapped. If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets:Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings and destination sett Back to top';
body[244]='04-073.htm';
dai[244]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS';
bun[244]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALSSTAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS(VERIFICATION STAMP)OverviewThis function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned.To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.When the "O" mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE".Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder. Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Verification Stamp] key. To cancel the Verification Stamp setting:Tap the [Verification Stamp] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[245]='04-074.htm';
dai[245]='CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT';
bun[245]='CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORTCHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT(TRANSACTION REPORT)OverviewA transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed.The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.). Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the setting mode; however, you can temporarily select different conditions for a transmission. Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in "Setting mode"; however, you can temporarily select different conditions for a transmission.For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations. To set the printing conditions of transaction report:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Transaction Report Print Select Setting].Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transaction Report] key. Tap the key of the print settings. To cancel the transaction report settings:Tap the [Do not Print] key. The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows: "Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails. "Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails. "Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report. Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[246]='04-075.htm';
dai[246]='ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES';
bun[246]='ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXESADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES(FAX OWN NUMBER SENDING)Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit. Example of the sender information printed (1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. (2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.(3)Sender fax number or destination name (one-touch key name) (4) Page numbers: Page number/total pages To set the date and time:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Clock Adjust].To store a sender name and sender fax number:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Own Number and Name Set] &#8594; [Sender Data Registration].If you intend to use own number sending, be sure to configure this information. To add the number of pages to be transmitted:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Printing Page Number at Receiver]. Page numbers appear in the format "page number/total pages". Only the page numbTo select a sender fax number or destination:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Sender/Destination Name Change].Back to top';
body[247]='04-076.htm';
dai[247]='TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION';
bun[247]='TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATIONTEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION(OWN NAME SELECT)OverviewYou can temporarily change sender information to be used in the own number sending by selecting from data stored separately.The function is released when the transmission with the changed sender information ends. To store the sender information to be used for Own Name Select function:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Own Name and Destination Set] &#8594; [Registration of Own Name Select].Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Own Name Select] key. Tap the sender information key to specify the sender information used for own number sending. To cancel the sender information settings: Tap the [Clear] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[248]='04-077.htm';
dai[248]='CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION';
bun[248]='CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTIONCALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION(POLLING)OverviewWhen you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called "Polling".The document reception from another machine is called "Polling Reception".You can enter multiple destination numbers. When you enter multiple destination numbers, the document is received by polling in the sequence you have entered the destination numbers.Document reception by polling from multiple machines is called "Serial Polling".When you are using fax information services, you can manually poll and receive information by following the announcement of another machine. Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function.The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.If necessary, this function can be combined with the timer transmission to perform the polling reception at any time such as at night or when you are not present. (Only one timer polling reception can be set.)Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. To cancel the Polling setting:Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLINGMultiple fax numbers can be entered (maximum of 500).Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered. Polling multiple machines is called "Multi Polling".To enter multiple fax numbers, tap after entering a fax number and enter the next fax number. A one-touch key in which an address other than fax number is stored cannot be used. Tap the [Start] key to initiate fax reception.Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.Back to top';
body[249]='04-078.htm';
dai[249]='INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY';
bun[249]='INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLYINITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLYOverviewUse the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service.Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function.This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function. Operation Tap the [Speaker] key. You will hear the dial tone through the machine\'s speaker. Enter the destination fax number.ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING One-touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are stored, and one-touch key for which an address other than fax number is stored cannot be used. After tapping the [Speaker] key, you can tap the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key to receive originals (data). To cancel the Polling setting:Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. Back to top';
body[250]='04-079.htm';
dai[250]='SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE';
bun[250]='SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINESENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE(POLLING MEMORY)Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORYThis function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function. Back to top';
body[251]='04-080.htm';
dai[251]='RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS';
bun[251]='RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESSRESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS(POLLING SECURITY SETTING)The following explains "Polling Security Setting", a feature restricting other machines that can use polling memory.When a machine requests fax transmission, you can only allow the machine to use polling memory if its programmed sender fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This function is called "Polling Security SetThe polling security setting can be enabled for up to 10 other machines. To set the polling security:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Polling] &#8594; [Fax Polling Security].Back to top';
body[252]='04-081.htm';
dai[252]='SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY';
bun[252]='SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORYSCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORYOverviewFollow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Select image settings and other functions.To return to the screen of step 4, tap the [Memory Box List] key. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. Tap the [Change Number of Times] key on the action panel. Tap the [Once] key or [Unlimited] key to specify the number of times. Tap the [Once] key if you want the document cleared from memory after it is transmitted. Tap the [Unlimited] key to allow polling an unlimited number of times. After the settings are completed, tap and . Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.When the original is scanned, a preview image appears in the touch panel.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.Back to top';
body[253]='04-082.htm';
dai[253]='CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX';
bun[253]='CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOXCHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOXOverviewYou can check the document stored in the machine\'s memory box (public box) for memory polling. To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. If a document is stored in the public box, is displayed. Tap the [Image Check] key to check the document. To print the document, tap the [Print] key.Back to top';
body[254]='04-083.htm';
dai[254]='DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX';
bun[254]='DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOXDELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOXOverviewDelete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. If a document is stored in the public box, is displayed. Tap the [Empty out Box] key. If you tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased. Tap the [Yes] key.The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 2.You can tap the [Image Check] key to check the image in the touch panel before deleting it. To cancel deleting the document:Tap the [No] key. Back to top';
body[255]='04-085.htm';
dai[255]='F-CODE COMMUNICATION';
bun[255]='F-CODE COMMUNICATIONF-CODE COMMUNICATIONThis function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code. It enables exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) with other machines that * F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.How F-codes workA fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the recThe products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "sub-address" and "passcode". If you need to contact the operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the tab The machineITU-T&nbsp;F-code polling memory boxF-code confidential boxF-code relay broadcasting functionSub AddressSEPSUBSUBPasscodePWDSIDSIDAn F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.Back to top';
body[256]='04-086.htm';
dai[256]='CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION';
bun[256]='CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATIONCREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATIONBefore the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created in "Setting mode". Set the box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) in each memory box, and store them. After you have created a memory box, notify the other party of F-code communication of the sub-address and passcode of the box. To create F-code memory boxes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [F-Code Memory Box]. To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine. F-code confidential reception F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION Back to top';
body[257]='04-087.htm';
dai[257]='F-CODE DIALLING';
bun[257]='F-CODE DIALLINGF-CODE DIALLINGWhen performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission. To use the following F-code communication functions, your machine must dial the other machine. F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSIONF-code polling receptionF-code relay request transmission If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialling that machine. To store and edit one-touch keys and group keys:Select [Address Book] in "Setting mode".Back to top';
body[258]='04-088.htm';
dai[258]='F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION';
bun[258]='F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSIONF-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSIONBy sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) stored in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine), the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box. This is convenient for sending sensitive documents thaCHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTIONThe F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient before the fax is sent. To create F-code memory boxes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [F-Code Memory Box].Back to top';
body[259]='04-089.htm';
dai[259]='CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES';
bun[259]='CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESCONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESOverviewSend a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode).If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program. Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination.(1)&nbsp;Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys.(2)&nbsp;Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol "/" is entered.(3)&nbsp;Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys.(4)&nbsp;Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol "/" is entered.(5)&nbsp;Enter the passcode using the numeric keys.If the sub-address and passcode are already registered, you can select a one-touch key as well.If the passcode is omitted for the memory box of destination machine, you can skip Steps (4) and (5). Tap the [Start] key.Scanning of the original starts.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[260]='04-090.htm';
dai[260]='CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION';
bun[260]='CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTIONCHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTIONOverviewWhen an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the print passcode. Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue.The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. To print transaction report automatically when an F-code confidential fax is received:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Transaction Report Print Select Setting] &#8594; [Confidential Reception]. Operation The machine rings and the fax is received.A beep sounds when reception ends. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. From the [Confidential] tab, tap the [Check received data list] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the memory box containing the confidential fax."" appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes are greyed out and cannot be tapped. Enter the print passcode using the numeric keys.As each digit is entered, "-" changes to "*".Take care to enter the correct print passcode. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the entry screen. You can tap the [Cancel] key to return to step 4. Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap the [Check Image] key on the action panelDisplays the received data image. To print the document, tap the [Print] key.Back to top';
body[261]='04-091.htm';
dai[261]='POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES';
bun[261]='POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODESPOLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODESOverviewThis function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling reception.The receiving machine bears the telephone charges of the transmission.If necessary, use the F-code polling reception in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. Only one polling reception with a timer setting can be stored at a time.SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION(TIMER) Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the F-code for the polling reception function. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key.A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Polling setting:Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. Specify the destination.(1)&nbsp;Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys.(2)&nbsp;Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol "/" is entered.(3)&nbsp;Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys.(4) Tap the [Passcode] key.Symbol "/" is entered.(5)&nbsp;Enter the passcode using the numeric keys.If the sub-address and passcode are already registered, you can select a one-touch key as well.If the passcode is omitted for the memory box of destination machine, you can skip Steps (4) and (5). Tap the [Start] key.Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.Back to top';
body[262]='04-092.htm';
dai[262]='SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION';
bun[262]='SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSIONSCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSIONOverviewWhen your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcod If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored documents.By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. To create F-code memory boxes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [F-Code Memory Box].Operation Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. You cannot set the Program, Timer, Transaction Report, Polling, and Document Filing. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the key of the F-code memory box (polling memory). Tap the [Change Number of Times] key on the action panel, and set the polling times. To erase the original after its transmission, tap the [Once] key. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. Change the settings as necessary.After the settings are completed, tap and key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
body[263]='04-093.htm';
dai[263]='CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX';
bun[263]='CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOXCHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOXOverviewYou can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap the [Check Registered Data] key on the action panel. To print the document, tap the [Print] key. Back to top';
body[264]='04-094.htm';
dai[264]='DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION';
bun[264]='DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSIONDELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSIONOverviewDelete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document.A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission.Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap the [Empty out Box] key on the action panel. You can tap the [Check Registered Data] key to check the image in the touch panel before deleting it.If you tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel, you can check the image before it is erased. Tap the [Yes] key The document is deleted, and you return to Step 2.To cancel the document deletion:Tap the [No] key.Back to top';
body[265]='04-095.htm';
dai[265]='RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES';
bun[265]='RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESRELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESOverviewThis function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines. When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combinat SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION(TIMER) F-code (sub-address and passcode) and the destination in the F-code relay broadcast memory box of the recipient machine should be verified by the recipient in advance.Before using this function, program the destination machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box in the relay machine.It is not necessary for the destination machines to support F-code communication.Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines.If necessary, this function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program. When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date &amp; Time Print" is disabled.) To create F-code memory boxes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [F-Code Memory Box]. Operation Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYSRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKTHE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONRETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDSENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch key, it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 5. Go to step 6. Tap the [Sub Address] key.Enter "/". Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys. Tap the [Sub Address] key.Enter "/". If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the destination machine, it is not necessary to take steps 6 and 7. Tap the [Start] key.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". Scanning begins. If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and t Back to top';
body[266]='04-096.htm';
dai[266]='RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES';
bun[266]='RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESRELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODESWhen your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine.Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box. Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically.Prior to carrying out the operation, inform the requesting party, who you will communicate with using F-code relay request transmission, of the sub-address and passcode of the F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machineProgram the destination machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATIONIt is not necessary for the destination machines to support F-code communication.The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines. When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date &amp; Time Print" is disabled.) Back to top';
body[267]='04-103.htm';
dai[267]='CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONE';
bun[267]='CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONECONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONEYou can connect an existing telephone to the machine.The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the extension telephone as shown below.As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the [START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party. You can also press the [START] key when an original is not placed to receive a fax.After connecting an extension telephone, configure the "External Telephone Setting" in setting mode.Enable the "Tel/Fax Auto Change" function. This is useful as the telephone or fax operation is selected automatically according to the calling.You cannot send a fax from your telephone.You can connect a telephone with a modular cable plug to your machine. Also, use the two-wire cable for telephone connection. If another type of cable is used, the telephone may not operate normally.If you have a problem in telephone cable connection, contact your dealer or authorised service representative.Back to top';
body[268]='04-105.htm';
dai[268]='RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE';
bun[268]='RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONERECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE(REMOTE RECEPTION)OverviewFollow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone. If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals. To receive a fax after answering a call on the extension telephone:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Fax Data Receive/Forward] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings] to enable [Manual Reception].To change the number to receive faxes:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Remote Reception Number Setting].Operation While the machine is ringing, pick up the receiver to speak. Signal the machine to start fax reception.Press from the extension telephone. Replace the receiver.The machine beeps when reception ends.Back to top';
body[269]='04-108.htm';
dai[269]='FAX JOBS';
bun[269]='FAX JOBSFAX JOBSWhen you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax.When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items:STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDPRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOBCHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESSCHECKING COMPLETED JOBSFax jobs include reception, timer transmission, and data forwarding as well as usual transmission. For information on jobs in fax mode, see "COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS".Back to top';
body[270]='04-109.htm';
dai[270]='COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS';
bun[270]='COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBSCOMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS Fax reception jobs When a fax is being received, the status field displays "Receiving" in the job queue list. When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays "In Memory". After the fax is printed, the st Timer transmission jobs A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the specified time is reached. The job is printed at the specified time, and moves to the completed job list. If another job is being printed at the specified time, the job being prin Retry jobs A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list. Transmission of the retry job starts according to the [Recall in Case of Line Busy] setting in "Setting mode". When the transmission is completed, the retry job moves to the completed job lis Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (Inbound routing settings) Received data is not printedWhen a data is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue list. When the reception is completed, the status changes to "Waiting".Received Internet fax is printedWhen reception is completed, the status field displays "In Memory" in the completed job list. After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Received". Then a job is added for which the status field displays "Waiting" in thBack to top';
body[271]='04-116.htm';
dai[271]='PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS';
bun[271]='PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSPRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSYou can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result, etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 trYou can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once a day only). The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted. When the Image Sending Activity Report is erased, the log is reset. The Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reach 200 again, the report is printed. To configure the image sending activity report:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Activity Report Print Select Setting]. To print the communication record, 1. Display the job status screen and tap the [Complete] key. 2. Tap [Print Image Sending Activity Report] in the action panel.Back to top';
body[272]='04-117.htm';
dai[272]='INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN';
bun[272]='INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMNINFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMNError types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.Examples of messages that are printed in the result columnMessageDescriptionOKThe transaction was completed normally.G3Communication took place in G3 mode.ECMCommunication took place in G3 ECM mode.SG3Communication took place in Super G3 mode.ForwardingThe received data was forwarded.NO RESPONSENo response from the receiving party.BUSYTransmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.CANCELThe transmission was cancelled while in progress.MEMORY OVERThe memory became full during quick on-line transmission.MEM. FULLThe memory became full during reception.LENGTH OVERThe transmitted fax was over 59" (1.5 m) long and therefore could not be received.ORIGINAL ERRORDirect transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred.PASS# NGThe connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.NO RX POLLThe machine that was polled does not have a polling function.RX POLL FAILThe other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when polled because no data was in memory. NO F-CODE POLLThe other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.RX POLL# NG The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid.F POLL PASS# NGThe connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid.BOX NO. NGYour machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory box does not exist.F PASS# NGYour machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for F-code communication.RX NO F-CODE POLLF-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box.NO F FUNCF-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code communication.NO F-CODEF-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or other reason.M. BOX: [xxxxxx] ******Data was received and stored in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a memory polling box. The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request reception, polling memory transmissioFAIL xx (xxxx) The transaction failed due to a communication error. First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99. Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.Reject ReceptionA fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked.Back to top';
body[273]='05-001.htm';
dai[273]='USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER';
bun[273]='USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNERUSES OF THE NETWORK SCANNERThe network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on yThe network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.Scanner modeInternet fax modeData entry mode Scanner mode Scan to E-mailA scanned file is attached to e-mail and sent.Scan to FTPThe scanned file is sent to a specified folder of an FTP server. When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. Scan to DesktopThe scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the software, see the manual (PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the procScan to Network FolderThe scanned file is sent to a network folder on a Windows PC on the same network as the machine. When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file.For the operating procedure, see "SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE".Internet fax modeThe scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Internet faxes are received if necessary.The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a mail server.To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.For the operating procedure, see "SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE".Data entry modeIn data entry mode, information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format. Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function.The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.Metadata is information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects.For the operating procedure, see "TRANSMITTING METADATA". Back to top';
body[274]='05-002.htm';
dai[274]='BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER';
bun[274]='BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNERBEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNERTo use the machine as a network scanner, you must store sender information, configure server settings, store destinations in the address book, and perform other required operations.Make sure the main power switch is in the "" positionWhen the main power indicator is lit up, the main power is in the "" position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the "" position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel. *If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the main power switch in the "" position. Checking the date and timeVerify that the correct date and time are set in the machine. To set the date and time of the machine:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Clock Adjust].If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. In this case, select [System Settings] in "Setting mode" and select [Operation Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] setting.Storing sender informationBefore using Scan to E-mailStore a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be used in the case when a sender is not selected. To store the sender\'s name and e-mail address that are used when a sender is not selected:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Default Sender Set].Before using Internet faxStore a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address". To store the sender\'s name and address:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Own Number and Name Set] &#8594; [Sender Data Registration].Configuring settings required in the setting modeConfigure server settings, default settings for the network scanner, and settings for Internet Fax. To configure server settings:In "Setting mode", select [Network Settings] &#8594; [Services Settings]. (Administrator rights are required.)To configure basic settings for the network scanner:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Network Scanner Settings]. (Administrator rights are required.)To configure settings for Internet Fax:In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] and then configure options in [Internet Fax Settings]. (Administrator rights are required.)Storing destination addresses for each scan mode in the address bookYou can send an image by directly entering an address when using Scan to Image. It is convenient to previously store addresses in the address book. Up to 6000 addresses can be stored in the address book. For information on the address book, see "ADDR For how to use the address books and how to store addresses, see the following item. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Back to top ';
body[275]='05-005.htm';
dai[275]='SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE';
bun[275]='SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODESELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODEYou can select the network scanner mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows:OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the icon indicating the network scanner modeTap one of [E-mail], [FTP/Desktop], [Network Folder], and [Internet Fax]. The initial screen of the selected mode is displayed.&nbsp;Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode display&nbsp;Tap [Image Send]By default, the screen changes to the fax mode screen.&nbsp;To change the screen that is initially displayed when the [Image Send] in the mode display is tapped:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Default Display Setting].Tap and then tap one of [E-mail], [FTP/Desktop], [Network Folder], and [Internet Fax]The initial screen of the selected mode is displayed.In "Setting mode", by selecting [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection] and setting the [Higher priority is given to the display of address book.] checkbox to , the Address Book inBack to top';
body[276]='05-007.htm';
dai[276]='STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP';
bun[276]='STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOPSTORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOPTo store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer.To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Shapdesk Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk. Back to top';
body[277]='05-008.htm';
dai[277]='BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS';
bun[277]='BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESSBEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESSThe machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a mail server. For the procedure for storing the Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY" and " STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH" or "STORING GROUPS". Stored Direct SMTP addresses If the destination is busy:If the destination is busy, the machine will wait briefly and then automatically resend.To cancel the transmission:Do so from the job status screen.STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be established because the line is busy, or for other reasons:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Recall in Case of Line Busy]. The factory default setting is two attempts at 3-minute intervals.When a communication error occurs:If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time, transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval.To cancel the transmission:Do so from the job status screen.STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Recall in Case of Communication Error]. The factory default setting is two attempts at 3-minute intervals.Back to top';
body[278]='05-009.htm';
dai[278]='BASE SCREEN OF EACH MODE';
bun[278]='BASE SCREEN OF EACH MODEBASE SCREEN OF EACH MODE This section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the E-mail base screen. Several methods are available in the Image Send mode, including Scan to E-mail and Scan to FTP. The base screen layout slightly differs d To set the screen that is initially displayed when the [Image Send] key is tapped: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Default Display Setting]. Back to top';
body[279]='05-017.htm';
dai[279]='IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE';
bun[279]='IMAGE SEND SEQUENCEIMAGE SEND SEQUENCEFirst, to place the machine in a desired image send mode, tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen.SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODEPlace the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSEnter the destination.Tap the address key to directly enter the destination, and specify the address to send scan data. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Configure the scan settings.Specify the original scan size, exposure, file format, and other items.If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELYADJUSTING COLOURS AND SHADINGSCANNING ORIGINALS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL(2-SIDED ORIGINAL)SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE(ENLARGE/REDUCE)SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGECHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPECHANGING THE RESOLUTIONCHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODECHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODECHANGING COLOUR MODE Set Others.Use Others other than the time when using scan settings such as sending two pages as a single page or sending originals of different sizes at the same time. Send the original.Tap the [Start] key.You can check the preview of an image by tapping the [Preview] key.When the original is placed on the document glass:Repeat the placing original and transmission procedures until all originals have been sent. After scanning all originals, tap the [Read-End] key.Back to top';
body[280]='05-018.htm';
dai[280]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES';
bun[280]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESTRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESThe following original sizes can be transmitted&nbsp;Minimum original size (mm)Maximum original size (mm)Using the automatic document feeder(131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width))5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)(297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width))11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)Using the document glass-(297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width))11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width) *A long original can be transmitted. Back to top';
body[281]='05-019.htm';
dai[281]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL';
bun[281]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALTHE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALWhen a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" on the base screen. SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When an original of 8-1/2" x 14" in size is detected, the image setting direction is automatically set so that it will be scanned starting from the top side. Likewise, when mixed-size originals of 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11" in size are detected, all orWhen the automatic original detection function is operating and a non-standard size original (of inch or non-standard size) is placed, the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct Standard sizesStandard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. To specify the standard size, select [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Original Size Detector Setting] in "Setting mode".List of original size detector settingsSelectionsStandard sizes (detected original sizes)Document GlassDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x13")8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-5A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RInch-111"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3 Inch-211"x17", 8-1/2"x13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3 Inch-311"x17", 8-1/2"x13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3Back to top';
body[282]='05-020.htm';
dai[282]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[282]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKOverview In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination.If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one-touch key. Tapping the key will retrieve all the stored destinations. The address book screen shows all destinations used in each mode. Each one-touch key shows the name of the destination and an icon indFor information on the address book, see "ADDRESS BOOK".For the procedure for storing an address in the address book, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY" and " STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH" or "STORING GROUPS".FaxScan to E-mailInternet Fax (Direct SMTP)Scan to FTPScan to Network FolderScan to DesktopGroup key with multiple destinationsOperation Tap the [Address Book] key. Tap the one-touch key of contact or group that has a destination. The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, job types, indexes, and keywords.A list can be displayed in the order of the search numbers. When adding a destination, tap another one-touch key.If two or more destinations are selected or specified, the total number of addresses appears next to .Even if only a single destination is selected, the number of addresses appears when the destination is a contact or group in which multiple addresses are stored.For more information, see "ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN".If you select an incorrect destination:Tap the key again to cancel the selection.To select a destination from the transmission log, tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panel. USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND To retrieve a destination by using a search number, tap the [Call Search Number] key on the action panel. USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONTo retrieve a destination from a global address book, tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKTo check the entered destinations, tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSTap the one-touch key, and then tap the [Show Details] key on the action panel to display the detailed information screen.The destination for transmission can be selected by tapping a stored destination. Back to top';
body[283]='05-021.htm';
dai[283]='VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS';
bun[283]='VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSOverviewWhen multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).Operation Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. Confirm the destination.After the confirmation is completed, tap .To confirm detailed information such as the type or name of the specified destination, tap the one-touch key of the target destination, and then tap the [Confirm Destination Information] key.To cancel a specified destination:Tap the key of the destination that you wish to cancel, and tap the [OK] key.Back to top';
body[284]='05-022.htm';
dai[284]='USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION';
bun[284]='USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION Tap the [Call Search Number] key. Enter a search number (4 digits) using the numeric keys and tap .When the search number is entered, the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination.If an incorrect search number is entered:Tap the [C] key to clear the number and enter the correct number.The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.If you do not know the search number, tap the [Print Individual List] key on the action panel to print and check the address list.When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "0001", enter "1" and tap the [OK] key.Back to top';
body[285]='05-023.htm';
dai[285]='ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY';
bun[285]='ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY In the base screen of a mode, tap [Text Box] On the base screen of Internet Fax, tap [Text Box] to display the screen you want to select the address type. Tap either the [Internet Fax] or [Direct SMTP] key. Enter the destination addressIn data entry mode, select the mode of the destination, and enter the destination address.For Scan to Network Folder mode, the network folder entry screen appears. See "SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER".To switch among [To], [Cc] and [Bcc], tap .You can select [Bcc] if [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Bcc Setting] &#8594; [Enable Bcc] is enabled in [System Settings].In Internet Fax mode, the reception report request screen will appear if [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings]&#8594;"I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in [System SeBack to top';
body[286]='05-024.htm';
dai[286]='SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER';
bun[286]='SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER Tap the [Browse] key in the network folder entry screen.To directly enter a folder, tap the [Path Imput to Folder] key. The soft keyboard is displayed.If a user name and password are required, check with the administrator of the server and enter the user name and password.If a user authentication function other than authentication by user number is enabled, the login name of the current user is automatically entered in the user name field. Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access.Tap the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder.Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.Tap the [Cancel] key to return to the screen of step 1. Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access.If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password. Tap the key of the network folder.After the settings are completed, tap . You will return to the screen of step 1. Tap the [OK] key again to accept the destination.Back to top';
body[287]='05-025.htm';
dai[287]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[287]='RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKOverviewWhen an LDAP server is configured in the "Setting mode (Web version)", look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses). Operation Tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel. Tap [Destination] and tap the LDAP server to be used.If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.If only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take step 2. In this case, start from step 3.After the settings are completed, tap . Tap of [Object] to select the object to be searched, and tap [Touch to Input Keyword] to enter the initial of destination, then tap the [Start Search] key.The search results will appear after a brief interval.How to searchEnter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters. An asterisk is used as follows:XXX : Names beginning with "XXX" XXX: Names that end with "XXX" XXX : Names containing "XXX" AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX". Tap the destination key to determine the destination.If no destination is found:Tap the [Search Again] key to add more search letters. To continuously add other destination. Tap the destination.To check the destination information:Tap the one-touch key of the target destination, and then tap the [Confirm Destination Information] key. Tap to close the address information screen.Back to top';
body[288]='05-027.htm';
dai[288]='USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND';
bun[288]='USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDOverviewSelect a destination from a transmission log and resend the data.The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses), and/or fax are stored. Select one of these to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to When a destination for retransmission is selected in the transmission log screen, the mode of the selected destination is automatically selected.The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.One-touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are stored.Broadcasting destinationsDestinations transmitted to using a programThe user name and password are not stored for security reasons. If a screen requiring you to enter such information appears, enter the information again. Operation Tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the destination to resend.The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information.To cancel the resend setting:Tap the highlighted key.When you select the destination and tap the [Register New Address in Address Book], the destination can be stored in the address book. This is convenient if you have entered a destination directly.Back to top';
body[289]='05-028.htm';
dai[289]='SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE';
bun[289]='SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODESENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODEOverviewAn image can be sent in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large. When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce the sDo not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size. Operation Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.*To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown in the figure titled "Landscape orientation" and specify the placement orientation in step 5.Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation (). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation (), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original si Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDThe icon on the key indicates the type of destination stored in the key. : Scan to E-mail: Scan to FTP: Scan to Network Folder: Scan to DesktopAfter a one-touch key is tapped, if the screen is changed without tapping , the destination of the tapped key is automatically specified.When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Tap to select destinations.Multiple destinations can be specified.To change [Subject], [File Name], [Reply Name], or [Body Text], tap a target entry box, or tap [Options].Change the subject, file name, reply name, or mail text at scan transmission. Tap the [Original] key. Tap the appropriate orientation key.Specify the orientation of the original placed in step 1.After the settings are completed, tap .You can change exposure, resolution, file format, colour mode, and other settings. Tap their keys.AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL)SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (ENLARGE/REDUCE)CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPECHANGING THE RESOLUTIONCHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODECHANGING COLOUR MODETapping the [Others] key allows you to configure various functions, for example, collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending the original.If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place.If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to step 6.If the file format is set to [PDF/Encrypt], [PDF/Encrypt/Emphasize Black Letter], [PDF/Encrypt/High Compression], or [PDF/Encrypt/High Compression/Ultra Fine], you will be prompted to enter the password when you tap the [Start] key. Tap the [Entry] key to If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original and tap the [Start] key.Repeat until all originals have been scanned. Tap the [Read-End] key.A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.Tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in Others, change only the exposure when scanning an even-numbered original page.Back to top ';
body[290]='05-029.htm';
dai[290]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION';
bun[290]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSIONCHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSIONOverviewChange the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text.When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.If the subject or file name is not changed, the settings in [Application Settings] &#8594; [Network Scanner Settings] in "Setting mode" are used.If the reply-to address is not changed, the settings in [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Default Sender Set] in "Setting mode" are used. If this is not configured, the reply address configured in [To configure the candidates for the subject, file name, and body text, select [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in "Setting mode".Operation To change the subject, tap the [Subject] entry box. Tap a pre-set text key. To cancel the selection of the subject:Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the text and tap the [OK] key. To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box. After the settings are completed, tap .Tap the key of the file name from the list.To directly enter the file name, tap the [Direct Entry] key. Tap [Options]. To change the reply address, tap the [Reply-To] entry box. Tap the key that you wish to use for the reply address.After the settings are completed, tap .Tap the [Global Address Search] key to specify a user stored in the global address book in the same way as you would select the reply address.Tapping the [Direct Entry] key allows you to directly enter the e-mail address.Selecting the [Add \'Reply to\' to Cc] checkbox to adds a reply address to the Cc address. To change the body text, tap the [Body Text] entry box. Enter the body text.After the settings are completed, tap .To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-set Message] key.To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key.To clear all entered text:Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately; not just the selected line.Enter up to 1800 characters. (A line break counts as one character.)To edit the selected line, tap the [Edit] key. The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered.Back to top';
body[291]='05-030.htm';
dai[291]='SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE';
bun[291]='SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODESENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODEOverviewTransmits a fax in Internet Fax mode. This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP. When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. If necessary, use this number to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcasMail Footer Registration: The specified text is automatically appended to the end of the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when you wish to append pre-set text such as a corporate policy. To enter the text to append, select [Application Settings], [ Operation Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size. Place the original of the A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size in the portrait orientation (). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation (), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" xSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Rotation sending A4, B5R and A5R (8-1/2" x 11" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R) originals are rotated 90 degrees, and respectively sent in the A4R, B5 and A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2) orientations Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESENDThe icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet fax addresses are stored.To change [Subject], [File Name], or [Body Text], tap its entry field, or tap [Options].CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSION Tap the [Original] key. You can change exposure, resolution, file format, colour mode, and other settings.AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL)CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPECHANGING THE RESOLUTIONCHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODECHANGING COLOUR MODETapping the [Others] key allows you to configure various functions, for example, collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes. Tap the appropriate orientation key.After the settings are completed, tap . Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending the original.If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, go to step 8. To scan more pages, go to the next step.If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place. If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original and tap the [Start] key.Repeat until all originals have been scanned. Tap the [Read-End] key.A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. Back to top';
body[292]='05-031.htm';
dai[292]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSION';
bun[292]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSIONCHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSIONOverviewChange the subject, file name, and body text when performing an Internet fax transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. Configure a file name, and other settings for an Internet fax using the Send Settings of the other functions.If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Setting mode (Web version) are used.To configure the candidates for the subject, file name, and body text, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in "Setting mode".Operation Tap [Others], and tap the [Send Settings] key. To change the subject, tap the [Subject] entry box. Tap a pre-set text key. To cancel the selection of the subject:Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the text and tap the [OK] key. To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box.After the settings are completed, tap .Tap the key of the file name from the list.To directly enter the file name, tap the [Direct Entry] key. To change the body text, tap the [Body Text] entry box. Enter the body text.After the settings are completed, tap . To clear all entered text:Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately; not just the selected line.To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-set Message] key.To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key.Enter up to 1800 characters. (A line break counts as one character.) Use to select on a line basis.To edit the selected line, tap the [Edit] key. The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered.Back to top';
body[293]='05-032.htm';
dai[293]='SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS';
bun[293]='SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONSSENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)OverviewSend the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation.One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.) It is convenient to store destinations you frequently use for broadcast transmission as contacts or groups. A maximum of 500 destinations can be stored in one contact.For broadcast transmission, the contact or group key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers. You can also send faxes with the one-touch key by setting the [Set to the address as usually used] checkbox to when addresses are registered. If yA transmission is performed, ignoring hyperlinks with Scan to FTP and Scan to Network Folder addresses.If the original is colour and the colour mode is set to "Full Colour", the original is sent in Mono2 to Internet fax or fax mode destinations. A long original is also sent in Mono2.If you wish to send the same image as fax to all destinations, tap the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] key on the action panel. To register destinations in a contact or group:In the base screen or address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. For more information, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY" anOperation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify all destinations. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection.If a Scan to FTP or Network Folder address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not take place. To switch delivery types (To/Cc/Bcc), tap .If [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Always press next destination key () before selecting next destination] is enabled in "Setting mode", tap before specifying the If you wish to send the same image (Mono2) as the one for the fax address to all destinations, tap the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] key on the action panel.If you wish to send the same image (Mono2) as the one for the Internet fax address to all destinations, tap the [Send Same Image as I-Fax Address] key on the action panel. Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. Confirm the destination.To cancel a specified destination:Tap the key of the destination that you wish to cancel to release the selection. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatBack to top';
body[294]='05-033.htm';
dai[294]='SETTING MODES WHEN MULTIPLE TYPES OF ADDRESSES ARE INCLUDED IN A BROADCAST TRANSMISSION';
bun[294]='SETTING MODES WHEN MULTIPLE TYPES OF ADDRESSES ARE INCLUDED IN A BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONSETTING MODES WHEN MULTIPLE TYPES OF ADDRESSES ARE INCLUDED IN A BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONThis section explains settings you should bear in mind if multiple types of addresses are included in a broadcast transmission.When a broadcast transmission includes a mix of several types of addresses (such as scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations), its settings are enabled for all addresses regardless of which mode screen is used to configure them. Note the following excSend sizeWhen the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only possible in A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) size. If an original larger than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") is scanned, it will automatically be reduced to A4R before transmissiResolution (image)Pages are sent using settings configured in each mode.File format (file compression mode)The compression mode set with [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Scan Settings] &#8594; [Compression Mode at Broadcasting] in "Setting mode" is used for all destinations.Colour scanningIn scan mode, if the colour mode setting is [Full Colour], the original is sent in Mono2 to Internet fax destinations and in colour to scan destinations. If the facsimile expansion kit is enabled, tap the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] key on the actionOriginal countAn address of a mode in which the number of original sheets are specified, if it exists, is enabled.Scan file sizeIf a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an attachment size limit has been set using [Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments] or [Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)] (in "Setting mode",2in1This mode is available only for Fax and Internet Fax. It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function.Dropout colourThis mode is available for Scanner and Data entry. It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function.Back to top';
body[295]='05-034.htm';
dai[295]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS';
bun[295]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSRESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSOverviewThe results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations.Operation Tap the job status display. After tapping the appropriate mode tab, tap the [Complete] key.If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes. After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission, tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel. "Broadcast xxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx". After tapping the [Sending Failed] tab, tap the [Resending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations] key on the action panel to resend the image. The steps to follow after the [Resending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations] key is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used. Using document filing:You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to re-scan the original.)Not using document filing:You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the steps of the broadcast transmission.Back to top';
body[296]='05-035.htm';
dai[296]='SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC';
bun[296]='SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PCSENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC(PC-I-FAX) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and By using the "Log Viewer" application, Internet faxes can be sent using the transmission log displayed in the Log Viewer.For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help. To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit.For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.This function can only be used on a Windows computer. This function is available for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer that is connected to the machine. Back to top ';
body[297]='05-037.htm';
dai[297]='AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL';
bun[297]='AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINALAUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL(2-SIDED ORIGINAL)OverviewThe automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original.The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed.OperationAfter tapping the [Original] key, tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Book] key. See the figure on the right to check the binding edge of the original and select the key to be tapped. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original.If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted.After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel 2-sided scanning:Tap the [2-Sided original type Tablet] key or the [2-Sided original type Book] key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display.Back to top';
body[298]='05-038.htm';
dai[298]='SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE';
bun[298]='SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZESCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE(ENLARGE/REDUCE)When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. For example, if the scan size is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image will be reduced Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.Standard sizesWhen the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESBack to top';
body[299]='05-039.htm';
dai[299]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE';
bun[299]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZEOverviewWhen the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only.When [Postcard], [Photo Size], or a standard size (direct entry) is selected, send size cannot be changed. Operation After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [Scan Size] key. Tap the appropriate original size key.After the settings are completed, tap .If you are sending a long original, tap the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1,000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8")).TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESBack to top';
body[300]='05-040.htm';
dai[300]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES';
bun[300]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESOverviewWhen scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1&quWhen the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified.Operation Tap the [Original] key. After tapping the "Scan Size" key, tap the [Direct Entry] key. Specify the original size.Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size. Tap the [OK] key.On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key.After the settings are completed, tap twice.Back to top';
body[301]='05-041.htm';
dai[301]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE';
bun[301]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGESPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGEOverviewTap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced.The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R).)Operation Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Send Size] key. Tap the desired send size key.After the settings are completed, tap .Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". You cannot tap size keys that are unavailable for the "Send Size". Tap the "Image Orientation" key with the same orientation as the original image.If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted.After the settings are completed, tap . To configure the default setting of image orientation, select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Image Orientation] in "Setting mode". The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".Back to top';
body[302]='05-042.htm';
dai[302]='CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE';
bun[302]='CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPECHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPEOverviewOptimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original.When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the exposure setting each time you change pages. Exposure settingsExposureSuggestionAutoThis setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.Manual2013/1/2Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.3Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).2013/4/5Select this setting when the original consists of light text. How to select the original type (Scan mode, Data entry mode)ItemDescriptionAutoThe original image type is automatically selected to match the original.ManualText/Prtd.PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.Text/PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.TextUse this mode for regular text documents.PhotoUse this mode to scan photos.Printed PhotoThis mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.MapThis mode is best for copying maps with light colour shading and fine text.Operation Tap the [Exposure] key. Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type. Tap to adjust the exposure.After the settings are completed, tap .When [Auto] is selected, changing the exposure sets the original image type to [Text] automatically. In Internet Fax Mode Tap the [Exposure] key. Tap to adjust the exposure.After the settings are completed, tap .When [Auto] is selected, the exposure will be set to "3". Back to top';
body[303]='05-043.htm';
dai[303]='CHANGING THE RESOLUTION';
bun[303]='CHANGING THE RESOLUTIONCHANGING THE RESOLUTIONOverviewSpecify the resolution setting.How to select the resolutionFor normal text originals, 200 x 200 dpi (200 x 100 dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolutCHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODECHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODESPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the resolution setting each time you change pages.When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200x100dpi] or [200x200dpi] can be selected.Operation Tap the [Resolution] key. Tap the key of the desired resolution.After the settings are completed, tap .If there is a mix of destinations in different modes, tap to switch modes to set the resolution in each mode. However, FTP/Desktop and Network Folder are set to the same mode.When E-mail, FTP/Desktop, or Network Folder is selected:When Internet Fax is selected: In the Internet Fax mode, set the [Half Tone] checkbox to to specify half tone. (This option is unavailable if [200x100dpi] is selected.) This function sends an image with a higher quality than usual when scanning an original with many greyscale parts sBack to top';
body[304]='05-044.htm';
dai[304]='CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE';
bun[304]='CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODECHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODEOverviewChange the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed.The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Colour/Greyscale] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)File format combinations[Colour/Greyscale] tab[Black &amp; White] tabPDFPDFHigh Compression PDF*PDFHigh Compression PDF (Ultra Fine)*PDFPDF/A PDF/AHigh Compression PDF/A*PDF/AHigh Compression PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*PDF/AEncrypted PDFEncrypted PDFEncrypt/High Compression PDF*Encrypted PDFEncrypt/High Compression (Ultra Fine) PDF*Encrypted PDFTIFFTIFFJPEGTIFFXPSXPS*The scanner function expansion kit is required. If [PDF/Encrypt] is specified for the file format, the password entry screen appears when scanning. Enter a password with up to 32 characters. Note the following when [PDF/High Compression] is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format. When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High Compression] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as High Compression PDF files.When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High Compression] and [PDF/High Compression/Ultra Fine] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as High Compression PDF (Ultra Fine) files.If [High Compression/PDF] is specified, the resolution cannot be changed in the scanner mode. The resolution is set to 300 x 300 dpi.When [PDF/High Compression] is selected, [Resolution] cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in [Change Setting] in the job build settings.If [PDF/High Compression] is set when an original type setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, [Photo] will change to [Text/Photo] and [Map] will change to [Text/Printed Photo].Operation Tap the [File Format] key. Tap the [Colour/Greyscale] or [B/W] tab and select the format mode for scanning.The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Mono2].The format setting for [Colour/Greyscale] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Full Colour] or [Greyscale]. Tap the key of the desired file type.When [Colour/Greyscale] mode is selected and the scanner function expansion kit is installed, the [Compact] and [U-Fine] checkboxes appear. To suppress image quality deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be transmitted, select High CompressiWhen [B/W] tab is selected Tap the desired compression mode key or tap the desired compression ratio key.[Emphasize Black Letter] in the [Colour/Greyscale] tab is a file format that reduces the data size while suppressing deterioration of black text. To change the number of pages per file, set the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox to , and use to specify the number of pages per file. Tapping the numeric value display field allows you to directly change the numeric value using the numeric keys.After the settings are completed, tap . When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox , one file is created for all scanned pages.When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page. For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.Back to top';
body[305]='05-045.htm';
dai[305]='CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE';
bun[305]='CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODECHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODEOverviewChange the file format (file type and compression mode) for sending a scanned image in Internet Fax mode.The file format for sending an Internet fax is normally set to [TIFF-F]. If the destination Internet fax machine does not support full mode (it only supports simple mode), select [TIFF-S].When [TIFF-S] is selected, the transmission settings are restricted as follows: Send size: Always A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If [TIFF-S] is selected after the send size is changed, the send size is automatically fixed to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If a size larger than A4 (8-1/2&quoOthers: When a ratio setting is selected and the original size is entered, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, 4in1, or Mixed Size Original cannot be used. Operation Tap the [File Format] key. Tap the [TIFF-S] or [TIFF-F] key to specify the file format.If you selected [TIFF-F], select the compression mode. After the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
body[306]='05-046.htm';
dai[306]='CHANGING COLOUR MODE';
bun[306]='CHANGING COLOUR MODECHANGING COLOUR MODEOverviewChange the colour mode used to scan the original.ModeScanning methodAutoThe machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and automatically selects full colour or black and white (Mono2 or Greyscale) scanning.Full ColourThe original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues.Mono2Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.GreyscaleThe colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of grey (greyscale).This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.Operation Tap the [Colour Mode] key. Tap the key of the desired colour mode for the original.If there is a mix of destinations in different send modes, tap to select a send mode (E-mail, DeskTop/FTP, Internet Fax, or Data Entry) to set the colour mode for each mode. Tap the [Greyscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic colour selection.Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale.After the settings are completed, tap .The B/W mode can be set only when the [Auto] key is selected in the colour mode setting (step 2).Back to top';
body[307]='05-047.htm';
dai[307]='CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED';
bun[307]='CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTEDCHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTEDCheck the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. If you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a bettDepending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch panel.The preview function is not available when the original size is set to Long Size.Back to top';
body[308]='05-049.htm';
dai[308]='STORING SCAN OPERATIONS';
bun[308]='STORING SCAN OPERATIONSSTORING SCAN OPERATIONS(PROGRAM)Overview This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation.For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.The same documents are sent to each branch officeEach page of a bound document is successively transmittedSmudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmissionWhen a job program is not storedWhen a job program is storedEnter the address of each branch office. Select Dual Page Scan. Specify Erase. Tap the [Start] key.Scan and send the original.Tap the key of a stored program. Tap the [Start] key.Scan and send the original.Considerable time is required to send the documents each month because the above settings must be selected. In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings.When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by simply tapping the key of the program. In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored settings so there are no chances for mistakes. To configure a program:Tap the [Store Program - Set Current Store] key on the action panel that appears when you operate any mode screens. The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. The following contents cannot be stored in programs: Tapping of the [Speaker] key Custom sizes Card shot Page changes and unspecified erases during preview Metadata Entry Send settings Own Name Select Up to 48 programs can be stored. Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program. A program in which sub addresses and passcodes are specified as an F-code destination records all sub addresses and passcodes. This function cannot be used in data entry mode. Operation Place the original and tap the [Call Program] key on the action panel. According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the desired program key. Configure additional settings.For the called program, additionally configure the following settings:Image settings: Scan SizeSend Size, File Format, Colour ModeSend settingsOthers: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick File, Transaction ReportWhen stored in the program, this cannot be additionally specified. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.Back to top';
body[309]='05-050.htm';
dai[309]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE';
bun[309]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGEERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE(ERASE)Overview When scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. Scanning a thick book Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear in the image. No shadows appear. Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. F To change the default erase width setting:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Erase Width Adjustment]. The width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory defaultOperation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position.Check that he tapped checkbox is set to . If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to . If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to .Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up, Down, Left, and Right on the front side to scan a 2-sided original.If the [Reverse erase position of back face.] checkbox is set to , the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.If the [Reverse erase position of back face.] checkbox is set to , the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased. Specify the erase width.Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with . After the settings are completed, tap . To cancel the erase settings:Tap the [Clear] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatBack to top';
body[310]='05-051.htm';
dai[310]='SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES';
bun[310]='SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGESSCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES(DUAL PAGE SCAN)OverviewThe left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document. Original scan sizeTransmitted imageA3 (11" x 17") x 1 pageA4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pagesThis function is available when the original size setting is set to [Auto].Note that "Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.Operation Place the original on the document glass.DOCUMENT GLASSAlign the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting:Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.Back to top';
body[311]='05-052.htm';
dai[311]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY';
bun[311]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELYSPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY(BOOK DIVIDE)OverviewThe opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission.When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent.This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].The document glass is not available for this function.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key. Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original.Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the Book Divide setting:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Back to top';
body[312]='05-053.htm';
dai[312]='STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME';
bun[312]='STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIMESTARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME(TIMER TRANSMISSION)OverviewSpecify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch in the "" position. If the main power switch is in the "" position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmUp to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once.Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, and other functions) are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original image and settings are stored inIf another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that transmission is finished.If a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen, the timer will be cancelled. The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOBThe time can be specified up to a week in advance.After the timer transmission settings are specified, start the transmission in the same way as other functions.A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key. Tap [On] key.The setting will show the current time. If the time is different, correct it in the setting mode before starting a job.BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER Specify the date. Tap to specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format.Tapping a key in the numeric value display field allows you to directly enter a numeric value.After the settings are completed, tap . To cancel the Timer Transmission settings:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicatThe original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.Back to top';
body[313]='05-054.htm';
dai[313]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE';
bun[313]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGEWHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE(SUPPRESS BACKGROUND)OverviewSuppresses light background areas of originals.This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Suppress Background] key. Tap the [On] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed.To cancel the background suppression settings:Tap the [Off] key.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.When the colour mode setting is [Mono2], the suppress background function will not operate.Back to top';
body[314]='05-055.htm';
dai[314]='SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[314]='SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGESCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE(CARD SHOT)OverviewSend the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately.If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.Operation Place a card face down on the document glass.DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then tap [-] or [+] for adjustment . To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size, tap the [Fit to Send Size] key.After selecting Card Shot, tap the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you tap the scan size key. For the procedure for setting the send size, see "SPTo cancel the Card Shot settings:Tap the [Off] key. Tap the [Start] key, and scan the front side.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side.Before scanning the back of the card, tap the [Change Setting] key on the touch panel to change the exposure. Tap the [Read-End] key.If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size.Back to top';
body[315]='05-056.htm';
dai[315]='SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE';
bun[315]='SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCESCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE(JOB BUILD)OverviewThis function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic docuWhen scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.The scan settings can be changed for each set of originals.Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder.The original can also be placed on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.To cancel the Job Build setting:Tap the [Job Build] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to scan the first set.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additionally Scan] key. To cancel scanning the original:Tap ([Cancel Scan] key). All scanned data will be cleared. Tap the [Start Sending] key.If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.The [Change Setting] key can be tapped to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with "2in1" in "Others", only the exposure can be changeBack to top';
body[316]='05-057.htm';
dai[316]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES';
bun[316]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZESSCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES(MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)OverviewScan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals.When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original.This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below.A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, and A4 and B5A4R and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, and B5 and A511" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13", and 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"When Mixed Size Original is selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.After the original scan size has been selected, Mixed Size Original cannot be specified.Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.This function is not available if [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Original Size Detector Setting] is set to "AB-3" in "Setting mode". Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting:Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key to clear the checkmark.After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Back to top';
body[317]='05-058.htm';
dai[317]='SCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL';
bun[317]='SCANNING A THIN ORIGINALSCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL(SLOW SCAN MODE)OverviewUse this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.Adjust the original guides slowly.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERIf the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed. Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Touch the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting:Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark.After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Back to top';
body[318]='05-059.htm';
dai[318]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[318]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSIONCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION(ORIGINAL COUNT)OverviewCount the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission.Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when a 2-sided original is transmitted, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitteWhen a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will operate for all destinations.The setting should be enabled separately for each mode.Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Original Count setting:Tap the [Original Count] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. When scanning is completed, check the number of original sheets.The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet wa Tap the [OK] key to start transmission.If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Read-End] key has been tapped.If this step is not performed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the image will not be reserved If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets:Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert theBack to top';
body[319]='05-060.htm';
dai[319]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS';
bun[319]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALSSTAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS(VERIFICATION STAMP)OverviewThis function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.When the "O" mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE".Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Verification Stamp] key on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verification Stamp] key. The appropriate icon or checkbox is selected.If you tap the [Others] key, tap the [Back] key after the settings have been completed.To cancel the Verification Stamp setting:Tap the [Verification Stamp] key on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verification Stamp] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.Back to top';
body[320]='05-061.htm';
dai[320]='ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSION';
bun[320]='ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSIONELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSION(BLANK PAGE SKIP)OverviewIf the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to send only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original.If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.In a broadcast transmission to destinations including fax and Internet fax destinations, this function is applied to scan mode destinations only.Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not sent, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent. Operation Place originals in the automatic document feeder.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key.To cancel the blank page skip setting:Tap the [Off] key.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended. When scanning ends, check the number of original sheets and the number of sheets to be sent and tap the [OK] key to start transmission.When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will appear after the [Read-End] key is tapped.On the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of sheets to be sent excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are sIf this step is not performed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will stop automatically and the image will not be reserved for transmisBack to top';
body[321]='05-062.htm';
dai[321]='SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[321]='SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGESENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE(2IN1)OverviewReduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode.The 2in1 is only available for originals with a size other than a standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")).Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values, this function cannot be used.This function cannot be used together with Dual Page Scan or Card Shot.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [2in1] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the 2in1 setting:Tap the [2in1] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap . Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soTap the [Change Setting] key in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure is changed.)Back to top';
body[322]='05-063.htm';
dai[322]='REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[322]='REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSIONREMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION(DROP OUT COLOUR)OverviewThis function cannot be used in fax and Internet fax mode.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Drop Out Colour] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Drop Out Colour setting:Tap the [Drop Out Colour] key to clear the checkmark. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soTap the [Change Setting] key in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be changed.)Back to top';
body[323]='05-064.htm';
dai[323]='ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[323]='ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSIONADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION(CONTRAST)Overview This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level.To cancel the contrast settings:Tap the [Off] key.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soBack to top';
body[324]='05-065.htm';
dai[324]='ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[324]='ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSIONENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION(SHARPNESS)Overview This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness.To cancel the sharpness settings:Tap the [Off] key.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soBack to top';
body[325]='05-066.htm';
dai[325]='CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT';
bun[325]='CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORTCHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT(TRANSACTION REPORT)OverviewA transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed.The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMNTransaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the setting mode. Select different conditions for a transmission as required.This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode.For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.Operation Place the original.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination. RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOKVIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONSUSING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATIONENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLYSPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDERRETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKUSING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transaction Report] key. Tap the key of the print settings.After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the transaction report settings:Tap the [Do not Print] key.The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows: "Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails."Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report. Reporting printing is not available for speaker, direct transmission, polling reception, or F code transmission. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED".If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will soBack to top';
body[326]='05-067.htm';
dai[326]='ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES';
bun[326]='ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXESADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES(I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND)Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender address, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of the file you transmit. Example of the sender information printed (1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. (2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.(3) Source Address (4) Page numbers: Page number/total pagesStoring and setting sender informationDate, time: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Clock Adjust].Sender name, sender address: In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Own Number and Name Set] &#8594; [Sender Data Registration]. If you intend to use the I-Fax Own Address Page numbers: Select whether or not to include page numbers using [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Send Settings] &#8594; [Printing Page Number at Receiver] in "Setting mode".Position of sender informationThe sender information is printed at the top of the scanned image data. This makes the transmission data longer than the scan size, so it may be reduced or divided onto two pages when printed by the receiving machine.Back to top';
body[327]='05-068.htm';
dai[327]='INTERNET FAX JOBS';
bun[327]='INTERNET FAX JOBSINTERNET FAX JOBSWhen you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of an Internet Fax job, tap the [Internet Fax] tab. PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Back to top';
body[328]='05-069.htm';
dai[328]='COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS';
bun[328]='COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBSCOMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS Reception job During Internet Fax receiving, the status field displays "Receiving" in the job queue list. When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays "In Memory". After Internet Fax printing is Timer transmission jobs A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the specified time is reached. The job is printed at the specified time, and moves to the completed job list. If another job is being printed at the specified time, the job being prin Internet Fax transmission job with reception report request specified An Internet Fax transmission job with a reception report request specified, excluding a direct SMTP transmission job, is placed into the standby state at the bottom of the Job Queue screen after a transmission has been completed. "Completed Waiting&q Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (Inbound routing settings) Received data is not printedWhen a data is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue list. When the reception is completed, the status changes to "Waiting".Received Internet fax is printedWhen reception is completed, the status field displays "In Memory" in the completed job list. After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Received". Then a job is added for which the status field displays "Waiting" in thBack to top';
body[329]='05-075.htm';
dai[329]='PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS';
bun[329]='PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSPRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTSPrint a log of recent image sending activities (date, name of destination, time required, result, and other items). The Image Sending Activity Report contains information that is useful in dealing with problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report. You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once a day only). The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted. When the Image Sending Activity Report is erased, the log is reset. The Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reach 200 again, the report is printed. To configure the image sending activity report:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Activity Report Print Select Setting]. To print the communication record, 1. Display the job status screen and tap the [Complete] key. 2. Tap [Print Communication Record] in the action panel.Back to top';
body[330]='05-076.htm';
dai[330]='INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN';
bun[330]='INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMNINFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMNError types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.Examples of messages that are printed in the result columnMessageDescriptionOKThe transaction was completed normally.OK REPORTA receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and the receive report was received from the destination.CANCELA transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was cancelled.MEM. FULLThe memory became full during reception.Reject ReceptionAn Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.NG REPORTA receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place correctly and a transmission failed report was received.NO REPORTA receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the timeout time.NG LIMITTransmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine\'s file size limit setting.E-mailAn e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached file, and thus printing was not possible.FAIL xx (xxxx)The transaction failed due to a communication error. First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99. Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.Back to top';
body[331]='05-077.htm';
dai[331]='RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLY';
bun[331]='RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLYRECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLYOverviewThe Internet fax function periodically connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.In the default setting, this function checks for reception once every five minutes.If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch of the machine in the "" position.If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.You can print the received Internet fax data at the specified time.PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIMEYou can print the received Internet fax data when a password has been entered.PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX(HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT)You can print, forward, or save the received Internet fax data after checking it.CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTINGFORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYSAVING RECEIVED DATAOperation The machine rings and fax reception begins automatically. A beep sounds when reception ends. The fax is automatically printed.Back to top';
body[332]='05-078.htm';
dai[332]='RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES MANUALLY';
bun[332]='RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES MANUALLYRECEIVING INTERNET FAXES MANUALLYIf the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually initiate reception.The [Receive] key can be tapped only when POP3 server settings are configured in the Setting mode.Tap the [Receive] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.Back to top';
body[333]='05-079.htm';
dai[333]='PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX';
bun[333]='PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAXPRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX(HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received. To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered using the numeric keys, printing begins. When the [Cancel] key is tapped, the password entry screen closes; however, the data in memory key will blink in the touch panel. The password entry scree In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Job Detail Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting]. To transfer received data to another machine: You can check the received data image on the touch panel before printing. The received faxes will be stored in memory regardless of whether they are received automatically or manually. When the received data is transferred to another machine, data stored in memory is also transferred. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing. Forwarding will not take place unles Back to top';
body[334]='05-080.htm';
dai[334]='PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME';
bun[334]='PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIMEPRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIMEPrint received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. The printed data is automatically deleted from memory.If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.This function can be specified when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled. If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled, this function cannot be used. To print received data at the specified time:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Time Specified Output of Received Data].To disable the hold setting for received data print:In "Setting mode", disable this function using [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Hold Setting for Received Data Print].Back to top';
body[335]='05-081.htm';
dai[335]='CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING';
bun[335]='CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTINGCHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTINGOverviewCheck the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode".*The factory default setting is disabled.Depending on the size of the received data, part of the check image on the touch panel may not appear.To perform this operation, the user must have [Access to Fax Data] permission. The received data list can also be shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap the job status display. The received data can be forwarded, deleted, or saved from Received Data List.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYSAVING RECEIVED DATAOperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, select the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed.&nbsp; You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap the [Check Image] key on the action panelDisplays the received data image.&nbsp;Tap to show thumbnails of received images(Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.To delete a received image, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.To transfer the selected received image, tap the [Forward to Other Destination] key.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYTo save the selected received image, tap the [File] key.SAVING RECEIVED DATATap the image you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panelThe machine starts printing the image.&nbsp;[Select All]: Selects all displayed images.[Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All"./: Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image./: Rotates image counterclockwise or clockwise.A preview image is an image for the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.Tap the [Erase Specified Range] key to delete unwanted area of the image. Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Erase Specified Range screen.To forward the selected image, tap the [Forward to Other Address] key.FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYTo save the selected image, tap the [File] key.SAVING RECEIVED DATA Back to top';
body[336]='05-083.htm';
dai[336]='FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA';
bun[336]='FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATAFORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA(FAX DATA FORWARD)OverviewWhen the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded to another previously registered Internet fax address (including direct SMTP).Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was cancelled or a communication error occurred, the faxes that were to be forwarded will return to the machine\'s the print queue.If a password entry screen appears after tapping the [OK] key, "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled. Enter the password using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print)Operation Tap the [Setting mode] key on the Home screen. Tap the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key. Tap the [Internet Fax Settings] key. Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding.Back to top';
body[337]='05-084.htm';
dai[337]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS';
bun[337]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONSFORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS(INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS)OverviewReceived Internet faxes are automatically forwarded to a fax destination number, an Internet fax address, an e-mail address, a file server address, a desktop address, or a network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinationIn setting mode (Web version), configure the inbound routing settings. For the procedure for accessing the setting mode (Web version), see Quick Start Guide. The following explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web version) has been accessed with admi Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set. In "Setting mode", select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Forward Received Data], and tap [Valid]/[Invalid] on the displayed forwarding table to switch the settings.When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date &amp; Time Print" is disabled.)The received data is not forwarded to a hyperlink destination that is registered in the specified address.Operation In "Setting mode (Web version)", click [Application Settings] &#8594; [Inbound Routing Settings] &#8594; [Administration Settings]. In "Forward Received Data", select [Valid] and click the [Store] button. Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to .Disable Registration of Forward TableDisable Change/Delete of Forward TableDisable Change of Forward ApprovalSpecify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled. After the settings are completed, be sure to click the [Store] button.[Always Print]: Always prints received data before forwarding the data.[Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding.[Save Only at Error]: Saves received data only when an error prevents forwarding. For the saved data, the error address can be confirmed and the data can be resent. Click [Sender Number/Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing Settings] menu in the "Setting mode (Web version)". Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button.The sender address or number you entered will be added to the "Address to be Entered" list.Enter the address directly (maximum of 1500 characters) or select the address from a global address book by clicking the [Global Address Search] button.To store multiple sender addresses or fax numbers, repeat these steps.If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you store a forwarding table.A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button. When you have finished adding addresses, click the [Store] button. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the "Setting mode (Web version)" menu and click the [Add] button. Enter a "Table Name".A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored. Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded. To forward only data received from specific senders, select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender]. To forward all data except data from specific senders, select [Forward Received Data from Senders except Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the Select the forwarding conditions. Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the [Forwarding Destination List] tabs to access each setting. Select the file format.The format can be set separately for each forwarding address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in the table).Images forwarded in TIFF format may not be displayed correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file format to PDF.If the Internet fax address is selected as a recipient, data is forwarded in TIFF regardless of the specified format.If a fax number is selected as a recipient, the file format is ignored. Select the recipient from the address book.You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine. Up to 1,000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1, 2, and 3 in total. When you select the recipients from the address book, up to 400 recipien Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient.Specify this information if necessary.Enter an e-mail address, an Internet fax address, a direct SMTP address, or a fax number directly and tap the [Add] key.When you specify an e-mail address or a fax number, you can use the global address search.When you specify a fax number, also specify the sending line and international correspondence mode.When enter the recipients directly, up to 100 recipients can be registered for e-mail address, network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax. Click [Store]. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in "Setting mode (Web version)". Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on Selected Day &amp; Time] from the forwarding table. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 10, set the forwarding permission settings.To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected () and click [Delete]. Click [Store].Back to top';
body[338]='05-084_2.htm';
dai[338]='SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISK ';
bun[338]='SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISK SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE\'S HARD DISKReceived faxes can be saved to the machine\'s hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the received data. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail.Received faxes are saved in the following directory:\\MFP\faxreceive Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data. The "faxreceive" folder contains files of "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings".Received data is saved in the folder specified in "Specify folder" in "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings" in "Application Settings". If there is no specified folder, a folder is automatically created and the data saved.The file name for received data can be set in "File Name Setting" in "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings" in "Application Settings". How to save received faxes to the hard diskClick [Public Folder / NAS Setting] in "Network Settings". (Administrator rights required.)Select [Valid] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Save] button.Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk In Setting mode, click [Application Settings] &#8594;[Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings]. (Administrator rights required.) Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.Depending on the setting, received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box.Back to top ';
body[339]='05-085.htm';
dai[339]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY';
bun[339]='FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYFORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLYOverviewReceived faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt.This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode".*The factory default setting is disabled.OperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed. You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap the [Forward to Other Address] keyTap to show thumbnails of received images(Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.Multiple sets of received data can be selected. When you select a single received data only, you can tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.Select the destination from the Address Book screen, and tap the [Start] keyBack to top';
body[340]='05-086.htm';
dai[340]='SAVING RECEIVED DATA';
bun[340]='SAVING RECEIVED DATASAVING RECEIVED DATAOverviewSave received faxes in the document filing folder.This function is available when [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Preview Setting] &#8594; [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Setting mode".*The factory default setting is disabled.OperationWhen data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] keyThe received data is listed. You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the [Check Received Data] key on the action panel of Job Status screen.Tap the key of the received data you wish to save, and tap the [File] key on the action panelTap to show thumbnails of received images(Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.Multiple sets of received data can be selected. When you select a single received data only, you can tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.Set the file information, and tap the [Save] keyBack to top';
body[341]='05-088.htm';
dai[341]='METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)';
bun[341]='METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)METADATA DELIVERY(DATA ENTRY)When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generateBy linking the metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a sophisticated document solution environment can be built.Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and transmitted along with the image as an XML file.Back to top';
body[342]='05-089.htm';
dai[342]='SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION)';
bun[342]='SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION)SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE(WEB VERSION)To configure the settings related to metadata, select [Application Settings] &#8594; [Metadata Entry] in "Setting mode". (Administrator rights are required.) Enable metadata delivery.Storing Metadata SetsStore the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, or a global address book search. (Addresses Back to top';
body[343]='05-090.htm';
dai[343]='METADATA DELIVERY USING SCAN TO DESKTOP';
bun[343]='METADATA DELIVERY USING SCAN TO DESKTOPMETADATA DELIVERY USING SCAN TO DESKTOPWhen Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on the PC.When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the file name generated by the computer. (When sIt is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata.For more information, see the Network Scanner Tool User\'s Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM. For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application integration modUsing third party applicationsVarious types of third party applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start thFor example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start application "APP.EXE", the "APP.EXE IMG.TIF" command is applied.If a file was specified to receive metadata, the metadata file name cannot be specified at the same time using the command to start the application directly.(However, the metadata file is stored in the same folder as IMG.TIF in the computer.)Back to top';
body[344]='05-091.htm';
dai[344]='TRANSMITTING METADATA';
bun[344]='TRANSMITTING METADATATRANSMITTING METADATAOverviewSelect a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery. Metadata delivery is performed using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, perform metadata delivery using document filing in [Docume In data entry mode, configure metadata settings to perform metadata delivery. To perform transmission without sending metadata, switch the screen from data entry mode to a different mode and then perform transmission.When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in data entry mode, it will not be possible to switch to another mode.Before configuring metadata settings, specify addresses in all available modes. After metadata settings have been configured, specify only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata.Operation Tap the [Data Entry] icon on the [Home Screen], and tap the [Metadata Entry] key on the action panel. If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3.If no metadata sets have been stored, Metadata Entry is unavailable. Store metadata set in the setting mode (Web version) before performing transmission. Tap the key for the desired metadata set. The keys of the items stored in the metadata set will appear. Tap the key of the item that you wish to enter. Tap the key of the value that you wish to enter, and tap the [OK] key.To directly enter the metadata value, tap the [Direct Entry] key. On the soft keyboard screen that appears, tap the [OK] key. You will return to the screen shown in step 3. After the settings are completed, tap . To cancel the selection of the metadata value:Tap the [Clear] key. Configure image or other settings, and perform the scan send procedure.Configure job detail settings and then start transmission using the same operations as in other modes.When directly entering an address, tap [Touch to enter a file name] to display the screen for selecting an address type. If the address type such as E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax, Network Folder, or Direct SMTP is selected, the address type entry screen appeaBack to top';
body[345]='05-092.htm';
dai[345]='METADATA FIELDS';
bun[345]='METADATA FIELDSMETADATA FIELDSThe following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.Data automatically generated by the machineThese data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC.Previously defined fieldsThese fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields can be selected, and can only be included in the XML file if they are enabled in the setting mode (Web version).User defined fieldsCustom fields are added to the XML file. These fields can be selected and are defined in the setting mode (Web version).If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be filled in. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.Name entered in metadata fieldsDescriptionWhere enteredformNameName of the user who sent the job. If the name is not entered as metadata, the sender name determined by the usual rules for determining the sender name will be applied as metadata.[Reply-To](sender name of selected sender)replyToE-mail address to which the transmission result will be sent.[Reply-To](E-mail address of selected sender)documentSubjectJob name appearing in the e-mail "Subject" line, or job name on the fax cover sheet. When the user enters a [Subject] in the send settings screen in the touch panel, the entered value is applied as metadata.[Subject](Blank until a value is set in the send settings screen.)fileNameEnter the file name of the image to be sent. [File Name](Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames] checkbox is selected in the metadata entry screen in the setting mode (Web version)) (Blank until a value is set in the send settings screen.)Back to top';
body[346]='06-001.htm';
dai[346]='DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[346]='DOCUMENT FILINGDOCUMENT FILINGThis function saves the original scanned on the machine, received fax data, or print data from a computer on the hard drive of the machine or an external memory device as data. The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required. Editing of the stoA PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer.Uses of document filingUsing the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required.Additionally printing out conference material with the same settingsPrinting out ledger sheets as requiredBack to top';
body[347]='06-002.htm';
dai[347]='TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[347]='TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILINGTYPES OF DOCUMENT FILINGThere are the following ways to save a file using document filing: [Quick File] and [File] in copy mode or image send mode, and [Scan to HDD] and [Scan to External Memory Device] in document filing mode.Quick FileAs a copy, image send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a file name or other information. The stored file can aFileAs a copy, image send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved to enable efficient file management. A password cScan to HDDThis function scans an original and stores it to the hard drive. Like File, various types of information can be appended.Scan to External Memory DeviceThis function scans a original and stores it in an external memory device such as a USB memory device. Like File, various types of information can be appended.Back to top';
body[348]='06-005.htm';
dai[348]='FOLDER TYPES';
bun[348]='FOLDER TYPESFOLDER TYPESThree types of folders are used to store files on the hard drive using the document filing function.Folders on the hard drive Quick File Folder Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically assigned to each job. Main Folder Scanned documents are stored in this folder. When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name. A password can also be set when storing a file ("Confidential" save) as required. Custom Folder Folders with custom names are stored inside this folder. Scanned documents are stored in the stored folder. Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job. Passwords can A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.Back to top';
body[349]='06-006.htm';
dai[349]='CONVENIENT ITEMS TO STORE';
bun[349]='CONVENIENT ITEMS TO STORECONVENIENT ITEMS TO STOREWhen storing a job using [File] in copy mode or image send mode, or [Scan to HDD] in document filing mode, it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not required when storing a job using [Quick File].User NameThis is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.Custom FolderThe Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by [File] and [File Store]. Store a custom folder and specify it as a location for storing files. Specify a password for the user folder as required. Enter the password to use the foldMy FolderA previously created custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder created as "My Folder". When "My Folder" has been configured and user authentication is used, "My Folder" will always be selected as To store a custom folder for document filing:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Document Filing Control].To store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder":In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User List].Back to top';
body[350]='06-007.htm';
dai[350]='APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF PAGES AND FILES THAT CAN BE STORED';
bun[350]='APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF PAGES AND FILES THAT CAN BE STOREDAPPROXIMATE NUMBER OF PAGES AND FILES THAT CAN BE STOREDCombined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folderExamples of original typesNumber of pages*Number of filesFull colour original (Text and photo example) Size: A4Max. 5700Max. 3000Black &amp; white original (Text) Size: A4Max. 13000Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folderExamples of original typesNumber of pages*Number of filesFull colour original (Text and photo example) Size: A4Max. 700Max. 1000Black &amp; white original (Text) Size: A4Max. 2000* The indicated numbers are guidelines for the number of pages that can be stored when all pages are full colour, and when all pages are black &amp; white. Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too Back to top';
body[351]='06-008.htm';
dai[351]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILES';
bun[351]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILESAUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILESYou can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees space on the hard driv To automatically delete document filing data periodically:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Document Filing Settings] &#8594; [Automatic Deletion of File Settings].To check the settings: Print the list. To check the set deletion cycle:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [List Print] &#8594; [Administrator Settings List], and print a list of the administrator settings including document filing settings.To check information on the folders selected for file deletion:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [List Print (User)] and print a list of the folders of document filing.When you specify automatic deletion of document filing data takes place periodically, all files in the specified folders will be deleted when the set time arrives. Exercise care not to store files that you wish to keep in folders specified for file deletiBack to top';
body[352]='06-009.htm';
dai[352]='INFORMATION ADDED TO FILES';
bun[352]='INFORMATION ADDED TO FILESINFORMATION ADDED TO FILESWhen saving a file using "File", add the following information to distinguish it from other files. User Name The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. File Name Names a file. Stored to Specifies a folder to store files. Property Sharing Any user can display and operate files having the "Sharing" property. Protect Once "Protect" is set, its file cannot be edited, moved, and deleted. No password setting is required. The protected files are identified by "" in each mode. Confidential You can set a password (5 to 32 digits long) for file protection. The confidential files are identified by "" in each mode. The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File. To store a user name:In "Setting mode", select [User Control] &#8594; [User List].Back to top';
body[353]='06-010.htm';
dai[353]='IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[353]='IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILINGIMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILINGFiles stored using [Quick File] are provided with the "Sharing" property that can be accessed by any person for output and sending. Therefore, do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others using the [QuiWhen saving a file with [File], you can save it with the "Confidential" property. Set a password for a "Confidential" file to prevent the file from being used by other people. Exercise care to prevent other people from obtaining the paThe property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" as required. Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the disclosure of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or File function, Back to top';
body[354]='06-011.htm';
dai[354]='USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE';
bun[354]='USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODEUSING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODETo use Document Filing, select the action panel for each mode.To save data simultaneously with a copy or fax, tap the [File] or [Quick File] key on the action panel in each mode.To use Document Filing from the beginning, select the action panel in the Document Filing mode. Tap any one of the keys shown at the right to scan and save the original.[File] key and [Quick File] key These keys may not appear on the action panel depending on the mode or settings. In this case, tap the [Others] key on the base screen in each mode, and then tap the [Quick File] or [File] key. To change the screen display:In "Setting mode (Web version)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Favourites Menu].Using document filing in print mode To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For details about document filing, see "SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (Force retention/document filing)" in "PRINTER&quotBack to top';
body[355]='06-012.htm';
dai[355]='BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE';
bun[355]='BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODEBASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE Back to top';
body[356]='06-013.htm';
dai[356]='QUICK FILE';
bun[356]='QUICK FILEQUICK FILEOverview This function allows you to store an original in copy mode or image send mode as an image file in the Quick File folder of the machine.The image file stored in quick file mode can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to copy the document or transmit it in image send mode without having to locate the original. When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second (Example: Copy_20140404_112030) Stored to: Quick File Folder When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selectedOnly the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File folder can be changed as required. To delete all files in the Quick File folder with the exception of protected files:In "Setting mode", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Document Filing Settings] &#8594; [Delete All Quick Files]. Configure settings to have all files deleted when the power is turned on as required.Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Tap the [Quick File] key to enable . When a message relating to saving confidential information appears, tap the [OK] key. Start a copy or image sending. When the function is executed, the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder. To prevent accidental saving of the file, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key is tapped. To change the message display time, select [System Settings] in "Setting mode"&#8594;[Operation Settings] &#8594; [Message Time Setting]. To cancel Quick File:Tap the [Quick File] key to enable . Back to top ';
body[357]='06-014.htm';
dai[357]='FILE';
bun[357]='FILEFILEOverviewTapping the [File] key of the document filing function when printing or transmitting an original in each mode allows you to store the original in the Main folder or stored Custom folder as a file simultaneously with printing or transmission. The stored fiWhen a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file. User Name: User Unknown File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second (Example: Copy_20140404_112030) Stored to: Main FolderOperationAs an example, the procedure for using "File" in copy mode is explained below. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINALDepending on the copy functions used, there are also cases where settings are required to be made before a preview is carried out. Tap the [File] key to append file information.To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see "File Information". To save on the HDD:Changing the propertySpecifying a user nameAssigning a file nameSpecifying the folderCreating PDF for PC browsing To save in an external memory device:Assigning a file nameSpecifying the folderCreating PDF for PC browsing After configuring the above settings, you will return to this screen. Go to the next step. If you do not wish to assign a user name or other information to the file, go to the next step. Tap .You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [File] key will be highlighted. Select copy settings and then tap the [Start] key.Simultaneously with starting copy, the original is stored as a file. The selected copy settings are also saved.For the procedure for placing the original, see step 1 in "SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL".File InformationThe procedure for detail settings is described below. Specifying a property, user name, file name, and folder makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when [Confidential] is selected for Property and a password is established, other pChanging the propertyA protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved, or automatically or manually deleted. Three properties are available for saved files: "Sharing", "Protect", andSharingA "Sharing" file can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential" using "Property Change" in the Job Settings.Protect"Protect" does not require setting of a password, but prevents a file from being moved, deleted or edited. A password cannot be established. The icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a protected file.ConfidentialTo protect a "Confidential" file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file. ) The icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a confidential file.Restrictions on changing the propertyA file that is set to "Sharing" can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential" as required. However, a "Sharing" file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to "Protect".A file that is set to "Protect" can be changed to "Sharing" or "Confidential" as required. However, a "Protect" file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to "Sharing".A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to "Confidential". If the file is moved to the Main folder or a custom folder, the property can be changed to "Confidential".Two properties cannot be selected for a single file. Select [Property] in the File Information screen. When you have selected [Confidential], enter a password (32 digits) using the numeric keys.Every time you enter one digit, "" is displayed.Specifying a user name Tap the [User Name] text box.When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not necessary.The user name must first be stored by selecting [User Control] in "Setting mode" &#8594;[User List]. Tap the key of the user name.Alternatively, you can select a user name by tapping the [Call with Registration Number] key and entering the user number. The user number must be first set by selecting [User Control] in "Setting mode" &#8594;[User List]. Tap .The system goes back to the screen of step 1 to display the selected user name.Assigning a file nameA file name can be assigned to the file. Tap the [File Name] text box and enter the file name.Enter a file name using up to 30 characters.File NameIf a file name that already exists is specified, a tilde and a serial number are added after the file name and this file is saved as a different file. The file name is not case-sensitive. For example, if the "test.txt" file already exists and yoIf the length of the file name exceeds the limit, excess characters will be omitted and a serial number will be added to the end of the file name.Specifying the folderSpecify the folder for storing the file. Tap the [Stored to] text box.If a user name with a "My Folder" setting is selected, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected. Tap the key of the folder where you want to store the file.If a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen appears. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys and tap the .Creating PDF for PC browsingTap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox to , and a public PDF for PC browsing will be created when the file is saved.Back to top';
body[358]='06-017.htm';
dai[358]='SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE';
bun[358]='SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILESEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILEOverviewThe screens and procedures differ depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled. The sequence for using a stored file depending on the situation is explained. For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION&quAlso in setting mode (Web version), you can use document filing. In setting mode (Web version), click [Document Operations] &#8594; [Document Filing], and then click the folder that contains the file you wish to use. Also, you can show a preview of a storOperationSwitch to document filing mode.Select the file that you wish to retrieve.When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve.Select a file from the thumbnail images of the stored files.FILE SELECTION SCREENSELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVERetrieve a file using the search function.FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVALSelect an operation item.Select the desired operation and configure settings. FILE PRINTINGFILE TRANSMISSIONFILE MOVINGDELETE FILE FILE IMAGE CHECKING FILE MERGINGBack to top';
body[359]='06-019.htm';
dai[359]='FILE SELECTION SCREEN';
bun[359]='FILE SELECTION SCREENFILE SELECTION SCREENThe file selection screen can be displayed in "List screen" format or "Thumbnail screen" format to display thumbnail images of files.List display mode Thumbnail display modeMode icons COPYINGInternet FaxDirect SMTPPrinterFax SendScan to E-mailFile StoreScan to FTPScan to DesktopScan to Network FolderPC-Fax SendPC-I-Fax SendEdit (When different types of jobs such as copy and fax are combined)Back to top';
body[360]='06-020.htm';
dai[360]='SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE';
bun[360]='SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVESELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is configured by selecting [User Control] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [User List], the custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file.If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (Maximum of 8 digits) using the numeric keys and tap the . Tap the key of the desired file.If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (Maximum of 32 digits) and tap the .Tap the [Print Now] key to printed out the file with the settings used for its storage.Tap the [By Job Display] key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode, enabling quick data search. Back to top';
body[361]='06-021.htm';
dai[361]='FILE PRINTING';
bun[361]='FILE PRINTINGFILE PRINTINGOverviewA file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before printing by changin The setting cannot be changed to "2in1" or "Pamphlet Copy" in a stored file. Printing is not available when a long-size document is saved in "Scan to HDD", "Scan to External Memory Device", "E-mail", "FTP/Desktop", or "Network Folder". Printing is available when the data saved in If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of prints. The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.OperationQuick printingChanging settings before printingQuick printingPrints a file with the various settings used when it was saved. Select a file and tap the [Print Now] key.To delete data after printing, set the [Print and Delete the Data] checkbox to .Changing settings before printingAfter selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Choose Print Settings] key. Change the print settings.For more information, see "OVERVIEW". Select the [Delete] checkbox when needed. Tap the [Start] key.The file will be printed.Back to top';
body[362]='06-022.htm';
dai[362]='MULTI-FILE PRINTING';
bun[362]='MULTI-FILE PRINTINGMULTI-FILE PRINTING Select the keys of the multiple files that you wish to print.Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files.A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder.If the job type is changed with the [By Job Display] key or the screen is changed by being tapped while a file is selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled. Tap the [Print] key on the action panel. When not printing with the number of copies at data saving, tap the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job.] checkbox to set to .When printing with the number of copies at data saving without specifying copies, go to step 5. Use to specify the number of copies.As required, directly tap the numeric value display key and change the value using the numeric keys. To delete the file after printing, tap the [Delete] checkbox to set to . Tap the [Start] key to start printing.Back to top';
body[363]='06-023.htm';
dai[363]='BATCH PRINTING';
bun[363]='BATCH PRINTINGBATCH PRINTING Tap the [Batch Print] key. Tap the [User Name] text box. Select the user name.After selecting the user name, tap .If you have selected [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594;[Document Filing Settings] &#8594; [Batch Print Settings] and disabled the [Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.] checkbox and [Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.] chec If a password has been established, tap the [Password] key.Enter the password (5 to 32 digits) and tap . Only files that have the same password will be selected. If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step. When not printing with the number of copies at data saving, tap the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job.] checkbox to set to .When printing with the number of copies at data saving, go to step 7. Use to specify the number of copies.As required, directly tap the numeric value display key and change the value using the numeric keys. To automatically delete the file after printing, tap the [Delete] key. Tap the [Start] key to start printing.If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen.It the [Delete the Data] key on the action panel is tapped, all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted.Back to top';
body[364]='06-024.htm';
dai[364]='FILE TRANSMISSION';
bun[364]='FILE TRANSMISSIONFILE TRANSMISSIONOverviewThe settings used when the file was stored with document filing are stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the transmission settings to modify the retrieved file. A stored print job cannot be transmitted. (However, if the job has been filed by specifying retention in the printer driver, it can be transmitted as long as RGB is selected for "RIP format" in the [Printer Features] button setting in the [Advanced] tabThese transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted. "Pamphlet Copy", "Covers/Inserts", "Photo Repeat", "Multi-Page Enlargement", " 2in1" for copying.If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted, but other functions cannot be executed. "Margin Shift", "Transparency Inserts", "Book Copy", "Tab Copy", "Stamp&Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution. However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, OperationAfter selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Send] key on the action panel. Select settings for sending. Tap the [Start] key.Back to top';
body[365]='06-026.htm';
dai[365]='FILE MOVING';
bun[365]='FILE MOVINGFILE MOVINGOverviewChanges the file storage location. (The file is moved to another folder.)A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential".OperationAfter selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Move] key on the action panel. Tap the [Move to:] key.A file cannot be moved to the Quick File folder. With this procedure, the original name is changed and the file is moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the "Save As" command on a computer, the file is not copied to the specified folder with thTo change the file name, tap the [File Name] key. Tap the key of the folder to which you want to move the file.If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys and tap the . Tap the [Move] key.Back to top';
body[366]='06-027.htm';
dai[366]='DELETE FILE';
bun[366]='DELETE FILEDELETE FILEOverviewStored files that are no longer required can be deleted.A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential".OperationAfter selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Delete] key. Check the file and then tap the [Yes] key.Back to top';
body[367]='06-028.htm';
dai[367]='FILE IMAGE CHECKING';
bun[367]='FILE IMAGE CHECKINGFILE IMAGE CHECKINGOverviewDepending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected.The following data cannot be divided into chapters in edit mode.Fax or Internet fax dataFile-merged dataLong original dataOperationAfter selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Check Image] key on the action panel. Check the image of the file.Back to top';
body[368]='06-029.htm';
dai[368]='FILE MERGING';
bun[368]='FILE MERGINGFILE MERGINGOverviewYou can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing.If you have only selected a single file, the [File Merge] key is not displayed.The file name is a combination of "the first file name", "a tilde (~)", and "a serial number". As required, change the file name at a later time.OperationAfter selecting two desired files, follow the steps below.SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the [Combine File] key on the action panel. Append file information.To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see "File Information". Changing the propertySpecifying a user nameAssigning a file nameSpecifying the folderCreating PDF for PC browsingTo delete the original file, select the [Delete] checkbox. Tap the [Execute] key.Combining of files starts, and after the processing is finished, the "Files combined." message appears.To cancel the operationTap the [Cancel] key. Note that the operation cannot be cancelled when the original file is being deleted after the files are combined.Back to top';
body[369]='06-032.htm';
dai[369]='RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN';
bun[369]='RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREENRETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREENOverviewFiles stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination.Operation Tap the job status display. Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved, and tap the [Complete] key. Tap the key of the desired file from the completed job.A file that has been processed by Quick File or File can be selected for a job in the retrieve operation. Tap the [Send] or [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel. FILE TRANSMISSIONFILE PRINTINGTo view detailed information on a file, select the file, and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel.Back to top';
body[370]='06-033.htm';
dai[370]='FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL';
bun[370]='FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVALFILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVALOverviewWhen there are many stored files, it may take some time to locate a file. The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly. Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. As required, a foExample: Only part of a file name is known: "Meeting"Operation To search for a specific folder, tap its key.If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys. Tap . Select search conditions.Tap each text box and set the search condition.To search for the current folder, set the [Search Just Within the Folder] checkbox to .[User Name] Search using the user name.Select a user on the user selection screen that appears, and then tap .[Login Name] Search using the login name.[File or Folder Name] Search using the file name or folder name.[Date] Search using the date when the file was created. Tap the [Start Search] key. A list of the files that match your search conditions will appear. Select the desired file from the list. The job settings screen will appear.To return to the base screen of document filing mode, tap the [CA] key. To return to the file search screen, tap the [Search Again] key.When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in the list.Also in setting mode (Web version), you can use the file search function. Click [Document Operations] in "Setting Mode (Web version)" &#8594;[Document Filing] &#8594; [Search].Back to top';
body[371]='06-034.htm';
dai[371]='PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE';
bun[371]='PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILEPRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILEOverviewA file stored in the FTP server, USB memory device, or network folder of a PC can be printed. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings. On the action panel, tap the [Select File from FTP to Print], [Select File from USBOperationPrinting a file on an FTP serverPrinting a file in a USB memoryPrinting a file in the network folder of a PCPrinting a file on an FTP server Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel. Select an FTP server. Select a file or folder. Change the print settings.For more information, see "FILE PRINTING". Select the [Delete] or [Print B/W] checkbox when needed.To fit the image to the paper size when printing, select the [Fit To Page] checkbox . Tap the [Start] key to start file printing.Printing a file in a USB memory Tap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panel. Select a file or folder. Change the print settings.For more information, see "FILE PRINTING". Select the [Delete] or [Print B/W] checkbox when needed.To fit the image to the paper size when printing, select the [Fit To Page] checkbox . Tap the [Start] key to start file printing.Printing a file in the network folder of a PC Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. Select a workgroup.When you tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key in the action panel and enter the path to a folder on the keyboard, the folder having that path appears. Go to step 4. Select an FTP server.(A) Displays the workgroup selection screen. To manually select from the folder list, tap [Refer to Folders on Network] in the action panel. Select a network folder.(A) Displays the workgroup selection screen. (B) Displays the server selection screen. Select a file or folder.When the file (D) is tapped, the print screen appears.(A) Displays the first level of the network folder. This does not appear if there is just one upper level. (B) Displays folders one level above. (C) Displays folders. (D) Displays the print screen. Change the print settings.For more information, see "FILE PRINTING". Select the [Delete] checkbox when needed.To fit the image to the paper size when printing, select the [Fit To Page] checkbox . Tap the [Start] key to start file printing.Back to top';
body[372]='06-035.htm';
dai[372]='SAVE ON HDD';
bun[372]='SAVE ON HDDSAVE ON HDD Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Scan to HDD] key on the action panel. Specify the file name and a folder.For original scan settings, see the explanation of the copy or image send mode.If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Booklet] key as appropriate for the original. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.Back to top';
body[373]='06-036.htm';
dai[373]='SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE';
bun[373]='SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICESAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Scan to External Memory Device] key on the action panel. Specify the file name and a folder.For original scan settings, see the explanation of the copy or image send mode.If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Booklet] key as appropriate for the original. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.Back to top';
body[374]='07-001.htm';
dai[374]='SETTING MODE';
bun[374]='SETTING MODESETTING MODEOverview Use "Setting mode" to configure the system settings of the machine. This mode allows management of various functions that will make it easier to use the machine, such as default registration for each function, network connection setting, and loSetting mode can also be selected using the Web browser by accessing the machine from a PC connected to the same network as the machine.This section explains the settings that can be controlled from the touch panel of the machine. Administrator passwordTo maintain security, the machine administrator should promptly change the password after the machine is purchased. (For the default administrator password, see Quick Start Guide.) To change the password, see "CHANGE PASSWORD".* To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals. For fax settings, see "SETTING MODE FOR FAX". OperationDisplaying the setting mode on the machineDisplaying the setting mode (Web version)Displaying the setting mode on the machine Tap the [Settings] key. Tap the [Settings] key on the home screen.The setting mode screen appears on the touch panel. Tap the item that you wish to set up from the menu on the left of the screen.For details of the settings, see the explanation for each item. To quit the setting mode, tap the [Exit] key in the upper right corner of the screen.For details on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "User authentication" of the "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES".Displaying the setting mode (Web version) When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC&rsquo;s Web browser.From the setting mode of the machine, print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC&rsquo;s Web browser. Tap the [Settings] key. From the menu, tap [System Settings] &#8594; [Print Data List]. Tap the [Print] key on the [All Custom Setting List]. Check the IP address on the printed list. Start the Web browser on the PC, and enter the IP address of the machine. Start a Web browser on a PC on the same network the machine is on, and enter the IP address of the machine. Recommended Web browsers: Internet Explorer: 6.0 or later (Windows&reg;)Netscape Navigator: 9 (Windows&reg;)Firefox: 2.0 or later (Windows&reg;)Safari: 1.5 or later (Macintosh)Displaying the Setting mode (Web version).Depending on the machine settings, user authentication may be required to display the setting mode (Web version). For password and other information required for user authentication, contact the administrator of the machine. Back to top ';
body[375]='07-003_01.htm';
dai[375]='STATUS';
bun[375]='STATUSSTATUSThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStatusDevice status-YesYesNetwork status-YesYesPower reset-NoYesBack to top';
body[376]='07-003_02.htm';
dai[376]='ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[376]='ADDRESS BOOKADDRESS BOOKThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAAddress Book-YesYesCategory SettingCategory 1YesYesGlobal Address Book-NoYesBack to top';
body[377]='07-003_02_01.htm';
dai[377]='DOCUMENT OPERATIONS';
bun[377]='DOCUMENT OPERATIONSDOCUMENT OPERATIONS The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Operations*Document FilingYesYesQuick File Folder-YesYesMain Folder-YesYes Custom Folder-YesYes Search-YesYes File Batch Print-YesYes Filing Data Backup-NoYes Export Settings-NoYes Import Settings-NoYes Submit Print Job-YesYes Print Settings-YesYes * This cannot be set on the machine. Select [Document Operations] in Setting mode (Web version). (Some items require administrative rights.)Back to top';
body[378]='07-003_03.htm';
dai[378]='USER CONTROL';
bun[378]='USER CONTROLUSER CONTROLThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAUser ControlUser List-NoYesCustom Index-NoYesDefault SettingsNoYesUser Authentication-NoYesUser AuthenticationDisabledNoYesAuthentication Method SettingAuthenticate a User by Login Name and PasswordNoYesDevice Account Mode SettingDisabledNoYesActions when the limit of pages for output jobsJob is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is ReachedNoYesA Warning when Login FailsDisabledNoYesDisable Printing by Invalid UserDisabledNoYesAutomatically print stored jobs after loginDisabledNoYesDefault Network Authentication Server Setting-NoYesPerform LDAP server access controlDisabledNoYesDisplay Usage Status after LoginEnabledNoYesLogin name displayDisplay login name.NoYesInclude job status in user authenticationDisabledNoYesAutomatic Logout SettingEnabled (60 sec)NoYesMaking the Login Name Case SensitiveEnableNoYesEdit help display of login screen-NoYesRelease the Lock on Machine Operation Panel-NoYesReset Counter After Sending E-mail Status-NoYesOrganization /Group List-NoYesPage Limit Group List-NoYesMachine Page Limit Setting-NoYesAuthority Group List-NoYesFavourite Operation Group List*1-NoYesCustomized Key List*1-NoYesHome Screen List*1-NoYesUser CountView User Count-NoYesSave user count*1-NoYesCard Area SettingsNoYesImport from Configuration file-NoYesCard Scan Test-NoYesCheck Facility Code in HID ModeDisabledNoYesCard Type/Card Reader SettingsNoYesCard Type / Card Reader-NoYesUse IC Card for AuthenticationDisabledNoYesCard Reader Device Registration-NoYes*1 This cannot be set on the machine. Select [User Control] in Setting mode (Web version).Back to top';
body[379]='07-003_03_01.htm';
dai[379]='BILLING CODE SETTING';
bun[379]='BILLING CODE SETTINGBILLING CODE SETTING Overview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorSetting itemsFactory default settingUABilling Code SettingMain Code List-○○Sub Code List-○○Administration Settings-×○Use Billing CodeDisable×○Use Code Settingsusecode×○Take Over Billing Code at Mode TransitionDisable×○Disabling of Change of Billing CodeDisable×○Apply Use Code While Logged in with Device AccountDisable×○Exception Setting for Billing Code Function×○Application Name registered as Standard ApplicationAll Invalid×○Web Browse*Disable×○Billing Code Display Name Setting×○Main Code Display NameDefault×○Sub Code Display NameDefault×○* Displayed when the Web Browsing Expansion Kit is installed. Back to top ';
body[380]='07-003_04.htm';
dai[380]='SYSTEM SETTINGS';
bun[380]='SYSTEM SETTINGSSYSTEM SETTINGS The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings. Total CountU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUATotal Count-YesYesJob Count-YesYesDevice Count-YesYesDefault SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADefault SettingsYesYesClock AdjustYesYesSpecify Time Zone-YesYesDate&amp;Time Settings-YesYesSynchronize with Internet Time ServerDisabledYesYesDaylight Saving Time SettingVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesSelect Setting TypeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesStart TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesCompleting TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesAdjustment TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesDate FormatVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesKeyboard SelectVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesList Print (User)U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAList Print (User)YesYesAll Custom Setting List-YesYesPrinter Test Page-YesYesSending Address List-YesYesDocument Filing Folder List-YesYesPaper Tray SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPaper Tray SettingsYesYesAuto Switching of TrayEnabledYesYesTray 1Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesTray 2*1YesYesTray 3*1、*2Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)*2YesYesPlain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")*3Tray 4*1、*2Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)*2YesYesPlain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")*3Tray 5*3Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")YesYesBypassPlain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesCustom Size Registration (Bypass)Custom 1 to 7: X = 420 mm (17"), Y = 297 mm (11")YesYes*1 When a paper drawer is installed*2 When a large capacity drawer is installed*3 When a large capacity tray is installed Paper Type RegistrationU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPaper Type Registration-YesYesFax Data Receive/ForwardU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAFax Data Receive/Forward*1,*2YesYesInternet Fax Settings*1YesYesReception Start-YesYesManual Reception Key in Initial ScreenEnabledYesYesForward Received Data-YesYes*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. *2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installedPrinter Condition SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPrinter Condition SettingsYesYesCondition SettingsYesYesCopies1 sets of copiesYesYesOrientationPortraitYesYesDefault Paper SizeA4 (8-1/2" x 11")YesYesDefault Output TrayVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesDefault Paper TypePlain PaperYesYesInitial Resolution Settings600 dpi (High Quality)YesYesDisable Blank Page PrintDisabledYesYesLine Thickness5YesYes2-Sided Print1-SidedYesYesN-Up Print1-UpYesYesFit To PageEnabledYesYesOutputVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesPrint per UnitEnabledYesYesStaple Position*1DisabledYesYesPunch*2DisabledYesYesQuick FileDisabledYesYesPCL SettingsYesYesPCL Symbol Set SettingPC-8YesYesPCL Font SettingInternal Font, 0: CourierYesYesPCL Line Feed Code0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FFYesYesWide A4DisabledYesYesPostScript SettingsYesYesPrint PS ErrorDisabledYesYesBinary ProcessingDisabledYesYes*1 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed. *2 When a punch module is installed.Document Filing ControlU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Filing Control-YesYesUSB-Device CheckU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAUSB-Device Check-YesYesDevices Recognized-YesYesDriver-YesYesOperation SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAOperation SettingsNoYesEnlarge Display ModeDisabledNoYesKeys Touch SoundMiddleNoYesKey Touch Sound at Initial PointDisabledNoYesAuto Clear Setting60 secondsNoYesCancel Auto Clear TimerDisabledNoYesMessage Time Setting6 secondsNoYesMFP Display Language SettingVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesDefault Display SettingsHome ScreenNoYesDisplay Favourite Menus as DefaultDisabledNoYesDisplay Action Panel as default.EnabledNoYes Display Confirmation Dialog when job is canceled. Disabled No Yes Disabling of Job Priority OperationDisabledNoYesDisabling of Bypass PrintingDisabledNoYesKey Operation Setting0.0 secondsNoYesDisable Auto Key RepeatDisabledNoYesTime for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch0.5 secondsNoYesDouble Tap Interval Setting0.5 secondsNoYesDisabling of Clock AdjustmentDisabledNoYesDisabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisabledNoYesSet Keyboard Priority*1Soft Keyboard*1NoYesDisplay current path in System SettingsEnabledNoYesEnable link of current pathEnabledNoYesEco Recommendation FunctionDisabledNoYesInitial Original Count SettingAll InvalidNoYesUnify 10-key number in ascending order from upper leftDisabledNoYesMFP Display Pattern SettingPattern 1NoYesPreview SettingNoYesReceived Data Image Check SettingDisabledNoYesDefault List/Thumbnail DisplayNoYesFax/I-Fax Reception Data ThumbnailNoYesFile Retrieve of Document FilingNoYesMain Folder/Quick File FolderListNoYesCustom FolderListNoYesRemote Operation SettingsNoYesRemote Software OperationNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesOperation from Specified PCNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesHostname or IP Address of PC-NoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesOperation by User Who Has PasswordNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesCookie SettingsNot storedNoYesSoft Keyboard Template Setting-NoYesCustomized Key Setting*2NoYesMode Key Display Setting-NoYesHome Screen Registration-NoYesHome Screen Settings*2-NoYes*1 When an external keyboard is not installed. : Soft Keyboard*2 This cannot be set on the machine. It can be set in Setting mode (Web version). Device ControlU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADevice ControlNoYesOriginal Size Detector SettingNoYesOriginal Detection Size CombinationAB-1 (Inch-1)NoYesCancel Detection at Document GlassDisabledNoYesDisabling of Document FeederDisabledNoYesOriginal Feeding ModeAll DisabledNoYesDisabling of DuplexDisabledNoYesDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette*1DisabledNoYesDisabling of Optional Paper Drawer*2DisabledNoYesDisabling of Tray SettingDisabledNoYesDisabling of Finisher*3DisabledNoYesDisabling of OffsetDisabledNoYesDisabling of Stapler*3DisabledNoYesSaddle Stitch Position Adjust*40.0 mm (1/2")NoYesDisabling of Punch*5DisabledNoYesAuto Paper Selection SettingPlain PaperNoYesTandem Connection SettingNoYesIP Address of Slave Machine0.0.0.0NoYesPort Number50001NoYesTandem ModeNoYesDisabling of Master Machine ModeDisabledNoYesDisabling of Slave Machine ModeDisabledNoYesAuto Switching of Finisher Trays*6EnableNoYesOptimization of Hard Disk-NoYesFusing Cleaning Mode-NoYesFusing Control SettingsNoYesPaper Weight60 to 89g/m2 (16 to 23 lbs.)NoYesList PrintsOne SidedNoYesBlack Streak ReductionDisableNoYesDisplay warning message for black streaks detection.DisableNoYes*1 When a large capacity tray is installed*2 When a paper drawer is installed *3 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed *4 When a saddle finisher is installed *5 When a punch module is installed *6 When a saddle finisher (large stacker) or finisher (large stacker) is installedCopy Function SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUACopy Function SettingsNoYesInitial Status SettingsNoYesPaper TrayVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesExposure TypeAutoNoYesCopy Ratio1NoYes2-Sided Copy1-Side to 1-SideNoYesOutputVaries depending on the machine configurationVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesOffsetEnabledNoYesCopy SettingsNoYesCopy Exposure AdjustmentDocument Glass: 5(Normal)Document Feeder: 5(Normal)NoYesRotation Copy SettingRotation copyNoYesAdd or Change Extra Preset Ratios-NoYesSetting a Maximum Number of Copies999NoYesInitial Margin Shift SettingNoYesSide 110 mm (1/2")NoYesSide 210 mm (1/2")NoYesErase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesInitial Multi Shot SettingDisabledNoYesLayoutLeft to Right/Right, and DownNoYesBorderNo PrintNoYesCard Shot SettingsNoYesOriginal SizeX: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8")NoYesFit to PageDisabledNoYesAutomatic Saddle Stitch*1EnabledNoYesInitial Tab Copy Setting10 mm (1/2")NoYesDisabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisabledNoYesDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisabledNoYesDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisabledNoYesAuto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the PaperDisabledNoYesDisabling Registration of Custom ImageDisabledNoYesDisabling sending while copyingDisabledNoYes600dpiX600dpi Scanning Mode for Document FeederDisabledNoYesQuick Scan from Document GlassEnabledNoYesAuto Clear Before Copy JobDisabledNoYesAuto CalibrationNoYes* When a saddle finisher is installedPrinter SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPrinter SettingsNoYesDefault SettingsNoYesProhibit Notice Page PrintingEnabledNoYesProhibit Test Page PrintingDisabledNoYesA4/Letter Size Auto ChangeVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesPrint Density LevelNoYesBypass Tray SettingsNoYesEnable Detected Paper Size in Bypass TrayDisabledNoYesEnable Selected Paper Type in Bypass TrayEnabledNoYesExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectDisabledNoYesJob Spool QueuingEnabledNoYesProhibit USB Memory Direct PrintDisabledNoYesDisabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisabledNoYesDisabling sending while printingDisabledNoYesInterface SettingsNoYesHexadecimal Dump ModeDisabledNoYesI/O Timeout60 secondsNoYesEnable USB PortEnabledNoYesUSB Port Emulation SwitchingAutoNoYesEnable Network PortEnabledNoYesNetwork Port Emulation SwitchingAutoNoYesPort Switching MethodSwitch at End of JobNoYesAuto Calibration-NoYesImage Send SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAImage Send SettingsNoYesOperation SettingsNoYesDefault SettingsNoYesHold settings for a while after scanning has been completed.DisabledNoYes Job Auto Start Time During Scanning 60 seconds No Yes Default Display SettingsE-mail (fax when fax is installed)NoYesAddress Book Default SelectionNoYesApply Addresses of Sending Modes OnlyEnabledNoYesHigher priority is given to the display of address book.EnabledNoYesCategory Displayed as DefaultNoneNoYesDisplay all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently.DisabledNoYesEnlarge Address BookEnabledNoYesImage OrientationPortraitNoYesInitial Resolution SettingNoYesScanner CommonApply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, 200 X 200 dpiNoYesE-mailApply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, 200 X 200 dpiNoYesInternet Fax*1Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, 200 X 100 dpiNoYesFax*2Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, StandardNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeTextNoYesSharpness3 (Normal)NoYesContrast3 (Normal)NoYesSending the same image sent in Fax/I-Fax modeDisabledNoYesBe sure to press Next Address Key () before selecting the next addressDisabledNoYesScan Complete Sound SettingMiddleNoYesDisable Switching of Display OrderDisabledNoYesHold Setting for Received Data PrintDisabledNoYesDefault Verification Stamp*3DisabledNoYes E-mail/Scanner/Data Entry Disabled No Yes Fax/Internet Fax Disabled No Yes Erase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesTime Specified Output of Received DataDisabledNoYesEnable/Disable SettingsNoYesSettings to Disable RegistrationNoYesDisable Registering Destination from Operation PanelAll InvalidNoYesDisable Registering Destination on Web Page*3All InvalidNoYesDisabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisabledNoYesDisable Registration of Memory BoxAll InvalidNoYesDisable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*4All InvalidNoYesDisable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*4DisabledNoYesDisabling of Forwarding via NetworkDisabledNoYesSettings to Disable TransmissionNoYesDisable [Resend] on Image Send ModeDisabledNoYesDisable Selection from Address BookAll InvalidNoYesDisable Direct EntryAll InvalidNoYesDisable PC-I-Fax Transmission*1DisabledNoYesDisable PC-Fax TransmissionDisabledNoYesOwn Number and Name SetNoYesSender Data Registration-NoYesRegistration of Own Name Select-NoYesScan SettingsNoYesScan SettingsNoYesDefault Sender Set-NoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsNoYesScanner Common(No item)AutoNoYes(No item)GreyscaleNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisabledNoYesCommon to E-mails(No item)AutoNoYes(No item)GreyscaleNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisabledNoYesInitial File Format SettingScanner CommonNoYesFile TypePDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYesBk Letter EmphasisDisabledNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisabledNoYesNumber of Pages1NoYesE-mailNoYesFile TypePDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYesBk Letter EmphasisDisabledNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisabledNoYesNumber of Pages1NoYesCompression Mode at BroadcastingNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMH (G3)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYesBk Letter EmphasisDisabledNoYesMaximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail)UnlimitedNoYes If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files. Disabled No Yes Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)UnlimitedNoYesBcc SettingNoYesEnable BccDisabledNoYesDisplay Bcc Address on the Job Status ScreenDisabledNoYesDisable Scan FunctionNoYesPC Scan DisabledNoYesDefault Address SettingDisabledNoYesInternet Fax Settings*1NoYesDefault SettingsNoYesAuto Wake Up PrintEnabledNoYesCompression SettingMH (G3)NoYesSpeaker Volume SettingNoYesReceive SignalMiddleNoYesCommunication Error SignalMiddleNoYesOriginal Print on Transaction ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyNoYesTransaction Report Print Select SettingNoYesSingle SendingPrint Out Error Report OnlyNoYesBroadcastingPrint Out All ReportNoYesReceivingDo not PrintNoYesActivity Report Print Select SettingNoYesAuto Print at Memory FullDisabledNoYesPrint Daily at Designated TimeDisabledNoYesBody Text Print Select SettingDisabledNoYesSend SettingNoYesI-Fax Reception Report On/Off SettingDisabledNoYesI-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting1 hourNoYesNumber of Resend Times at Reception Error2 timesNoYesMaximum Size of E-mail AttachmentsUnlimitedNoYesRotation Sending SettingAll EnabledNoYesPrinting Page Number at ReceiverEnabledNoYesRecall in Case of Line BusyRecall. Times: 2, Interval: 3 minutesNoYesRecall in Case of Communication ErrorRecall. Times: 1, Interval: 3 minutesNoYesReceive SettingsNoYesAuto Receive Reduce SettingEnabledNoYesDuplex Reception SettingDisabledNoYesSet Address for Data Forwarding-NoYesDirect SMTPDisabledNoYesAdd Hostname or IP Address TooDisabledNoYesHostname or IP Address-NoYesLetter Size RX Reduce Print *5DisabledNoYesReceiving Date &amp; Time PrintDisabledNoYesA3 RX Reduce *5DisabledNoYesPOP3 Communication Timeout Setting60 secondsNoYesReception Check Interval Setting5 min.NoYesFax Output SettingsVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesNumber of Prints-NoYesStaple Settings-NoYesAllow/Reject Mail or Domain Name SettingNoYesAllow/Reject Mail or Domain Name SettingAll InvalidNoYes*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed*2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.*3 When the verification stamp unit is installed*4 When the network is enabled*5 This function is not available in some countries and regions. Document Filing SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Filing SettingsNoYesDefault Mode SettingsSharing ModeNoYesSort Method SettingDateNoYesAdministrator Authority SettingNoYesDelete FileDisabledNoYesDelete FolderDisabledNoYesChange PasswordDisabledNoYesDelete All Quick FilesNoYesDelete Now-NoYesDelete Quick Files at Power UpEnabledNoYesImage OrientationPortraitNoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeTextNoYesInitial Resolution Settings600 X 600 dpiNoYesScan Complete Sound SettingMiddleNoYesDefault Output Tray*1Varies depending on the machine configurationNoYesDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintDisabledNoYesBatch Print SettingsNoYesSelection of [All Users] is not allowed.EnabledNoYesSelection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.EnabledNoYesErase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCard Shot SettingsNoYesOriginal SizeX: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8")NoYesFit to Store SizeDisabledNoYesSetting of store/delete after file print Store NoYesScan to External Memory Device SettingNoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsAutoNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisabledNoYesInitial File Format SettingNoYesFile TypePDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: MiddleNoYesEmphasize Black LetterDisabledNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisabledNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeAutoNoYesInitial Resolution Settings200 X 200 dpiNoYesDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceDisabledNoYesDefault Setting of PDF Format for PC BrowsingNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteNoYesCompression ModeMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleNoYesCompression RatioMiddleNoYesCopyDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolution200dpix200dpiNoYesPrinterDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolution200dpix200dpiNoYesScannerDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolution200dpix200dpiNoYesInternet FaxDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolution200dpix100dpiNoYesFaxDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolutionStandardNoYesScan to HDDDisabledNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisabledNoYesResolution200dpix200dpiNoYesDocument Output OptionsNoYesPrintNoYesCopyEnabledNoYesPrinterEnabledNoYesScan SendDisabledNoYesInternet Fax Send (Including PC-I-Fax) *2DisabledNoYesFax Send (Including PC-Fax)3*DisabledNoYesScan to HDDEnabledNoYesScan SendNoYesCopyDisabledNoYesPrinterDisabledNoYesScan SendEnabledNoYesInternet Fax Send (Including PC-I-Fax) *2DisabledNoYesFax Send (Including PC-Fax)3*DisabledNoYesScan to HDDEnabledNoYesInternet Fax Send*2NoYesCopyDisabledNoYesPrinterDisabledNoYesScan SendDisabledNoYesInternet Fax Send (Including PC-I-Fax)EnabledNoYesFax Send (Including PC-Fax)DisabledNoYesScan to HDDDisabledNoYesFax Send*3NoYesCopyDisabledNoYesPrinterDisabledNoYesScan SendDisabledNoYesInternet Fax Send (Including PC-I-Fax) *2DisabledNoYesFax Send (Including PC-Fax)EnabledNoYesScan to HDDDisabledNoYesAutomatic Deletion of File SettingsAll InvalidNoYes*1 When the exit tray unit is installed.*2 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.*3 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed. List Print (Administrator)U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAList Print (Administrator)NoYesAdministrator Settings List-NoYesImage Sending Activity Report-NoYesData Receive/Forward List-NoYesWeb Settings List*1-NoYesMetadata Set List*2-NoYes*1 When the network is enabled *2 When the application integration module is installed Sharp OSA SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUASharp OSA SettingsNoYesExternal Account Setting*1NoYesExternal Account ControlDisabledNoYesEnable Authentication by External ServerDisabledNoYesUSB Driver Settings*2NoYesExternal KeyboardUse internal driverNoYesCard Reader/WriterUse internal driverNoYesUSB MemoryUse internal driverNoYesLevel of EncryptionNoneNoYesJob Priority Settings-NoYes*1 When an external account module is installed *2 When an external account module or application communication module is installed Enable/Disable SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAENABLE/DISABLE SETTINGSNoYesPrinter Condition SettingsNoYesDisable Blank Page PrintDisabledNoYesUser ControlNoYesDisabling of Printing by Invalid UserDisabledNoYesOperation SettingsNoYesCancel Auto Clear TimerDisabledNoYesDisabling of Job Priority OperationDisabledNoYesDisabling of Bypass PrintingDisabledNoYesDisable Auto Key RepeatDisabledNoYesDisabling of Clock AdjustmentDisabledNoYesDisabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisabledNoYesDevice ControlNoYesDisabling of Document FeederDisabledNoYesDisabling of DuplexDisabledNoYesDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette*1DisabledNoYesDisabling of Optional Paper Drawer*2DisabledNoYesDisabling of Tray SettingDisabledNoYesDisabling of Finisher*3DisabledNoYesDisabling of OffsetDisabledNoYesDisabling of Stapler*3DisabledNoYesDisabling of Punch*4DisabledNoYesDisabling of Master Machine ModeDisabledNoYesDisabling of Slave Machine ModeDisabledNoYesCopy Function SettingsNoYesDisabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisabledNoYesDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisabledNoYesDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisabledNoYesDisabling Registration of Custom ImageDisabledNoYesDisabling sending while copyingDisabledNoYesPrinter SettingsNoYesProhibit Notice Page PrintingEnabledNoYesProhibit Test Page PrintingDisabledNoYesExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectDisabledNoYesDisabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisabledNoYesDisabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisabledNoYesDisabling sending while printingDisabledNoYesImage Send SettingsNoYesDisable Switching of Display OrderDisabledNoYesDisable Fax BroadcastingDisabledNoYesDisable Scan FunctionNoYesSettings to Disable RegistrationNoYesDisable Registering Destination from Operation PanelAll InvalidNoYesDisable Registering Destination on Web Page*5All InvalidNoYesDisabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisabledNoYesDisable Registration of Memory BoxAll InvalidNoYesDisable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*5All InvalidNoYesDisable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*5DisabledNoYesDisabling of Forwarding via NetworkDisabledNoYesSettings to Disable TransmissionNoYesDisable [Resend] on Image Send ModeDisabledNoYesDisable Selection from Address BookAll InvalidNoYesDisable Direct EntryAll InvalidNoYesDisable PC-I-Fax Transmission*6DisabledNoYesDisable PC-Fax Transmission*7DisabledNoYesDocument Filing SettingsNoYesDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintDisabledNoYesBatch Print SettingsNoYesSelection of [All Users] is not allowed.EnabledNoYesSelection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.EnabledNoYesDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceDisabledNoYesWeb Browsing Settings*8NoYesDisable URL EntryDisabledNoYesDisable Additional Edit of FavouriteDisabledNoYesDisable Registration/Edit of Home PageDisabledNoYesDisable Print from Web Browse ModeDisabledNoYesDisable display of HistoryDisabledNoYesSecurity SettingsNoYesHidden Pattern Print SettingNoYesDisable Direct EntryDisabledNoYes*1 When a large capacity tray is installed*2 When a paper drawer is installed*3 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed *4 When a punch module is installed*5 When the network is enabled*6 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed*7 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.*8 When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed Data BackupU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAData BackupNoYesStorage Backup-NoYesDevice Cloning-NoYesForward Address Book-NoYesProduct KeyU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAProduct Key*NoYesSerial Number-NoYesBarcode Font Kit-NoYesInternet Fax Expansion Kit-NoYesE-mail Alert and Status-NoYesApplication Integration Module-NoYesApplication Communication Module-NoYesExternal Account Module-NoYesXPS expansion kit-NoYesWeb Browsing Expansion Kit-NoYes* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed. Storing/Calling of System SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStoring/Calling of System SettingsNoYesRestore Factory Defaults-NoYesStore Current Configuration-NoYesRestore Configuration-NoYesBack to top ';
body[381]='07-003_05.htm';
dai[381]='NETWORK SETTINGS';
bun[381]='NETWORK SETTINGSNETWORK SETTINGSThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUANetwork SettingsQuick SettingsNoYesIPv4 Settings-NoYesIPv6 Settings-NoYesNetwork Name Settings-NoYesDNS Settings-NoYesSMTP Settings-NoYesLDAP Settings-NoYesPublic Folder/NAS Settings-NoYesGeneral SettingsNoYesGeneral SettingsNoYesPrint Status on StartupDisabledNoYesNetwork Settings-NoYesReset the NIC-NoYesProtocol SettingsNoYesIPv4 SettingsNoYesDHCP/BOOTPDisabledNoYesRARPDisabledNoYesIPv6 SettingsNoYesIPv6DisabledNoYesDHCPv6EnabledNoYesPing CommandNoYesNetWareNoYesNetWare SettingsNoYesNetWareDisabledNoYesFrame Type802.2NoYesOperation ModePSERVERNoYesPSERVER Settings-NoYesRPRINTER Settings-NoYesEtherTalkNoYesEtherTalk SettingsNoYesEtherTalkDisabledNoYesNetBIOSNoYesNetBIOS SettingsNoYesNBT/WINSDisabledNoYesServices SettingsNoYesDNS-NoYesWINS-NoYesSMTP-NoYesSNMP-NoYesKerberos-NoYesSNTP-NoYesmDNS-NoYesPrint Port SettingsNoYesLPDNoYesLPD SettingsNoYesLPDEnabledNoYesTimeout0 secondsNoYesUse BannerDisabledNoYesRAWNoYesRaw Print SettingsNoYesRaw PrintEnabledNoYesPort Number9100NoYesTimeout90 secondsNoYesUse BidirectionalDisabledNoYesWSDNoYesWSD SettingsNoYesWSD PrintEnabledNoYesUse Multicast DiscoveryEnabledNoYesLDAP SettingsNoYesLDAP SettingsEnabledNoYesGlobal Address Books List-NoYesPublic Folder/NAS SettingsNoYesPublicUse of StorageAllowedNoYesSharedUse of StorageAllowedNoYesfaxreceiveUse of StorageAllowedNoYesProxy SettingsNoYesProxy Server Address-NoYesUser Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesPort Number8080NoYesAddress without using proxy-NoYes Wireless SettingsNoYesWireless Settings-NoYesConnection Type Switching-NoYesHTTP Access SettingsNoYesNumber of Users who can log in at the Same Time32NoYesAuto Logout Time60NoYesView Login User-NoYesBack to top';
body[382]='07-003_06.htm';
dai[382]='APPLICATION SETTINGS';
bun[382]='APPLICATION SETTINGSAPPLICATION SETTINGSThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAApplication SettingsTEXT / IMAGE PRINTING-YesYesText Settings (Stamp)-YesYesCustom Stamp-NoYesCustom Watermark-NoYesNetwork Scanner Settings-YesYesSubject Name Settings-YesYesFile Name Settings-YesYesMessage Body Settings-YesYesAdministration SettingsNoYesAdvanced SettingsNoYesDisable Selection of Reply-toDisabledNoYesFile NamingNoYesDefault SubjectScanned image from: (Name)NoYesAdd Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message BodyEnabledNoYesAdd a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message BodyDisabledNoYesMail Footer Registration-NoYesInternet Fax SettingsNoYesReceive SettingsNoYesInternet fax receptionEnabledNoYesPOP3 Server-NoYesPort Number110NoYesPOP AuthenticationDisabledNoYesUser Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesChange PasswordDisabledNoYesPOP3 Communication Timeout60 secondsNoYesReception Check Interval Setting5 minutesNoYesEnable SSLDisabledNoYesConnection Test-NoYesDefault SettingsNoYesI-Fax Own Name and Address SetNoYesSender Name-NoYesI-Fax Own Address-NoYesDirect SMTPNoYesPort Number (Receive)25NoYesTimeout300NoYesPort Number (Send)25NoYesTimeout300NoYesInbound Routing Settings-YesYesSender Number/Address Registration-YesYesAdministration SettingsNoYesInbound Routing SettingsNoYesInbound RoutingDisabledNoYesDisable Registration of Forward TableDisabledNoYesDisable Change/Delete of Forward TableDisabledNoYesDisable Change of Forward ConditionDisabledNoYesPrint Style SettingPrint at ErrorNoYesFile Name SettingNoYesPreset of Character-NoYesFile Naming-NoYesIf received from a contact registered in the address book, sender\'s name is changed to contact\'s name.DisabledNoYesSettings for HDD Storing of Received Data-NoYesDocument Administration FunctionNoYesForwarding Destination Settings (Send Data)NoYesForward Send DataDisabledNoYesFile FormatTIFF(Multi)NoYesForwarding Destination Settings (Received Data)NoYesForward Send DataDisabledNoYesFile FormatTIFF(Multi)NoYesMetadata SettingNoYesMetadata EntryNoYesMetadata DeliveryDisabledNoYesMetadata Set List-NoYesExternal Applications SettingsStandard Application Settings-NoYesReceived Application Settings-NoYesExternal Accounting Application SettingsNoYesExternal Account ControlDisabledNoYesPolling Setting-NoYesWeb Browsing Settings*NoYesHow to handle Cookie?Alert meNoYesDisable URL EntryDisabledNoYesDisable Adding or Editing FavouritesDisabledNoYesDisable Registration/Edit of Home PageDisabledNoYesDisable Print from Web Browse ModeDisabledNoYesDisable display of HistoryDisabledNoYesUse a Proxy ServerDisabledNoYesAlways display Proxy Authentication DialogueDisabledNoYesUSB Driver SettingsNoYesExternal KeyboardUses internal driverNoYesCard Reader/WriterUses internal driverNoYesUSB MemoryUses internal driverNoYesLevel of EncryptionNoneNoYesE-mail Print SettingsNoYesE-mail Print SettingsNoYesE-mail PrintDisabledNoYesPOP3 Server-NoYesPort Number110NoYesPOP AuthenticationDisabledNoYesUser Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesCheck Interval5 minutesNoYesEnable SSLDisabledNoYesConnection Test-NoYesSetting for Print from the MFP(FTP)-NoYesSetting for Print from the MFP(SMB)-NoYesSetting for Print from the PCNoYesFTP PrintEnabledNoYesPort Number21NoYesUse BannerDisabledNoYes* When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed.Back to top';
body[383]='07-003_07.htm';
dai[383]='ENERGY SAVE';
bun[383]='ENERGY SAVEENERGY SAVEThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAEnergy SaveNoYesEco Mode SettingsNoYesEco Mode SettingsFollowing the Power managementNoYesEco Scan SettingNoYesEco Scan SettingEnabledNoYesHome ScreenDisabledNoYesCopyDisabledNoYesFax Image SendNoYesScan SendEnabledNoYesFax/I-Fax SendEnabledNoYesFax Receive/ Internet Fax ReceiveEnabledNoYesMetadata SetEnabledNoYesDocument FilingNoYesHDD StoreEnabledNoYesScan to Ext.Memory Dev.EnabledNoYesPrintEnabledNoYesSendEnabledNoYesExternal Data AccessEnabledNoYesSystem SettingsEnabledNoYesSharp OSAEnabledNoYesWeb Browsing*EnabledNoYesPower Management SettingNoYesPreheat Mode Setting1 minutesNoYesTurn Off the panel display in the Preheat modeEnabledNoYesAuto Power Shut-OffEnabledNoYesAs soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off modeDisabledNoYesEnergy Saving Pattern List-NoYesSleep Mode Power LevelLow PowerNoYesSpecific Date Operation Settings-NoYesDisplay a Message to Delay the Time of Entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shut-Off ModeDisabledNoYesToner Save Mode-NoYesPower ON/OFF Schedule Setting-NoYes* When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed.Back to top';
body[384]='07-003_08.htm';
dai[384]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS';
bun[384]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAE-Mail Alert and StatusE-mail Status-NoYesAlerts Message-NoYesBack to top';
body[385]='07-003_09.htm';
dai[385]='JOB LOG';
bun[385]='JOB LOGJOB LOGThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAJob LogControl Job Log-NoYesView Job Log-NoYesBack to top';
body[386]='07-003_10.htm';
dai[386]='SECURITY SETTINGS';
bun[386]='SECURITY SETTINGSSECURITY SETTINGSThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUASecurity Settings Other Settings No Yes Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job Enabled No Yes Restrict Operation Force Retention No Yes Change Password-NoYesPort ControlNoYesServer PortNoYesHTTPEnabledNoYesPort Number80NoYesHTTPSEnabledNoYesPort Number443NoYesFTP PrintEnabledNoYesPort Number21NoYesRaw PrintEnabledNoYesPort Number9100NoYesLPDEnabledNoYesPort Number515NoYesIPPEnabledNoYesPort Number631NoYesIPP-SSLDisabledNoYesPort Number443NoYesTandem Output ReceiveEnabledNoYesPort Number50001NoYesPC ScanEnableNoYesPort Number52000NoYesRemote Operation PanelEnabledNoYesPort Number5900NoYesSNMPDEnabledNoYesPort Number161NoYesTelnetEnabledNoYesNBT/WINSDisabledNoYesJCPDisabledNoYesRARPDisabledNoYesSMTPEnabledNoYesWSDEnabledNoYesUSB-Device Expansion*1EnabledNoYesSharp OSA (Expansion Platform)NoYesHTTPEnabledNoYesPort Number10080NoYesHTTPSEnabledNoYesPort Number10443NoYesClient PortNoYesHTTPEnabledNoYesHTTPSEnabledNoYesFTPEnabledNoYesFTPSEnabledNoYesSMTPEnabledNoYesSMTP-SSLEnabledNoYesPOP3EnabledNoYesPOP3-SSLEnabledNoYesSNMP-TRAPEnabledNoYesPort Number162NoYesNotify Job EndEnabledNoYesLDAPEnabledNoYesLDAP-SSLEnabledNoYesSMB/WINSEnabledNoYesSNTPDisabledNoYesmDNSEnabledNoYesTandem Output SendEnabledNoYesData Backup (Send)Enable*5NoYesFilter SettingDisabledNoYesIP Address Filter SettingsNoYesFilter ModeAllowedNoYesFilter Addresses 1 to 4NoYesStart IP Address0.0.0.0NoYesEnd IP Address0.0.0.0NoYesMAC Address Filter SettingsNoYesFilter Addresses 1 to 100NoYesSSL SettingsNoYesServer PortNoYesHTTPSEnabledNoYesIPP-SSLDisabledNoYesRedirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page AccessDisabledNoYesClient PortNoYesHTTPSEnabledNoYesFTPSEnabledNoYesSMTP-SSLEnabledNoYesPOP3-SSLEnabledNoYesLDAP-SSLEnabledNoYesLevel of EncryptionLowNoYesCertificate Information-NoYesIEEE802.1X SettingNoYesIEEE802.1X AuthenticationDisabledNoYesEAP Authentication MethodEAP-TLSNoYesEAP User Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesServer AuthenticationEnabledNoYesEAP Timeout10 secondsNoYesNumber of EAP Retries3 timesNoYesCertificate Information-NoYesData Clearance Settings*2DisableNoYesRelease Lock on File/Folder Operation*2-NoYesIPsec SettingsNoIPsec SettingsDisabledNoYesIKEv1 SettingsNoPre-Shared Key-NoYesSA Lifetime (time)28800 secondsNoYesSA Lifetime (size)28800 KB (10 mm (1/2"))NoYesIKE Lifetime30 secondsNoYesIPsec Rules-NoYesHidden Pattern PrintNoYesDefault SettingsHidden Pattern Print SettingStandardNoYesPrint ColourBlackNoYesExposureStandardNoYesFont Size48 pointsNoYesAngle0 deg.NoYesFont StyleStandardNoYesCamouflage PatternPattern 1NoYesPrint MethodCharacter stand out.NoYesPrint Contents SettingNoYesPre-Set WordEnabled, DO NOT COPYNoYesPre-set TextONNoYesUnit Serial NumberDisabledNoYesAccount Job IDDisabledNoYesLogin Name/User NumberDisabledNoYesControl No.DisabledNoYesDate/TimeDisabledNoYesDisable Direct EntryDisabledNoYesContrastNoYesBlack5NoYesCustom Text Registration-NoYesTracking Information Print-NoYesTracking Information Print SettingDisabledNoYesPrint InformationNoYesUnit Serial NumberEnabledNoYesTextDisabledNoYesAccount Job IDEnabledNoYesLogin Name/User NumberEnabledNoYesDate/TimeEnabledNoYesPrint PositionNoYesVertical PositionNoYesPrint Upper Side of PaperDisabledNoYesPrint Lower Side of PaperEnabledNoYesHorizontal PositionNoYesPrint Left Side of PaperEnabledNoYesPrint Right Side of PaperDisabledNoYesSelect the Job to PrintNoYesCopyEnabledNoYesPrinterEnabledNoYesPrints (Document Filing)EnabledNoYesInternet Fax Receive*3EnabledNoYesFax Receive*4EnabledNoYesList PrintsEnabledNoYesInitialize Private Data/Data in Machine-NoYes*1 Displayed when the application communication module or external account module product key is enabled.*2 Displayed when the data security kit is enabled*3 Displayed when the Internet fax function is enabled. *4 Displayed when the fax function is enabled.*5 Disabled when the data security kit is installedBack to top';
body[387]='07-003_11.htm';
dai[387]='TOP PAGE';
bun[387]='TOP PAGETOP PAGEThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStatusMachine Identification-NoYesBack to top';
body[388]='07-004.htm';
dai[388]='TOP PAGE';
bun[388]='TOP PAGETOP PAGEThe top page displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location.ItemDescription [Update] keyUpdates the information displayed.Unit Serial NumberIndicates the serial number of the machine.NameIf [Name] is not set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the [Machine Identification] screen appears.Model NameDisplays the standard model name of the machine.Machine LocationThe information entered in the [Machine Location] item in [Machine Identification] appears. If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears.Current StatusDisplays the current status of the machine. If two or more errors occur at the same time, only one status is displayed according to the priority order. The errors are displayed in the following priority order.Printer errorAccount LimitIncorrect PaperOverdue Service MaintenancePaper JamMarker Supply MissingToner EmptyReplace Used Toner Container.Cover OpenPaper EmptyInput Tray EmptySpecified Input Tray OpenSpecified Output Tray FullOfflinePrinter WarningToner LowPaper LowInput Tray OpenOutput Tray FullOutput Tray Nearly FullNear to overdue service maintenanceOnlineAuto Power Shut-OffWarming UpBUSYMemoDisplays text that the administrator entered. If you have logged in as an administrator, you can enter a memo.If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears.When you tap the [Not Set] key, the Machine Identification screen appears.Device StatusGraphically displays the current status of the machine.[Reboot the MFP] keyDisplays the restart screen.(Administrator rights are required.) [Enter the Power Save Mode] keyDisplays the power save mode screen.(Administrator rights are required.) Machine Identification ScreenItemDescriptionNameEnter the model name and other information of the machine.Machine CodeEnter the machine code of the machine.Machine LocationEnter the name of the place where the machine is installed (e.g., section name).MemoEnter the contact or other information of the administrator.Back to top';
body[389]='07-005.htm';
dai[389]='DEVICE STATUS';
bun[389]='DEVICE STATUSDEVICE STATUSThis screen shows the device status.ItemDescription[Update] buttonUpdates the information displayed.[Back] buttonReturns to the top page.Paper Input Tray StatusDisplays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine.Output Tray StatusDisplays the current status of the output tray installed in the machine.Supply StatusDisplays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed.Device ConfigurationDisplays the information of options installed in the machine.HDD StatusDisplays the usage status of the hard disk drive.Back to top';
body[390]='07-007.htm';
dai[390]='NETWORK STATUS';
bun[390]='NETWORK STATUSNETWORK STATUSThe Network Status screen shows the general status information and the statuses relevant to, TCP/IP, NetWare, EtherTalk, and NetBIOS protocols.ItemDescriptionGeneralDisplays the information common to the network.Link Status: Displays the data transfer rate of the NIC and cable information.Duplex Mode: Displays the duplex mode of the NIC.Hardware Address: Displays the MAC address of the NIC.Print Status on Startup: Displays whether or not status is printed upon startup.Device Name: Displays the device name.Domain: Displays the domain name. Reception Level (Max. 100): Displays the reception level of the wireless LAN.TCP/IPDisplays the current status of the TCP/IP protocol.IPv4 Settings: Displays the IPv4 protocol settings.DHCP/BOOTP: Selects whether or not the IP address is obtained from the DHCP/BOOTP server.RARP: Displays the status of the RARP protocol.IPv4 Address: Displays the IPv4 address.Subnet Mask: Displays the current subnet mask.Default Gateway: Displays the current default gateway.IPv6 Settings: Displays the IPv6 status.DHCPv6: Displays the status of the DHCPv6 server.Manual Address: Displays the IPv6 address that has been manually specified.Default Gateway: Displays the current default gateway.Link-Local Address: Displays the link-local address.Stateless Address 1: Displays the stateless address.Stateless Address 2: Displays the stateless address.Stateful Address: Displays the stateful address.DNSDisplays the status of the DNS server.Primary Server: Displays the current IP address of the primary DNS server.Secondary Server: Displays the current IP address of the secondary DNS server.Domain Name: Displays the current domain name of the DNS server.WINSDisplays the status of the WINS server.Primary Server: Displays the current IP address of the primary WINS server.Secondary Server: Displays the current IP address of the secondary WINS server.Primary Server (DHCP): Displays the current IP address of the primary WINS server (DHCP).Secondary Server (DHCP): Displays the current IP address of the secondary WINS server (DHCP).Scope ID: Displays the current WINS scope ID.Scope ID (DHCP): Displays the current WINS scope ID (DHCP).NetWare StatusDisplays the NetWare status.NetWare: Displays the status of the NetWare protocol.Frame Type: Displays the frame type.Network Number: Displays the network number.Operation Mode: Displays the operation mode.Print Server Name: Displays the print server name.NDS Tree: Displays the NDS tree name.NDS Context: Displays the NDS context.EtherTalk StatusDisplays the EtherTalk status.EtherTalk: Displays the status of the EtherTalk protocol.Zone Name: Displays the zone name.Type Name: Displays the type name.Object Name: Displays the object name.NetBIOS StatusDisplays the NetBIOS status.NetBIOS: Displays the status of the NetBIOS protocol.Master Browser: Displays the master browser.Back to top';
body[391]='07-008.htm';
dai[391]='POWER RESET';
bun[391]='POWER RESETPOWER RESETThe Power Reset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode.In some environments, the machine cannot be restarted or shifted to power save mode.ItemDescriptionReboot the machineReboots the machine. Tapping the [Execute] key opens the Restart screen, and then tapping the [Execute] key again restarts the machine.Enter the Power Save ModeShifts the machine to power save mode. Tap the [Execute] key to open the power save mode screen.Back to top';
body[392]='07-010.htm';
dai[392]='CATEGORY SETTING';
bun[392]='CATEGORY SETTINGCATEGORY SETTINGA category can be renamed for greater ease of use. Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters). The factory default name is "Category 1".Back to top';
body[393]='07-011.htm';
dai[393]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[393]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKGLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKGlobal Address Book is used to configure global address book settings. Click the list to display the global address book setting screen.RegistrationItemDescriptionApplicable Destination TypeSelect the applicable destination type from E-mail Address, Fax Number, and Internet Fax.Allow selection on operation panelSpecify whether or not enable the global address to be selected on the operation panel of the machine.To Be Used as DefaultSpecify whether or not to use the selected global address as default.Authenticate a User in Global Address SearchSelect whether or not authenticate a user when a global address is searched for.Back to top';
body[394]='07-011_01.htm';
dai[394]='DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[394]='DOCUMENT FILINGDOCUMENT FILING Data saved by Document Filing can be manipulated from the Web.Quick File Folder Files in the Quick File Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete].ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleSaved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Main Folder The files that are in the Main Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleSaved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Custom Folder The files that are in the Custom Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionIndexThe displayed Custom Folder names can be filtered by index.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Search A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionUser Name Enter the user name (maximum of 32 characters).Select from User ListClick the [Setup] button and search for users from the list.Login NameEnter the login name (maximum of 30 characters).Search FolderSet the folder.File NameEnter the file name (maximum of 30 characters).Password of FileEnter the password that is set for the file (1 to 32 digits).Stored DateSet the date and time the file was saved.Search ResultDisplay the results of the data search.ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleThe files that were found can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe found files can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.File Batch PrintMultiple files can be printed at once by batch printing. Search for the files using search conditions, and then select multiple files from the displayed search results.If you want to use the number of copies set when each file was saved by Document Filing, select “Apply the Number of Copies Stored in Each File”. If you want to set a different number of copies, enter the desired number in “Enter the Number”. Click [PrItemDescriptionSearch ConditionUser Name Enter the user name (maximum of 32 characters).Select from User ListClick the [Setup] button and search for users from the list.Login NameEnter the login name (maximum of 30 characters).Password of FileEnter the password that is set for the file (1 to 32 digits).Search ResultJob ClassificationThe found files can be filtered by job.Billing CodeMain CodeSelect this checkbox, and then enter the main code. (32 characters or less) Sub CodeSelect this checkbox, and then enter the sub code.(32 characters or less)Back to top ';
body[395]='07-011_02.htm';
dai[395]='FILING DATA BACKUP';
bun[395]='FILING DATA BACKUPFILING DATA BACKUP You can back up a file saved with Document Filing, and restore a backed up file to the machine. Export SettingsSelect the folder you want to back up and click [Execute]. The files are saved to your computer. ItemDescriptionIndexThe displayed Folder names can be filtered by index.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed. Import SettingsYou can restore a file to the machine that was saved with “Export Settings”. Enter a maximum of 200 characters for the path of the saved file in “Import settings from file”, and click [Execute]. Back to top';
body[396]='07-011_03.htm';
dai[396]='SUBMIT PRINT JOB';
bun[396]='SUBMIT PRINT JOBSUBMIT PRINT JOB You can print a file on your computer.The machine can print following file types:PDF(V1.6)(*) with file extensions pdf. TIFF with file extensions tif and tiff. JPEG with file extensions jpeg, jpg, jpe and jfif. PCL with file extensions pcl. PS(*) with file extensions ps. XPS(**) with file ext(*) Available only if the MFP supports PostScript.(**) Available only if the XPS expansion kit is installed.Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files described above.Enter the password for the encrypted PDF data on Spool Queue of the Job Status screen Print SettingsSelect print settings. Select the file you want to print in “Select File”, select settings, and then click [Print].ItemDescriptionNumber of PrintsSet the number of copies to be printed.Paper SizeSet the print size.OrientationSelect portrait or landscape for the print orientation.2-Sided PrintSelect one-sided printing, two-sided printing (booklet), or two-sided printing (tablet).OutputIf printing by set, select the “Print per Unit” checkbox.StapleSelect staple settings.Fit To PagePrint with the file expanded to the full paper size.Output TraySelect the output tray for the print job.Quick FileSave the print data in the Quick File Folder of the machine.Print GlossySelect this checkbox if the print job will be printed on glossy paper.Billing CodeSelect the checkbox of the Billing Code to assign, and then enter the billing code. Back to top ';
body[397]='07-012.htm';
dai[397]='USER LIST';
bun[397]='USER LISTUSER LISTThis is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled.[Add] key Adds a new user.[Delete All Users] key Deletes all registered users. (Excluding users stored as factory default.) Only the administrator of the machine can use this function.[Delete All Auto-registered users] key Deletes all of Auto-registered users. - Users auto-registeredUser List This shows the users stored as factory default and the currently stored users. An asterisk [*] appears in front of the user name of auto-registered users. When you select a user name, the user edit or delete screen appears.The [Vender] and [Vender2] options are displayed only when the vender is connected.Storing a userWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 1000 groups can be registered. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Editing and deleting a userWhen you select a user from the list, the user edit/delete screen appears. For information on the settings, see "Settings". A user can be deleted using the [Delete] key.If the login authentication with a Fixed User is set, the "Delete All Users" option cannot be used.Users stored as factory default cannot be deleted.Users stored as factory defaultThe following users are stored in the machine at the factory.Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default.System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This account cannot execute jobs.User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.)Vender: The account used when a coin is fed into the new coin vender.Vender2: The account used when a coin is fed into the old coin vender.Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.) For settings related to each of the users, see the following table.User NameAdministratorSystemOperatorUserVenderVender2Other UserLogin NameadminsysadminusersVenderVender2OtherPassword(See "Quick Start Guide.") *1sysadmin*1users*1-My Folder-Main Folder--Authentication SettingsLogin Locally-Pages Limit GroupUnlimited*1Authority Group*2AdminSystem Administrator*1User*1User*1Guest*1Favourite Operation GroupFollowing the System Settings*1Default Billing CodeNot Set*1*1 Items that can be changed *2 For detailed information about each of the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups".SettingsItemDescriptionUser NameStore a user name consisting of up to 255 characters. This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. (The user name must be unique.)Apply User Name to Log-in Name*1Select this to enter the entered user name in the login name.InitialThis determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Enter a maximum of 10 characters for the initials. (The initials are optional).IndexSelect a custom index to be stored. The custom index names are the same as those used in the address book.User Number*2Enter a user number in 5 to 8 digits.Login Name*1Enter the login name that is used when authentication by login name and password is enabled (up to 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.)Password*1, 3Enter the password, consisting of 1 to 255 characters, that is used for user authentication by login name and password (the password is optional).After entering the password, enter once again in "Password (for confirmation)".E-mail AddressEnter the e-mail address that is used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (up to 255 characters).Extended PlatformTo enable authentication and tracking over a firewall, configure settings to use the extended platform.Use Proxy ServerSet to use a proxy server for authentication and tracking.My FolderStore a folder to be used for document filing as the dedicate user folder (or My folder). A stored folder can be selected, or you can create and specify a new folder.Authentication Settings*1Select either [Login Locally] or [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) for authentication.User GroupSet a group to which the user belongs. Up to 8 groups can be assigned.Authentication ServerWhen the [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user authentication from the LDAP server list that is stored using Setting mode (Web version).Pages Limit GroupSpecify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory default setting is [Unlimited]. For more information, see "PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST".Authority GroupSpecify the user authority by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory default setting is [User]. For more information, see "AUTHORITY GROUP LIST".Favourite Operation GroupThe favourite operation group is displayed when the user logs in. The factory default setting is [Following the System Settings]. To change the settings, select [User Control] in Setting mode (Web version).Default Billing CodeSet the Main Code and Sub Code when the user logs in.The factory default setting is [Not Set].*1 It is not displayed when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method. *2 It is displayed only when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method. *3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used. Custom IndexYou can change the custom index name. Tap the custom index name on the list to edit it. Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters). The factory default name is "User 1".Back to top';
body[398]='07-013-01.htm';
dai[398]='USER AUTHENTICATION';
bun[398]='USER AUTHENTICATIONUSER AUTHENTICATIONThis setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method. When the user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, the separate authentication settings apply to the user.For the procedure for storing users, see "USER LIST".For details on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "User authentication" of the "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES".User AuthenticationWhen [User Authentication] is enabled, the authentication screen appears before an operation is carried out in any mode except the job status screen*. Log in as an already registered user. After logging in, you can move freely through the modes.*The login screen appears when a document filing file is used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted from the job status screen.Authentication Method SettingThis selects the authentication method. When using user authentication, be sure to configure this setting first. The items to be configured for users stored after setting the user authentication method vary depending on the selected authentication method.Authenticate a User by Login Name and PasswordStandard authentication method using a login name and password.Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and E-mail AddressThis authentication also checks the e-mail address, in addition to the login name and password of the user.Authenticate a User by User Number OnlyUse this option for simple authentication if you skip the network authentication.The login screen will vary depending on the authentication method that is selected. For details, see "User authentication" of the "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES".When "Authenticate a User by User Number Only" is selected for the authentication method, network authentication cannot be used.Device Account Mode SettingA specific user can be registered as an auto login user. When this option is enabled, the registered user can log in the machine automatically. This function can eliminate each login procedure on the authentication screen and apply the selected user settings (such as network authentication and favourite operations). As an example, this enables uses such as "authentication for one-sided copyiIf you have logged in as the Auto Login user, and if you have failed automatic login due to some reasons or if you do not have the administrator\'s privileges, you cannot use the general setting modes or Setting mode. In that case, the administrator shouldTo log in as a user other than a fixed user when [Allow Login by Different User] is enabled, tap the [Logout] key to cancel the fixed user login state. When the user authentication screen appears, log in as the desired user again. After you have used the Back to top';
body[399]='07-013-02.htm';
dai[399]='ACTIONS WHEN THE LIMIT OF PAGES FOR OUTPUT JOBS';
bun[399]='ACTIONS WHEN THE LIMIT OF PAGES FOR OUTPUT JOBSACTIONS WHEN THE LIMIT OF PAGES FOR OUTPUT JOBSThis setting determines whether or not a job will be completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in progress. The following settings can be configured.Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is ReachedJob is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is ReachedJob is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached and the Receiving Job is Deleted.Back to top';
body[400]='07-013-04.htm';
dai[400]='A WARNING WHEN LOGIN FAILS';
bun[400]='A WARNING WHEN LOGIN FAILSA WARNING WHEN LOGIN FAILSIf a login fails three times in succession, a warning is displayed and further login is disabled for five minutes. This prevents an unauthorised person from attempting to guess a password. (The number of failed login attempts is retained even if the powerLocking of the operation panel for five minutes can be cancelled by selecting [User Control] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel].Back to top';
body[401]='07-013-05.htm';
dai[401]='DISABLING OF PRINTING BY INVALID USER';
bun[401]='DISABLING OF PRINTING BY INVALID USERDISABLING OF PRINTING BY INVALID USERPrinting by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode (Web version), can be prohibited.When a print job is executed by a user who is not registered in the machine, the "Other User" registered as factory default is used as the login user. For more information, see "Users stored as factory default".Back to top';
body[402]='07-013-06.htm';
dai[402]='AUTOMATICALLY PRINT STORED JOBS AFTER LOGIN';
bun[402]='AUTOMATICALLY PRINT STORED JOBS AFTER LOGINAUTOMATICALLY PRINT STORED JOBS AFTER LOGINWhen retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, you can have the spooled print data automatically print out when the user who enabled retention logs in.Back to top';
body[403]='07-013-07.htm';
dai[403]='DEFAULT NETWORK AUTHENTICATION SERVER SETTING';
bun[403]='DEFAULT NETWORK AUTHENTICATION SERVER SETTINGDEFAULT NETWORK AUTHENTICATION SERVER SETTINGUse this to set the default network authentication server. When you log into Setting mode (Web version) or send a print job to the machine using user information that is not registered in the machine, the authentication server is not known. This setting iWhen login is performed by network authentication using user information that is not registered in the machine, the login user will be the "User" registered as factory default. For more information, see "Users stored as factory default&quotBack to top';
body[404]='07-013-08.htm';
dai[404]='PERFORM LDAP SERVER ACCESS CONTROL';
bun[404]='PERFORM LDAP SERVER ACCESS CONTROLPERFORM LDAP SERVER ACCESS CONTROLRegister the access control information for page count limits, authorities, and favourite operations can be registered on an LDAP server in advance. By using this LDAP server for network authentication, perform the user authentication based on the registePropertyName of property in factory default stateSettingPages Limit GrouppagelimitRegistration number of Pages Limit Group registered in the machine, or a group name previously registered in the machine. Unlimited: unlimitedAuthority GroupauthorityRegistration number of Authority Group registered in the machine, or a group name previously registered in the machine. Admin: admin User: user Guest: guestFavourite Operation GroupfavouriteRegistration number of Favourite Operation Group registered in the machine, or a group name previously registered in the machine. Following the System Settings: systemsettingsMy FoldermyfolderFolder name of user folder stored in the machine. Do not enter if the default folder is specified.Rename the properties that the machine obtains from the LDAP server as follows. In "Setting mode", select [Network Settings] &#8594; [LDAP Settings]. From the Global Address Book setting screen that is displayed, select [Linkage with User ControUsers auto-registeredWhen access control is enabled and login is performed by network authentication, the user information in the LDAP server is automatically registered in the machine. The information stored is as follows:ItemDescriptionUser NameInformation is acquired from the LDAP server.*Initial1IndexUser1Password-Authentication Settings-Authentication ServerNetwork AuthenticationE-mail AddressInformation is acquired from the LDAP server.My FolderPages Limit GroupAuthority GroupFavourite Operation Group*If the user name cannot be acquired, the first 16 characters of the text string entered as the user name for network authentication is used. If the login name is different but the user name received from the LDAP server is the same, or if the user name is already registered in the machine, "Cannot login because the user name entered has been previously registered" will appear If access control information cannot be obtained from the LDAP server used for authentication, user authentication cannot take place.If a user that is registered in the machine is authenticated by network authentication, the user registration settings in the machine will be given priority for the page count limit group, authority group, favourite operations group, and my folder.</lIf the access control obtained from the LDAP server is not registered in the machine, the factory default user authority will be applied.When this function is not enabled and a user is authenticated by network authentication as a non-registered user, the factory default user authority will be applied.Back to top';
body[405]='07-013-09.htm';
dai[405]='DISPLAY USAGE STATUS AFTER LOGIN';
bun[405]='DISPLAY USAGE STATUS AFTER LOGINDISPLAY USAGE STATUS AFTER LOGINWhen user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to display the page counts of a user when the user logs in.Back to top';
body[406]='07-013-10.htm';
dai[406]='LOGIN NAME DISPLAY';
bun[406]='LOGIN NAME DISPLAYLOGIN NAME DISPLAYWhen user authentication is enabled, select whether the login name is shown or asterisks are shown. ItemDescriptionDisplay login nameShow the login name.Display login name with "*"Hide the login name with asterisks.Back to top';
body[407]='07-013-12.htm';
dai[407]='INCLUDE JOB STATUS IN USER AUTHENTICATION';
bun[407]='INCLUDE JOB STATUS IN USER AUTHENTICATIONINCLUDE JOB STATUS IN USER AUTHENTICATIONWhen user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to include the job status in user authentication.Back to top';
body[409]='07-013-13.htm';
dai[409]='AUTOMATIC LOGOUT SETTING';
bun[409]='AUTOMATIC LOGOUT SETTINGAUTOMATIC LOGOUT SETTINGWhen user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to enable automatic logout. The time until logout can be specified up to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds.Back to top';
body[408]='07-013-13-1.htm';
dai[408]='MAKING THE LOGIN NAME CASE SENSITIVE';
bun[408]='MAKING THE LOGIN NAME CASE SENSITIVEMAKING THE LOGIN NAME CASE SENSITIVE Set whether or not to make login names used at the time of user authentication case sensitive.If the checkbox is set to , login names with identical spelling but different cases (upper and lower) will be identified as different login names. Therefore, login names with identical spelling but different cases will be authenticated as user names of diIf the checkbox is set to , case sensitivity for login names is disabled. Therefore, identically spelled user names with upper and lower case character differences will be authenticated as the user name of the same user. If the selected checkbox is changed to , and identical user names with only upper and lower case character differences exist, the user names that have already been registered are identified as user names of different users.Back to top ';
body[410]='07-013-14.htm';
dai[410]='USER INFORMATION PRINT';
bun[410]='USER INFORMATION PRINTUSER INFORMATION PRINTPrints the following item lists.User ListList of Number of Pages UsedPage Limit Group List*AUTHORITY GROUP LISTFavourite Operation Group List*All User Information PrintSelect each item and tap the [Print] key to print it out.* Cannot be printed when no groups are stored. To specify [One Sided] or [Two Sided] printing in List Print, select "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [List Prints].In All User Information Print, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis.User ListList of Number of Pages UsedPage Limit Group ListFavourite Operation Group ListBack to top';
body[411]='07-013-15.htm';
dai[411]='EDIT HELP DISPLAY OF LOGIN SCREEN';
bun[411]='EDIT HELP DISPLAY OF LOGIN SCREENEDIT HELP DISPLAY OF LOGIN SCREENSettings you have created here is displayed on the login screen.Back to top ';
body[412]='07-013-16.htm';
dai[412]='RESETTING THE COUNTER AFTER E-MAIL STATUS TRANSFER';
bun[412]='RESETTING THE COUNTER AFTER E-MAIL STATUS TRANSFERRESETTING THE COUNTER AFTER E-MAIL STATUS TRANSFERAfter E-mail Status has been sent, the counter is reset.Back to top';
body[413]='07-015.htm';
dai[413]='ORGANIZATION/GROUP LIST';
bun[413]='ORGANIZATION/GROUP LISTORGANIZATION/GROUP LISTThis is used to store user groups.Tap each group name to enter them directly.Back to top';
body[414]='07-016.htm';
dai[414]='PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST';
bun[414]='PAGE LIMIT GROUP LISTPAGE LIMIT GROUP LISTThis is used to register the page limit settings in advance for each group. The page limit for each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered.[Add] keyUse this to add a new group.List displayThis shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group.Storing page limit groupsWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 20 groups can be registered. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Editing a page limit groupSelecting a group from the list displays the edit screen for that group. For information on the settings, see "Settings". To return a group to the factory default state, set "Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model" to &quotSettingsItemDescriptionGroup NameStore the name of the group (up to 32 characters).Select the Home Screen to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.Function NamesThe name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function.Page LimitWhen [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input from the mode is prohibited. When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be input/output in that mode. When [Limited] is selected, enter a page limit (1 to 9999Back to top';
body[415]='07-017.htm';
dai[415]='MACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTING';
bun[415]='MACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTINGMACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTINGSets the page limit for the machine.SettingsItemDescriptionFunction NamesThe name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function.Page LimitWhen [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input from the mode is prohibited. When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be input/output in that mode. When [Limited] is selected, enter a page limit (1 to 9999Back to top';
body[416]='07-019.htm';
dai[416]='AUTHORITY GROUP LIST';
bun[416]='AUTHORITY GROUP LISTAUTHORITY GROUP LISTThis is used to store the settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered.[Add] keyUse this to add a new group.List displayThis shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group.Storing authority groupsWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 20 groups can be registered. For detailed information about each of the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups".Editing an authority groupSelecting a group from the list displays the edit screen for that group. For detailed information about each of the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups". To return a group to the factory default state, select the group from the list and select any of options [Return to the Administrator Authority], [Return to the system administrator authority.], [Return to the User Authority], [Return to the Guest AutList of settings and factory default settings of template groupsItemDescriptionGroup NameStore a name of group (up to 32 characters).Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.The factory default groups and their settings are shown below.&nbsp;AdminSystem Administrator AuthorityUserGuestScanner Prohibited AuthorityCopyApproval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedSpecial Modes UsageAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedUtilize sending function at copyAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedApproval Setting to Use Toner Save ModeNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SavePDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedPRINTERApproval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedFTP Pull PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedUSB Memory Direct PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedNetwork Folder Pull PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedSending while printingAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedToner Save Mode Usage Approval Setting*1No Toner SavingNo Toner SavingNo Toner SavingNo Toner SavingNo Toner SavePDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedImage Send Access to Fax Data Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Approval Settings for Each ModeE-mailFTPDesktopNetwork FolderInternet Fax SendPC-I-Fax SendFax SendPC-Fax SendPC ScanAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedAll allowedAll prohibitedColour ScanAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedSpecial Modes UsageAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedProgram RegistrationAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedApproval Setting for AddressingApproval Setting for Direct EntryApproval Setting to Use a Local Address BookApproval Settings to Use a Global Address BookAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedDocument FilingScan to HDDApproval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedAllowedSpecial Modes UsageAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedScan to Ext.Memory Dev.Approval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedProhibitedSpecial Modes UsageAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedPrints (Document Filing)Approval SettingAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedAllowedAll allowedSpecial Modes UsageAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedApproval Setting to Use Toner Save ModeNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveNo Toner SaveDocument Filing Image CheckAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedDisplay only the Files of Logged-in UsersProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedSharp OSASharp OSA Approval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedWeb BrowsingWeb Browsing Approval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedAllowedCommon FunctionsApproval Settings for 2-Sided PrintAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedChanging Billing CodeAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedOutput Approval SettingsAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedSecurityPrint Jobs Other than Print Hold JobAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedFile Saving: Quick File/Sharing ModeProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedFile Saving: Confidential ModeAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedPattern Print Input - Direct EntryAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedAllowedSYSTEM SETTINGSSYSTEM SETTINGSSystem Settings*2Allowed*3Allowed*3Only user authority settings are allowedAll settings prohibitedOnly user authority settings are allowedWeb SettingsDisplay of Device/Network StatusAllowedAllowedAllowedProhibitedAllowedPower ResetProhibitedProhibitedMachine IdentificationProhibitedProhibitedApplication Settings(Except for Pre-set Text, Forwarding / Storing Table)ProhibitedProhibitedRegistration of Pre-set Text/Forward TableAllowedAllowedE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSProhibitedProhibitedJob Log SettingProhibitedProhibitedPort Control/Filter SettingsProhibitedProhibitedCustom Link SettingProhibitedProhibitedOperation Manual DownloadAllowedAllowed *1&nbsp; This function is not available in some countries and regions.*2&nbsp; For information on each setting, see the setting mode list.*3&nbsp; All allowed except for Change Administrator Password. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.Back to top';
body[417]='07-020-01.htm';
dai[417]='FAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LIST';
bun[417]='FAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LISTFAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LISTThe preferred operation environment can be set for each group. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by registering the language in a favouriteSettingsItemDescriptionGroup NameStore a name of group (up to 32 characters).Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.CopyInitial Status SettingsSelect settings for Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, 2-Sided, Output, Offset, Output Tray, Staple Position, and Punch.Image SendInitial Status SettingsSelect settings for Image Orientation, Exposure, Resolution, Colour Mode, File Format, and Original Image Type. Select settings for Specified Pages per File, and Fax Sender Name.Document FilingImage OrientationSpecify the image orientation.Initial Status SettingsSelect settings for Colour Mode, Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution.Scan to Ext.Memory Dev.: Initial Status SettingsSelect settings for Colour Mode, File Format, Specified Pages per File, Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution.Prints (Document Filing)Set the default output tray for document filing print.SYSTEM SETTINGSLarge Character ModeTurn this option ON to display large characters on the Setting mode screen.Original Size Detector SettingSelect whether Inch sizes or AB sizes are detected, or disable detection on the document glass.Display Language SettingSelect the display language.Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job StatusSelect whether to display the number of progress sets or remaining sets as the job status.Key Operation SettingSet the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting.Long-touch Detection TimeSelect a time when a long key touch is detected.Double Tap Interval SettingSelect an interval when a double tap is detected.Keys Touch SoundSet the sound made when keys are touched.Keyboard SelectSet the language that appears on the keyboard.MFP Display Pattern SettingSelect the colour pattern used in the touch panel.Automatically print stored jobs after loginWhen retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in.Customize Key SettingSelect to use System Settings or use the registered customized key settings for performing Customize Key Setting.Home Screen SettingsSelect to use System Settings or use the stored home screen settings for performing Home Screen Settings.Preview SettingDefault List/Thumbnail DisplaySelect the default thumbnail display of the received data that is to be handled in fax or Internet fax mode.File Retrieve of Document FilingSelect the default display for document filing. It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.';
body[418]='07-020-02.htm';
dai[418]='HOME SCREEN LIST';
bun[418]='HOME SCREEN LISTHOME SCREEN LISTHome screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List.SettingsItemDescriptionNameEnter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name.Select the Home Screen to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied.TemplateA template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the selected template can be reviewed.Key Layout of the ScreenThe layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.Home buttonRegisters the function to use for the selected key number.Fixed buttonRegisters the function to use for the selected key number. This button is displayed on all pages of the home screen.TemplateSelect a layout pattern of the registered key.Rename Home ScreenEnter a home screen name to change the existing name.Text ColourSelect a text colour.Icon StyleSelect a shape and a colour of each button from the default designs.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.Back to top';
body[419]='07-020-03.htm';
dai[419]='CUSTOMIZED KEY LIST';
bun[419]='CUSTOMIZED KEY LISTCUSTOMIZED KEY LISTAssign shortcut keys to frequently used functions. They will be displayed in the base screen of each mode. The display settings returns to the factory default state when you tap the [Return to the Factory Default Setting] key for each mode.SettingsItemDescriptionKey NameEnter a name for the customized key (maximum of 20 characters).Function Menu/Program/OthersSelect the function that you wish to assign to the key. The functions that can be selected vary by mode.HideIf this item is enabled, the customized keys are not displayed.Back to top';
body[420]='07-021.htm';
dai[420]='USER COUNT';
bun[420]='USER COUNTUSER COUNTThis displays the total number of pages printed by each user.[Select All] keyThis selects all users.[Clear Checked] keyThis clears all selections.[Show] keyThis shows the counts of the selected user.[Clear Count] keyUse this to reset the counts of the selected user.User ListThis shows the users stored as factory default and the currently stored users. When you select a user name, the user is selected.View User CountWhen you select a user and tap the [Show] key, this user count is displayed.ItemDescriptionNextDisplays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).PreviousDisplays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).Show CountsDisplays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function.Page LimitThe page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count.If peripheral devices are not mounted, their count is not displayed.Resetting user countsSelect a user in the setting screen and tap the [Delete] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear. The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in each case are described in When a single user is selectedItemDescriptionNextDisplays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).PreviousDisplays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).Show CountsDisplays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function.Clear CountReset the count of the selected item to "0".Clear All CountClears all counts of the selected user to zero (0).When multiple users are selectedItemDescriptionShow CountsDisplays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function.Clear CountReset the count of the selected item to "0".Clear All CountClears all counts of the selected user to zero (0).Save User CountClicking the [Save] button saves the user count information as a data file.To delete the user count information in the machine, click the checkbox next to the "Save and Delete the Data" so that it is selected and click the [Save] button.This cannot be set on the machine. It can be set in Setting mode (Web version).Back to top';
body[421]='07-022_01.htm';
dai[421]='MAIN CODE LIST';
bun[421]='MAIN CODE LISTMAIN CODE LIST You can display a list of main codes to search for, register, correct, or delete a main code.[Search] key Searches for a main code.[Add] key Adds a new main code.ListDisplays a list of registered main codes. Selecting each main code displays the window to correct the main code.[Delete] keySet the check box on the left of each main code to , then tap the [Delete] key; the selected main code is deleted.Register a main codeTapping the [Add] key displays the registration window. A total of up to 2,000 main and sub codes can be registered. For information on setting items, refer to "List of setting items". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit and ReCorrect a main codeSelecting a main code from the list displays the window to correct the main code. For information on setting items, refer to "List of setting items". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit] key; you can apply the corrected contentSearch for a main codeEnter the main code and main code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed.List of setting itemsItemDescriptionMain CodeEnter the main code Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.Main Code NameEnter the main code name. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters.Public GroupThe registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group. When not specifying a public destination, select [Public to All]. When specifying a public destination, select [Designate Public Address.], then specify a group to share the billing To register a group for specifying a public destinationSelect "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [User Control] - [Organization/Group List].Back to top ';
body[422]='07-022_02.htm';
dai[422]='SUB CODE LIST';
bun[422]='SUB CODE LISTSUB CODE LIST You can display a list of sub codes to search for, register, correct, or delete a sub code.[Search] key Searches for a sub code.[Add] key Adds a new sub code.ListDisplays a list of registered sub codes. Selecting each sub code displays the window to correct the sub code.[Delete] keySet the check box on the left of each sub code to , then tap the [Delete] key; the selected sub code is deleted.Register a sub codeTapping the [Add] key displays the registration window. A total of up to 2,000 main and sub codes can be registered. For information on setting items, refer to "List of setting items". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit and ReCorrect a sub codeSelecting a sub code from the list displays the window to correct the sub code. For information on setting items, refer to "List of setting items". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit] key; you can apply the corrected contents Search for a sub codeEnter the sub code and sub code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed.List of setting itemsItemDescriptionSub CodeEnter the sub code using up to 32 single-byte characters.Sub Code NameEnter the sub code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters.Public GroupThe registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group. When not specifying a public destination, select [Public to All]. When specifying a public destination, select [Designate Public Address.], then specify a group to share the billing cTo register a group for specifying a public destinationSelect "Setting Mode (Administrator)" - [User Control] - [Organization/Group List].Back to top ';
body[423]='07-022_03.htm';
dai[423]='ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS';
bun[423]='ADMINISTRATION SETTINGSADMINISTRATION SETTINGS Change the billing code setting.Use Billing CodeSwitch whether to enable or disable a billing code.Use Code SettingsA use code is automatically assigned when no billing code is entered. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.Take Over Billing Code at Mode TransitionIf this function is enabled, the billing code entry window is not displayed at the time of mode transition.Disable Change of Billing Code.If this function is enabled, you cannot register, edit, or delete a billing code. In addition, you cannot directly type in a billing code in the billing code entry window.Apply Use Code While Logged in with Device AccountIf this function is enabled, a use code is always set while you are logging in with device account.Exception Setting for Billing Code FunctionThe billing code entry window is displayed when the external application that is set to enable is started.The setting items are as follows.Application Name registered as Standard ApplicationWeb Browse** Displayed when the Web Browsing Expansion Kit is installed.Billing Code Display Name SettingYou can change the main code or sub code name displayed in the billing code entry window or billing code selection window.Back to top ';
body[424]='07-023.htm';
dai[424]='TOTAL COUNT';
bun[424]='TOTAL COUNTTOTAL COUNTThis function shows the page count in each mode.Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the "Other Prints" count.The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.Before printing the number of pages used, select "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [List Prints].In All Sending Address List, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis.Individual List Group ListBack to top';
body[425]='07-024-02.htm';
dai[425]='CLOCK ADJUST';
bun[425]='CLOCK ADJUSTCLOCK ADJUSTThis is the first and basic setting for operating the machine.Use this to set the date and time in the machine\'s built-in clock.If [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set.ItemDescriptionSpecify Time ZoneIf your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is behind GMT, select [-].Date&amp;Time SettingsSelect and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.Synchronize with Internet Time ServerThis can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet. The machine\'s time is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet time server.Back to top';
body[426]='07-024-03.htm';
dai[426]='DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING';
bun[426]='DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTINGDAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine. If [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set. Enable daylight saving time. ItemDescriptionDaylight Saving Time SettingSelect whether or not the Daylight Saving Time Setting is enabled. If disabled, the following settings will not be possible.Select Setting TypeSpecify whether the starting and ending day of daylight saving time are to be set using the day of the week or the date.Start TimeSet the starting time of daylight saving time. Set the starting month. If you selected "Day of the Week" in "Select Setting Type", set the starting week of daylight saving time and then the starting day. If you selected "Date&quotCompleting TimeSet the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting time.Adjustment TimeSet the time to be adjusted when daylight saving time begins. When this function is used, the time changes at the beginning and end of daylight saving time as indicated in the table below. AreaStandard time &#8594; Daylight saving timeDaylight saving time &#8594; Standard timeEurope*Last Sunday in March, 1:00 to 2:00 AMLast Sunday in October, 1:00 to 0:00 AMAustralia, New ZealandLast Sunday in October, 2:00 to 3:00 AMLast Sunday in March 3:00 to 2:00 AMOther countriesSelect the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. The clock setting is configured to normal time plus one hour. When the is selected, clock returns to normal time. * In some countries, the starting and ending times of daylight saving time may be different than the times set in the machine.Back to top ';
body[427]='07-024-04.htm';
dai[427]='DATE FORMAT';
bun[427]='DATE FORMATDATE FORMATThis is the first and basic setting for operating the machine.The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed.If [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set.ItemDescriptionCurrent SettingThe current time appears in the format set in Date Format.FormatSet the order of display of the year, month, and day.SeparatorSelect one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.Day-Name PositionSelect whether the day name appears before or after the date.Time DisplaySelect 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time. 12-Hour Display: 00:00 AM to 11:59 AM/00:00 PM to 11:59 PM 24-Hour Display: 00:00 to 23:59Back to top';
body[428]='07-024-05.htm';
dai[428]='KEYBOARD SELECT';
bun[428]='KEYBOARD SELECTKEYBOARD SELECTThis is the first and basic setting for operating the machine.The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed. The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below.English (US)English (UK)JapaneseFrenchGermanSwedishNorwegianFinnishDanishRussianGreekTurkishBack to top';
body[429]='07-025.htm';
dai[429]='LIST PRINT (USER)';
bun[429]='LIST PRINT (USER)LIST PRINT (USER)Lists showing the settings and information registered in the machine can be printed.List nameDescriptionAll Custom Setting ListPrints all hardware status, software status, printer environment settings, and paper tray settings.Printer Test PageThis is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page (network interface settings, etc.).PCL Symbol Set ListPCL Internal Font ListPCL Extended Font ListPS Font ListNIC PageSending Address ListLists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine.Individual ListGroup ListProgram ListMemory Box ListAll Sending Address ListDocument Filing Folder ListThis shows the folder names for document filing. To specify 1-Sided or 2-Sided Print, select "Setting mode (administrator)" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [List Prints]. The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.You cannot print the printer test page if you have selected, from the "Setting mode (administrator)", [System Settings] &#8594; [Printer Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] and if you have set the [Prohibit Test Page Printing] option.Back to top';
body[430]='07-026-01.htm';
dai[430]='TRAY SETTINGS';
bun[430]='TRAY SETTINGSTRAY SETTINGSPaper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section.These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray. When the [Tray Settings] key is tapped, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.Auto Tray SwitchingWhen a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of paper is automatically selected and printing continues.Settings of each trayWhen the [Change] key is tapped, the corresponding setting screen appears. The following settings can be configured.ItemDescriptionTypeSelect a type of paper to be loaded into the tray. The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For more information, see "Tray Settings". To user type setup, see "PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION".SizeSelect the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray. The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected above. For more information, see "Tray Settings". If the desired size does nFeeding Approved JobSelect the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be used with the selected tray, disable the function. When the "Type" is other than plain paper, recycled paper, coloured paper, or a user type, [Fax] and [InterneIf the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray, a problem or misfeed may occur when printing. To change the paper size in a tray, see "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray properties cannot be changed in this screen.If [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Disabling of Tray Settings] is selected, the tray settings (except for the bypass tray) cannot be configured.Tray SettingsPaper TrayPaper TypeSizeTray 1Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, User TypeAuto-AB (A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x13")), Auto-Inch (11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 7-1/4"x10-1/2"R), 8-1/2"x13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 216 mm x 3Tray 2 (when a stand/500/2x500/3x500/500&amp;2000 sheet paper drawer is installed) Tray 3 (when a stand/2x500/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed)Tray 4 (when a stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed)Tray 3 (when a stand/500&amp;2000 sheet paper draweris installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, User TypeA4, 8-1/2"x11"Tray 4 (when a stand/500&amp;2000 sheet paper draweris installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, User TypeA4, 8-1/2"x11"Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, User TypeA4, 8-1/2" x 11"BypassIn addition to the paper types of trays 1 to 4, Heavy Paper 2*1, Heavy Paper 3*1, Thin Paper, Glossy PaperAuto-AB (A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11", 216mmx330mm (8-1/2"x13")*2, 216mmx340mm (8-1/2"x13-2/5")*2, 216mmx343mm (8-1/2"x13-1/2")*2, Postcard), Auto-Inch (12"x18", 11&quoLabelsAuto-AB (A4, A4R, B5, B5R), Auto-Inch (8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R)TransparencyAuto-AB (A4, A4R), Auto-Inch (8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R)Tab PaperAuto-AB (A4), Auto-Inch (8-1/2"x11")EnvelopeCom-10, Monarch, DL, C5, form 3, form 4, international form 2, international form 4, square form 2, square form 3*1Heavy paper 1: 106 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (28 lbs bond to 110 lbs index) heavy paper Heavy paper 2: 221 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (110 lbs bond to 140 lbs index) heavy paperHeavy paper 3: 257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (140 lbs index to 110 lbs cover) heavy paper*2The size that is automatically detected is set in "Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen (see below).Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection"Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is automatically detected from similar sizes when the automatic paper size detection takes place. Select one of two sizes when &quAuto-AB216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")Auto-Inch8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm)Back to top';
body[431]='07-026-02.htm';
dai[431]='CUSTOM SIZE REGISTRATION (BYPASS)';
bun[431]='CUSTOM SIZE REGISTRATION (BYPASS)CUSTOM SIZE REGISTRATION (BYPASS)Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section.If you frequently use a non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, register that paper size in advance. Registering the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you need to use it. Up to three paper sizes can be registered. Tap the Select whether you wish to enter the size in mm ("Size Input-AB") or inches ("Size Input-Inch"), and then set the X and Y dimensions of the paper."Size Input-AB"The X direction can be set between 140 mm and 432 mm. The factory default setting is 420 mm. The Y direction can be set between 90 mm and 297 mm. The factory default setting is 297 mm."Size Input-Inch"The X direction can be set between 5-1/2" and 17". The factory default setting is 17". The Y direction can be set between 3-5/8" and 11-5/8". The factory default setting is 11".Back to top';
body[432]='07-027.htm';
dai[432]='PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION';
bun[432]='PAPER TYPE REGISTRATIONPAPER TYPE REGISTRATIONStore a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of paper properties. Up to 7 paper types can be registered.ItemDescriptionType NameRegister any name.The factory default names are "User Type 1" to "User Type 7".Fixed Paper SideUse this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used.Disable DuplexUse this setting when paper loaded cannot be used for 2-sided printing.Disable ReverseUse this setting when using paper that cannot be reversed.Disable StapleUse this setting when paper used cannot be stapled.Disable PunchUse this setting when paper used cannot be punched.The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.Back to top';
body[433]='07-029.htm';
dai[433]='FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD';
bun[433]='FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARDFAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARDINTERNET FAX SETTINGSThese settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.Reception StartTap this key to immediately connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you have received Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed.Manual Reception Key in Initial ScreenThis displays the [Internet Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.Forward Received DataWhen the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another Internet fax machine.To cancel forwarding Tap the job status display and cancel fax forwarding in the similar way as for a transmission job.Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD - FAX FUNCTIONS."To enable "Reception Start", the POP3 server settings must be configured. See [Application Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings].To register a forwarding address, see "Set Address for Data Forwarding" in "Setting Mode".If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was cancelled or a communication error occurred, the faxes that were to be forwarded will return to the print queue on the machine.If the initial pages of a fax were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.If you select [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Operation Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] and if "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled, you are prompted to enter a password. EntBack to top';
body[434]='07-030-01.htm';
dai[434]='CONDITION SETTINGS';
bun[434]='CONDITION SETTINGSCONDITION SETTINGSIf you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (that is, if you print data using the MS-DOS system or if you print data using the PC that does not have the provided printer driver installed), set the detailed printing conditions.When printing using the printer driver, the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings.SettingsItemSettingCopies1 - 999 setsOrientationPortraitHorizontalDefault Paper SizeA3W, A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"), 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2&Default Output TrayCentre Tray (Not displayed if a finisher is installed)Offset Tray*1Finisher Upper Tray*2Finisher Lower Tray*2Right TrayDefault Paper TypePlain Paper, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Recycle Paper, ColourInitial Resolution Settings600 dpi600 dpi (High Quality)1200 dpiDisable Blank Page Print (Enabled) (Disabled)Line Thickness*30 to 92-Sided Print1-Sided2-Sided (Booklet)2-Sided (Tablet)N-Up Print*4N-Up1-Up2-Up4-Up8-UpLayoutLeft To Right*5Right To Left*5Upper-Left To Right*6Upper-Left To Lower*6Upper-Right To Left*6Upper-Right To Lower*6Fit To Page*7 (Use Fit to Page) (Do not use Fit to Page)Output (Use Print per Unit) (Do not use Print per Unit) Staple Position*1: None, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, 2 Staples (Top) (Use Punch)*8 (Do not use Punch)*8Quick File (Disabled) (Enabled)*1When the finisher is installed*2When the saddle finisher (large stacker) or finisher (large stacker) is installed*3This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics. Except for CAD and other specialized uses, there is normally no need to change this setting. When "0" is selected, all lines are printed at a width of 1 dot.*4Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", and 8-1/2" x 11". (This function may not take effect with some print methods.)*5Can be selected when 2-Up is selected.*6Can be selected when 4-Up/8-Up is selected.*7Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.*8When a punch module is installedBack to top';
body[435]='07-030-02.htm';
dai[435]='PCL SETTINGS';
bun[435]='PCL SETTINGSPCL SETTINGSThis is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.SettingsItemDescriptionSettingPCL Symbol Set SettingSpecify the symbol set used for printing.Select from 35 items.PCL Font SettingSelect a font used for printing.Internal FontExtended Font (List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not installed.)PCL Line Feed CodeThis setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received.0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FFWide A4When this is enabled, 80 characters per line are printed on the A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper using a 10-pitch font. (When this setting is disabled, up to 78 characters are printed per line.) (Enabled) (Disabled)Back to top';
body[436]='07-030-03.htm';
dai[436]='POSTSCRIPT SETTING';
bun[436]='POSTSCRIPT SETTINGPOSTSCRIPT SETTINGWhen an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format.ItemDescriptionSettingPrint PS ErrorWhen a PS (PostScript) error occurs during PostScript printing, this setting determines whether or not an error notice is printed. (Enabled) (Disabled)Binary ProcessingReceive PostScript data in binary format. (Enabled) (Disabled)Back to top';
body[437]='07-031.htm';
dai[437]='DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL';
bun[437]='DOCUMENT FILING CONTROLDOCUMENT FILING CONTROLDocument Filing Control is used to create, edit, and delete custom folders for document filing.[Register Next] keyUse this to add a new custom folder.List displayDisplays a list of registered user folders. A folder can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for the folder.Creating a custom folderWhen you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 1000 custom folders can be registered. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Editing and deleting a custom folderA custom folder can be selected from the list to open an edit/delete screen for the custom folder. For information on the settings, see "Settings". Delete the folder using the [Delete] key.SettingsItemDescriptionFolder NameEnter a name (maximum of 28 characters) for the custom folder to be created. A name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder.Initial of FolderEnter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the position of the one-touch key in the index.Password of FolderTo set a password for the folder, enter the desired number (5 to 8 digits).Select User NameSelect the desired user name from the user list.If the folder has a password, the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted.A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.Back to top';
body[438]='07-032.htm';
dai[438]='USB-DEVICE CHECK';
bun[438]='USB-DEVICE CHECKUSB-DEVICE CHECKCheck the current connection of USB devices to the machine.The connection of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear.Back to top';
body[439]='07-033-01.htm';
dai[439]='OPERATION SETTINGS';
bun[439]='OPERATION SETTINGSOPERATION SETTINGSEnlarge Display ModeDisplays large characters on the screen. appears in the system area when Large Character Mode is enabled. Keys Touch SoundControls the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off. You can also have three peeps sound at initial values when setting the ratio in copy mode or when adjusting the exposure in any mode.Screen in which setting is effectiveInitial valueRatio setting screen in base screen of copy modeRatio 100%Exposure setting screen in base screen of copy modeExposure level: 3 (medium)Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modesExposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing modeKey Touch Sound at Initial PointWhen you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached. Auto Clear SettingThe time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds from 10 to 240 in increments of 10 seconds. If the machine is not used for the duration of time set here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that have been selected and rCancel Auto Clear TimerThis is used to disable the auto clear function.Message Time SettingThe duration of time that messages appear in the touch panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12.MFP Display Language SettingThe language that appears in the touch panel can be changed to any language.When user authentication is enabled and a display language is specified in the favourite operation group, that setting is given priority.Default Display SettingsSet the screen that appears after auto clear and login. You can select from Copy, E-mail, Network Folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet Fax, Fax, Data Entry, Address Book, Document Filing, Home Screen, or the Sharp OSA Screen*. * When the application communication module is installed.Display Favourite Menus as DefaultYou can specify to display the "Favourite" first during mode selection.Display Action Panel as default.Specify whether or not to display with the action panel on the screen.Display Confirmation Dialog when job is cancelled. When the cancel key is pressed during copying or image sending, this setting displays a confirmation dialog instead of immediately cancelling the job. Disabling of Job Priority OperationThe job priority function can be disabled. When this is done, the [Priority] key will not appear in the job status screen.Disabling of Bypass PrintingThis setting is used to disable bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the paper required for the job is not available in any of the trays). * This does not include cases where the paper ran out during the job.Key Operation Setting Time for Accepting Key EntryThis setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered. The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. By lengthening the time setting, key input can be prevented when a key is tapDisable Auto Key RepeatThis is used to disable key repeat. Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously not only each time the key is tapped but while a key is tapped.Long-touch Detection TimeSelect a time when a long key touch is detected.Double Tap Speed IntervalSelect an interval when a double tap is detected.Disabling of Clock AdjustmentDisables the date and time from being changed.Disabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisables the use of the covers and inserts function.Set Keyboard PrioritySelects to use the soft keyboard or an external keyboard to enter characters if the external keyboard is attached.Display current path in System SettingsWhile the Setting mode of the machine is in use, the menu position is displayed in hierarchical form at the top of the touch panel.Enable link of current pathIf "Display current path in System Settings" is turned ON, the link of the current path is enabled.Eco Recommendation Function Shows recommended copy/print settings for copy, document filing reprint, and direct print. Display the copy/print settings screen for saving paper when using copy, document filing print, and direct print.Initial Original Count SettingSpecifies whether or not "Original Count" in Others is enabled for each function.COPYING COPYINGIMAGE SENDScannerInternet FaxFaxData EntryDOCUMENT FILINGScan to HDDSave in External Memory DeviceUnify 10-key number in ascending order from upper leftArranges numeric keys in the ascending order from the left top position.MFP Display Pattern SettingSelect a colour pattern in the touch panel from seven colour patterns. A sample of the selected template can be reviewed.Preview SettingReceived Data Image Check SettingSelect whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown.This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed.Default List/Thumbnail DisplayFax/I-Fax Reception Data: Select whether the default display format of the received fax/I-Fax list screen is list or thumbnails.File Retrieve of Document FilingMain Folder/Quick File Folder: Select whether the default display format of the document filing main folder and temporary folder screens is list or thumbnails.Custom Folder: Select whether the default display format of the document filing custom folder screen is list or thumbnails.Remote Operation SettingsConfigure settings required for remote operation of the machine from a PC connected to the same network.Remote Software OperationOperation Authority: This is used when remote software is used to operate the machine remotely.View Password Entry Screen: When remote software is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Operation from Specified PCOperation Authority: This is used to allow remote operation of the machine using the specified PC.Host Name or IP Address of PC: Enter the host name or IP address of the PC to be connected to the machine. Enter a maximum of 127 characters.View Password Entry Screen: When a specified PC is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Operation by User Who Has PasswordOperation Authority: This is used to allow a user who has a password to operate the machine remotely. For information on the password, consult your service technician.View Password Entry Screen: When a user who has a password operates the machine remotely, he or she can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Cookie SettingSpecify whether or not to save or delete cookies to be used when using Sharp OSA or viewing Web pages.If "Not hold Cookie" is selected, received cookies are discarded when operations have ended.Back to top';
body[440]='07-033-02.htm';
dai[440]='SOFT KEYBOARD TEMPLATE SETTING';
bun[440]='SOFT KEYBOARD TEMPLATE SETTINGSOFT KEYBOARD TEMPLATE SETTINGRegister a text that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance. Enter a maximum of 16 characters.Back to top';
body[441]='07-033-03.htm';
dai[441]='CUSTOMIZE KEY SETTING';
bun[441]='CUSTOMIZE KEY SETTINGCUSTOMIZE KEY SETTINGAssign frequently used functions to shortcut keys. They will be displayed in the favourite screen in the base screen of each mode.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.The following settings can be configured.ItemDescriptionCustomized Keys 1 - 40Enter a name for the customized key (maximum of 20 characters).ItemSelect the function that you wish to assign to the key. The functions that can be selected vary by mode.Return to the DefaultsThe selected favourite settings are returned to the factory default.Back to top';
body[442]='07-033-04.htm';
dai[442]='HOME SCREEN SETTINGS';
bun[442]='HOME SCREEN SETTINGSHOME SCREEN SETTINGSYou can configure the home screen that appears when the [Home Screen] button is pressed.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears. The following settings can be configured.ItemItemDescriptionHome keys 1 to 60Set the scroll keys at the top of Home screen. When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears.Fixed keys 1 to 10Set the scroll keys always displayed at the bottom of the Home screen. When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears.TemplateSelect one of six patterns. The key layout of the pattern selected with the [Key Layout of the Screen] is displayed.Use Custom ImageSet the background image that select your favourite image.File or Folder NameSelect the file or folder that want to register the background image.ImageItemDescriptionBackground ImageDisplays the selected background image file name. You can change the image by tapping the [Change] key.Back to top';
body[443]='07-033-04_2.htm';
dai[443]='MODE KEY DISPLAY SETTING';
bun[443]='MODE KEY DISPLAY SETTINGMODE KEY DISPLAY SETTINGThe mode selection keys can be displayed at the top of the screen.ItemDescriptionDisplay mode keys in screenThe mode selection keys can be displayed at the top of the screen.Display of mode keysSelect the modes shown in the mode selection keys.Display mode keys in home screenSet whether the modes selection keys are shown in the home screen. When this is disabled, the mode selection keys do not appear in the home screen even when "Display mode keys in screen" is enabled.Back to top';
body[444]='07-034-01.htm';
dai[444]='VARIOUS SETTING';
bun[444]='VARIOUS SETTINGVARIOUS SETTING Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. Original Size Detector Setting One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function. SelectionsDetectable original sizesDocument GlassDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x13")AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x13"), 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2"x13-2/5")AB-5216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2"x13-1/2")Inch-111" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A3, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Inch-211" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A3, A4, 11"x17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2"x13"), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"Inch-311" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"A3, A4, 11"x17", 8-1/2"x13-2/5 (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 5-1/2"x8-1/2"Cancel Detection at Document Glass Original size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document glass are treated as special size originals. Disabling of Document Feeder Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.) Original Feeding Mode The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, scan to HDD, and saved in external memory device modes. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time youMixed Size Original (Same Width (Copy mode only)/Different Width)Slow Scan ModeBlank Page Skip** Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode. Disabling of Duplex This is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions. Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Tray Setting This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for the bypass tray). Disabling of Finisher This setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Offset Disables an offset. Disabling of Stapler This setting is used to prohibit the use of staple, such as when the staple of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions. Saddle Stitch Position Adjust This setting is used to adjust the staple position (saddle fold position) when a saddle finisher is installed and the saddle stitch function is used.The value can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm within a range of +/-5.0 mm from the home position of each paper size. Disabling of Punch This setting is used to prohibit the use of punch, such as when the punch module of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions. Auto Paper Selection Setting The paper types* that the Auto Paper Selection function will select can be specified. Select one of the following settings:Plain PaperPlain and Recycle PaperRecycle PaperThe Auto Paper Selection function will not select any paper types other than the paper types specified with this setting.*The paper type set for each paper tray by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings].Tandem Connection Setting When two machines are used as network printers using TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port number and IP address of the machine used as the tandem slave machine. Disabling of Master Machine Mode To prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.) Disabling of Slave Machine Mode To prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.) To use the tandem function when user authentication is enabled, the same login name and password must be used on both the master machine and slave machine. If the same login name and password are not used, the page count may not be added to the appropria The factory default setting for the port number is [50001]. Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change the port number. Auto Switching of Finisher TraysIf the number of sheets on the upper finisher tray reaches the sheet limit, output willautomatically switch to the lower tray.Optimization of Hard Disk Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. This function optimizes the hard drive of the machine by defragmenting data. If a job is in progress, a message will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is finished. During optimization, the following operations are not possible:Access to Setting mode (Web version), and reception of print dataUse of keys on the operation panelTurning off the power with the main power switch of the machine.Auto Power Shut-OffWhen optimization is completed, the machine will automatically restart. When the document filing function is frequently used and output of files seems somewhat slow, optimizing the hard drive may improve performance. Fusing Cleaning Mode Use this function to clean the machine\'s fusing unit when dots or other dirt appear on the printed side of the paper.When this function is executed, "V" printed paper is output and the fusing unit is cleaned. If improvement is not noticed after the first time you use the function, try executing the function again. Fusing Control Settings These are used to control the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper.These settings apply to plain paper, recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, coloured paper, and user type paper.You can select "60g/m2 to 89g/m2" or "90g/m2 to 105g/m2" ("16 to 23 lbs." or "23+ to 28 lbs."). Be sure to use only paper that is in the same weight range as the weight range set here. Do not mix plain or other paper that is outside the range with the paper in the tray.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER" in "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE"List Print To specify [One Sided] or [Two Sided] printing in List Print. Black Streak Reduction Specify to use the black streak reduction or not.The black streak reduction can be used for Scan Original, Copy, Image Send, and Scan to HDD functions.If the black streak reduction is enabled, select any of the following options.Process Black Thin StreaksNormalProcess Black Thin and Thick StreaksDisplay warning message for black streaks detection.Set this option to display a warning message when black streaks are detected by the document feeder. Back to top ';
body[445]='07-035-01.htm';
dai[445]='INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS';
bun[445]='INITIAL STATUS SETTINGSINITIAL STATUS SETTINGSThe following settings are related to copying. Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).The copier settings are reset to the initial state when the [Power] button is turned on, when the [CA] key is tapped, or when the auto clear interval has elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode. The following settingsItemDescriptionPaper TraySpecify the paper tray that is selected by default.Exposure TypeConfigure default exposure mode settings.Copy RatioSpecify the copy ratio that is selected by default.2-Sided CopyConfigure the 2-sided mode settings that are selected by default. If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex function to any setting other than "1-Side to 1-Side" and the duplex function or automatic document feeder faiOutputSet the print output method and output tray that are selected by default.OffsetSet whether or not offset is performed in the default settings.Return to the DefaultsThis returns all items to the factory default settings.Back to top';
body[446]='07-035-02.htm';
dai[446]='COPY SETTINGS';
bun[446]='COPY SETTINGSCOPY SETTINGSThe following settings are related to copying. Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).Copy Exposure AdjustmentAdjusts the exposure level when [Auto] is used for the copy exposure.Sets for the document glass and for the automatic document feeder.Rotation Copy SettingWhen the original and paper are placed in different orientations, this function automatically rotates the image 90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper.Enable the Rotation Copy setting to copy an A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size original on A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) paper.Add or Change Extra Preset RatiosAdd two enlargement preset ratio values (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratio values (25% to 99%). Also, you can change the preset ratio if necessary.Preset ratios other than added preset ratios cannot be changed.Setting a Maximum Number of CopiesThis is used to set the maximum number that can be entered for the number of copies (number of continuous copies). Any number from 1 to 999 can be specified.Initial Margin Shift SettingThis is used to set the default margin shift amount. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 50 mm (2") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both the front and reverse sides.Erase Width AdjustmentThis is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 25 mm (1") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and centre erase. Initial Multi Shot SettingSet the default state for Multi Shot. Select the page layout for Multi Shot, whether or not borders are added, and if added, whether the borders are solid lines or dotted lines.Card Shot SettingsThis is used to set the default original size for the card shot function. Specify a value from 25 mm (1") to 216 mm (8-1/2") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the original.Fit to PageEnable this setting to have the [Fit to Page] key always appear in the card shot screen.Automatic Saddle StitchSaddle stitch stapling take place automatically when the pamphlet copy function is used.Initial Tab Copy SettingThis is used to set the default image shift width (tab width) for tab copying. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 25 mm (1") in increments of 3 mm (1/8").Disabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramThis is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy settings stored in job programs.Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies. The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these special media enters the revDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisables the Auto Paper Selection function. When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document feeder does not take place.Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the PaperWhen this setting is enabled and paper is loaded into a tray while the machine is on standby in copy mode, that tray is automatically selected.Disabling Registration of Custom ImageDisables storage of a custom image.Disabling sending while copyingDisables the Image Send function during copy.600dpiX600dpi Scanning Mode for Document FeederThe resolution for copying using the automatic document feeder can be changed from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high quality mode). When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the scanning speWhen high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 300 dpi and attain the fastest speed. The copy ratio must be set to 100%.Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.Quick Scan from Document GlassThe resolution for copying using the document glass can be changed from 600 x 600 dpi to 600 x 300 dpi (high speed mode). When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is quicker, however, the copy image is not as clear.When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 300 dpi and attain the fastest speed.The copy ratio must be set to 100%.Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.Auto Clear Before Copy JobEnables the Auto Clear function during copy even when a copy job is not completed. This protects the machine from being held due to the incomplete copy job.Back to top';
body[447]='07-035-03.htm';
dai[447]='AUTO CALIBRATION ';
bun[447]='AUTO CALIBRATION AUTO CALIBRATION The following settings are related to copying. Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).AUTO CALIBRATIONPerforms automatic colour correction when the colour in colour copies is off. The machine prints a test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is automatically corrected. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message aLay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Execute] key.If the colour is still off after performing Auto Calibration, repeating Auto Calibration once again may improve the colour.Back to top';
body[448]='07-036-01.htm';
dai[448]='DEFAULT SETTINGS';
bun[448]='DEFAULT SETTINGSDEFAULT SETTINGS Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Printer condition settings are described below.Prohibit Notice Page Printing Disables to print a notice page. Prohibit Test Page Printing Disables to print the test page.When this setting is enabled, [System Settings] &#8594; [List Print (User)] &#8594; [Printer Test Page] in "Setting mode" cannot be used to print test pages. A4/Letter Size Auto Change When printing an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size image, this setting allows A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper to be used if 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper is not loaded. Print Density Level This lightens or darkens the print density . The print density can be adjusted to five levels. Bypass Tray SettingsEnable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray This is used to prohibit printing when the paper size specified for a print job is different from the paper size inserted in the bypass tray. Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray This is used to prohibit printing when the paper size specified for a print job is different from the paper size inserted in the bypass tray. Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select When [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the bypass tray is excluded from the trays that can be selected. This is recommended when special paper is often placed in the bypass tray. Job Spool Queuing When this function is enabled, received print jobs are displayed in the spool queue of the job status screen. The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have not yet been analyzed appear in the spWhen this function is disabled, received print jobs are displayed in the job queue instead of being displayed in the spool queue. However, when an encrypted PDF job is printed, the job appears in the spool queue. Prohibit USB Memory Direct Print Disables the function for directly printing of a file in a USB memory device. Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print Disables the direct printing from a network folder. Disabling sending while printing Disables the Image Send function during printing. Back to top ';
body[449]='07-036-02.htm';
dai[449]='INTERFACE SETTINGS';
bun[449]='INTERFACE SETTINGSINTERFACE SETTINGSSettings related to the printer function can be configured.These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine.Hexadecimal Dump ModeThis function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text. This mode allows you to check whether or not print data from the PC is being transmitted to the printer correctly. Example of I/O TimeoutThe I/O timeout can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 999. The I/O timeout function temporarily breaks the connection if the set duration of time elapses without any data being received by the port. After the connection is broken, the port is set Enable USB PortEnables printing from the USB port.USB Port Emulation SwitchingIf the machine is connected using the USB port, select the emulated printer language. The following settings can be configured.AutoPost ScriptPCLThe settings are the same as those of "Network Port Emulation Switching".Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting "Auto".Enable Network PortEnables printing from the network port.Network Port Emulation SwitchingThis setting is used to select the emulated printer language when the machine is connected by a network port. The following settings can be configured.AutoPost ScriptPCLThe settings are the same as those of "USB Port Emulation Switching".Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting "Auto".Port Switching MethodSelects when port switching takes place.Switch at End of JobThe port changes to auto selection when printing ends.Switch after I/O TimeoutWhen the time set in "I/O Timeout" elapses, the port changes to Auto Selection.The following two print ports are available on the machine:USB portNetwork portBack to top';
body[450]='07-036-03.htm';
dai[450]='AUTO COLOUR CALIBRATION';
bun[450]='AUTO COLOUR CALIBRATIONAUTO CALIBRATIONSettings related to the printer function can be configured.Performs automatic colour correction when the colour in copies is off. The machine prints a test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is automatically corrected. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message appears Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Execute] key.If the colour is still off after performing Auto Calibration, repeating Auto Calibration once again may improve the colour.Back to top';
body[451]='07-037-01.htm';
dai[451]='OPERATION SETTINGS';
bun[451]='OPERATION SETTINGSOPERATION SETTINGSSettings related to the image send function (E-mail, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured.For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "IMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONS."The operation settings below apply to all image send functions.Default SettingsHold settings for a while after scanning has been completed.Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates).Job Auto Start Time During ScanningSet the time until timeout occurs after the original is scanned. Set from 10 to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds. Default Display SettingsSelect any of the following 5 base screens that appear when you tap the [Image Send] key or when you tap the ([CA] key) on the Image Send Mode screen.E-mailNetwork FolderFTP/DesktopInternet FaxFaxData EntryApply Addresses of Sending Modes OnlyWhen an address is selected from the address book, only the addresses displayed in narrowing mode are applied.Higher priority is given to the display of address book.If image send mode is enabled, the Address Book is displayed in place of the initial screen of this mode.In "Setting mode", if a default address has been configured by selecting [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Address] → [Default Address Setting], the [Higher priority is given to the display of address book.] function c Select a category to be displayed with the default.NoneFrequent UseCategories 1 to 32Enlarging the Address BookAn enlarged address book list appears.Display all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently.Displays all destinations regardless of the displayed mode when this setting is enabled.Image OrientationSets the default image orientation.Initial Resolution SettingThe following settings are available for the default resolutions of common scan, E-mail, Internet fax, and fax mode. Scanner Common 100 X 100 dpi, 150 X 150 dpi, 200 X 200 dpi,300 X 300 dpi, 400 X 400 dpi, 600 X 600 dpi E-mail 100 X 100 dpi, 150 X 150 dpiApply the Resolution Set when StoredWhen an image stored by document filing is used, this applies the resolution setting that was stored with the image.Default Exposure SettingsThis is used to set the default exposure settings for scanning a document in image send mode. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original (only in scan mode and USB memory device scan mode). The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPhotoPrinted PhotoMapWhen the exposure is set to [Auto], a default original type cannot be selected.SharpnessThis is used to emphasize the outline of image and show it clearly for scanning a document in image send mode. It can be set to any of 5 levels.ContrastThis is used to adjust the contrast of image for scanning a document in image send mode. It can be set to any of 5 levels.Sending the same image sent in Fax/I-Fax modeThis is used to enable or disable the default setting. Enable this function to send the same image simultaneously using fax mode or Internet fax mode with another mode. If this function is disabled, an image specified with each Scan Setting is sent to E-mBe sure to press Next Address Key () before selecting the next address This function forces the user to tap the [Next Address] key before entering the next destination during broadcasting. When this setting is enabled, the [Next Address] key cannot be omitted even if the next address is entered with a one-touch key. If a useScan Complete Sound SettingSets the scan complete sound to be heard when an original is scanned.Disable Switching of Display OrderDisables to change the order of display (search number order, ascending, descending). Once set, the display sequence is not changed. The display order will remain fixed at the order that is in effect when this setting is enabled.Hold Setting for Received Data PrintThis function holds received faxes and Internet faxes in memory without printing them. The faxes can be printed by entering a password (factory default setting: 0000) with the numeric keys.PasswordWhen [Hold Setting for Received Data Print] is enabled, enter the password (4-digit number).These settings can only be configured when there is no received data in the machine memory (excluding data in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box).Default Verification StampThis is used to enable or disable the default setting. Enable this to always affix the verification stamp on the original that has already been scanned using the automatic document feeder. E-mail/Scan/Data EntryFax/Internet Fax Erase Width AdjustmentThis is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 25 mm (1") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and centre erase.Time Specified Output of Received DataThis function is available when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled.* This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed. If "Time Specified Output of Received Data" is set to , this setting is greyed out.If "Change Password" or "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is set to , the password entry field is greyed out.ENABLE/DISABLE SETTINGSSettings to Disable RegistrationThis is used to prohibit the storing of destinations. Storing from the machine, storing from Setting mode (Web version), and storing from the PC can each be separately prohibited.Disable Registering Destination from Operation PanelDisables address control from the machine. Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)ContactsSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Registering Destination on Web PageDisables to store the destination from Setting mode (Web version). Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)IndividualSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of image send settings stored in job programs.Disable Registration of Memory BoxDisables all types of memory box registration. Configure the setting for each of the following items: Polling Memory, Confidential, Relay Broadcast (Direct Entry), Relay Broadcast (Address Book)Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address SearchThis disables address control from the global address search. Configure the setting for each of the following items: E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Registration Using Network Scanner ToolsDisables address control from Network Scanner Tools. Use this option to suppress to store data of another machine through Inbound Routing of address book.Disabling of Forwarding via NetworkThis prohibits inbound routing.Settings to Disable TransmissionThese settings are used to disable the following transmission operations.Disable [Resend] on Image Send ModeThis setting disables the [Resend] key in the base screen of image send mode.Disable Selection from Address BookDisables the selection of destinations from the address book. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPDesktopNetwork FolderInternet Fax (including Direct SMTP)FaxSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Direct EntryDisables the direct entry of destination address and others. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailNetwork FolderInternet Fax (including Direct SMTP)FaxSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable PC-I-Fax TransmissionThis prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.Disable PC-Fax TransmissionThis prohibits PC-Fax transmission.Own Number and Name SetStores the Internet-Fax or Fax sender information.Sender Data RegistrationUse this to store the sender name for fax and Internet fax, the sender fax number, and the sender address for Internet fax. The stored sender name and sender fax number or Internet sender address will be printed at the top of the received fax.Sender NameEnter the sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the sender name.Sender Fax NumberSets the sender fax number. To insert a pause between digits of the number, tap the [-] key. To insert a space between digits of the number, tap the [Space] key.I-Fax Own AddressEnter a default sender address (maximum of 56 characters).Registration of Own Name SelectStores the sender name used in "Own Name Select " of another function. Up to 18 sender names can be stored.Add NewStore a sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can be stored. After entering a sender name, tap the [Store] key. The lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be automatically assigned to the sender name. This number cannot be changed.Sender Name ListDisplays a list of stored sender names. When you select a sender name, it is deleted.Back to top';
body[452]='07-037-02.htm';
dai[452]='SCAN SETTINGS';
bun[452]='SCAN SETTINGSSCAN SETTINGSSettings related to the image send function (Scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured.For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "IMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONS."Scan SettingsThe following settings are related to the scanner.Default Sender SetThe information stored here is used if you do not specify [Reply to] in the send settings when performing Scan to E-mail.Sender NameEnter a default sender name (maximum of 20 characters).Source AddressEnter a default reply address (maximum of 64 characters).If only the sender name is stored, it will not be used as sender information.Default Colour Mode SettingsSelect a default colour mode setting for both colour and black &amp; white in e-mail address, network folder, FTP and Desktop. Specify "Scanner Common" unless E-mail is specified.Auto (Mono2, Greyscale*), Full Colour, Greyscale, Mono 2 * When scanning a black and white original with the colour mode set to [Auto] Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode: Disables black &amp; white settings from the base screen when the colour mInitial File Format SettingSpecify the initial file format for sending a file in E-mail, Network Folder, FTP, or Desktop mode. Specify "Scanner Common" unless E-mail is specified.File TypePDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG*1, Compact PDF*2*5, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*2*5, Compact PDF/A*4*5, Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*4*5, Encrypt PDF, Encrypt/Compact PDF*3*5, Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*3*5, XPS *1 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [TIFF]. *2 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF]. *3 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [Encrypt PDF]. *4 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF/A].*5 When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installed.Black &amp; WhiteCompression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleData compression ratio: Low, Medium, High.Emphasize Black LetterSpecified Pages per FileGenerates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned. If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified.Number of PagesAny number of pages can be specified as the number of pages per file. This setting can be used if [Specified Pages per File] is enabled.When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, [Specified Pages per File] cannot be selected.Compression Mode at BroadcastingSelects the compression mode for broadcasting using Scan to E-mail or Internet fax. The compression mode set here is used for all destinations regardless of their individual compression mode settings.B/WMH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleLow, Medium, HighEmphasize Black LetterMaximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail) To prevent the transmission of excessively large image files by Scan to E-mail, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image fil When ［If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.］ is selected, data to be sent by Scan to E-mail that exceeds the maximum data size setting (E-mail) can be divided into multiple files.This setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments" of the Internet fax settings. Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)A limit can be set for the size of files that can be sent by Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder. Limits that can be selected are 50 MB, 150 MB, and 300 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceedsDuring broadcasting that includes both e-mail and Internet fax destinations, the limit set in "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail) " precedes.Bcc SettingEnable BccEnable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery. Displays the [Bcc] key on the image send address book screen.Display Bcc Address on the Job Status ScreenDisplays Bcc addresses on the job status screen and address list tab.Disable scan functionSpecify this to disable remote PC scanning. Default Address SettingDefault Address SettingA default address can be stored that makes it possible to transmit by simply pressing the [Start] key without specifying an address. If [Apply E-mail address of the user for login.] is selected, the E-mail address of the login user is set as the default dWhen [Apply Home Directory of The User for Login] is selected, the default address is the home directory of the user that logged in.When the user logs in by internal authentication (authentication by the machine), the home directory setting of the user that logged in is configured in "User Registration" in "User List" in "User Control". When the user logsOnly a single default address can be set for Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder.Add Selected Select an address that is to be used by default.Apply E-mail address of the user for login.The E-mail address of the login user is set as the default address.Select the following items based on your intended use.ItemDescriptionApply also for Fax/I-Fax ScreenIn the fax/I-Fax screen, if you do not want to apply the E-mail address of the login user as the default destination, tap the [Apply also for Fax/I-Fax Screen] checkbox to set to .Allow CancelYou can cancel the E-mail address of the login user that is entered automatically. To cancel, tap the [Cancel] key on the action panel.Select From Address BookTo display you desired address book, narrow the search by alphabet or category with the list of [Index]. You can select the number of addresses that are to be displayed at a time with [Display Items].When you select the desired address name and tap the [Store] key, the selected address can be selected for the default address.Back to top';
body[453]='07-037-03.htm';
dai[453]='INTERNET FAX SETTINGS';
bun[453]='INTERNET FAX SETTINGSINTERNET FAX SETTINGSSettings related to the image send function (Scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured.For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "IMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONS."These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.Default SettingsConfigures the default settings for Internet fax.Auto Wake Up PrintWhen the [Power] button is "Off" (but the main power switch is "") and an Internet fax is received, this function activates the machine and prints the fax. When this function is disabled, received Internet faxes are not printed until tCompression SettingThis is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission. The following settings can be configured.MH (G3)MMR (G4)Speaker Volume SettingAdjusts the volume of fax receive signals and communication error signals heard through the speaker. A fax receive signal sounds after the machine checks the mail server and retrieves received faxes. A communication error signal sounds when a delivery faiOriginal Print on Transaction ReportWhen a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select one of the settings below.Print Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintThis setting will not be effective if the next "Transaction Report Print Select Setting" is set to "Do not Print".Transaction Report Print Select SettingSelects whether or not a transaction report will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being printed. Select a setting for each of the following operations:Single SendingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintBroadcastingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintReceivingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintWhen a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. For details, see "Original Print on Transaction Report".Activity Report Print Select SettingPrints the Image Sending Activity Report stored in the machine memory periodically. The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can be simuIf you only select the "Print Daily at Designated Time" setting and the number of recorded transactions reaches 200 before the specified time, each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction (the oldest transaction will not be printed).The Transaction Report can be printed out manually as needed. See "LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)" in Setting mode.Body Text Print Select SettingImage files attached to Internet faxes are normally printed. This setting can be enabled to also have the e-mail body text (subject and message) printed. This setting also applies to printing of the body text of e-mail messages without file attachments.A maximum of 5 pages of body text can be printed.Send SettingThese settings are used to configure the settings for Internet fax.I-Fax Reception Report On/Off SettingThis setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent.I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout SettingThe duration of time that the machine will wait for a reception report from the destination machine can be set by any number from 1 hour to 240 hours in increments of 1 minute.This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.Number of Resend Times at Reception ErrorThe number of resend attempts when an error message is received from an I-Fax recipient can be set to any number from 0 to 15.This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.Maximum Size of E-mail AttachmentsTo prevent the transmission of excessively large image files by Internet fax, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image files aThis setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail)" in Scan Settings.Rotation Sending SettingWhen transmitting an image that is one of the following sizes, this function rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. (The setting can be configured separately for each size.) A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2"x11", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R, 16KA4R and 8-1/2" x 11"R size images are not rotated.Printing Page Number at ReceiverWhen the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine, the page number can be added to the top of each printed page.Recall in Case of Line Busy(This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP transmission.) This setting sets the number of recall attempts and the interval between recall attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason.Number of Times to Recall When Line is BusySpecifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected.Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) When Line is BusyThe interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.Recall in Case of Communication Error(This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP transmission.) This determines how many times your machine will automatically attempt the call again if a fax transmission fails due to a communication error.Number of Times to Recall in Case of ErrorSpecify how many times the machine will recall when a communication error occurs. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected.Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in Case of ErrorThe interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.Receive SettingsConfigures the settings for Internet fax.Auto Receive Reduce SettingWhen a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender\'s name and address, the received image is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size.If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of the image outside the standard size will be cut off. However, the image will be clearer because it will be printed at the same size as the original.Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5 (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 5-1/2").Duplex Reception SettingThis is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper. When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or more pages is received (the pages must be the same size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.Set Address for Data ForwardingWhen the machine cannot print a received fax, the fax can be forwarded to another machine. This setting is used to configure the address of the other machine.Forwarding toEnter the forwarding address (maximum of 64 characters).Direct SMTPSelect this to enable forwarding when direct SMTP is used.Add Hostname or IP Address TooSelect this to separately enter a host name or IP address.Hostname or IP AddressUse this setting when "Add Hostname or IP Address." is enabled. Enter the host name or IP address (maximum of 64 characters).Multiple forwarding addresses cannot be stored.Letter Size RX Reduce PrintThis program is not available in Canada and Philippines.When a letter (8-1/2" x 11") size fax is received, this setting reduces the fax to A4 size.When this setting is enabled, A4 size faxes are also reduced.Receiving Date &amp; Time PrintEnable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position where the date and time is printed. When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date and time of The [Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected for the reception date and time print setting if "Auto Receive Reduce Setting" is not enabled.A3 RX ReduceWhen an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size.When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17") size faxes are also reduced.POP3 Communication Timeout SettingThe duration of time the machine waits until stopping reception can be set from 30 to 300 seconds in increments of 30 seconds if no response is received from the mail server (POP3 server).Reception Check Interval SettingSpecifies an interval at which the machine automatically checks the mail server (POP3 server) for received Internet faxes. The interval can be set from 0 minutes to 8 hours in increments of 1 minute. If 0 hours 0 minutes is specified, the machine does notThe machine also checks the mail server (POP3 server) for received Internet faxes when the main power is switched on. (Except when 0 hours 0 minutes is specified.)Fax Output SettingsThis sets the output tray for received Internet faxes. The items that appear will vary depending the machine configuration.Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name SettingAllows or refuses a reception from specified addresses/domains.ItemDescriptionReject ReceptionReception from the stored address/domain is not allowed.Allow ReceptionReception from the stored address/domain is allowed.All InvalidReception from any address and domain is allowed, regardless of whether or not any addresses or domains have been stored.Add NewAdds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the address/domain (maximum of 64 characters) and tap the [Store] key. If the first character of the entry is not "@", the entry is identified Registered address or domain listDisplays a list of the stored addresses and domains. An address or domain can be deleted from the list when selected.When there are no stored anti junk mail addresses or domains, only the [Add New] key can be selected.Back to top';
body[454]='07-038-01.htm';
dai[454]='VARIOUS SETTING';
bun[454]='VARIOUS SETTINGVARIOUS SETTINGDocument filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.GeneralDefault Mode SettingsSpecifies which mode, Sharing or Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a file. When [Confidential Mode] is selected, the [Confidential] checkbox is set to on the information screen for filing.Sort Method SettingSelects an order of display files stored in the Main Folder, Custom Folder, and Quick File Folder. Select one of the following settings:File NameUser NameDateAdministrator Authority SettingFor files and user folders that have a password, this setting allows the administrator password to be entered instead of the password when accessing the file or folder. Also, you can change the preset ratio if necessary.Delete All Quick FilesDeletes all files from the Quick File folder except for protected files.Delete NowTap this key to start deletion of all files immediately.Delete Quick Files at Power UpThis is used to automatically delete all files in the Quick File Folder (with the exception of protected files) when the [Power] button is turned "On".Image OrientationChanges the image orientation.Default Colour Mode SettingsSelects the default settings when Scan to HDD is used. The following settings can be configured.Full ColourGreyscaleMono2 Default Exposure SettingsDefault exposure settings for document filing can be configured. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original. The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPhotoPrinted PhotoMapWhen the exposure is set to [Auto], a default original type cannot be selected.Initial Resolution SettingsOne of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.100 X 100 dpi150 X 150 dpi200 X 200 dpi300 X 300 dpi400 X 400 dpi600 X 600 dpiScan Complete Sound SettingAdjusts the volume of the beep that sounds when scanning ends. The beep can also be turned off.Default Output TraySelects the default output tray for printing a file stored by Scan to HDD. The items that appear will vary depending the machine configuration.Disabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintWhen a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled. This function prevents an inconsistency of the date between the original data and output data and others.Batch Print SettingsWhen printing files by batch printing, this setting is used to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.Erase Width AdjustmentSets the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 25 mm (1") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and centre erase.Card Shot SettingsThis is used to set the default original size for the card shot function. Specify a value from 25 mm (1") to 216 mm (8-1/2") in increments of 3 mm (1/8") for both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the original.Fit to Store SizeAlways displays the [Fit to Store Size] key on the card shot screen.Setting of store/delete after file printSelect whether or not to save or delete a file after printing.Scan to External Memory Device SettingDefault Colour Mode SettingsAuto, Full Colour, Greyscale, Mono2Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeSetting the "Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode" checkbox to disables black &amp; white settings from the base screen when the colour mode is set to Auto. Initial File Format SettingYou can set the initial file format to be saved in an external memory device.File TypePDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG*1, Compact PDF*2*5, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*2*5, Compact PDF/A*4*5, Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*4*5, Encrypt PDF, Encrypt/Compact PDF*3*5, Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*3*5, XPS *1 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [TIFF]. *2 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF]. *3 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [Encrypt PDF]. *4 When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF/A].*5 When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installed.Black &amp; WhiteCompression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: Low, Medium, High, Emphasize Black LetterSpecified Pages per FileGenerates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned. If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified.When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, [Specified Pages per File] cannot be selected.Number of PagesAny number of pages can be specified as the number of pages per file.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original. The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPrinted PhotoMapWhen the exposure is set to [Auto], a default original type cannot be selected.Initial Resolution SettingsOne of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.100 X 100 dpi150 X 150 dpi200 X 200 dpi300 X 300 dpi400 X 400 dpi600 X 600 dpiDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceStoring to external memory device is disabled.Default Setting of PDF Format for PC BrowsingYou can set the initial file format of public PDF which is created during execution of each job.Compression RatioLow, Medium, HighSettings during each job executionWhen each of copy, printer, scanner, Internet fax, fax, or stored scan data is executed, you can specify to create a public PDF and to set the resolution of public PDF.Document Output OptionsThe use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored.The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.ItemDescriptionPrintFor each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed.Scan SendFor each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed.Internet Fax Send (including PC-I-Fax)For each mode, select whether or not I-Fax transmission of stored files is allowed.Fax Send (Including PC-Fax)For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed.Back to top';
body[455]='07-038-02.htm';
dai[455]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILE SETTINGS';
bun[455]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILE SETTINGSAUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILE SETTINGSDocument filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.Time and folder settings can be configured to have files in specified folders (stored by document filing) automatically deleted at a specified time. Up to 3 settings can be stored to be automatically deleted. The procedure for using this function is as foItemDescriptionScheduleSelect an automatic deletion cycle.Every Day: Auto deletion every day at the specified time.Every Week: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week.Every Month: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month.FoldersTo select the folder separately, select [Folder Select] and select the desired folder. To select all folders, including the folder currently being created, select [All Folders (Including folders registered hereafter)].Delete Protected FileEnable this setting to include protected files in the deletion.Delete Confidential FileEnable this setting to include confidential files in the deletion.Delete NowWhen this is executed with a folder selected, all files in the folder will be immediately deleted regardless of the date and time setting.Execute Auto Deletion even if Auto Power Shut-Off is enabled.Files are deleted automatically even when Auto Power Shut-Off is enabled.Back to top';
body[456]='07-039.htm';
dai[456]='LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)';
bun[456]='LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to.To specify [One Sided] or [Two Sided] printing in List Print, select "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [List Prints].When using "Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)" in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), select "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Internet Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings] &#8594; [Duplex RecWhen using "Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)" in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), select "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Receive Settings] &#8594; [Duplex Reception Setting], eAdministrator Settings ListLists of the administrator settings for the following modes can be printed.CopyingPrinterImage SendDocument filingSecurityCommonAll Administrator Settings ListImage Sending Activity ReportThe following Image Sending Activity Reports can each be separately printed.Image Sending Activity Report (Scan)Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)Data Receive/Forward ListThe following lists showing reception settings and forwarding settings can be printed.Anti Junk Fax Number ListAnti Junk Mail/Domain Name ListInbound Routing ListDocument Admin ListWeb Settings ListThis prints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode (Web version).Metadata Set ListPrints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode (Web version).Back to top';
body[457]='07-040.htm';
dai[457]='SHARP OSA SETTINGS';
bun[457]='SHARP OSA SETTINGSSHARP OSA SETTINGSYou can use the Sharp OSA Settings if the machine has an External Account Module or an Application Communication Module.The application communication and the external account module module will be a standard equipment in some countries and regions.External Account SettingExternal Account ControlWhen this setting is enabled, the machine enters external totaling mode and the totaling function can be used via an external account application.Enable Authentication by External ServerWhen this setting is enabled, the machine enters external authentication mode. Access to the machine is controlled by the external application.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER" in "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE"USB DRIVER SETTINGSWhen installing the external account module or application communication module, set the driver of the USB device to be connected.External KeyboardSelect whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used.Card Reader/WriterSelect whether the internal or external driver for the IC card reader/writer driver is used.USB MemorySelect whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used.Level of EncryptionSelect the level of encryption for communication using the external driver. Select from none, AES-128 or AES-256.When the external driver is selected, the connected USB device is treated as not connected and cannot be used.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".To check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine, see "USB-DEVICE CHECK".Job Priority SettingsSet the playing speed of the animation in Sharp OSA applications. The following settings can be configured.Priority PrintingHalf TonePriority Animation PlayIf the [LCD Animation Playback] or [Balanced] is selected, the job (or print) process speed of the machine may drop. Select [Priority Printing] to increase the process speed of print job.Back to top';
body[458]='07-041.htm';
dai[458]='ENABLE/DISABLE SETTINGS';
bun[458]='ENABLE/DISABLE SETTINGSENABLE/DISABLE SETTINGSThe following settings enables or disables certain functions.Printer Condition SettingsDisable Blank Page PrintDisables to print a blank page.USER CONTROLDisabling of Printing by Invalid UserPrinting by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode (Web version), can be prohibited.Operation SettingsCancel Auto Clear TimerDisables the Auto Clear mode.Disabling of Job Priority OperationThe job priority function can be disabled. If disabled, the [Priority] key is not shown on the job status screen.Disabling of Bypass PrintingDisables bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the paper required for the job is not in any of the trays). * This option is ignored when paper runs out during the job.Disable Auto Key RepeatDisables the Auto Key Repeat function.Disabling of Clock AdjustmentDisables the date and time from being changed.Disabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisables the use of the covers and inserts function.Device ControlDisabling of Document FeederUse this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.)Disabling of DuplexThis is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions.Disabling of Large Capacity CassetteThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the large capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of Optional Paper DrawerThis setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Tray SettingDisables the tray settings.Disabling of FinisherThis setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of OffsetDisables an offset.Disabling of StaplerThis setting is used to prohibit the use of staple, such as when the staple of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Disabling of PunchThis setting is used to prohibit the use of punch, such as when the punch module of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Disabling of Master Machine ModeDisables the Master Machine mode for tandem printing. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)Disabling of Slave Machine ModeDisables the Slave Machine mode for tandem printing. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)Copy SettingsDisabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisables the program registration.Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies. The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these special media enters the revDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisables the Auto Paper Selection function. When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document feeder does not take place.Disabling Registration of Custom ImageDisables the registration of custom images.Disabling sending while copyingDisables the Image Send function during copy.Printer SettingsProhibit Notice Page PrintingDisables to print a notice page.Prohibit Test Page PrintingDisables to print the test page. When this setting is enabled, "Printer Test Page" in Setting mode cannot be used to print test pages.Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectWhen [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the bypass tray is excluded from the trays that can be selected. This is recommended when special paper is often placed in the bypass tray.Disabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisables the function for directly printing of a file in a USB memory device.Disabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisables the direct printing from a network folder.Disabling sending while printingDisables the Image Send function during printing.Image Send SettingsDisable Switching of Display OrderDisables a change of display sequence (search number order, ascending, descending) in the address book and others. If set, the display is not sorted even when you tap the tab on the address book screen. The currently selected display order will be the ordDisable Fax BroadcastingDisables the facsimile broadcasting. Disable Scan FunctionSpecify this to disable remote PC scanning.Settings to Disable RegistrationDisable Registering Destination from Operation PanelDisables address control from the machine. Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Registering Destination on Web PageDisables to store the destination from Setting mode (Web version). Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)IndividualSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disabling of Registration/Deletion of ProgramDisables the use of address book when a program is stored. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPDesktopNetwork FolderInternet Fax (including Direct SMTP)FaxSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.ADDRESS BOOKThis prohibits the use of the address book in each mode.Direct EntryThis prohibits the use of the address book for functions in each mode.Disable Registration of Memory BoxDisables all types of memory box registration. Configure the setting for each of the following items: Polling Memory, Confidential, Relay Broadcast (Direct Entry), Relay Broadcast (Address Book) Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selDisable Destination Registration Using Global Address SearchThis disables address control from the global address search. Configure the setting for each of the following items: E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Registration Using Network Scanner ToolsThis disables address control from the Network Scanner Tools.Disabling of Forwarding via NetworkThis prohibits inbound routing.Settings to Disable TransmissionThese settings are used to disable the following transmission operations.Disable [Resend] on Image Send ModeThis setting disables the [Resend] key in the base screen of image send mode.Disable Selection from Address BookDisables the selection of destinations from the address book. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPDesktopNetwork FolderInternet Fax (including Direct SMTP)FaxSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable Direct EntryDisables the direct entry of destination address and others. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailNetwork FolderDesktopNetwork FolderInternet Fax (including Direct SMTP)FaxSelect All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.Disable PC-I-Fax TransmissionThis prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.Disable PC-Fax TransmissionThis prohibits PC-Fax transmission.Document Filing SettingsDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintWhen a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled. This function prevents an inconsistency of the date between the original data and output data and others.Batch Print SettingsWhen printing files by batch printing, this setting is used to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.The Enable/Disable Settings control the same parametres as the enable/disable settings in other settings. The settings are linked together (changing one setting changes the other).Disable Storing to External Memory DeviceStoring to external memory device is disabled.Security SettingsThis setting is used to set the security enhancement functions.Hidden Pattern Print SettingDisables the direct entry of background pattern and others.Back to top';
body[459]='07-043.htm';
dai[459]='DATA BACKUP';
bun[459]='DATA BACKUPDATA BACKUPThe system storage and settings contained in the machine can be saved in a USB memory device.Storage BackupAddress book information and user information stored in the machine can be saved to and retrieved from a USB memory device.ExportExports data to a USB memory device.ImportImports data, that you have saved in the USB memory device by "Export" option, into the machine.Device CloningSaves the machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines.ExportExports data to a USB memory device.ImportImports data, that you have saved in the USB memory device by "Export" option, into the machine.You can import data only to MX-M365F / MX-M465F / MX-565F.The following data is not copied when device cloning is performed: List print and fax forwarding items.Count and device status display items.IP address of the machine, device name, administrator password, sender names for image send, and other information that is specific to the machine.The settings specific to each hardware such as screen contras and saddle stitch position adjustmentForward Address BookForwards the address book of this machine directly to another multi-function peripheral.This function can be enabled when a USB memory device is installed.This function cannot be used while Setting mode is in use, while a job is being executed, or when there is a reserved job.Contact your dealer or the nearest authorised service representative listed on the Quick Start Guide for advice on the machine for data importing.Back to top';
body[460]='07-044.htm';
dai[460]='PRODUCT KEY';
bun[460]='PRODUCT KEYPRODUCT KEYYou must enter the machine product key to use the following advanced functions.Tapping or changes the display position of the numeric keys.Serial NumberThis displays the serial number that is required to obtain the product key.Barcode Font KitEnter the product key of the barcode font kit.Internet Fax Expansion KitEnter the product key of the Internet fax expansion kit.E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSEnter the product key of e-mail alert and status.Application Integration ModuleEnter the product key of the application integration module.Application Communication ModuleEnter the product key of the application communication module.XPS expansion kitEnter the product key of the XPS expansion kit.It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.Some option will be installed in this machine in some countries and regions.For the product key to be entered, contact your dealer.Back to top';
body[461]='07-045.htm';
dai[461]='STORING/CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGS';
bun[461]='STORING/CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGSSTORING/CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGSYou can reset the current Setting mode settings to the previously stored settings or to the factory default settings.Restore Factory DefaultsRestores the current settings (you have selected in Setting mode) to the factory default settings. If you wish to create a record of the current settings before restoring, print the current settings by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode&quoWhen settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Store Current ConfigurationStores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory. The stored settings will be retained even if the [Power] button is turned off. To retrieve the stored settings, use "Restore Configuration" below.Items not storedNetwork Settings: These are not stored as unexpected settings may cause damage to the network.Product Keys: Product Keys are not stored as reissue of keys may be necessary.Restore ConfigurationRestores the settings stored with " Store Current Configuration". The current settings are replaced by the retrieved settings.Back to top';
body[462]='07-046-01.htm';
dai[462]='QUICK SETTINGS';
bun[462]='QUICK SETTINGSQUICK SETTINGSSelect the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network.Connection Type SwitchingUse this setting to switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)].IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.DHCP/BOOTPUse this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the "Enable TCP/IP".RARPSet this option to use the RARP protocol.IPv4 AddressEnter the IP address of the machine.Subnet MaskEnter the IP subnet mask.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.IPv6 SettingsWhen using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.IPv6Enable this setting.DHCPv6Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.Manual Address/Prefix LengthEnter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine.Default GatewayDefault GatewayIf DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.TIf the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the "Enable TCP/IP".In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol.Network Name Settings Device NameEnter a device name.Domain NameEnter the domain name.DNS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary DNS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary DNS server.Domain NameEnter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.SMTP SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.Source AddressIf data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server. Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails. Usually, enter the e-mail address of system administrator.Enable SSLIf is selected, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command. This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the "Port Number" to the same port number as the normal SMTP.SMTP AuthenticationIf is set, the SMTP server authentication is carried out.User NameEnter the user name.PasswordEnter the password.Change PasswordTo change the password, set .Connection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server.LDAP SettingsNameEnter the address book name.Default Address SettingEnters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas.LDAP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server.User NameEnter the account name for LDAP setting.PasswordEnter the password.Change PasswordTo change the password, set .AuthenticationSelect the authentication server from the drop-down list.KDC ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.RealmEnter the Kerberos realm.Enable SSLIf is set, the SSL encryption communication is enabled.Connection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the LDAP server.Public Folder/NAS SettingsSet each option to [Prohibited] if the storage is not used.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[463]='07-046-02.htm';
dai[463]='GENERAL SETTINGS';
bun[463]='GENERAL SETTINGSGENERAL SETTINGSSelect the general network settings. General SettingsPrint Status on StartupSelect this option to print out the status information during startup. NETWORK SETTINGSDevice NameEnter a device name. Domain NameEnter the domain name. CommentEnter a comment.Reset the NICThis returns all "Network Settings" to the factory default settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[464]='07-046-03.htm';
dai[464]='PROTOCOL SETTINGS';
bun[464]='PROTOCOL SETTINGSPROTOCOL SETTINGSSelect the general network settings. The TCP/IP, NetWare, EtherTalk, and NetBIOS status information can be set.TCP/IPTCP/IP SettingsTCP/IPTo use the machine on a TCP/IP network, this setting must be enabled.IPv4 SettingsWhen using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.DHCP/BOOTPUse this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the "Enable TCP/IP" below.RARPSet this option to use the RARP protocol.IPv4 AddressEnter the IP address of the machine.Subnet MaskEnter the IP subnet mask.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.IPv6 SettingsWhen using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.IPv6Enable this setting.DHCPv6Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.Manual Address/Prefix LengthEnter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine.Default GatewayDefault GatewayIf DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the "Enable TCP/IP" below.In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol.Ping CommandChecks if the machine can communicate with the PC of the network. Specify the IP address of the desired PC and tap the [Execute] key. A message indicating a response by the PC or not is displayed.NetWareNetWare SettingsNetWareTo use the machine on a NetWare network, this setting must be enabled.Frame TypeSelect a frame type. Settings: 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, ETHER-IIOperation ModeSelect an operation mode. Settings: PSERVER, RPRINTERPrinter NameEnter the printer name.PSERVER SettingsPrint Server NameEnter a print server name.Login PasswordEnter the login password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Check IntervalEnter a job check interval.Bindery ModeSet this option to use the Bindery mode.File Server Name 1-8Enter a file server name.NDS TreeEnter the NDS tree name.NDS ContextEnter the NDS context.RPRINTER SettingsPrint Server Name 1-8Enter a print server name.Job TimeoutEnters a job timeout.EtherTalkEtherTalk SettingsEtherTalkTo use the machine on an EtherTalk network, this setting must be enabled.Zone NameEnter a zone name.Printer NameEnter the printer name.NetBIOSNetBIOS SettingsNBT/WINSTo use the machine on a NetBIOS network, this setting must be enabled.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[465]='07-046-04.htm';
dai[465]='SERVICES SETTINGS';
bun[465]='SERVICES SETTINGSSERVICES SETTINGSSelect the general network settings. Select the DNS system, SMTP, SNMP, WINS, Kerberos authentication, SNTP, and mDNS settings.DNSDNS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary DNS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary DNS server.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. This time is used until the connection to the DNS server is established according to the standard specifications.Domain NameEnter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.Dynamic DNS UpdatingSet this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server.Updating IntervalEnter an interval to update the DNS server.WINSWINS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary WINS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary WINS server.Scope IDEnter the scope ID.SMTPSMTP SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 25.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. This value is used for connection to the SMTP server and for data transmission according to the e-mail system specifications.Source AddressIf data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server. Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails. Usually, enter the e-mail address of system administrator.Enable SSLIf the SSL is enabled, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command. This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the "Port Number" to the same port number as the normalSMTP AuthenticationCarries out the SMTP server authentication. If you use the Kerberos authentication, set the KDC server, port number, and realm on the Kerberos authentication settings page.User NameEnter the user name.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .POP before SMTPIf is set, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication.POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.POP Authentication: If is set, the authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User Name: Enter the user name for POP before SMTP communication.Password: Enter the password required for POP before SMTP communication. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Enable SSL: If set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the "Port NumConnection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server.SNMPSNMPv1 SettingsSNMP v1 SettingsSet this option to use the SNMPv1 settings.Access MethodSet an access method.GET CommunityEnter the GET community name to fetch the device information using SNMP.SET CommunityEnter the SET community name required for SNMP setting.Change SET CommunityTo change the SET community, set .TRAP CommunityEnter the community name to be used for the SNMP TRAP sent from the device.TRAP Target AddressEnter the IP address of the destination computer for SNMP TRAP communication.SNMP v3 SettingsSNMP v3 SettingsSet this option to use the SNMPv3 settings.User NameEnter the user name.Authentication KeySelect an algorithm, enter the authentication key.Privacy KeySelect an algorithm, enter the privacy key.Context NameEnter the context name.KerberosKerberos Authentication SettingsKDC ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the Kerberos authentication server. The default setting is port 88.RealmEnter the Kerberos realm.SNTPSNTP SettingsSNTPSet this option to use the SNTP protocol.SNTP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 123.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds.Synchronous IntervalEnter an interval to synchronize to the SNTP server.Synchronize Upon StartTo establish synchronization during machine startup, set to .Synchronize NowWhen tapped, the machine is synchronized with the SNTP server time.mDNSmDNS SettingsmDNSSet this option to use the mDNS settings.Service NameEnter a service name.Domain NameEnter the domain name.Priority ServiceSelect a service you use with the priority. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[466]='07-046-05.htm';
dai[466]='PRINT PORT SETTINGS';
bun[466]='PRINT PORT SETTINGSPRINT PORT SETTINGS LPD Enter a profile expiring date. LPD SettingsLPD Set this option to use LPD. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 0 seconds. Use Banner Set this option to use the banner. The default setting is "Invalid". RawRaw Print SettingsRaw Print Set this option to use RAW printing. The default setting is "Valid". Port Number Enter a port number. The default setting is port 9100. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds. Use Bidirectional To use bidirectional communication, set to . WSDWSD SettingsWSD Print Set this option to use WSD printing. Use Multicast Discovery Set this option to use multicast discovery. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER". Back to top ';
body[467]='07-046-06.htm';
dai[467]='LDAP SETTINGS';
bun[467]='LDAP SETTINGSLDAP SETTINGSThe following explains the LDAP settings. When you tap the [Store] key, the LDAP settings are updated with your entries. The default address book is set to .LDAP SettingsSet this option to use LDAP.AddTap the [Add] key for addition.DeleteTo delete an item, select it and tap the [Delete] key.SettingsItemDescriptionNameEnter the address book name.Default Address SettingEnters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas.LDAP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server.Server TypeSelect the Default or Custom from the service type list. The default setting is Default.User ID PropertySet the user ID property. The default setting is "uid".LDAP Search PropertySet the LDAP search property. The default setting is "cn".E-mail Address SearchSet the e-mail address search. The default setting is "mail".I-Fax Address SearchSet the Internet Fax address search. The default setting is "mail".Fax Number SearchSet the fax number search. The default setting is "facsimileTelephoneNumber".Search Open KeySets the open key search. The default setting is "userCertificate".Pages Limit GroupSet the Storing Page Limit Group Search. The default setting is "pagelimit".Authority GroupSet the Storing Authority Group Search. The default setting is "authority".Favourite Operation GroupSet the Favourite Operation Group Search. The default setting is "favourite".My FolderSet the My Folder Search. The default setting is "myfolder".Card IDSets the card ID search. The default setting is "cardid".Home Directory PathEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the home directory path.Use Login Name And Password at User Authentication.Set whether the login name / password for user authentication is used for the user name / password for home directory path authentication.User NameEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication.PasswordEnter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home directory path authentication.Custom Property 1-10Enter each custom property.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 389.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds.User NameEnter the account name for LDAP setting.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .AuthenticationSelect the authentication server from the drop-down list.Bind PrefixSet the Bind prefix. The default setting is "uid".Server UsageSet the server application. Set the address book and user authentication.Enable SSLEnables the SSL encryption communication.Connection TestTap the [Execute] button, and the connection test is executed and its result is displayed.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[468]='07-046-07.htm';
dai[468]='HTTP ACCESS SETTINGS';
bun[468]='HTTP ACCESS SETTINGSHTTP ACCESS SETTINGSThe following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version).Number of Users who can log in at the Same TimeEnter a number of users who can access Setting mode (Web version) simultaneously.Auto Logout TimeEnter a time to automatically log out when no communication continues with the machine.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[469]='07-046-08.htm';
dai[469]='VIEW LOGIN USER';
bun[469]='VIEW LOGIN USERVIEW LOGIN USERThe user or users who have logged in this machine are displayed.Current Login UsersThe currently logged in users are displayed.Log Out All UsersThe current login users are logged out.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER".Back to top';
body[470]='07-046-09.htm';
dai[470]='PUBLIC FOLDER/NAS SETTINGS';
bun[470]='PUBLIC FOLDER/NAS SETTINGSPUBLIC FOLDER/NAS SETTINGSThe "public", "shared" and "faxreceive" folders of the MFP can be accessed as network folders from a network PC.SettingsItemDescriptionpublicWhen [Use of Storage] is set to [Allow], the PDF files for PC viewing in the "public" folder can be accessed.sharedIf the [Use of Storage] is set to [Allow], you can use the "shared" folder as a network folder.faxreceiveIf the [Use of Storage] in set to [Allow], you can use the "faxreceive" folder as a fax/Internet fax received data. The "faxreceive" folder contains files of "Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings".Back to top';
body[471]='07-046-10.htm';
dai[471]='PROXY SETTINGS';
bun[471]='PROXY SETTINGSPROXY SETTINGSA network access via the proxy server is allowed.SettingsItemDescriptionProxy Server AddressEnter the proxy server address.User NameEnter a user name to access the proxy server.PasswordEnter a password to allow access to the proxy server.Port NumberEnter the proxy server port number.Address without using proxySpecify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the Web browsing feature and Sharp OSA. When you enter multiple addresses, separate them by a semicolon (;).Back to top';
body[472]='07-046-11.htm';
dai[472]='WIRELESS SETTINGS';
bun[472]='WIRELESS SETTINGSWIRELESS SETTINGS It provides access to a network via a wireless LAN. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings.Wireless SettingsUsed to enable or disable the wireless LAN and show the status of wireless LAN.Connection Type SwitchingSwitches between infrastructure mode and access point mode to match the wireless LAN environment that is used.Current SettingShows settings, such as the SSID of a wireless LAN and security type. If the wireless LAN is disabled, "--" appears.Current Wireless StatusThis shows reception levels (Max. 100) of the wireless LAN and IP addresses.Show Wireless Setting ScreenClick the [Setup] button. In the Wireless Setting screen, you can configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key.Initialize Wireless SettingsClick the [Initialize] button. The settings for SSID, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key are initialized.Wireless Setting screen (Access Point Mode)If the [Settings] button is clicked while [Connection Type Switching] is set to [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wired Only], the Wireless Settings (Access Point Mode) screen is displayed. Configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings.SSIDEnter an SSID using up to 32 characters.Security TypeSelect a security type.Encry.Select an encryption type.Security KeyEnter a security key.Security TypeSecurity KeyWEP 64bit5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal number WEP 128bit 13 characters or 26-digit hexadecimal numberWAP/WAP2 8 to 63 characters or 64-digit hexadecimal numberShow Security KeyIf it is set to ON, the security key appears.Device IP AddressEnter the IP address.Channel to Be UsedSelect the channel to be used in wireless LAN.Sending OutputConfigure the sending output.BandwidthUse this setting when the communication mode is "11n". Select the bandwidth to be used.IP Address Distribution Range SettingConfigure the range to be used the IP address.Wireless Setting screen (Infrastructure Mode)If [Connection Type Switching] is set to [Wireless (infrastructure mode)] and the [Settings] button is clicked, the infrastructure mode wireless setting screen is displayed.Configure the SSID, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key of a wireless LAN.Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings.Access Point SearchClick this to search access points.When the search results are displayed, select the access point to use and click [OK]. [SSID], [Security Type], and [Encry.] are automatically applied.SSIDEnter an SSID using up to 32 characters.Security TypeSelect a security type.Encry.Select an encryption type.Security KeyEnter a security key.Security TypeSecurity KeyWEP 64bit5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal numberWEP 128bit13 characters or 26-digit hexadecimal numberWAP/WAP28 to 63 characters or 64-digit hexadecimal numberShow Security KeyIf it is set to ON, the security key appears.Back to top ';
body[473]='07-047.htm';
dai[473]='TEXT / IMAGE PRINTING';
bun[473]='TEXT / IMAGE PRINTINGTEXT / IMAGE PRINTINGLists preset text that can be used by the Character Print function in the copy mode.[Add] key Adds a new text message. List Lists the currently stored text. Save Preset TextWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 30 items can be stored.Edit or Delete Preset TextWhen you tap a text on the list, the edit screen appears for that text. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the text.Custom Watermark[Add] key Adds a new custom watermark.List Lists the currently stored custom watermarks. Store Custom WatermarkWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 30 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete Custom WatermarkWhen you tap a file name on the list, the edit screen appears for that custom watermark. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the custom watermark.SettingsItemDescriptionFile NameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File PropertySelect a file sharing type.Custom Stamp [Add] key Adds a new custom stamp.List Lists the currently stored custom stamps. Store Custom StampWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 30 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete Custom StampWhen you tap a file name on the list, the edit screen appears for that custom stamp. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the custom stamp.SettingsItemDescriptionFile NameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File PropertySelect a file sharing type.Back to top';
body[474]='07-048-01.htm';
dai[474]='SUBJECT NAME SETTINGS';
bun[474]='SUBJECT NAME SETTINGSSUBJECT NAME SETTINGSThe subjects that can be set for E-mail transmission are listed. [Add] key Adds a new subject name.List Lists the currently stored subject names. Store Subject NameWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 30 items can be stored.Edit or Delete Subject NameWhen you tap a subject name on the list, the edit screen appears for that subject. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the subject name.Back to top';
body[475]='07-048-02.htm';
dai[475]='FILE NAME SETTINGS';
bun[475]='FILE NAME SETTINGSFILE NAME SETTINGS[Add] key Adds a new file name.List Lists the currently stored file names.Store File NameWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 30 items can be stored.Edit or Delete File NameWhen you tap a file name on the list, the edit screen appears for that file name. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the file name.Back to top';
body[476]='07-048-03.htm';
dai[476]='MESSAGE BODY SETTINGS';
bun[476]='MESSAGE BODY SETTINGSMESSAGE BODY SETTINGSThe message body text that can be set for E-mail transmission are listed. [Add] key Adds a new message body.List Lists the currently stored messages.Store Message BodyWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. A title and a message body can be set. Up to 30 items can be stored.Edit or Delete Message BodyWhen you tap a title on the list, the edit screen appears for that message. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the message.Back to top';
body[477]='07-048-04.htm';
dai[477]='ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS';
bun[477]='ADMINISTRATION SETTINGSADMINISTRATION SETTINGSThe network scanner functions can be set.Advanced SettingsDisable Selection of Reply-toThe [Machine Name] and [Reply Address] are used to indicate the destination of return message. If the User Administration Settings are enabled and if both [Disable Selection of Reply-to.] are set to , the return destination of both [Machine Address] and [File NamingAdds a character string of the checked box to the file name of the scanned image data.When sending data to the same destination two or more times, set the [Unique Identifier] to not to overwrite the previously sent data by the new one.When sending data to a computer overseas using the Internet Fax function, set the [Sender Name] to .Default SubjectEnter a subject of e-mail to send it during network scanner E-mail transmission.Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message BodyWhen an e-mail is sent, the job information is added to the mail text automatically.Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message BodyWhen an e-mail is sent, the mail footer is added automatically.Mail Footer RegistrationEnter the text to be printed as the mail footer. Back to top';
body[478]='07-049.htm';
dai[478]='INTERNET FAX SETTINGS';
bun[478]='INTERNET FAX SETTINGSINTERNET FAX SETTINGSThe Internet Fax functions can be set.Receive SettingsInternet fax receptionEnables the Internet fax reception functions.POP3 ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110.POP AuthenticationThe authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User NameEnter the user name. The special user account is required for Internet fax reception.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, select [Change Password] and enter the new password in the text box.POP3 Communication TimeoutSet a timeout for communication to the POP3 server.Reception Check Interval SettingEnter an acknowledge cycle to the POP3 server.Enable SSLAllows the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow the POP over SSL communication, set the "Port Number" to thConnection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the POP3 server.Default SettingsI-Fax Own Name and Address SetSet these options to store the sender name and source address to be used for Internet fax communication. The stored sender name and source address will be printed at the top of the received fax.Sender NameEnter the default sender name.I-Fax Own AddressEnter the default source address.Direct SMTP SettingsPort Number (Receive)Enter the receive port number for direct SMTP communication. The default setting is port 25.TimeoutEnter a timeout.Port Number (Send)Enter the transmit port number for direct SMTP communication. The default setting is port 25.TimeoutEnter a timeout. Back to top';
body[479]='07-050.htm';
dai[479]='INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS';
bun[479]='INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGSINBOUND ROUTING SETTINGSOverviewThe fax and Internet fax received data can be forwarded according to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them.Registration of Forward TableYou can store or edit the data forwarding table that has the received data forward settings. Up to 50 data forwarding tables can be stored. A single forwarding table can store up to 500 sets of sender number and source address combinations. Up to 1000 desItemDescriptionForward Table NameEnter a forward table name.Receive Line SelectSelects a data receive line.Sender Number/Address SettingSelect the sender facsimile number or the Internet fax address. Before you select a sender number or address, store the destination number or address. To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data].AddEnters your selection.Sender Number/Address used on Forward TableDisplays the address that has been selected by the [Add] key.DeleteDeletes the selected address.Destination 1/2/3You can set the forwarding date and destination.Forwarding conditions: Set the data forwarding conditions.Day of week: Select a day of week to start data forwarding.Forwarding time: Set a clock time to start data forwarding.Start time: Set a time to start data forwarding.End time: Set a time to end the data forwarding.Format: Select a format of forwarding data.Destination SettingsLists the addresses that can be set as the destination. Select a destination by setting it to .Destination Settings (Direct Entry)Enter the destination name directly. Tap the [Add to forwarding destinations.] key to add the destination to the list.Sender Number/Address RegistrationStores new sender number or address to be used for inbound routing.ItemDescriptionAddress to be EnteredDisplays the entered sender number or address.Fax NumberEnter a facsimile number to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears.I-Fax AddressEnter an Internet fax address to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears.DeleteDeletes the selected sender number or address.Add to ListAdds the entered sender number to the list.Administration SettingsStores the administration settings to be used for inbound routing.ItemDescriptionInbound RoutingSets the inbound routing function.Disable Registration of Forward TableDisables the registration of forward table.Disable Change/Delete of Forward TableDisables a change of forward table.Disable Change of Forward ConditionDisables a change of data forwarding conditions.Disable Temporal Forward Setting from Operation PanelDisables a temporal data forward setting from the machine.Print Style SettingSets a print style of received data. If you have selected the [Always Save] or [Save Only at Error] option, enter a file name.Preset of CharacterSet characters added to the file name when a file is saved. When "Character 1" and "Character 2" are set in "File Naming No. 1 to No. 7", the set characters are added to the file name.Enter up to 64 full-width/half-width characters.File Naming No.1 to No.7Set the information included in the file name when saving a file.When stored in the address book, change the sender name to the contact nameWhen the sender of the data is stored in the address book, the sender information is changed to the name stored in the address book.Operation Enable the [Inbound Routing] function.Tap the [Administration Settings] from the menu. Enable the [Inbound Routing] function from the setting screen. Store the sender number or address.Tap the [Sender Number/Address Registration] from the menu. Enter the destination number or address that you wish to store.If you wish to forward all received data, you need not store the sender number and address separately. Store a forwarding table.Tap the [Inbound Routing Settings] from the menu. Tap the [Add] key on the displayed screen. When the [Table Registration] screen appears, store the forwarding table. Enable the stored forwarding table.Tap the [Inbound Routing Settings] from the menu.Set the forwarding table name that you wish to enable to .To specify forwarding conditions, select [Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1-3], and also select [Always Forward] or [Forward on Selected Day &amp; Time]. If you have selected the [Forward on Selected Day &amp; Time] option, you can Back to top';
body[480]='07-051.htm';
dai[480]='DOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTION';
bun[480]='DOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONDOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONAll of the transmitted image data (sent or received by facsimile or e-mail transfer) can be forwarded to any destination.ItemDescriptionForward Send DataSet a destination to forward the send data.Forward Received DataSet a destination to forward the received data.E-mail/Network Folder/FTP/DesktopSelect a forwarding type of the send or received image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book. You can enter an e-mail directly. Format: Select a format for data forwarding.Release SettingsReleases the destination settings.File FormatFormat: Select a format for data forwarding.Back to top';
body[481]='07-052.htm';
dai[481]='METADATA SETTING';
bun[481]='METADATA SETTINGMETADATA SETTINGIf the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications. The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata, and edit or delete an existing metadata. [Add] key Adds a new metadata set.List Lists the currently stored metadata sets.Metadata DeliveryEnables or disables the metadata delivery function.Storing Metadata SetsWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 10 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete Metadata SetWhen you tap a title on the list, the edit screen appears for that metadata set. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the metadata set.SettingsItemDescriptionMetadata Set NameEnter a metadata name.Metadata Delivery DestinationSelect a destination where you wish to send the image and metadata.Allow Custom FilenamesEnable or disable to edit the name of image file and XML file to be sent by the metadata send job.Address Type Allowing Metadata EntrySet the destination information to be used for metadata transmission.NameEnter a metadata name to be displayed on the touch panel.XML Tag NameEnter an XML tag name to be contained in the metadata set.Entry Type Direct entry: Allows direct entry of each metadata from the soft keyboard or the numeric keypad.Metadata list: Allows a selection of metadata from the previously entered data list. You must enter optional values for metadata selection in the input area. Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas. Each option can be comprised of up to 70 charaInitial entry by default: Uses a default value as the first value of the entered metadata list.Expand Metadata AutomaticallyWhen the machine generates metadata automatically, the "metadataSetName", "userLoginId" (if user authentication is used), "pageSize", and "imageMode" are added to the metadata.To Be Used as DefaultThe current metadata set is used as the default.Back to top';
body[482]='07-053-01.htm';
dai[482]='STANDARD APPLICATION SETTINGS';
bun[482]='STANDARD APPLICATION SETTINGSSTANDARD APPLICATION SETTINGSThe standard application settings can be added and controlled.[Add] key Adds a new standard application.List Lists the currently stored standard applications.Store Standard ApplicationWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 8 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete Standard ApplicationWhen you tap an application name on the list, the edit screen appears for that standard application. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the standard application.SettingsItemDescriptionApplication NameEnter an application name.Application UI AddressSet an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.Expansion PlatformSet this option to use the expansion platform.Use Proxy ServerSet this option to use the proxy server.Data SizeSet the screen size of application on the X and Y coordinates.Display FormatSet the screen of application.Back to top';
body[483]='07-053-02.htm';
dai[483]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNTING APPLICATION SETTINGS';
bun[483]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNTING APPLICATION SETTINGSEXTERNAL ACCOUNTING APPLICATION SETTINGSAn external account application can be added and controlled.Set the server name where you have installed the external accounting application.ItemDescriptionExternal Account ControlEnable the totalling function by the external accounting application. If enabled, always enter the application name or Web service address.Set Authentication Server (Server 1)If the server is set, the external authentication mode is selected. Any access to the MFP is controlled by the application that you set on this page. If set, always enter the application name, application UI address, or Web service address of server 1. IfEnable Image Job LogThis item is displayed when you enter a product key of the "Sharp Document Recorder."Server 1-4Select a server to enable it.Application NameEnter an application name.Application UI AddressEnter the URL of the login screen to be accessed first when the machine is turned on.Web Service AddressEnter the URL of the server or computer which sends commands and events by XML/SOAP protocol.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.Home Directory PathEnter a maximum of 64 half-width characters for the home directory search text.User NameEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication.PasswordEnter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home directory path authentication.Back to top';
body[484]='07-053-03.htm';
dai[484]='RECEIVED APPLICATION SETTINGS';
bun[484]='RECEIVED APPLICATION SETTINGSRECEIVED APPLICATION SETTINGSThe Fax or I-Fax Receive functions can be set in the Sharp OSA applications.SettingsItemDescriptionTransfer to ApplicationThe Fax or I-Fax message reception can be controlled by Sharp OSA applications.Application Name Enter the application name to receive.Web Service AddressEnter the Web service address.TimeoutEnter a timeout.Use Proxy ServerA network access via the proxy server is allowed.Back to top';
body[486]='07-054.htm';
dai[486]='USB DRIVER SETTINGS';
bun[486]='USB DRIVER SETTINGSUSB DRIVER SETTINGSSet the USB driver to be connected to the machine. Some settings are made valid only when the machine is restarted. In such a case, a prompt appears to restart the machine.ItemDescriptionExternal KeyboardSelect whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used.USB MemorySelect whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used.Level of EncryptionSelect the level of encryption for communication using the external driver.Back to top';
body[485]='07-054-02.htm';
dai[485]='INBOUND ROUTING (HDD STORAGE) SETTINGS';
bun[485]='INBOUND ROUTING (HDD STORAGE) SETTINGSINBOUND ROUTING (HDD STORAGE) SETTINGSConfigure settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk.ItemDescriptionAuto save of received faxes to HDDSet whether received faxes are saved to the hard disk.Set which faxes are savedSelect which received faxes are saved. Select from lines 1 to 3 and Internet Fax.Specify the folderSpecify the folder in which received faxes are saved. Enter a folder name no longer than 32 full-width/half-width characters.Enable/disable saving to folders by dateConfigure settings to have date folders created and received faxes saved to the folders by date.Received fax print settingsConfigure print settings for received faxes.Save and print: Save received faxes to hard disk, and also print.Only print when save error occurs: Print received fax when save fails.Save in inbound routing error box when save fails: When save fails, save the fax in the inbound routing error box.File formatSelect the file format for inbound routing. Preset charactersSet the characters added to the file name when a file is saved. When "Character 1" and "Character 2" are set in "File Naming No. 1 to No. 7", the set characters are added to the file name.Enter up to 64 full-width/half-width characters.File Naming No.1 to No.7Set the information included in the file name when saving a file.Reception notification settingsSet whether notification is sent by e-mail when a fax is received.Notification addressShows the address to which the notification is sent.Direct EntryEnter the notification address. Enter a maximum of 1500 half-width characters for the address.Global Address SearchSelect the address from the global addresses.Add to listAn address directly entered or found by global address search is saved as the notification address.Back to top';
body[487]='07-055.htm';
dai[487]='E-MAIL PRINT SETTINGS';
bun[487]='E-MAIL PRINT SETTINGSE-MAIL PRINT SETTINGSWhen an e-mail is sent to the address of this machine, a file attached to this mail is printed out.ItemDescriptionE-mail PrintSelect this option to use the E-mail printing.POP3 ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110.POP AuthenticationThe authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User NameEnter the user name. The special user account is required for e-mail printing.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, select [Change Password] and enter the new password in the text box.Check IntervalEnter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes.Enable SSLIf set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow the POP over SSL communication, set the "Port NuConnection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the POP3 server.Back to top';
body[488]='07-056.htm';
dai[488]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)';
bun[488]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)From the operator panel of machine, you can access the FTP server and select server data for printing.[Add] key Adds a new FTP server.List Lists the currently stored FTP servers.Store FTP ServerWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 20 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete FTP ServerWhen you tap a title on the list, the edit screen appears for that FTP server. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the FTP server.SettingsItemDescriptionNameEnter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel.FTP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the FTP server.DirectoryEnter the destination directory of the FTP file server.Enable User AuthenticationEnables user authentication. The user name and password are required to enter.User NameEnter the login user name for logging in the FTP file server.PasswordEnter the password required for logging in the FTP file server. To change the password select [Change Password] , and enter the new password in the text box.Enable SSLEnables the SSL encryption communication.Back to top';
body[489]='07-057.htm';
dai[489]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP(SMB)';
bun[489]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP(SMB)SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP(SMB)Allows you to access the network folder from the machine operator panel, and to select network folder data for printing.[Add] key Adds a new network folder.List Lists the currently stored network folders.Store Network FolderWhen you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 20 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".Edit or Delete Network FolderWhen you tap a title on the list, the edit screen appears for that network folder. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the folder.SettingsItemDescriptionNameEnter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel.Folder PathEnter a path to the network folder.Enable User AuthenticationEnables user authentication. The user name and password are required to enter.User NameEnter the user name used for logging in the network folder.PasswordEnter the password required for logging in the network folder. To change the password select [Change Password] , and enter the new password in the text box.Back to top';
body[490]='07-058.htm';
dai[490]='PRINT SETTINGS FROM PC';
bun[490]='PRINT SETTINGS FROM PCPRINT SETTINGS FROM PCIf the print settings data is loaded from the client PC to the FTP server of the machine, the print settings are stored in the machine automatically.ItemDescriptionFTP PrintEnable the FTP printing when data is moved to the FTP server of the machine. Enabled by default.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 21.Use BannerEnable or disable a banner. Disabled by default.Back to top';
body[491]='07-059-01.htm';
dai[491]='ECO SCAN SETTING';
bun[491]='ECO SCAN SETTINGECO SCAN SETTINGEco Scan Setting is used to execute a non-print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD while the fusing unit is turned Off. Set "Eco Scan Setting" to , and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting.The following modes and screens can be set.Home Screen CopyImage SendDocument FilingSystem SettingsSharpOSABack to top';
body[492]='07-059-02.htm';
dai[492]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS';
bun[492]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGSPOWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGSThe Auto Power Shut-Off can be enabled or disabled, and the Preheat Mode can be set. This function reduces your power costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural resources and reduce pollution.Preheat Mode SettingThe time until Preheat Mode activates can be set to any number of minutes from 1 to 120. Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses after printing ends and no further operations are performed. This function reduces your power costs, Preheat mode cannot be disabled.The Auto Power-Off transition time is fixed.The Auto Power-Off transition time is fixed. When this setting is enabled, the [Change transition time by time of day.] option is disabled.If the Auto Power-Off is disabled, the time you have set here is disabled.AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE.This function works in Auto Power Shut-Off mode. When the machine completes a print job received from the PC or outputs received fax data, the machine immediately returns to the Auto Power Shut-Off mode.Change Transition Time by Time of DayThis function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period. When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time] option is disabled. The image transfer control settings are not changed.This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling. If both of them are enabled, the Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.Pages are counted for each paper size separately.When the power supply of the machine was off, there was no job during this time.Transition to Energy Saving and Auto Power Shut-Off modesPatternTransition timeAverage outputs per hour*Mode1 (Job Start Priority1) After 1 hour500 or more Mode2 (Job Start Priority2)After 30 minutes100 to 499Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) After 5 minutes20 to 99 Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)After the minimum time periodUp to 19 * Factory default settingAutoThis function controls the power optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of machine based on job logs obtained during a certain time period.If the machine does not have the 4-week job log information, the machine enters the template2 (Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) between 8:00 and 18:00 hours). Then after that, it enters Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2).ManualYou can set a pattern for each time band. The machine already has the 3-pattern template. The Energy Save pattern can be added to the "Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4".Three-pattern templateTemplatePatternDescription of modeTemplate 1All "Energy Save Priority 2"The machine runs in the "Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)" all the time.Template 28:00-18:00 "Energy Save Priority 1"The machine runs in "Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1)" between 8:00 and 18:00, and in "Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)" at other times.Template 38:00-18:00 "Job Start Priority 1"The machine runs in "Mode1 (Job Start Priority1)" between 8:00 and 18:00, and in "Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)" at other times.Specific Date Operation SettingsYou can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date.The specific date operation is performed on the day configured as the specific date regardless of the setting on Auto Power-Off transition time (enabled or disabled)."Specific Date" tabYou can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date.ItemDescriptionDate SettingConfigure the date on which you want to operate the machine with a specific pattern.Select a day between 1 and 31 in Every Month or from End of Every Month.Applied Energy Saving OperationSelect an energy saving patten you want to apply.Use the "Pattern" tab to specify the details of the energy saving pattern.Operation for HolidayConfigure how the machine operates if the preset specific date falls on a holiday.Use the "Holiday" tab to specify the day as the holiday.If a specific date that is initially specified coincides with the one that is moved because it falls on a holiday, the setting for the former takes precedence.If specific dates of the same dates are configured, they are used in ascending order between 1 and 7 (specific date numbers)."Pattern" tabThis tab is used to configure the details of an energy saving pattern.ItemDescriptionEnergy Save OperationSelect a specific date pattern you want to specify.Change Pattern NameEnter a pattern name when you want to change the name of a specific date pattern.Pattern to Be ModeledSelect a source pattern when you create a pattern using a stored or preset pattern.Add new schedule.Add a schedule."Holiday" tabSpecify a holiday. The day you specified as the holiday will not be a specific date.ItemDescriptionHoliday ListWhen you tap this option, the dates and days of the week for the holidays you have set for two years.Day of WeekUse this option to specify a holiday using a day of the week.Set PeriodUse this to specify a holiday using a date."Final Registered Time" shows when the holiday that is stored with Set Period was stored.Display a Message to Delay the Time of Entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shut-Off ModeSet whether a message is displayed 15 seconds before Preheat Mode or Auto Power Shutoff Mode is entered.Sleep Mode Power LevelSet whether to give priority to Low Power or Fast Wake Up.Low Power: The machine switches to the power saving mode, but it takes some time to recover.Fast Wake Up: Compared with Low Power, the power value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster recovery.Back to top';
body[493]='07-059-03.htm';
dai[493]='TONER SAVE MODE';
bun[493]='TONER SAVE MODE TONER SAVE MODEToner Save ModeThis mode is used to reduce toner consumption.Toner consumption can be set for each print job of "Copy", "Printer", and "Prints (Document Filing)".Toner consumption can be selected from three levels. Toner Save1 (Toner Consumption: Much)Toner Save2 (Toner Consumption: Middle)Toner Save3 (Toner Consumption: Little)Items may not be displayed depending on the machine settings.Back to top ';
body[494]='07-060.htm';
dai[494]='ECO MODE SETTINGS';
bun[494]='ECO MODE SETTINGSECO MODE SETTINGSThe machine\'s power consumption can be reduced by Eco Mode setting. Although each function setting can be changed separately, the machine has the "Normal Mode" and "Eco Mode" to allow simultaneous changing of settings.ItemDescriptionNormal ModeAllows easy machine operation with reduced power consumption.Eco ModeMinimizes the machine\'s power consumption.Following the System SettingsThe separately power saving settings apply.Setting values applied by each mode is as follows.Energy SaveNormal ModeEco ModeEco ScanOn(Sending Modes Only)On(All Modes Except Copy)Auto Power Shut-Off TimerChange transition time by time of day.:AutoFix transition time.:On(1min.)As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.OffOnPreheat Mode Setting1min.1min.Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat modeOnOnEach Energy Save settings in the Power Management Setting is not applyed when Nomal/Eco mode is used.Back to top';
body[495]='07-062.htm';
dai[495]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING';
bun[495]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGPOWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGThe machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The "Setting 1", "Setting 2" and "Setting 3" are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the samThe scheduling function does not support the power management settings in the Preheat Mode and Auto Power Shut-Off Mode.The preset power-off time is subject to the following restrictions:If the machine is running due to the current job execution or other reasons, the machine is turned off only after the job has finished.The machine cannot receive printer jobs.The machine can receive output jobs, such as received fax data outputs.If the Time Specified Output of Received Data setting is enabled, they are output next time the machine is turned on.If the power management setting is also enabled, the Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.If the same time is specified, settings are applied in the order of "Setting 1", "Setting 2", and "Setting 3".The power is not turned off in the following cases:"Automatic deletion when power is turned on" is in progress.While the optimization of the hard disk is in progress or while a restart is in progress after the setting mode has been changed. The preset power on/off time is within one minute from when the setting is accepted. Back to top';
body[496]='07-063.htm';
dai[496]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS';
bun[496]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSE-mail StatusSelects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address.StandardSets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.ItemDescriptionE-mail AddressEnter the destination e-mail address for transmission of machine status information. When you enter multiple addresses, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,).Send NowWhen tapped, the status message is sent to the destination of the e-mail address list.Send on Schedule 1If checked as , an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule.Send on Schedule 2If checked as , an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule.SchedulingSelect a schedule to send E-mails.Advanced SettingsBi-directional Status MessageItemDescriptionPOP3 ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110.POP AuthenticationThe authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User NameEnter the user name. The special user account is required for bi-directional e-mail status transmission.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Check IntervalEnter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes.Enable SSLAllows the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the "Port Number" to the POP over SSConnection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the POP3 server.Alerts MessageSelects the E-mail Alert function settings. The E-mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to the administrator or dealer using e-mail. Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address liE-mail AddressEnter the destination E-mail address for alert message transmission. You can enter multiple addresses by separating them by a semicolon or colon. Example: aaa@abc.jp,bbb@xyz.comBack to top';
body[497]='07-064.htm';
dai[497]='JOB LOG';
bun[497]='JOB LOGJOB LOGControl Job LogDeletes log of a job executed on the machine. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log.You can save the job log by selecting the [Job Log] in Setting mode (Web version).View Job LogViews log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key.Back to top';
body[498]='07-065-01.htm';
dai[498]='CHANGE PASSWORD';
bun[498]='CHANGE PASSWORDCHANGE PASSWORDThe administrator password can be changed. When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password. (It is recommended that you periodically change the administrator password.) Enter a password consisting of 5 to 32 characters, and tap the [StoThe user-level authentication password is required to add, edit or delete the destination. When you log on, enter "users" as the user name. Then, enter the user password that you have registered with this option. The administrator-level authentiIf you tap the [Store] key without entering a password, the previously set value is assumed. Password protection is enabled by default.For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Quick Start Guide.Back to top';
body[499]='07-065-02.htm';
dai[499]='PORT CONTROL';
bun[499]='PORT CONTROLPORT CONTROLPort Control Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Store] key. The following ports can be configured.Server PortClient PortHTTPHTTPSFTP PRINTRaw PrintLPDIPPIPP-SSLTandem Output ReceivePC ScanRemote Operation PanelSNMPDTelnetNBT/WINSJCPRARPSMTPWSDUSB-Device Expansion (when Application Communication Module or External Account Module is enabled)Sharp OSA (when Application Communication Module or External Account Module is enabled)HTTPHTTPSHTTPHTTPSFTPFTPSSMTPSMTP-SSLPOP3POP3-SSLSNMP-TRAPNotify Job EndLDAPLDAP-SSLSMB/WINSSNTPmDNSTandem Output SendData Backup SendBack to top';
body[500]='07-065-03.htm';
dai[500]='FILTER SETTING';
bun[500]='FILTER SETTINGFILTER SETTINGFilter SettingYou can set the filter by an IP or MAC address to prevent an authorised access to the machine via a network. Set the IP or MAC address filter and tap the [Store] key.IP Address Filter SettingsThis option sets an IP address. You can specify whether to allow or prohibit access to the machine from the IP address you set.MAC Address Filter SettingsThis option sets a MAC address. It allows access to the machine from the MAC address you set.Back to top';
body[501]='07-065-07.htm';
dai[501]='SSL SETTINGS';
bun[501]='SSL SETTINGSSSL SETTINGSSSL can be used for data transmission over a network. SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of information communicated over a network. Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive information safely. Data encryption can be Server PortHTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication.Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Setting mode (Web version) Access: When this setting is enabled, all communication that attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected to HTTPS.Client PortHTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication.SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP communication.POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3 communication.LDAP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to LDAP communication.Level of EncryptionThe encryption strength can be set to one of three levels. Certificate Information Register the information that is required to issue a certificate. Back to top';
body[502]='07-065-08.htm';
dai[502]='IEEE802.1X SETTING';
bun[502]='IEEE802.1X SETTINGIEEE802.1X SETTINGIEEE802.1X can be used to authenticate a user to allow use of the machine. IEEE802.1X protocol defines port-based authentication for both wired and wireless networks. Use IEEE802.1X authentication to allow only authenticated devices to use network, and prBack to top';
body[503]='07-065-08_01.htm';
dai[503]='DATA CLEARANCE SETTINGS';
bun[503]='DATA CLEARANCE SETTINGS DATA CLEARANCE SETTINGSData Clearance SettingsEnabling this function activates the following security functions on the machine.Use caution, as this function cannot be cancelled once enabled.This is displayed when a data security kit is installed.The image data generated in each job is encrypted. You can automatically clear the encrypted data in the memory or on the hard disk drive after completing each job.If you enter the password below incorrectly three consecutive times, the input operation becomes locked for five minutes.Administrator password/user password to use when the user authentication function is not setPassword for confidential folders and files in document filingPassword for printing encrypted PDF for direct printing* *This data cannot be used if you enter the password incorrectly three consecutive times.Password for FTP pull printTo enable these features, touch [OK] when a message for confirming whether or not to enable the features appears, and enter the same code as that shown on the "Security code input" screen. Touch the [Execute] key.Then restart the device.After restarting, you can select from one to seven times for the "Clearance Time Settings". A high clearance time setting will increase security, however, the time will take longer to clear. It is recommended that you set it to an appropriate setting according to your usage.Back to top ';
body[504]='07-065-08_02.htm';
dai[504]='RELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATION';
bun[504]='RELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATION RELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATIONRelease Lock on File / Folder OperationThis function is used to release document filing folders and files and encrypted PDF files, that are locked due to the entry of an incorrect password.Touch the [Release Lock on File/Folder Operation] key and then the [Release] key to release all locked items.After this is done, the items can be manipulated. When no items are locked, the [Release Lock on File/Folder Operation] key is greyed out. Back to top ';
body[505]='07-065-09.htm';
dai[505]='IPSEC SETTINGS';
bun[505]='IPSEC SETTINGSIPSEC SETTINGSIPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and received safely without the need to configure settings for IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other higher-level application. This setting is onIt may take some time to reflect on the machine settings, and you cannot connect to the machine during this time.If the Setting mode (Web version) settings are not correctly selected, connection to the machine may not be allowed, or the settings may not allow printing, scanning, or Setting mode (Web version) display. In this case, deselect this setting and change thBack to top';
body[506]='07-065-10.htm';
dai[506]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT';
bun[506]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINTHIDDEN PATTERN PRINTSelect Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The hidden pattern print function is effective at preventing unauthorised copying as the specified text emerges in the background on output sheets.Default SettingsItemDescriptionHidden Pattern Print SettingA pattern print can be printed with this settings.ExposureSelect an exposure.Font SizeSelect a font size.AngleSelect a character angle.Font StyleSelect the standard or italic character settings.Camouflage PatternSet a camouflage pattern.Print MethodSelect a character display pattern.Character stand out.The background stands out.Print Contents SettingItemDescriptionStandard CharactersAllows you to select a preset character string. The following character strings can be selected.DO NOT COPY, Copy Ban, Internal Use Only, Handle With Care, CONFIDENTIAL, Copy Invalid, IMPORTANT, COPYPre-set TextSelect a stored preset character string. This setting is ignored if [Direct Entry] is enabled.DO NOT COPY, Copy Ban, Internal Use Only, Handle With Care, CONFIDENTIAL, Copy Invalid, IMPORTANT, COPYInformation PrintingEnables simultaneous printing of the following information sets.Serial number, account job ID, login name/user number, number of copy control, date and timeDisable Direct EntryDirectly enters the user name. This setting is ignored if [Pre-set Text] is enabled. ContrastSet a character contrast. The black, magenta, and cyan can be set in any of 9 levels.Store Print CharactersStores the user-created print characters. Up to 30 characters can be stored.Back to top';
body[507]='07-065-11.htm';
dai[507]='TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT';
bun[507]='TRACKING INFORMATION PRINTTRACKING INFORMATION PRINTPrints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed.ItemDescriptionPrint tracking information settingsSet this option to print the tracking information.Print DataThe following information can be printed.Serial number, characters, account job ID, login name/user number, date and timePrint PositionSet a print position on each page.Select the Job to PrintSet a job to print the tracking information.Back to top';
body[508]='07-065-13.htm';
dai[508]='PERSONAL INFORMATION AND HDD INITIALIZATION';
bun[508]='PERSONAL INFORMATION AND HDD INITIALIZATIONPERSONAL INFORMATION AND HDD INITIALIZATIONInitialize Private Data / Data in Machine Use this to batch-delete private data, such as address books and transmission logs, for each item to enhance security of the disposal or recycling of the machine.When this function has been executed, a notification on the completion of deletion is printed. The machine is then locked and can no longer be used.If you wish to use the locked machine, contact your dealer.The following pieces of data are deleted.All data in address books and related private dataAll data in user informationAll Job Data inside MachineProgramsPre-set TextJob logsSetting information on the system settings (initialized to the factory default)Back to top';
body[509]='07-065-14.htm';
dai[509]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT';
bun[509]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINTOTHER SETTINGS Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job You can select settings to cancel print jobs that are not print hold jobs, or force all print jobs to be held. When ［Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job］ is turned ON, the settings below can be selected.ItemDescriptionForce RetentionThis setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected.Disable JobProhibit all print jobs other than print hold jobs.Back to top ';
body[510]='07-066.htm';
dai[510]='LIST OF SETTING MODE FOR FAX';
bun[510]='LIST OF SETTING MODE FOR FAXLIST OF SETTING MODE FOR FAXThe following lists the Setting mode for fax and factory default settings.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.SYSTEM SETTINGSU: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUASystem SettingsYesYesF-Code Memory Box-YesYesFax Data Receive/Forward - Fax FunctionsYesYesFax SettingsYesYesReceive SettingsAuto ReceptionYesYesMultiple Set PrintDisabledYesYesStaple *1DisabledYesYesForward Received Data-YesYesImage Send Settings - Fax FunctionsNoYesFax SettingsNoYesFax Default SettingsNoYesDial Mode SettingToneNoYesAuto Wake Up PrintEnabledNoYesPause Time SettingVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesFax Dest. Confirmation ModeDisabledNoYes Apply to Addresses Other Than Fax Disabled No Yes Speaker SettingsNoYesSpeakerVolume: 5NoYesRinger VolumeVolume: 5NoYesLine MonitorVolume: 5NoYesFax Receive Complete SignalVolume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3 Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: 3 sec.NoYesFax Send Complete SignalVolume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3 Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: 3 sec.NoYesFax Communication Error SignalVolume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3 Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: 0.3 sec. eachNoYesRemote Reception Number Setting5NoYesOriginal Print on Transaction ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyNoYesTransaction Report Print Select SettingNoYesSingle SendingPrint Out Error Report OnlyNoYesBroadcastingPrint Out All ReportNoYesReceivingDo not PrintNoYesConfidential ReceptionPrint Out Notice PageNoYesActivity Report Print Select SettingNoYesAuto Print at Memory FullDisabledNoYesPrint Daily at Designated TimeDisabledNoYesECMEnabledNoYesDigital Subscriber NetworkDisabledNoYesDRD(Distinctive Ring Detection) DisabledNoYesFax Send SettingsNoYesAuto Reduction Sending SettingEnabledNoYesRotation Sending SettingAll EnabledNoYesQuick On Line SendingEnabledNoYesPrinting Page Number at ReceiverEnabledNoYesSender/Destination Name ChangeFax No.NoYesDate/Own Number Print Position SettingOutside the Original ImageNoYesRecall in Case of Line BusySee "Country Differentiation Table"NoYesRecall in Case of Communication ErrorSee "Country Differentiation Table"NoYesProhibit Fax BroadcastingDisabledNoYesFax Receive SettingsNoYesNumber of Calls in Auto Reception2 timesNoYes Switching from Manual to Automatic Reception *2 Disabled No Yes Duplex Reception SettingDisabledNoYesAuto Receive Reduce SettingEnabledNoYesPrint Style SettingAuto Size SelectNoYesSet the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding-NoYes Letter Size RX Reduce Print *2 Disabled No Yes Receiving Date &amp; Time PrintDisabledNoYesA3 RX ReduceDisabledNoYesFax Output SettingsVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesNumber of Prints1NoYesStaple Settings*11 Staple at BackNoYesPaper SizeA4 or A3 (8-1/2 x 11 or 8-1/2 x 11R)NoYesAllow/Reject Number SettingNoYesAllow/Reject Number SettingAll DisabledNoYesReject Unknown CallsDisabledNoYesFax Polling SecurityNoYesSet Fax Polling SecurityEnabledNoYes*1 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed *2 This function is not available in some countries and regions.Back to top';
body[511]='07-068.htm';
dai[511]='F-CODE MEMORY BOX';
bun[511]='F-CODE MEMORY BOXF-CODE MEMORY BOXThis section explains how to store memory boxes for various types of F-code communication.[Add] key Adds a new memory box.List Lists the currently stored memory boxes. When you select a memory box, the edit/delete screen for the memory box appears.Storing a memory boxWhen you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be stored for all functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast). For information on the settings, see "Settings".Editing and deleting a memory boxWhen you select a memory box from the list, the edit screen appears for the box. For information on the settings, see "Settings". Tap the [Delete] key to delete the memory box.SettingsItemDescriptionItems common to all typesBox TypeSelect the type of box.Polling Memory: Store a memory box for F-code polling memory. The sub-address and passcode that you store in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to poll the machine (request transmission) using F-code communication.Confidential: Store a memory box for F-code confidential communication. In addition, store a "Print PIN" in the memory box to print faxes received by confidential reception. The sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory box are necRelay Broadcast: Store a memory box for F-code relay broadcast transmission. Up to 30 destinations can be stored to forward the received data. The sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to send a faMemory Box NameEnter a name (maximum of 18 characters) for the memory box.Sub Address/PasscodeEnter a sub-address and passcode. A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for each sub-address and passcode. Separate a sub-address and passcode by a slash ("/").Items displayed when storing a confidential memory boxPrint PINSet a "Print PIN" for confidential reception. Enter a 4-digit number.Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory boxRecipientsSelect the end recipients of the relay broadcast. Select the recipients from the address book.Select the recipient from the address book: Selects an address from the address book.Destination Entry: An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly entered. Enter the address in the same way as when storing an address for a mode.Address Review: This displays a list of the selected recipients. Addresses can be deleted from this list if needed.When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is already programmed for another box cannot be used. However, the same passcode can be used for more than one memory box.[] and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address.A passcode can be omitted.Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.Back to top';
body[512]='07-069.htm';
dai[512]='FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD - FAX FUNCTIONS';
bun[512]='FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD - FAX FUNCTIONSFAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD - FAX FUNCTIONSThis section explains settings for fax reception and forwarding.Fax SettingsItemDescriptionReceive SettingsSet the fax reception method.Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception.Manual Reception: Used when an existing extension telephone is connected to the machine. You can answer to a phone call first, and then receive a fax by manual operation. Multiple Set PrintSpecify whether or not two or more copies of received faxes will be printed. The number of copies can be set with the "Fax Output Settings."StapleSpecify whether or not stapling is performed. (Only when a finisher is installed) A binding style can be set with the "Fax Output Settings."Forward Received DataWhen the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine.If there is no forwarding data or if the destination is not registered, no data is forwarded.If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled, you are prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct password using numeric keys.If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.All faxes received are forwarded. Note that the received data stored in the F-code confidential memory box is not forwarded.For destination number registration, see "Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding" in Setting mode.Back to top';
body[513]='07-070.htm';
dai[513]='IMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONS';
bun[513]='IMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONSIMAGE SEND SETTINGS - FAX FUNCTIONSYou can select the image send settings of fax functions.Fax SettingsFax Default SettingsThe fax settings can be enabled or disabled to suit the needs of your workplace.Dial Mode SettingThis setting can only be activated in Canada. Select the appropriate setting for your telephone line type.Dial Mode SettingSelect the line type from the list.Auto SelectSelect this after the line has been connected to have the machine automatically detect whether your line is a pulse dial line or a tone dial line.Auto Wake Up PrintWhen the [Power] button is "Off" (but the main power switch is "") and a fax is received, this function activates the machine and prints the fax. When this function is disabled, received faxes are not printed until the [Power] button iPause Time SettingChanges the length of pauses inserted in fax numbers. If a hyphen (-) is entered when dialling or storing a fax number, a pause of 2 seconds is inserted. It can be set between 1 and 15 seconds, in every 1 seconds.Fax Dest. Confirmation ModeThis setting specifies whether or not a destination verification message is displayed when sending a fax in order to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination.Speaker SettingsUse these settings to set the sound heard from the speaker for the Speaker, Ringer Volume, Line Monitor, Fax Receive Complete Signal, Fax Send Complete Signal, and Fax Communication Error Signal. For the Fax Receive Complete Signal, the Fax Send Complete Check on Setup SoundsChecks the selected tone pattern and volume.Remote Reception Number SettingYou can set the machine to the fax reception mode by entering a one-digit number from the connected extension telephone and by tapping the key. This one-digit number is called the Remote Reception number, and it can be between 0 and 9.Original Print on Transaction ReportWhen a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select one of the settings below.Print Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintThis setting will not be effective if the next "Transaction Report Print Select Setting" is set to "Do not Print".Transaction Report Print Select SettingSelects whether or not a transaction report will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being printed. Select a setting for each of the following operations:Single SendingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintBroadcastingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintReceivingPrint Out All ReportPrint Out Error Report OnlyDo not PrintConfidential ReceptionPrint Out Notice PageDo not PrintWhen a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. For details, see "Original Print on Transaction Report".When transaction report printing is set for "Receiving", a report will not be printed for a reception from a number specified as a reject number in "Allow/Reject Number Setting".Activity Report Print Select SettingThis is used to have the Image Sending Activity Report that is stored in the machine memory printed at regular intervals. The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once If you only select the "Print Daily at Designated Time" setting and the number of recorded transactions reaches 200 before the specified time, each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction (the oldest transaction will not be printed).The Transaction Report can be printed out manually as needed. For more information, see "LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)".ECMLine conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted fax image. When ECM (Error Correction Mode) is turned on, pages that are distorted are automatically re-transmitted.If the other machine supports Super G3, ECM will function regardless of this setting.Distinctive Ring DetectionThis Setting can only be activated in Canada, Australia, New Zealand, and Hong Kong. If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to your telephone line, the number called can be identified by its ringing pattern. By using one number for voice calls aPBX SettingThis Setting can only be activated in France and Germany.When the machine is used on a PBX, you can enable the PBX setting to have the machine automatically connect to the outside line. When this setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. When the [R] key is tapped, the PBX setting is temporariIf your PBX uses the Flash method to connect to the outside line, select the [Flash]. If your PBX uses an ID number to connect to the outside line, specify the ID number. Select a number for the first digit and then a number or a hyphen "-" for the second and third digits. Fax Send SettingsSettings for fax transmission can be configured.Auto Reduction Sending SettingThis setting is used to have the size of transmitted faxes automatically reduced to match the size of the paper in the receiving machine. If the setting is disabled, faxes are sent at full size. Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the prRotation Sending SettingWhen transmitting an image that is one of the following sizes, this function rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. (The setting can be configured separately for each size.) A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2"x11", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R, 16KA4R and 8-1/2" x 11"R size images are not rotated.Quick On Line SendingWhen this setting is enabled, the machine starts transmitting a fax as soon as the first page is scanned. Transmission takes place at the same time as the remaining pages are being scanned. If you disable this setting, transmission will not begin until alPrinting Page Number at ReceiverWhen the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine, the page number can be added to the top of each printed page.Sender/Destination Name ChangeAllows you to change the destination name and sender fax number if necessary.Date/Own Number Print Position SettingThis setting determines the position of the date and sender information printed at the top of faxes by the receiving machine. To have the information printed outside the transmitted document image, tap the [Outside the Original Image] key. To have the infRecall in Case of Line BusyThis program is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between recall attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason.Number of Times to Recall When Line is BusyThis setting specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy. When recalling is performed, you can set the number of recall attempts.Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) When Line is BusyThe interval between recall attempts can be set.The number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts that can be set in each country are shown in the following table.Country Differentiation Table &nbsp; The number of recall attemptsThe interval between attemptsUnited Kingdom, France, Germany, Sweden, Italy, Spain, Netherlands, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Hungary, Czech, Republic, Slovakia, Poland, Greece, Russia1 to 10(default: 2)any number of minutes from 1 to 15(default: 3)Canada1 to 14(default: 2)Australia, New Zealand, Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, India, Philippines1 to 9(default: 2)Hong Kong1 to 3(default: 2)Taiwan1 to 15(default: 2)any number of minutes from 4 to 15(default: 4)Indonesia1 to 5(default: 2) When this setting is enabled, note that the machine will not attempt the call again when manual transmission or direct transmission is used.Recall in Case of Communication ErrorThis determines how many times the machine will automatically attempt the call again if a fax transmission fails due to a communication error.Number of Times to Recall in Case of ErrorSpecify how many times the machine will attempt the call again when a communication error occurs.Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in Case of ErrorThe interval between recall attempts can be set. The number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts that can be set in each country are shown in the following table.Country Differentiation Table &nbsp; The number of recall attempts The interval between attempts United Kingdom, France, Germany, Sweden, Italy, Spain, Netherlands, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Hungary, Czech, Republic, Slovakia, Poland, Greece, Russia 1 to 5 (default: 1) any number of minutes from 1 to 15 (default: 1W) Australia, New Zealand, Canada 1 attempt any number of minutes from 1 to 15 (default: 3) Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, India, Philippines 1 to 9 (default: 2) any number of minutes from 1 to 15 (default: 1) Hong Kong 1 to 3 (default: 2) Taiwan 1 to 15 (default: 2) Indonesia 1 to 5 (default: 2) any number of minutes from 4 to 15(default: 4) When this setting is enabled, note that the machine will not attempt the call again when manual transmission or direct transmission is used.Prohibit Fax BroadcastingDisables facsimile broadcasting.Fax Receive SettingsSettings for fax transmission can be configured.Number of Calls in Auto ReceptionThis setting is used to select the number of rings on which the machine automatically receives a call and begins fax reception in auto reception mode.The "Number of Calls in Auto Reception" that can be set in each country are shown in the following table.Country Differentiation Table &nbsp; The number of rings United Kingdom, France, Germany, Sweden, Italy, Spain, Netherlands, Thailand, Hong Kong, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakia, Poland, Greece, Russia, Philippines, Indonesia 0 to 9 Australia, New Zealand 2 to 4 Singapore 0 to 3 Malaysia, India, Canada, Taiwan 0 to 15 If you select "0" for the number of rings, the machine will immediately answer and begin fax reception without ringing in auto reception mode. This setting can only be activated in France.When a fax is received in manual reception mode, you have have the machine automatically switch to auto reception. The number of rings on which switching to auto reception takes place can be set to any number from 1 to 9. Duplex Reception SettingThis is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper. When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or more pages is received (the pages must be the same size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.Auto Receive Reduce SettingWhen a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender\'s name and address, the received image is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size.If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of the image outside the standard size will be cut off. However, the image will be clearer because it will be printed at the same size as the original.Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5 (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 5-1/2").Print Style SettingThis setting determines the paper selection condition when printing received faxes. Select one of the three conditions below.Print Actual Size Cut off DisabledThe received fax image is printed at full size without dividing it onto multiple sheets of paper. If the same size of paper or larger paper is not loaded, the fax will be received in memory and will not be printed until a suitable size of paper is loaded.Print Actual Size Cut off EnabledEach received image is printed at full size. If necessary, the image is divided onto multiple sheets of paper.Auto Size SelectEach received image is printed at full size when possible. When not possible, the image is automatically reduced before printing.Set the Telephone Number for Data ForwardingWhen a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax, the received fax can be forwarded to another fax machine. This setting is used to program the fax number of the destination fax machine. Only one forwarding fax number can be programmed (ma Letter Size RX Reduce PrintThis program is not available in Canada and Philippines.When a letter (8-1/2" x 11") size fax is received, this setting reduces the fax to A4 size.When this setting is enabled, A4 size faxes are also reduced.Receiving Date &amp; Time PrintEnable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position where the date and time is printed. When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date and time of The [Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected for the reception date and time print setting if "Auto Receive Reduce Setting" is not enabled.A3 RX ReduceThis function is not available in some countries and regions. When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size.When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17") size faxes are also reduced.Fax Output SettingsThese settings are used to select the number of copies and output tray for received faxes. When a finisher is installed, the finisher tray can be selected as the output tray and stapling can be selected.Output traySelect the output tray for received faxes.Number of PrintsSet the number of copies of received faxes that are printed to any number from 1 to 99.Staple SettingsWhen a finisher is installed, set the position at which received faxes are stapled.Paper SizeWhen a finisher is installed, select the paper used for printing of received faxes.This setting can only be used when the [Multiple Set Print] and [Staple] checkboxes are selected in "Fax Settings".Up to 50 pages can be stapled. (When the paper is oriented horizontally, up to 30 sheets can be stapled.)Allow/Reject Number SettingUse this setting to specify whether reception from a stored number is to be allowed or rejected.ItemDescriptionReject ReceptionReject reception from the stored number.Allow ReceptionAllow reception from the stored number.All InvalidEven if numbers have been stored, disregard the numbers and allow reception from all numbers.Reject Unknown CallsRejects a call if the caller has blocked the sending of caller identification information.Add NewAdds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the number (maximum of 20 digits) and tap the [Store] key.Registration Number ListA list of the stored numbers can be displayed. When you select a number from this screen, it is deleted from the list.Reject Unknown CallsIf checked, any call from the number of Reject Unknown Calls setting is rejected, regardless of the certain number receive settings.When there are no stored anti junk mail addresses or domains, only the [Add New] key can be selected.Fax Polling SecurityThe following settings are for regular polling memory using the Public Box.Polling SecurityWhen the memory polling function is used, this setting determines whether any machine will be allowed to poll your machine, or only machines that have been stored in your machine.Add NewWhen the Polling Security Setting is enabled, use this setting to store (or delete) the fax numbers of the machines that are allowed to poll your machine. Up to 10 destination fax numbers can be stored. Each number must be within 20 digits in length.Passcode Number Key ListThis shows a list of the stored passcode numbers. Select a number from the list and delete it.Note that these settings do not apply to F-code polling memory.Back to top';
body[514]='07-072.htm';
dai[514]='CARD AREA SETTINGS';
bun[514]='CARD AREA SETTINGSCARD AREA SETTINGSThe data check during card reading can be set.SettingsItemDescriptionImport from Configuration fileWhen you enter the configuration file name and tap the [Execute] key, the card area settings are read from the configuration file. If you tap the [Clear] key, all files that match the current search conditions are deleted.Check Facility Code in HID ModeChecks the facility code of a HID card.Facility CodeEnters the facility code of a HID card. When you tap the [Store] key, the facility code is stored.Back to top';
body[515]='07-073.htm';
dai[515]='CARD TYPE/READER SETTINGS';
bun[515]='CARD TYPE/READER SETTINGSCARD TYPE/READER SETTINGSThe authentication of Felica, HID and other IC cards can be set.SettingsItemDescriptionCard Type / Card ReaderEnter the card type and card reader information.Use IC Card for AuthenticationUse these settings for authentication and for use of a HID or other IC card.Card Reader Device RegistrationIn this setting, the product ID and vender ID of the connected HID card reader are displayed. To store the HID cardreader, touch the [Read] key.For settings that enable an HID card to be used, consult your service technician.Back to top';
body[516]='07-074.htm';
dai[516]='WEB BROWSING SETTINGS';
bun[516]='WEB BROWSING SETTINGSWEB BROWSING SETTINGSConfigure settings related to a Web browser functions.ItemDescriptionHow to handle Cookie?Select how to handle a cookie if it is contained in a Web page.Disable URL EntryPrevents users from directly entering URL addresses.Disable Adding or Editing FavouritesPrevents users from adding or editing favourites.Disable Registration/Edit of Home PagePrevents users from registering or editing an URL address of the home page.Disable Print from Web Browse ModePrevents users from printing from a Web browser or a PDF viewer that is displayed in a Web browser.Disable display of HistoryPrevents users from viewing the history of Web pages that were displayed.Use a Proxy ServerShows a Web page via a proxy server.Always display Proxy Authentication DialogueShows the Proxy Authentication dialog if the "Use a Proxy Server" is enabled.Back to top';
body[517]='08-005_01.htm';
dai[517]='COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[517]='COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACECOPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[518]='08-005_03.htm';
dai[518]='IMAGE ROTATION DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[518]='IMAGE ROTATION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIMAGE ROTATION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you select the copy ratio manually?Copy using automatic ratio selection.Are you copying using settings that do not allow rotate copying?Rotate copying can generally be combined with other modes as required, however, some combinations are not possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.Is "Rotation Copy Setting" disabled in the setting mode?Check with your administrator. If you are the administrator, enable [Rotation Copy Setting].Select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Settings] &#8594; [Rotation Copy Setting] &#8594; [Rotation Copy] in "Setting mode".Back to top';
body[519]='08-005_04.htm';
dai[519]='2-SIDED COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[519]='2-SIDED COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE2-SIDED COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2-sided copying?Check "Tray Settings" in the setting mode. If the [Disable Duplex] checkbox is selected, 2-sided copying using that tray will not be possible. Change the paper type setting to a type that can be used for 2-sided printing. Set [System Settings] &Are you using a special size or type of paper?For the paper types and sizes that can be used for two-sided copying, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Are you copying using settings that do not allow 2-sided copying?2-Sided Copy can generally be combined with other modes as required, however, some combinations are not possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[520]='08-005_05.htm';
dai[520]='THE PAPER SIZE OF A TRAY CANNOT BE SET';
bun[520]='THE PAPER SIZE OF A TRAY CANNOT BE SETTHE PAPER SIZE OF A TRAY CANNOT BE SETIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[521]='08-006_01.htm';
dai[521]='THE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK';
bun[521]='THE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARKTHE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARKIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the image too light?Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original being copied and adjust the exposure level manually.Is the image too dark?Has an appropriate exposure mode for the original type been selected?Select one of the following modes depending on the original type.TextUse this mode for regular text documents.Text/Printed PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.Text/PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.Printed PhotoThis mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.PhotoUse this mode to copy photos.MapThis mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps.Light originalUse this mode for originals with light pencil writing. Copy of Copy This setting is best for a copy or printed as an original. [Copy of Copy] is available when [Auto], [Text], [Printed Photo] or [Text/Printed Photo] is selected as the original image type.Back to top';
body[522]='08-006_03.htm';
dai[522]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF';
bun[522]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFPART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHas an appropriate ratio been selected for the original size and paper size?Select an appropriate ratio setting.Are you using an inch (AB) size original?When copying an inch (AB) size original, specify the original size manually.Back to top';
body[523]='08-006_04.htm';
dai[523]='COPIES COME OUT BLANK';
bun[523]='COPIES COME OUT BLANKCOPIES COME OUT BLANKIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original placed face up or face down correctly?When using the document glass, the original must be placed face down. When using the automatic document feeder, the original must be placed face up.Back to top';
body[524]='08-007_01.htm';
dai[524]='PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[524]='PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEPRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs your PC connected correctly to the machine?Make sure that the cable is connected securely to the LAN connector or the USB port of your PC and that of the machine. If you are connected to a network, make sure that the LAN cable is securely connected to the hub as well. - "SIDE AND BACK" Is the machine connected to the same network (LAN, etc.) as your PC?The machine must be connected to the same network as your PC. If you do not know which network the machine is connected to, ask the network administrator.Is the IP address selected correctly? (Windows)Check the IP address setting. If the machine does not have a permanent IP address (the machine receives an IP address from a DHCP server), printing will not be possible if the IP address changes. Print the "All Custom Setting List" in the settinAre you using a printer port created using Standard TCP/IP Port?Check the PC settings. When a port created with Standard TCP/IP Port in Windows is used and the [SNMP Status Enabled] checkbox is , it may not be possible to print correctly. Change the [SNMP Status Enabled] checkbox to . See: Software Setup GuideIs "Connect via" set to [Ethernet] for AppleTalk? (Mac OS 9.0-9.2.2)Open [AppleTalk] from the [Control Panels] and make sure that [Ethernet] is selected in the "Connect via" menu. Printing is not possible if [Ethernet] is not selected.Is your computer in an unstable state?Restart your computer. Printing is sometimes not possible when you run multiple applications at once or there is insufficient memory or hard drive space. Restart your computer.Is the machine specified correctly in the application that you are using for printing?Check whether the machine\'s printer driver has been selected from the print window of the application. If the machine\'s printer driver does not appear in the list of available printer drivers, it may not be installed correctly. Remove the printer driver aAre the network connection devices operating normally?Make sure that the routers and other network connection devices are operating correctly. If a device is not powered on or is in an error state, see the manual of the device to correct the problem.Is the I/O timeout setting too short?Check with your administrator. If the I/O timeout setting is too short, errors may occur while writing to the printer. Ask the administrator of the machine to configure an appropriate time in "I/O Timeout". "Setting mode" &#8594; [PrinWas a Notice Page printed?Check the Notice Page. A Notice Page will be printed to indicate the cause of the problem if a print job cannot be performed as specified and the cause is not shown in the display. Read the printed page and take appropriate actions. For example, a Notice The print job is too large to fit in memory.A function that has been prohibited by the administrator is specified.By factory default, Notice Pages are not printed.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[525]='08-007_03.htm';
dai[525]='TWO-SIDED PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[525]='TWO-SIDED PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACETWO-SIDED PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2-sided printing?Check "Paper Tray Settings" in the setting mode. If the [Disable Duplex] checkbox is , two-sided printing using that tray will not be possible. Change the paper type setting to a type that can be used for 2-sided printing. "Setting mode&quoAre you using a special size or type of paper?For the paper types and sizes that can be used for two-sided printing, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[526]='08-007_04.htm';
dai[526]='DIRECT PRINTING OF A FILE IN A SHARED FOLDER ON A COMPUTER IS NOT POSSIBLE';
bun[526]='DIRECT PRINTING OF A FILE IN A SHARED FOLDER ON A COMPUTER IS NOT POSSIBLEDIRECT PRINTING OF A FILE IN A SHARED FOLDER ON A COMPUTER IS NOT POSSIBLEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs [IPsec Settings] enabled on the machine?Check with your administrator. When [IPsec Settings] is enabled in the setting mode, direct printing of a file in a shared folder may not be possible in your PC environment. For information about [IPsec Settings], consult your administrator. "SettingBack to top';
body[527]='08-007_05.htm';
dai[527]='A TRAY, FINISHER, OR OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICE INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE CANNOT BE USED';
bun[527]='A TRAY, FINISHER, OR OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICE INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE CANNOT BE USEDA TRAY, FINISHER, OR OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICE INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE CANNOT BE USEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave the peripheral devices that are installed on the machine been configured with the printer driver?Open the printer properties dialog box and click the [Auto Configuration] button on the [Options] tab. (Windows) If auto configuration cannot be executed, see the Software Setup Guide.Back to top';
body[528]='08-008_01.htm';
dai[528]='THE IMAGE IS GRAINY';
bun[528]='THE IMAGE IS GRAINYTHE IMAGE IS GRAINYIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionAre the printer driver settings appropriate for the print job?Check the settings of the printer driver. When selecting print settings, select a print mode from [Normal], [High Quality], or [Ultra Fine]. When you need a very clear image, select [Ultra Fine]. Windows: The resolution setting is selected in the [AdvanceBack to top';
body[529]='08-008_02.htm';
dai[529]='THE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK';
bun[529]='THE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARKTHE IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. A When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to Point to checkSolutionDoes the image (particularly a photo) need correction?(Windows)Check the settings of the printer driver. Correct brightness and contrast with [Image Adjustment Settings] on the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver. Use these settings to make simple corrections in a case such as when image editing software is not installed on your computer.Back to top ';
body[530]='08-008_04.htm';
dai[530]='TEXT AND LINES ARE FAINT AND DIFFICULT TO SEE';
bun[530]='TEXT AND LINES ARE FAINT AND DIFFICULT TO SEETEXT AND LINES ARE FAINT AND DIFFICULT TO SEEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionWas colour data printed in black and white? (Windows)Check the settings of the printer driver. You can also adjust the line thickness, adjust the line width in [Line Width Settings] on the [Advanced] tab.Back to top';
body[531]='08-008_05.htm';
dai[531]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF';
bun[531]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFPART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the paper size specified by the job match the size of paper loaded into the tray?Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of paper loaded into the tray.Is the print orientation setting (portrait or landscape) correct?Set the print orientation to match the image. Windows: The setting is selected in the [Main] tab of the printer driver. Macintosh: The setting is selected in the [Page Setup] menu.Are the margins set correctly in the layout settings of the application?Select an appropriate paper size and margins in the layout settings of the application.If the edge of the image extends outside the printable area of the machine, the edge will be cut off.Back to top';
body[532]='08-008_06.htm';
dai[532]='THE IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWN';
bun[532]='THE IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWNTHE IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWNIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionAre you using a type of paper (tab paper, punch paper, etc.) that can only be loaded in a fixed orientation?Rotate the image 180 degrees before printing. When the image size and paper size are the same but the orientations are different, the orientation of the image is automatically rotated to match the paper. However, when the paper can only be loaded in a fixIs the correct binding position selected for 2-sided printing?Be sure to set the appropriate binding position.When 2-sided printing is performed, every other page is printed upside down when tablet binding is selected for the binding position. Windows: The setting is selected in the [Main] tab of the printer driver.Back to top';
body[533]='08-008_07.htm';
dai[533]='MANY GARBLED CHARACTERS ARE PRINTED';
bun[533]='MANY GARBLED CHARACTERS ARE PRINTEDMANY GARBLED CHARACTERS ARE PRINTEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs your computer or the machine in an unstable state?Cancel printing, restart your PC and the machine, and try printing again.If there is only a small amount of free space remaining in the memory or hard drive of your PC, or if a large number of jobs have been spooled on the machiBack to top';
body[534]='08-009_01.htm';
dai[534]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[534]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACETRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the telephone line connected securely?Check the telephone line socket, the wall socket, and any extension adapters to make sure that all connections are secure. - SIDE AND BACKIs the correct dial mode set for your line?Ask your administrator to verify that "Dial Mode Setting" is set correctly for the line you are using.Select the telephone line type in "Dial Mode Setting" in the setting mode (administrator). "Setting mode" &#8594; [System SIs a busy signal received?If a busy signal is received, the transmission is temporarily cancelled and then automatically attempted again after a brief interval. (Factory default setting: 2 attempts, 3 min. intervals)"Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [ImageDid a communication error occur?If an error occurs that prevents transmission, the transmission is temporarily cancelled and then automatically re-attempted after a brief interval."Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8Does a message appear indicating that the memory is full?Divide the originals into sets and fax each set separately, or use direct transmission. If the memory becomes full, the transmission will be cancelled.Does a message appear notifying you that the original size was not detected?Place the original again. If the original size is still not detected correctly, specify the original size manually.Does the job status screen (completed jobs) or a transaction report indicate that the transmission was not successful?Perform the transmission again.If the transmission is still not successful after recalling is performed as set in [Recall in Case of Line Busy] or [Recall in Case of Communication Error], the transmission failure will be indicated in the job status screenDid you place a long original on the document glass when it is scanned?Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. A long original cannot be scanned from the document glass.Did you place an original that is folded?Following the instructions in the display, unfold the original, place it in the automatic document feeder again, and re-scan it. If a folded original is placed in the automatic document feeder, an error will occur and scanning will be cancelled when the aAre the sub-address and passcode correct? (When using F-code communication)Check with the operator of the other machine to make sure that the sub-address and passcode are correct.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[535]='08-009_02.htm';
dai[535]='THE TRANSMITTED FAX PRINTS OUT BLANK AT THE RECEIVING SIDE';
bun[535]='THE TRANSMITTED FAX PRINTS OUT BLANK AT THE RECEIVING SIDETHE TRANSMITTED FAX PRINTS OUT BLANK AT THE RECEIVING SIDEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original placed face up or face down correctly?Place the original again in the correct orientation, and resend. When using the document glass, the original must be placed face down. When using the automatic document feeder, the original must be placed face up. Place the original correctly and send theIf the receiving machine is using thermal paper, was the thermal paper loaded with the wrong side out?Check with the operator of the other machine.Back to top';
body[536]='08-009_03.htm';
dai[536]='THE TRANSMITTED FAX IS REDUCED BY THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINE';
bun[536]='THE TRANSMITTED FAX IS REDUCED BY THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINETHE TRANSMITTED FAX IS REDUCED BY THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHas the rotation sending been set?Enable "Rotation Sending Setting" before transmission.When [Rotation Sending Setting] is not enabled (the image is not rotated), an original placed in the vertical orientation may be reduced by the receiving machine. "Setting mode" &#8Back to top';
body[537]='08-009_04.htm';
dai[537]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT BEGIN AT THE SPECIFIED TIME';
bun[537]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT BEGIN AT THE SPECIFIED TIMETRANSMISSION DOES NOT BEGIN AT THE SPECIFIED TIMEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the machine\'s clock set to the correct time?Set the clock to the correct time. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Clock Adjust]Is a transmission in progress?If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission is finished.Back to top';
body[538]='08-010-01.htm';
dai[538]='PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE AFTER RECEPTION';
bun[538]='PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE AFTER RECEPTIONPRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE AFTER RECEPTIONIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes a message appear in the display instructing you to add toner or paper, or to take some other actions? (Printing is not possible when this screen appears.)Restore printing capability as instructed by the message.Does a password entry screen appear?Enter the correct password using the numeric keys. [Hold Setting for Received Data Print] is enabled. If you do not know the password, check with your administrator. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; Has cut-off printing been disabled in the setting mode (administrator)?Load the same size of paper as the received fax. If [Print Actual Size Cut off Disabled] is enabled in [Print Style Setting] in the setting mode (administrator) and a fax is received that is larger than any paper that is loaded, the fax will be received aIs forwarding (Inbound Routing function) enabled for a received fax?If you need to print a received fax, ask your administrator. When the Inbound Routing function is enabled, received faxes are automatically forwarded to a specified address. If [Print at Error] is selected when Inbound Routing is enabled, received faxes wBack to top';
body[539]='08-010-02.htm';
dai[539]='MANUAL RECEPTION/POLLING RECEPTION ARE NOT POSSIBLE';
bun[539]='MANUAL RECEPTION/POLLING RECEPTION ARE NOT POSSIBLEMANUAL RECEPTION/POLLING RECEPTION ARE NOT POSSIBLEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs little free memory remaining?If any of the following applies, print or delete received faxes to increase available memory space for receiving faxes.The memory contains data that has been received with the received image check setting enabled.The memory contains data that has been received with confidential reception or that is protected by a password.A fax is stored in the memory box.Back to top';
body[540]='08-010-03.htm';
dai[540]='THE RECEIVED IMAGE IS FAINT';
bun[540]='THE RECEIVED IMAGE IS FAINTTHE RECEIVED IMAGE IS FAINTIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original that was faxed also faint?Ask the other party to send the fax again using a suitable (darker) exposure setting.Back to top';
body[541]='08-010-04.htm';
dai[541]='THE MACHINE DOES NOT BEGIN FAX RECEPTION';
bun[541]='THE MACHINE DOES NOT BEGIN FAX RECEPTIONTHE MACHINE DOES NOT BEGIN FAX RECEPTIONIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHas the reception mode been set to [Manual Reception] in the setting mode?Set the reception mode to [Auto Reception]. When the reception mode is set to [Manual Reception], the machine will not receive faxes automatically. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Fax Data Receive/Forward] &#8594; [Fax SettingsIs little free memory remaining?Increase the amount of free memory.The amount of free memory can be increased by printing faxes received by confidential reception and other password-protected received data, and by deleting data stored in memory boxes.Back to top';
body[542]='08-011-01.htm';
dai[542]='DIALLING IS NOT POSSIBLE';
bun[542]='DIALLING IS NOT POSSIBLEDIALLING IS NOT POSSIBLEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the extension telephone connected?Check the connections. Check the telephone line socket, the wall socket, and any extension adapters to make sure that all connections are secure.Back to top';
body[543]='08-011-03.htm';
dai[543]='YOU CANNOT TALK TO THE OTHER PARTY';
bun[543]='YOU CANNOT TALK TO THE OTHER PARTYYOU CANNOT TALK TO THE OTHER PARTYIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you dial using the speaker?Use the extension telephone. When you dial using the speaker, you will be able to hear the voice of the other party, but he or she will not hear your voice. Use the extension telephone. (When the optional receiver or extension telephone is not installed, Back to top';
body[544]='08-012-01.htm';
dai[544]='THE VOLUME IS TOO LOW';
bun[544]='THE VOLUME IS TOO LOWTHE VOLUME IS TOO LOWIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bSpeakerRinger VolumeLine MonitorFax Receive Complete SignalFax Send Complete SignalFax Communication Error SignalPoint to checkSolutionHas the volume been set to a low level in the setting mode?Ask your administrator to set the volumes in [Speaker Settings] to a higher level. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Speaker Settings]Back to top';
body[545]='08-012-02.htm';
dai[545]='NO SOUND IS HEARD';
bun[545]='NO SOUND IS HEARDNO SOUND IS HEARDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bRinger VolumeLine MonitorFax Receive Complete SignalFax Send Complete SignalFax Communication Error SignalPoint to checkSolutionHas the ringer volume been set to [None] in the setting mode?Ask your administrator to set the volumes in [Speaker Settings] to other than [None]. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [Image Send Settings] &#8594; [Fax Settings] &#8594; [Default Settings] &#8594; [Speaker Settings]Back to top';
body[546]='08-013-01.htm';
dai[546]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STORED';
bun[546]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STOREDA ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STOREDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHas the maximum number of keys been stored?Adjust the number of stored keys. Delete one-touch keys and group keys that are not being used.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[547]='08-013-02.htm';
dai[547]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETED';
bun[547]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETEDA ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIf the key is an individual key, is the key included in a group?Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple programs, it must be removed from all programs.) "Setting mode" &#8594; [Address Book]If the key is included in multiple group keys, print the GroIs the key being used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress?Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the reserved transmission and then edit or delete the key.Is the key included in a program key?Remove the key from the program and then edit or delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple programs, it must be removed from all programs.) [Call Program] &#8594; [Delete] in the action panel for each mode Is the key that you wish to edit or delete stored as a relay destination of an F-code relay broadcast transmission?Remove the key from the relay destinations of the F-code relay broadcast transmission and then edit or delete the key. An individual or group one-touch key that is stored as a relay destination cannot be edited or deleted. Remove the key from the relay deHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.Has your administrator enabled a function that prevents editing/deleting?Check with your administrator.If your administrator has enabled settings such as [Inbound Routing Settings], keys cannot be edited or removed. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Application Settings] &#8594; [Inbound Routing Settings]Back to top';
body[548]='08-014-01.htm';
dai[548]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[548]='TRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACETRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you select the correct destination? Is the correct information (e-mail address or FTP server information) stored for that destination?Make sure that the correct information is stored for the destination and that the destination is correctly selected. If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail) is unsuccessful, an error message such as "Undelivered Message" may be sent to the designDoes the image file exceed the e-mail attachment limit set in the setting mode (administrator)?Check with your administrator. If your administrator has set a limit on the size of transmitted files, a file that exceeds the limit cannot be transmitted.Did the image file exceed the file attachment size limit of your mail server? (When Scan to E-mail is used.)Reduce the size of the file attachment (reduce the number of pages to scan) for one e-mail transmission. The size of the file can also be reduced by scanning using a lower resolution setting. Ask your mail server administrator (or Internet service provideHas the folder on the destination computer been set as a shared folder so that files can be sent to it? (When using Scan to Network Folder.)If the destination folder is not configured as a shared folder, select "share" in the folder properties. If the folder was moved or otherwise changed, the "share" setting may have been cancelled.Is [IPsec Settings] enabled on the machine? (When using Scan to Network Folder.)Check with your administrator.When [IPsec Settings] is enabled in the setting mode, scanning to a shared folder may not be possible in your PC environment. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Security Settings] &#8594; [IPsec Settings]Did you place a long original on the document glass when it is scanned?Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. A long original cannot be scanned from the document glass.Did you place an original that is folded?Following the instructions in the display, unfold the original, place it in the automatic document feeder again, and re-scan it. If a folded original is placed in the automatic document feeder, an error will occur and scanning will be cancelled when the aBack to top';
body[549]='08-014-02.htm';
dai[549]='AN ADDRESS CANNOT BE SPECIFIED';
bun[549]='AN ADDRESS CANNOT BE SPECIFIEDAN ADDRESS CANNOT BE SPECIFIEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[550]='08-014-03.htm';
dai[550]='MODE CANNOT BE SELECTED';
bun[550]='MODE CANNOT BE SELECTEDMODE CANNOT BE SELECTEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.Back to top';
body[551]='08-014-04.htm';
dai[551]='AUTO SELECTION OF THE COLOUR MODE DOES NOT TAKE PLACE CORRECTLY';
bun[551]='AUTO SELECTION OF THE COLOUR MODE DOES NOT TAKE PLACE CORRECTLYAUTO SELECTION OF THE COLOUR MODE DOES NOT TAKE PLACE CORRECTLYIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionAre you scanning one of the following types of originals? When Black &amp; White is not selected:Are there colours or colouring in the paper?When Colour is not selected:Is the colour in the original very light?Is the colour in the original very dark, almost black?Is only a very small area of the original coloured?Specify the colour mode manually. Back to top';
body[552]='08-014-05.htm';
dai[552]='THE RECEIVED IMAGE FILE CANNOT BE OPENED';
bun[552]='THE RECEIVED IMAGE FILE CANNOT BE OPENEDTHE RECEIVED IMAGE FILE CANNOT BE OPENEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the viewer program used by the recipient support the format of the received image data?Use a software program that is capable of opening the selected file type and compression mode. The recipient may be able to open the file if you change the file type and compression mode selected at the time of transmission.Does a message appear prompting you to enter your password?Ask the sender for the password, or have the image sent again in a non-encrypted format. The received file is an encrypted PDF file.Back to top';
body[553]='08-014-06.htm';
dai[553]='TRANSMISSION TAKES A LONG TIME';
bun[553]='TRANSMISSION TAKES A LONG TIMETRANSMISSION TAKES A LONG TIMEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the resolution setting appropriate at the time of scanning?Select resolution and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose of transmission. To create image data that is balanced in terms of resolution and file size, pay attention to the following points: Resolution Back to top';
body[554]='08-014-07.htm';
dai[554]='A DESTINATION IS PRE-SELECTED';
bun[554]='A DESTINATION IS PRE-SELECTEDA DESTINATION IS PRE-SELECTEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs [Default Address Setting] enabled in the setting mode?If you wish to send to a destination other than the default destination, tap the [Cancel] key. If you are the administrator and wish to change or disable the default destination, change the settings as appropriate in [Default Address Setting]. "SettiBack to top';
body[555]='08-014-08.htm';
dai[555]='CANNOT WRITE TO THE USB MEMORY DEVICE (WHEN USING USB MEMORY SCAN)';
bun[555]='CANNOT WRITE TO THE USB MEMORY DEVICE (WHEN USING USB MEMORY SCAN)CANNOT WRITE TO THE USB MEMORY DEVICE (WHEN USING USB MEMORY SCAN)If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the connected USB device recognized correctly?Use [USB-Device Check] in the setting mode to check whether or not the device is recognized. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [USB-Device Check]If it is not recognized, connect it once again.Back to top';
body[556]='08-015-01.htm';
dai[556]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS CLIPPED';
bun[556]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS CLIPPEDTHE SCANNED IMAGE IS CLIPPEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original scan size setting smaller than the actual original size?Set the scan size to the actual original size. If you have intentionally set a smaller size than the actual original size, place the original considering the reference placement position for the selected scan size. For example, when scanning an A4 (8-1/2& Back to top';
body[557]='08-015-02.htm';
dai[557]='THE QUALITY OF THE SCANNED IMAGE IS POOR';
bun[557]='THE QUALITY OF THE SCANNED IMAGE IS POORTHE QUALITY OF THE SCANNED IMAGE IS POORIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original printed matter such as a book or magazine?To reduce the moire effect, take the following procedure: When the original is printed matter, vertical patterns (moire) may occur. Select [Others] &#8594; [Sharpness] in the Base Screen and soften the edges of image to reduce the moire effect (only in "E-mail", "FTP/Desktop", "Network Folder", and "Scan When scanning a colour or greyscale original, is the colour mode set to [Mono2]?Setting the colour mode to [Mono2] replaces the colours in the original with either black or white. This is suitable for text-only originals; however, for originals that contain illustrations, it is best to use the [Start] key with the colour mode set to Is a destination included that has [TIFF-S] selected for the format?If you wish to send an image scanned at high resolution to destinations for "E-mail", "FTP/Desktop", and "Network Folder", send the image to scanner and Internet fax destinations separately. When a broadcast transmission is pBack to top';
body[558]='08-015-03.htm';
dai[558]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS BLANK';
bun[558]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS BLANKTHE SCANNED IMAGE IS BLANKIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the original placed face up or face down correctly?Place the original again in the correct orientation, and resend. When using the document glass, the original must be placed face down. When using the automatic document feeder, the original must be placed face up.Back to top';
body[559]='08-015-04.htm';
dai[559]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWN OR ON ITS SIDE';
bun[559]='THE SCANNED IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWN OR ON ITS SIDETHE SCANNED IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWN OR ON ITS SIDEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionAre Internet fax addresses included in the transmission?Send the image to the scan mode and Internet fax mode destinations separately. When destinations for "E-mail", "FTP/Desktop", and "Network Folder" and Internet fax destinations are included in a broadcast transmission, the orBack to top';
body[560]='08-015-05.htm';
dai[560]='JPEG WAS SELECTED FOR THE FILE TYPE BUT THE FILE WAS CREATED AS A TIFF FILE';
bun[560]='JPEG WAS SELECTED FOR THE FILE TYPE BUT THE FILE WAS CREATED AS A TIFF FILEJPEG WAS SELECTED FOR THE FILE TYPE BUT THE FILE WAS CREATED AS A TIFF FILEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you select [Mono2] in colour mode?Change the colour mode to [Full Colour] or [Greyscale], and then tap the [Start] key. When [JPEG] is selected for the file type and the image is scanned in Mono2, the file will be created as a TIFF file.Back to top';
body[561]='08-016-01.htm';
dai[561]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STORED';
bun[561]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STOREDA ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE STOREDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHas the maximum number of keys been stored?Adjust the number of stored keys. Delete one-touch keys and group keys that are not being used.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode (administrator).If the key is an individual key, is the key included in a group?Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple groups, it must be removed from all groups.) [Call Program] &#8594; [Delete] in the action panel for each modeIs the key being used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress?Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the reserved transmission and then edit or delete the key.Back to top';
body[562]='08-016-02.htm';
dai[562]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETED';
bun[562]='A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETEDA ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the key included in a program key?Remove the key from the program and then edit or delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple programs, it must be removed from all programs.) [Call Program] &#8594; [Delete] in the action panel for each mode If the key is included in multiple progHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator.Has your administrator enabled a function that prevents editing/deleting?Check with your administrator. If your administrator has enabled settings such as [Default Address Setting] and [Inbound Routing Settings], keys cannot be edited or removed.Back to top';
body[563]='08-017-01.htm';
dai[563]='DOCUMENT FILING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[563]='DOCUMENT FILING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEDOCUMENT FILING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you enable document filing in the printer driver?Enable document filing. In print mode, enable document filing on the [Job Handling] tab of the printer driver.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.Back to top';
body[564]='08-017-02.htm';
dai[564]='A FILED DATA CAN NOT BE PRINTED';
bun[564]='A FILED DATA CAN NOT BE PRINTEDA FILED DATA CAN NOT BE PRINTEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.Back to top';
body[565]='08-017-03.htm';
dai[565]='A JOB CANNOT BE STORED IN A CUSTOM FOLDER';
bun[565]='A JOB CANNOT BE STORED IN A CUSTOM FOLDERA JOB CANNOT BE STORED IN A CUSTOM FOLDERIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDo the custom folders created with the machine appear in "Folder Information"?(When printing)Click the [Get Folder Name] button in the document filing save screen of the printer driver to call up the custom folders that have been created on the machine.Does the custom folder have a password?Enter the password configured in the machine in the document filing save screen.Back to top';
body[566]='08-018-01.htm';
dai[566]='A STORED FILE HAS DISAPPEARED';
bun[566]='A STORED FILE HAS DISAPPEAREDA STORED FILE HAS DISAPPEAREDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you tap the [Print and Delete the Data] key to print a stored file?Tap the [Print and Save the Data] key to print again. If you print the file by tapping the [Print and Delete the Data] key, the file is automatically deleted after being printed. The file property can be set to [Protect] to prevent the file from being easHas automatic deletion of document filing files been enabled?If files that you need have been deleted, consult the administrator of the machine. When [Automatic Deletion of File Settings] is enabled in the setting mode, the files in the specified folders are periodically deleted. (Even when the file property is [CoBack to top';
body[567]='08-018-02.htm';
dai[567]='A FILE CANNOT BE DELETED';
bun[567]='A FILE CANNOT BE DELETEDA FILE CANNOT BE DELETEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the property of the file set to [Protect]?A file cannot be deleted when its property is set to [Protect]. Change the file property from [Protect] to [Sharing] and then delete the file.Back to top';
body[568]='08-018-03.htm';
dai[568]='THE PROPERTY OF A FILE CANNOT BE SET TO [CONFIDENTIAL]';
bun[568]='THE PROPERTY OF A FILE CANNOT BE SET TO [CONFIDENTIAL]THE PROPERTY OF A FILE CANNOT BE SET TO [CONFIDENTIAL]If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionIs the file in the Quick File folder?Move the file to a different folder and then set its property to "Confidential". [Confidential] cannot be specified for a file in the Quick File folder. (Note that [Protect] can be specified for a file in the Quick File folder to prevent it fromBack to top';
body[569]='08-018-04.htm';
dai[569]='A CONFIDENTIAL FILE OR CONFIDENTIAL FOLDER CANNOT BE OPENED';
bun[569]='A CONFIDENTIAL FILE OR CONFIDENTIAL FOLDER CANNOT BE OPENEDA CONFIDENTIAL FILE OR CONFIDENTIAL FOLDER CANNOT BE OPENEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDid you enter the wrong password?Check with your administrator. If you cannot remember the password, change the file or folder password to a new password in the setting mode.Back to top';
body[570]='08-018-05.htm';
dai[570]='A FILE NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGED';
bun[570]='A FILE NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGEDA FILE NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the name include characters that cannot be used in a file or folder name?The following characters cannot be used in a file or folder name: ? / " ; : , < > ! * &amp; # \ |Back to top';
body[571]='08-018-06.htm';
dai[571]='A CUSTOM FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGED';
bun[571]='A CUSTOM FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGEDA CUSTOM FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE STORED OR CHANGEDIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionDoes the name include characters that cannot be used in a file or folder name?The following characters cannot be used in a file or folder name: ? / " ; : , < > ! * &amp; # \ |Back to top';
body[572]='08-018-07.htm';
dai[572]='A FILE NAME IS CUT OFF';
bun[572]='A FILE NAME IS CUT OFFA FILE NAME IS CUT OFFIf you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the ""position. AfWhen the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to bPoint to checkSolutionWas the file name stored in the advanced transmission settings during a scan or Internet fax transmission?If the name was stored in the advanced transmission settings before Quick File or File settings were configured, that name will be used for the stored file. If the number of characters in the name exceeds the maximum number of characters allowed for a QuiBack to top';
body[573]='08-019-01.htm';
dai[573]='SPECIFIED MACHINE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE USED';
bun[573]='SPECIFIED MACHINE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE USEDSPECIFIED MACHINE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE USEDPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.Back to top';
body[574]='08-019-02.htm';
dai[574]='THE OPERATION PANEL CANNOT BE USED';
bun[574]='THE OPERATION PANEL CANNOT BE USEDTHE OPERATION PANEL CANNOT BE USEDPoint to checkSolutionIs the main power indicator lit?If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the machine\'s power on. Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted in the power outlet, switch the main power switch to the "" position, and press the [Power] button to turn on the power.Did you just power on the machine?Wait until a message appears indicating that the machine is ready. After the [Power] button is turned on, the machine requires some time to complete warmup operation. During warmup operation, functions can be selected, but a job cannot be run.Is the [Power Save Mode] button blinking?Auto Power Shut-Off mode has activated. To return the machine to normal operation, press the [Power Save Mode] button. - "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER"Is a cover open or a device separated from the machine?Read the message and take appropriate actions. A warning message will appear when a cover is open or a device is separated from the machine.Did login fail three times in a row?After operation unlocks, log in using the correct user information. When [A Warning when Login Fails] is enabled in the setting mode and login fails 3 times in a row, a warning will be displayed and user authentication operation will lock for 5 minutes. (Does a message appear indicating that Auto Login failed?Check with your administrator. Auto Login failed due to network or other problems. If you are the administrator, tap the [Administrator Password] key, log in as an administrator, and temporarily change the auto login settings in the setting mode. (RestoreDoes the message "Call for service. Code:xx-xx*." appear in the touch panel? *Letters and numbers appear in xx-xx.Turn on the machine power again. Make sure that the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is grey, and press the [Power] button and then turn the main power switch to the "" position. Wait at leBack to top';
body[575]='08-019-03.htm';
dai[575]='PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE OR STOPS DURING A JOB';
bun[575]='PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE OR STOPS DURING A JOBPRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE OR STOPS DURING A JOBPoint to checkSolutionIs a tray out of paper?Add paper as instructed by the message in the touch panel.Is the machine out of toner?Replace the toner cartridge. When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced. For more information on replacing the toner cartridge, see "REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE".Has a paper misfeed occurred?Remove the misfeed as instructed by the message in the touch panel. - "REMOVING MISFEEDS" in "TROUBLESHOOTING"Is the output tray full?Remove the output from the tray and resume printing. When the output tray becomes full, a detector activates and stops printing.Is the toner collection container full?Replace the toner collection container as instructed by the message in the touch panel. - "REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER"Are restrictions placed on the trays that can be used in each mode (copy, print, fax, Internet fax, and document filing)?Check the settings in [Paper Tray Settings] and see if checkmarks appear in the checkboxes of each mode ([Feeding Approved Job]). Functions without a checkmark cannot be used for printing using that tray. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray SettiBack to top';
body[576]='08-019-04.htm';
dai[576]='THE ORIGINAL SIZE IS NOT AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED OR THE WRONG SIZE IS SELECTED';
bun[576]='THE ORIGINAL SIZE IS NOT AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED OR THE WRONG SIZE IS SELECTEDTHE ORIGINAL SIZE IS NOT AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED OR THE WRONG SIZE IS SELECTEDPoint to checkSolutionIs the original curled or folded?Straighten the original. The correct original size cannot be detected if the original is curled or folded.Did you place an original smaller than A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size?Select the original size manually. Original sizes smaller than A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") cannot be detected. When scanning a small original on the document glass, it is convenient to place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original which is the saBack to top';
body[577]='08-019-05.htm';
dai[577]='THE DISPLAYED BYPASS TRAY PAPER SIZE IS NOT CORRECT';
bun[577]='THE DISPLAYED BYPASS TRAY PAPER SIZE IS NOT CORRECTTHE DISPLAYED BYPASS TRAY PAPER SIZE IS NOT CORRECTPoint to checkSolutionIs the extension guide pulled out?Pull out the bypass tray extension guide.When loading paper in the bypass tray, be sure to pull out the extension to enable the paper size to be detected correctly.Back to top';
body[578]='08-020-01.htm';
dai[578]='THE ORIGINAL MISFEEDS (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER)';
bun[578]='THE ORIGINAL MISFEEDS (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER)THE ORIGINAL MISFEEDS (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER)Point to checkSolutionIs too much paper loaded into the document feeder tray?Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not higher than the indicator line.Is the original a long original?When using the automatic document feeder to scan a long original, set the scan size to [Long Size]. (Note that long originals cannot be copied using the copy function.)Is the original on thin paper?Use the document glass to scan the original. If you need to use the automatic document feeder, use [Slow Scan Mode] in [Others] to scan the original.Is the feed roller dirty?Clean the surface of the paper feed roller. - "CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER"Back to top';
body[579]='08-020-02.htm';
dai[579]='THE PAPER MISFEEDS';
bun[579]='THE PAPER MISFEEDSTHE PAPER MISFEEDSPoint to checkSolutionIs a torn piece of paper remaining in the machine?Make sure all paper is removed. - REMOVING MISFEEDSIs too much paper loaded in the tray?Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not higher than the indicator line.Are multiple sheets feeding at once?Fan the paper well before loading it.Are you using paper that is not within the specifications?Use SHARP-recommended paper. Using paper that is for other models or special paper that is not supported may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges. - "SUPPLIES" in "Quick Start Guide" For paper that is prohibited or not recommended, Has the paper in the tray absorbed moisture?If you will not be using paper in a tray for a long time, remove the paper from the tray and store it in a bag in a dark and dry location.Are the bypass tray guides adjusted to the width of the paper?Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper.Is the bypass tray extension guide pulled out?When loading large-size paper, pull out the extension guide.Is the bypass feed roller dirty?Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller. - CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLERIs A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size paper loaded?When loading A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size paper, place the paper in the horizontal (A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) orientation.Is the paper size specified?If you are using a non-standard size, be sure to specify the paper size. If the size of paper loaded into a tray was changed, be sure to check the paper size setting. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings] &#8594; [Tray Registration]Did you add paper to the bypass tray?When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.Back to top';
body[580]='08-020-03.htm';
dai[580]='PAPER DOES NOT FEED FROM THE PAPER TRAY';
bun[580]='PAPER DOES NOT FEED FROM THE PAPER TRAYPAPER DOES NOT FEED FROM THE PAPER TRAYPoint to checkSolutionIs the paper loaded correctly into the paper tray?Set the guides to the size of the paper. Make sure the height of the paper does not exceed the indicator line.Are restrictions placed on the trays that can be used in each mode (copy, print, fax, Internet fax, and document filing)?Check the settings in [Paper Tray Settings] and see if checkmarks appear in the checkboxes of each mode ([Feeding Approved Job]). Functions without a checkmark cannot be used for printing using that tray. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray SettiBack to top';
body[581]='08-020-04.htm';
dai[581]='THE IMAGE ON PAPER IS SKEWED';
bun[581]='THE IMAGE ON PAPER IS SKEWEDTHE IMAGE ON PAPER IS SKEWEDPoint to checkSolutionIs too much paper loaded into the bypass tray?Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets. The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the paper type setting. For more information, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Are the paper tray or bypass tray guides adjusted to the width of the paper?Adjust the paper tray or bypass tray guides to the width of the paper.Are the original guides adjusted to the width of the paper?Adjust the original guides to the width of the paper.Back to top';
body[582]='08-020-05.htm';
dai[582]='THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOES NOT OPERATE';
bun[582]='THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOES NOT OPERATETHE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOES NOT OPERATEPoint to checkSolutionHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.Back to top';
body[583]='08-021-01.htm';
dai[583]='LINES APPEAR IN THE SCANNED IMAGE';
bun[583]='LINES APPEAR IN THE SCANNED IMAGELINES APPEAR IN THE SCANNED IMAGEPoint to checkSolutionAre the scanning areas of the document glass or automatic document feeder dirty?Clean the scanning areas of the document glass or automatic document feeder. - "CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER"Is the bypass feed roller dirty?Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller. - "CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER"Back to top';
body[584]='08-021-02.htm';
dai[584]='SMUDGES APPEAR ON PRINTED OUTPUT';
bun[584]='SMUDGES APPEAR ON PRINTED OUTPUTSMUDGES APPEAR ON PRINTED OUTPUTPoint to checkSolutionAre you using paper that is not within the specifications?Use SHARP-recommended paper. Using paper that is for other models or special paper that is not supported may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges. - "SUPPLIES" in "Quick Start Guide"Are you printing on pre-punched paper?Take care that the image does not overlap the punch holes. If the printed image overlaps the punch holes, smudges may appear on the reverse side of the paper following 1-sided printing, or on both sides following 2-sided printing.Does a message appear indicating the need for maintenance?Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative as soon as possible.Back to top';
body[585]='08-021-03.htm';
dai[585]='TONER DOES NOT ADHERE WELL OR CREASES APPEAR ON THE PAPER';
bun[585]='TONER DOES NOT ADHERE WELL OR CREASES APPEAR ON THE PAPERTONER DOES NOT ADHERE WELL OR CREASES APPEAR ON THE PAPERPoint to checkSolutionAre you using paper that is not within the specifications?Use SHARP-recommended paper. Using paper that is for other models or special paper that is not supported may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges. - "SUPPLIES" in "Quick Start Guide"Has the paper type been set correctly?Set the correct paper type in the tray settings. Make sure that the following has not occurred:Heavy paper is being used, but a paper type other than heavy paper is selected in the tray settings. (The image may disappear if rubbed.)Paper other than heavy paper is being used, but heavy paper is selected in the tray settings. (This may cause creases and misfeeds.)"Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings] &#8594; [Tray Registration]Is the paper loaded so that printing takes place on the reverse side?Check the front and reverse side of paper. Some types of paper such as labels and transparency films have specific front or reverse sides. If printing takes place on the wrong side of label sheets or transparency film, the toner may not adhere well and a Back to top';
body[586]='08-021-05.htm';
dai[586]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF';
bun[586]='PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFPART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFFPoint to checkSolutionHas the correct paper size been set?If you are using a non-standard size, be sure to specify the paper size. If the size of paper loaded into a tray was changed, be sure to check the paper size setting. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Paper Tray Settings] &#8594; [Tray Registration]Was the original placed in the correct position?If you are using the document glass, be sure to place the original in the far left corner of the document glass. - "DOCUMENT GLASS"Back to top';
body[587]='08-021-06.htm';
dai[587]='PRINTING TAKES PLACE ON THE WRONG SIDE OF THE PAPER';
bun[587]='PRINTING TAKES PLACE ON THE WRONG SIDE OF THE PAPERPRINTING TAKES PLACE ON THE WRONG SIDE OF THE PAPERPoint to checkSolutionIs the paper loaded with the print side facing in the correct direction?Make sure that the print side of paper is facing in the correct direction.Trays 1 to 4: Load the paper with the print side facing up*.Bypass tray and tray 5: Load the paper with the print side facing down*.*When the paper type is "Pre-Printed" or "Letter Head", load the paper in the opposite way. (Except when [Disabling of Duplex] is enabled in the setting mode (administrator). For information about the setting mode, consult your adminisBack to top';
body[588]='08-021-07.htm';
dai[588]='A COVER OR INSERT IS NOT PRINTED ON THE SPECIFIED PAPER';
bun[588]='A COVER OR INSERT IS NOT PRINTED ON THE SPECIFIED PAPERA COVER OR INSERT IS NOT PRINTED ON THE SPECIFIED PAPERPoint to checkSolutionHas the paper type been set correctly?Set the correct paper type for the tray that contains the paper specified for the cover or insert. If the paper type set for the cover or insert is not the same as the paper type set for the tray, paper will be fed from a different tray. "Setting modBack to top';
body[589]='08-022-01.htm';
dai[589]='THE CONNECTED USB DEVICE CANNOT BE USED';
bun[589]='THE CONNECTED USB DEVICE CANNOT BE USEDTHE CONNECTED USB DEVICE CANNOT BE USEDPoint to checkSolutionIs the USB device compatible with the machine?Ask your dealer if the device is compatible with the machine. USB devices that are not compatible with the machine cannot be used.Is the connected USB device recognized correctly?Use [USB-Device Check] in the setting mode to check whether or not the device is recognized. "Setting mode" &#8594; [System Settings] &#8594; [USB-Device Check]If it is not recognized, connect it once again.Back to top';
body[590]='08-022-02.htm';
dai[590]='THE CONNECTED USB MEMORY DEVICE CANNOT BE USED';
bun[590]='THE CONNECTED USB MEMORY DEVICE CANNOT BE USEDTHE CONNECTED USB MEMORY DEVICE CANNOT BE USEDPoint to checkSolutionIs the format of the USB memory device FAT32?Check the file format of the USB memory device. If the format of the USB memory device is other than FAT32, use your PC to change the format to FAT32.Are you using a USB memory device with a capacity of more than 32 GB?Use a 32 GB or less USB memory device.Back to top';
body[591]='08-022-03.htm';
dai[591]='THE FINISHER/SADDLE FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE';
bun[591]='THE FINISHER/SADDLE FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATETHE FINISHER/SADDLE FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATEPoint to checkSolutionDoes a message appear indicating that you need to remove paper from the stapler compiler?Remove all remaining paper from the stapler compiler.Does the following message appear in the touch panel? "The finisher is in trouble. xx-xx*" *Letters and numbers appear in xx-xx.Check the cable connection of the finisher. Remove and then firmly reinsert the cable, and restart the machine.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.Back to top';
body[592]='08-022-04.htm';
dai[592]='STAPLING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE (INCLUDING SADDLE STITCH)';
bun[592]='STAPLING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE (INCLUDING SADDLE STITCH)STAPLING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE(INCLUDING SADDLE STITCH)Point to checkSolutionDoes a message appear instructing you to check the staple unit?Remove jammed staples. - "REMOVING MISFEEDS" in "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES"Does a message appear instructing you to add staples?Replace the staple cartridge.Do not forget to replace the staple case. - "REMOVING MISFEEDS" in "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES"Is a different width of paper mixed in?To perform mixed size stapling, use paper of the same width and select the [Same Width] setting. Stapling is not possible when paper of different widths are mixed together. When copying, select [Same Width] for [Mixed Size Original] in [Other].Are there more sheets than can be stapled at once?For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Is a paper size that cannot be stapled included in the print job?For the paper size that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Is the paper type setting of the tray selected in the printer driver set to a paper type that cannot be stapled?Check the paper type settings in the machine and select a tray that has paper that can be used for stapling*. Click the [Details] button in [Paper Selection] on the [Pape] tab of the printer properties window and check the paper type setting of each tray. *Stapling is not possible on labels, tab paper, glossy paper, transparency film, or envelopes. In addition, if "Disable Staple" is selected in the user type, stapling will not be possible.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.Back to top';
body[593]='08-022-05.htm';
dai[593]='PUNCHING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[593]='PUNCHING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEPUNCHING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEPoint to checkSolutionDoes a message appear instructing you to check the punch module?Dispose of punch scraps. - PUNCH MODULEIs a different size of paper mixed in?Punching is not possible when different widths of paper are mixed together. To perform mixed size punching, use paper of the same width and select the [Same Width] setting. When copying, select [Same Width] for [Mixed Size Original] in [Other].Is a paper size that cannot be punched included in the print job?For the paper sizes that can be punched, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in Quick Start Guide.Is the tray selected in the printer driver set to a paper type that cannot be punched?Check the paper type settings in the machine and select a tray that has paper that can be used for punching*. Click the [Details] button in [Paper Selection] on the [Paper] tab of the printer properties window and check the paper type setting of each tray *Punching is not possible on labels, tab paper, glossy paper, transparency film, and envelopes. In addition, if "Disable Punch" is selected in the user type, punching will not be possible.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.Back to top';
body[594]='08-022-06.htm';
dai[594]='THE STAPLING POSITION OR PUNCH POSITION IS NOT CORRECT';
bun[594]='THE STAPLING POSITION OR PUNCH POSITION IS NOT CORRECTTHE STAPLING POSITION OR PUNCH POSITION IS NOT CORRECTPoint to checkSolutionIs the stapling position set correctly?Check the stapling position in "PREVIEW SCREEN".Are the punching positions set correctly?Check the punch position in "PREVIEW SCREEN".Back to top';
body[595]='08-022-07.htm';
dai[595]='FOLDING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE';
bun[595]='FOLDING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEFOLDING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEPoint to checkSolutionDid the administrator enable the [Disabling of Duplex] setting?The paper folding function cannot be used when [Disabling of Duplex] is enabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator. "Setting mode" &#8594; [Device Control] &#8594; [Disabling of Duplex]Are you using a paper type that has a specific front and reverse side?The folding function cannot be used with pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, or other paper that has specific front or reverse sides. When folding paper, use a paper type such as plain paper that does not have specific front or reverse sides.Back to top';
body[596]='08-022-08.htm';
dai[596]='PRINTED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE FINISHER OUTPUT TRAY';
bun[596]='PRINTED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE FINISHER OUTPUT TRAYPRINTED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE FINISHER OUTPUT TRAYPoint to checkSolutionIs the printed output curled?Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tray.Back to top';
body[597]='08-022-09.htm';
dai[597]='STAPLED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE TRAY';
bun[597]='STAPLED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE TRAYSTAPLED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE TRAYPoint to checkSolutionIs the output curled?Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tray.Back to top';
body[598]='08-022-10.htm';
dai[598]='SHEETS OUTPUT TO THE DELIVERY TRAY OF THE FINISHER ARE SCATTERED';
bun[598]='SHEETS OUTPUT TO THE DELIVERY TRAY OF THE FINISHER ARE SCATTEREDSHEETS OUTPUT TO THE DELIVERY TRAY OF THE FINISHER ARE SCATTEREDPoint to checkSolutionHave the output sheets got folded?If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been reversed, in some cases it can be improved.Back to top';
body[599]='08-022-11.htm';
dai[599]='THE STAPLED SHEETS ARE SCATTERED';
bun[599]='THE STAPLED SHEETS ARE SCATTEREDTHE STAPLED SHEETS ARE SCATTEREDPoint to checkSolutionHave the output sheets got folded?If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been reversed, in some cases it can be improved.Back to top';
body[600]='08-023-01.htm';
dai[600]='PREVIEW IMAGES OR THUMBNAIL IMAGES DO NOT APPEAR';
bun[600]='PREVIEW IMAGES OR THUMBNAIL IMAGES DO NOT APPEARPREVIEW IMAGES OR THUMBNAIL IMAGES DO NOT APPEARPoint to checkSolutionAre there a number of jobs waiting to be executed?Wait until several of the jobs have been executed.Back to top';
body[601]='08-023-02.htm';
dai[601]='THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY IS DIFFICULT TO VIEW';
bun[601]='THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY IS DIFFICULT TO VIEWTHE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY IS DIFFICULT TO VIEWPoint to checkSolutionIs the brightness properly adjusted?Tap the [LCD Control] key on the home screen to adjust the brightness.Back to top';
body[602]='08-023-03.htm';
dai[602]='YOU WERE LOGGED OUT WITHOUT LOGGING OUT YOURSELF';
bun[602]='YOU WERE LOGGED OUT WITHOUT LOGGING OUT YOURSELFYOU WERE LOGGED OUT WITHOUT LOGGING OUT YOURSELFPoint to checkSolutionDid Auto Clear activate?Log in again.When user authentication is used, the currently logged in user will be automatically logged out if Auto Clear activates. If you are the administrator, change the time setting of Auto Clear or disable Auto Clear in [Auto Clear Setting]. "Back to top';
body[603]='08-023-04.htm';
dai[603]='YOU FORGOT THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD';
bun[603]='YOU FORGOT THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORDYOU FORGOT THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORDPoint to checkSolutionWas the administrator password changed from the factory default setting?Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in Quick Start Guide. After changing the password, take special care to remember it.Back to top';
body[604]='08-032.htm';
dai[604]='CANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGS';
bun[604]='CANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGSCANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGSTo clear and initialize all settings:Tap the [CA] key.To cancel printing or transmission:Tap the [Cancel Print] or [Cancel Transmission] key.To cancel job:Remove the pending jobs in the [Job Status] screen.STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDTo clear entered numeric values:Tap the [C] key.Back to top';
body[605]='09-001.htm';
dai[605]='HOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUAL';
bun[605]='HOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUAL HOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUALOverviewThis section explains how to use the User\'s Manual.A desired function can be displayed by switching the mode tab and then selecting the title. It can also be displayed from the contents, index, or search.Click a tab of the mode you want to seeTap the item that you want to see from the menu on the left of the screenIf the menu items are opened, click the item to view its contents to select desired items.Contents, Search, Index FunctionsA target function can be displayed using the Contents, Search, or Index function.Display from ContentsClicking the [CONTENTS] tab displays a list of contents of the User\'s Manual. Click the item you want to see. Search and DisplayEnter a word to be searched, then click the [SEARCH] button to display the search result screen. Click the item you want to see.Display from IndexClicking the [INDEX] tab displays the index screen. Click the item you want to see.Meanings of icons used in the User\'s ManualThis alerts you to a situation that could result in death or serious personal injury. This alerts you to a situation that could result in personal injury or damage to properties.This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of machine damage or failure.This supplements function or operation procedure.This explains a restriction of function or operation procedure.This explains how to stop or correct an operation.This describes a routine work relevant to setting mode.Indication of setting mode (for administrators) This machine provides "Setting mode" for administrators. The mode allows the administrator to change or register default values of each function, and configure network settings.When setting mode is required to use this machine, this manual describes a procedure as shown in the following examples.Follow the arrow marks to tap or click menu items and select the proper item.To set Rotation Copy:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] &#8594; [Copy Function Settings] &#8594; [Copy Function Settings] &#8594; [Rotation Copy Setting].To edit the home screen list:In "Setting mode (Web version)", select [User Control] &#8594; [Favourite Operation Group List] &#8594; [Home Screen List]. (Administrator rights are required.)Descriptions in the manualScreens or icons shown in the User\'s Manual may differ from the actual ones used on this machine.For how to install the drivers and software described in the User\'s Manual, consult the Software Setup Guide.For matters related to operating systems, consult the manual of the operating system or refer to relevant help function as necessary.The User\'s Manual provides the explanations of screens and procedures based on Windows 7 &reg;. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.The User\'s Manual provides the explanations of screens and procedures based on Mac OS X 10.4 in the case of a Mac OS X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in the User\'s Manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".This manual contains references to the fax function. However, please note that the fax function is not available in some countries and regions.The contents of the User\'s Manual have been created with great care. However, should you have any questions or information regarding this manual when you use it, please do not hesitate to contact "authorised service representative".Strict quality control and inspection were performed before this machine was shipped. However, should you find any failures, please contact your dealer or "authorised service representative".Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any failures that occur due to incorrect operation of the product and its options by the customer or a third party, or for any damage that occurs due to the failures.For purposes of improvement, the contents of the User\'s Manual are subject to change without notice.The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.In general, the explanations provided in the User\'s Manual are based on the assumption that the large capacity tray, saddle finisher (50-sheet stapling), and punch module have been installed on the MX-M365N. However, some descriptions assumes an installatThe specifications or descriptions may differ depending on the region where the product is used or the type of the product.Back to top ';
body[606]='09-002.htm';
dai[606]='USER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD';
bun[606]='USER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD USER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD If you wish to view the User\'s Manual on your PC, download it from this machine. If the machine is not connected to the network, you cannot download the User\'s Manual. For more information, consult a network administrator.OperationStart the Web browser on the PC, and enter the IP address of the machine Check the IP address of the machine with the network administrator. Recommended Web browserInternet Explorer: 6 or laterFirefox: 3.6 or laterSafari: 4.0 or laterDepending on the machine settings, user authentication may be required to display the setting mode (Web version). For password and other information required for user authentication, contact the machine administrator.Click [Operation Manual Download] on the menuSelect the language you wish to downloadClick the [Download] buttonExpand the "User\'s Manual" you have downloaded in step 4 If you use Windows, right-click the downloaded "User\'s Manual", and select [Expand All] from the menu.If [Expand All] does not appear in the menu, use any zip application to expand the "User\'s Manual".If you use Macintosh, double-click the "User\'s Manual". Follow the instructions that appear in the Deployment Wizard to expand the "User\'s Manual" Open the "User\'s Manual" folderDouble click "index (.htm)""User\'s Manual" appears. Depending on your Web browser, a warning message may appear in the information bar or dialog box to indicate that your Web browser has restricted viewing of this file to help protect security. In this case, release the restricted viewing of your Web browser. The "User\'s Manual" is not properly displayed unless you release the restriction.For more information, please refer to your Web browser\'s help file or consult your Web browser manufacturer. Back to top ';
body[607]='09-007.htm';
dai[607]='ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG';
bun[607]='ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOGITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.No.&nbsp;Item nameDescription1Main itemsJob IDThe job ID is recorded. Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum of 999999, after which the count resets to 1.2Job ModeThe job mode type, such as copy or print is recorded.3account-job-idThe job ID used in the OSA is recorded. It is recorded regardless of whether or not the OSA is present.4Computer NameThe name of the computer that sent a print job is recorded.*5User NameThe user name when the user authentication function is used is recorded.6Login NameThe login name when the user authentication function is used is recorded.7Card IDThe card ID when it is used for an authentication process is recorded.8Number of Card IssuanceThe number of times the card has been issued is written in an SSFC IC card is recorded.9Billing CodeMain Code/Sub Code or Use Code is recorded.10Starting Date &amp; TimeThe date and time the job was started are recorded.11Completing Date &amp; TimeThe date and time the job was completed are recorded.12Black &amp; White Total CountFor a print job, the total count is recorded. For a send job, the number of transmitted black &amp; white pages is recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total number of pages is recorded. For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored bl13 Count according to size Counts by original/paper size in colour mode and black &amp; white mode are recorded. 14Number of sheets according to sizeNumber of sheets according to paper size is recorded.15 Number of Reserved Sets Number of specified sets or reserved destinations is recorded. 16Number of Completed SetsNumber of completed sets or number of destinations to which transmission was successfully completed is recorded.17Number of Reserved PagesNumber of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded.18Number of Completed PagesNumber of completed pages of a set is recorded.19ResultThe result of a job is recorded.20Error CauseWhen an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded.21Print Job Related ItemOutputThe output mode of a printed job is recorded.22StapleThe status of stapling is recorded.23Staple CountThe staple count is recorded.24Punch CountThe punch count is recorded.25FoldA job that uses the fold function is recorded.26Fold CountNumber of folded pages is recorded.27Printer ToneThe tone used for a print job is recorded.28Image Send Related ItemAddressAddress of an image send job is recorded.29Sender NameSender name of an image send job is recorded.30Sender AddressSender address of an image send job is recorded.31Transmission TypeTransmission type of an image send job is recorded.32Administrative Serial NumberAdministrative serial number of an image send job is recorded.33Broadcast numberBroadcast number of an image send job is recorded.34Entry OrderReservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job is recorded. This is used to link communication and printing when recording multi polling jobs.35File FormatFile format of an image send job is recorded.36Compression Mode/Compression RatioCompression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image send job is recorded.37Communication TimeThe communication time of image send jobs is recorded.38Fax No.The stored sender\'s number is recorded.39Document Filing Related ItemDocument FilingStatus of document filing is recorded.40Storing ModeDocument filing storing mode is recorded.41Common FunctionalityColour SettingColour mode selected by user is recorded.42Special ModesSpecial modes selected when the job was executed is recorded.43File NameThe stored file name is recorded.*44Data Size [KB]The size of a file is recorded.45Detailed ItemsOriginal SizeSize of scanned original is recorded. For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file is recorded.46Original TypeOriginal type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings screen is recorded.47Original CountNumber of scanned original sheets is recorded.48Paper SizeFor a print job, the paper size is recorded. For a send job, the transmitted paper size is recorded. For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file is recorded.49Paper TypeThe paper type used for printing is recorded.50Paper PropertyThe paper property specified in "Paper Type" is recorded.51Duplex SetupThe duplex setting is recorded.52ResolutionThe scanning resolution is recorded.53Machine ItemModel NameThe model name of the machine is recorded.54Unit Serial NumberThe serial number of the machine is recorded.55NameThe name of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded.56Machine LocationThe installation location of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded. Back to top';
body[608]='09-033.htm';
dai[608]='REQUESTING REPAIR';
bun[608]='REQUESTING REPAIR REQUESTING REPAIROverview Before requesting repair, read "TROUBLESHOOTING". Nevertheless, if a particular problem persists, stop using your machine. Unplug the power cable from the machine and contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative and inform tProduct nameDigital multifunctional systemModelMX-M365N / MX-M465N / MX-M565N Problem status (Enter as in details as possible.)&nbsp;Do not try to repair it by yourself. It is very dangerous. Back to top ';
body[609]='09-034.htm';
dai[609]='IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES';
bun[609]='IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGESOverview When the machine is transferred, the internal toner cartridge needs to be taken out. Please contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area before you change your place of residence. Back to top ';
body[610]='09-035.htm';
dai[610]='MAINTENANCE';
bun[610]='MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCEOverview When the maintenance execution time is approaching, a message will appear on the touch panel. When the message is displayed, contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area as soon as possible. Back to top ';
body[611]='09-036.htm';
dai[611]='MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM';
bun[611]='MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEMOverview We provide two types of optional maintenance services to maintain the performance and functions of this product: the Counter Service System and the Spot Service System.For service system details, contact the dealer and select the most appropriate service. Back to top ';
body[612]='09-037.htm';
dai[612]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES';
bun[612]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSESOverviewIn order to ensure our maintenance services, we will retain performance parts for this product for seven (7) years after production is discontinued.Performance parts refers to parts that are required to maintain the functions of this product. Back to top ';
body[613]='09-038.htm';
dai[613]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES';
bun[613]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIESOverview We will retain supplies of this product for seven (7) years after it has been discontinued. Back to top ';
body[614]='09-040.htm';
dai[614]='LICENSE INFORMATION';
bun[614]='LICENSE INFORMATION LICENSE INFORMATIONInformation on the Software License for This Product Software compositionThe software included in this product is comprised of various software components whose individual copyrightsare held by SHARP or by third parties.Software developed by SHARP and open source softwareThe copyrights for the software components and various relevant documents included with this product that weredeveloped or written by SHARP are owned by SHARP and are protected by the Copyright Act, international treaties,and other relevant laws. This product also makes use of freely distributed software and software componentswhose copyrights are held by third parties. These include software components covered by a GNU General PublicLicense (hereafter GPL), a GNU Lesser General Public License (hereafter LGPL) or other license agreement.Obtaining source codeSome of the open source software licensors require the distributor to provide the source code with the executablesoftware components. GPL and LGPL include similar requirements. For information on obtaining the source codefor the open source software and for obtaining the GPL, LGPL, and other license agreement information, visit thefollowing website:http://sharp-world.com/products/copier/source/download/index.htmlWe are unable to answer any questions about the source code for the open source software. The source code forthe software components whose copyrights are held by SHARP is not distributed.Software CopyrightsCopyright (c) 2000 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For permission or any other legal details, please contactOffice of Technology TransferCarnegie Mellon University 5000 Forbes Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu4.Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ORCopyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska H&ouml;gskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before eWITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright noticTHIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.Individual source code files are copyright MIT, Cygnus Support, OpenVision, Oracle, Sun Soft, FundsXpress, and others.Project Athena, Athena, Athena MUSE, Discuss, Hesiod, Kerberos, Moira, and Zephyr are trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). No commercial use of these trademarks may be made without prior written permission of MIT.&nbsp; "Commercial use" means use of a name in a product or other for-profit manner. It does NOT prevent a commercial firm from referring to the MIT trademarks in order to convey information (although in doing so, recognition of their trademark statusOpenSSL License ---------------Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"4.The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.5.Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.6.Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEThis product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).Original SSLeay License---------------Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SCopyright remains Eric Young\'s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word \'cryptographic\' can be left out4.If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version orderivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] D3DES License---------------Copyright (c) 1988,1989,1990,1991,1992 by Richard Outerbridge. (GEnie : OUTER; CIS : [71755,204]) Graven Imagery, 1992.GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSEVersion 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. PreambleThe licenses for most software are designed to take away yourfreedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General PublicLicense is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change freesoftware--to make sure the software is free for all its users. ThisGeneral Public License applies to most of the Free SoftwareFoundation\'s software and to any other program whose authors commit tousing it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered bythe GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it toyour programs, too.When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, notprice. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that youhave the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge forthis service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get itif you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of itin new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbidanyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if youdistribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whethergratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights thatyou have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get thesource code. And you must show them these terms so they know theirrights.We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,distribute and/or modify the software.Also, for each author\'s protection and ours, we want to make certainthat everyone understands that there is no warranty for this freesoftware. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, wewant its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, sothat any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the originalauthors\' reputations.Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by softwarepatents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a freeprogram will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making theprogram proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that anypatent must be licensed for everyone\'s free use or not licensed at all.The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution andmodification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION0. This License applies to any program or other work which containsa notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributedunder the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into anotherlanguage. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation inthe term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are notcovered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act ofrunning the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Programis covered only if its contents constitute a work based on theProgram (independent of having been made by running the Program).Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program\'ssource code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that youconspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriatecopyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all thenotices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this Licensealong with the Program.You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, andyou may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portionof it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy anddistribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. Ifidentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works inthemselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to thosesections when you distribute them as separate works. But when youdistribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work basedon the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms ofthis License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to theentire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contestyour rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is toexercise the right to control the distribution of derivative orcollective works based on the Program.In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Programwith the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work underthe scope of this License.3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms ofSections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work formaking modifications to it. For an executable work, complete sourcecode means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus anyassociated interface definition files, plus the scripts used tocontrol compilation and installation of the executable. However, as aspecial exception, the source code distributed need not includeanything that is normally distributed (in either source or binaryform) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of theoperating system on which the executable runs, unless that componentitself accompanies the executable.If distribution of executable or object code is made by offeringaccess to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalentaccess to copy the source code from the same place counts asdistribution of the source code, even though third parties are notcompelled to copy the source along with the object code.4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Programexcept as expressly provided under this License. Any attemptotherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program isvoid, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you underthis License will not have their licenses terminated so long as suchparties remain in full compliance.5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have notsigned it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify ordistribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions areprohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, bymodifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on theProgram), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, andall its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifyingthe Program or works based on it.6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on theProgram), the recipient automatically receives a license from theoriginal licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject tothese terms and conditions. You may not impose any furtherrestrictions on the recipients\' exercise of the rights granted herein.You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties tothis License.7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patentinfringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannotdistribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under thisLicense and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence youmay not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patentlicense would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program byall those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, thenthe only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the Program.If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances.It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe anypatents or other property right claims or to contest validity of anysuch claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting theintegrity of the free software distribution system, which isimplemented by public license practices. Many people have madegenerous contributions to the wide range of software distributedthrough that system in reliance on consistent application of thatsystem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willingto distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannotimpose that choice.This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed tobe a consequence of the rest of this License.8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted incertain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, theoriginal copyright holder who places the Program under this Licensemay add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excludingthose countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or amongcountries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporatesthe limitation as if written in the body of this License.9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versionsof the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions willbe similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail toaddress new problems or concerns.Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Programspecifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "anylater version", you have the option of following the terms and conditionseither of that version or of any later version published by the FreeSoftware Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number ofthis License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free SoftwareFoundation.10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other freeprograms whose distribution conditions are different, write to the authorto ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the FreeSoftware Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimesmake exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goalsof preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software andof promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTYFOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHENOTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIESPROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSEDOR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK ASTO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THEPROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION.12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/ORREDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BYYOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHERPROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New ProgramsIf you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatestpossible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make itfree software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safestto attach them to the start of each source file to most effectivelyconvey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at leastthe "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program\'s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like thiswhen it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w\'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c\' for details.The hypothetical commands `show w\' and `show c\' should show the appropriateparts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use maybe called something other than `show w\' and `show c\'; they could even bemouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or yourschool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, ifnecessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision\' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of ViceThis General Public License does not permit incorporating your program intoproprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you mayconsider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with thelibrary. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser GeneralPublic License instead of this License.GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] PreambleThe licenses for most software are designed to take away yourfreedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General PublicLicenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and changefree software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to somespecially designated software packages--typically libraries--of theFree Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. Youcan use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whetherthis license or the ordinary General Public License is the betterstrategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure thatyou have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and chargefor this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can getit if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces ofit in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can dothese things.To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbiddistributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender theserights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities foryou if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratisor for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gaveyou. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the sourcecode. If you link other code with the library, you must providecomplete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink themwith the library after making changes to the library and recompilingit. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright thelibrary, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legalpermission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear thatthere is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library ismodified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should knowthat what they have is not the original version, so that the originalauthor\'s reputation will not be affected by problems that might beintroduced by others.Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence ofany free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannoteffectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining arestrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist thatany patent license obtained for a version of the library must beconsistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by theordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU LesserGeneral Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, andis quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We usethis license for certain libraries in order to permit linking thoselibraries into non-free programs.When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or usinga shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking acombined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinaryGeneral Public License therefore permits such linking only if theentire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser GeneralPublic License permits more lax criteria for linking other code withthe library.We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because itdoes Less to protect the user\'s freedom than the ordinary GeneralPublic License. It also provides other free software developers Lessof an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantagesare the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for manylibraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certainspecial circumstances.For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need toencourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomesa de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must beallowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a freelibrary does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In thiscase, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to freesoftware only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-freeprograms enables a greater number of people to use a large body offree software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library innon-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNUoperating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operatingsystem.Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of theusers\' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that islinked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to runthat program using a modified version of the Library.The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution andmodification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between awork based on the library and a "work that uses the library". Theformer contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter mustbe combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or otherprogram which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder orother authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms ofthis Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").Each licensee is addressed as "you".A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or dataprepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or workwhich has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on theLibrary" means either the Library or any derivative work undercopyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or aportion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translatedstraightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation isincluded without limitation in the term "modification".)"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work formaking modifications to it. For a library, complete source code meansall the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associatedinterface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilationand installation of the library.Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are notcovered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act ofrunning a program using the Library is not restricted, and output fromsuch a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work basedon the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool forwriting it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library doesand what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library\'scomplete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided thatyou conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy anappropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intactall the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of anywarranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with theLibrary.You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for afee.2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portionof it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy anddistribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. Ifidentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works inthemselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to thosesections when you distribute them as separate works. But when youdistribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work basedon the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms ofthis License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to theentire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wroteit.Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contestyour rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is toexercise the right to control the distribution of derivative orcollective works based on the Library.In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Librarywith the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work underthe scope of this License.3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General PublicLicense instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To dothis, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, sothat they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of theordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specifythat version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change inthese notices.Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible forthat copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to allsubsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code ofthe Library into a program that is not a library.4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion orderivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable formunder the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompanyit with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, whichmust be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on amedium customarily used for software interchange.If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copyfrom a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy thesource code from the same place satisfies the requirement todistribute the source code, even though third parties are notcompelled to copy the source along with the object code.5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of theLibrary, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled orlinked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such awork, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, andtherefore falls outside the scope of this License.However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Librarycreates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because itcontains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses thelibrary". The executable is therefore covered by this License.Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header filethat is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be aderivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can belinked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. Thethreshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, datastructure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inlinefunctions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the objectfile is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivativework. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of theLibrary will still fall under Section 6.)Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you maydistribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine orlink a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce awork containing portions of the Library, and distribute that workunder terms of your choice, provided that the terms permitmodification of the work for the customer\'s own use and reverseengineering for debugging such modifications.You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that theLibrary is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered bythis License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the workduring execution displays copyright notices, you must include thecopyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a referencedirecting the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do oneof these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user\'s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses theLibrary" must include any data and utility programs needed forreproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,the materials to be distributed need not include anything that isnormally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the majorcomponents (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system onwhich the executable runs, unless that component itself accompaniesthe executable.It may happen that this requirement contradicts the licenserestrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normallyaccompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannotuse both them and the Library together in an executable that youdistribute.7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on theLibrary side-by-side in a single library together with other libraryfacilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combinedlibrary, provided that the separate distribution of the work based onthe Library and of the other library facilities is otherwisepermitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distributethe Library except as expressly provided under this License. Anyattempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, ordistribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate yourrights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,or rights, from you under this License will not have their licensesterminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have notsigned it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify ordistribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions areprohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, bymodifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on theLibrary), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, andall its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifyingthe Library or works based on it.10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on theLibrary), the recipient automatically receives a license from theoriginal licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Librarysubject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any furtherrestrictions on the recipients\' exercise of the rights granted herein.You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties withthis License.11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patentinfringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannotdistribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under thisLicense and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence youmay not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patentlicense would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library byall those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, thenthe only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the Library.If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under anyparticular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe anypatents or other property right claims or to contest validity of anysuch claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting theintegrity of the free software distribution system which isimplemented by public license practices. Many people have madegenerous contributions to the wide range of software distributedthrough that system in reliance on consistent application of thatsystem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willingto distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannotimpose that choice.This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed tobe a consequence of the rest of this License.12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted incertain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, theoriginal copyright holder who places the Library under this License may addan explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thusexcluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as ifwritten in the body of this License.13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or newversions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Libraryspecifies a version number of this License which applies to it andany later version, you have the option of following the terms andconditions either of that version or of any later version published bythe Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify alicense version number, you may choose any version ever published bythe Free Software Foundation.14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other freeprograms whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,write to the author to ask for permission. For software which iscopyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the FreeSoftware Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Ourdecision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free statusof all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharingand reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NOWARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OROTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THELIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUMETHE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO INWRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFYAND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOUFOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THELIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR AFAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IFSUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New LibrariesIf you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatestpossible use to the public, we recommend making it free software thateveryone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permittingredistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of theordinary General Public License).To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It issafest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectivelyconvey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least thecopyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library\'s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USAAlso add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or yourschool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, ifnecessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob\' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of ViceThat\'s all there is to it!Back to top ';
body[615]='09-041.htm';
dai[615]='CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODS';
bun[615]='CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODS CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODSConsumable TypesYou should use our recommended copy paper and label paper. Please consult your dealer for details. You should use our specified toner cartridges, staple cartridges, and transparency films. Product nameModel nameRemarksStaple cartridge (for finisher or saddle finisher)MX-SCX1Approx. 5,000 staples&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3Staple cartridge (for finisher (large stacker))AR-SC2Approx. 5,000 staples &times; 3Staple cartridge (for saddle stitch unit of saddle finisher and saddle finisher (large stacker))AR-SC3Approx. 2,000 staples&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3Handling Toner and Toner Cartridge, and in Case of EmergencyHandlingDo not throw toner or toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may splatter and cause burns. Further, do not forcibly open a toner cartridge. Toner dusts may leak. In this case, avoid dust inhilation or skin contact.StorageStore toner or toner cartridge in a cool and dark place that is not sealed or containing flame. Store toner or toner cartridge out of reach of small children. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally, not setting upvertically, being careful not to invIn case or emergencyIf you inhale the dusts:Move to a location with clean air, and gargle with a large amount of water. If you have symptoms such as a cough, consult a doctor.If toner adheres to the skin:Clean skin with a soap, and rinse away toner with water.If toner enters the eyes:Immediately rinse away toner with flowing water. If you have a pain, consult a doctor.If toner is swollowed:Rinse out your mouth, and drink one or two glasses of water. If necessary, consult a doctor.Caution:Do not store a toner cartridge in a place in which the temperature is 40 degrees Celsius or more. If it is stored in a high-temperature place, toner in a cartridge may be hardened.Store toner cartridges pr toner collection container out of reach of small children.Other Consumable Storage MethodsStore consumables in a place that satisfies the following conditions.A clean and dry placeA place with a stable temperatureA place not exposed to direct sunlightPut copy paper in a bag, and store it on a flat place.If you do not put paper in a bag or you set up paper for storage, curling or moisture absorption occurs, resulting in a paper jam. Be sure to put the rest of paper in a bag, and close the top of the bag for storage, otherwise paper curling or moisture abBack to top ';
body[616]='09-042.htm';
dai[616]='RECYCLING RESOURCES';
bun[616]='RECYCLING RESOURCES RECYCLING RESOURCESRecycled paper with waste paper pulp compoundedThis machine is capable of using recycled paper made of compounded waste-paper pulp. However, various type of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service rWe Thank You for Your Co-operation in Recycling Used Products.Sharp collects used products to help preserve the Earth&rsquo;s environment and the effective use of of its resources, promoting the reuse or recycling of products and parts. To have used products collected, contact your dealer or the authorised service rWe thank you for your co-operation in recycling used cartridges.Sharp collects used cartridges to help preserve the Earth&rsquo;s environment and the effective use of of its resources, promoting the recycling of them. Please give the used cartridges to your maintenance staff.Collecting and Recycling Used Photoconductive Drums or Photoconductive Drum CartridgesSharp offers a material recycling system to collect used photoconductive drums or photoconductive drum cartridges from customers and reprocess them back into raw materials by using a recycler in each region. Please pass the used photoconductive drums or pBack to top ';
body[617]='09-043.htm';
dai[617]='TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS';
bun[617]='TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTSOverviewThe following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and accessories.Microsoft&reg;, Windows&reg;, Windows&reg; XP, Windows Server&reg; 2003, Windows Vista&reg;, Windows Server&reg; 2008, Windows&reg; 7, Windows&reg; 8, Windows Server&reg; 2012 and Internet Explorer&reg; are registered trademarks or trademarks of MicrosoftIntel&reg; is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Adobe and Flash are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.Mozilla&reg;and Firefox&reg;are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation in the U.S.A. and other countries.PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.NEC, PC-9821, and PC98-NX are registered trademarks or trademarks of NEC Corporation.Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.Sharp OSA is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.RealVNC is a trademark of RealVNC Limited.All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.The built-in fonts of this printer use MicroType&reg; font compression technology of Monotype Imaging, and also use the scalable font rendering subsystem of UFST&reg; (Universal Font Scaling Technology) of MonotBack to top ';
body[618]='09-044.htm';
dai[618]='SOFTWARE LICENSE';
bun[618]='SOFTWARE LICENSE SOFTWARE LICENSEPLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE.1LicenseThe application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this License, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the "Software") and related documentation are licensed to you by SHARP. You own the disk on which t2RestrictionsThe Software contains copyrighted material, trade secrets and other proprietary material which is owned by SHARP and/or its Licensors and in order to protect them you may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a h3TerminationThis license is effective until terminated. You may terminate this License at any time by destroying the Software and related documentation and all copies thereof. This License will terminate immediately without notice from SHARP and/or SHARP&rsquo;s Lice4Export Law AssurancesYou agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported outside the United States except as authorised and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United St5Government End UsersIf you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the United States Government, the following provisions apply. The Government agrees:(i)if the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD), the Software is classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the Government is acquiring only "restricted rights" in the Software and its documentation as that term(ii)if the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the United States Government other than DoD, the Software is classified as "Commercial" that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 and as "Commercial Computer Software" that term is6Disclaimer of Warranty on SoftwareYou expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk. The Software and related documentation are provided "AS IS" and without warranty of any kind and SHARP and SHARP\'s Licensor(s) (for the purpose of provisions 6 an7Limitation of LiabilityUNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SHARP BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF SHARP OR A SHARP AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE In no event shall SHARP\'s total liability to you for all damages, losses, and causes of action (whether in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise) exceed the amount paid by you for the Software.8Controlling Law and SeverabilityFor a portion of the Software related with Apple Macintosh and Microsoft Windows, this license shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of California and Washington, respectively. If for any reason a court of competent j9Complete AgreementThis License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and related documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Back to top ';
body[619]='09-044_2.htm';
dai[619]='OVERVIEW OF CLEANING';
bun[619]='OVERVIEW OF CLEANINGOVERVIEW OF CLEANINGTo ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. If coloured/white lines or misfeeds occur, follow the cleaning procedures below.When dirty spots or coloured/white lines are left on scanned imagesClean the following parts sequentially until no dirty spots, or coloured/white lines are left.CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERWhen paper misfeed occurs in the bypass tray:CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLERWhen coloured lines appear:CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUMDo not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the housing.Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel (shown below). If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface may be damaged.Back to top';
body[620]='09-045-0.htm';
dai[620]='CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER';
bun[620]='CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERCLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERWhen dirty spots or coloured/white lines are left on scanned images, clean the following parts. Keep these parts clean at all times. When using the document glass: the document glass, the document backplate sheetWhen using the automatic document feeder: tExamples of lines in the imageBack to top';
body[621]='09-045-1.htm';
dai[621]='DOCUMENT GLASS';
bun[621]='DOCUMENT GLASSDOCUMENT GLASSTo clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.Back to top';
body[622]='09-045-2.htm';
dai[622]='DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEET';
bun[622]='DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEETDOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEETTo clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.Back to top';
body[623]='09-045-3.htm';
dai[623]='SCANNING AREA';
bun[623]='SCANNING AREASCANNING AREA To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner. Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner. One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder. Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder. Push in the release switch to release the cover. Clean the scanning area in the automatic document feeder. Close the cover. Replace the glass cleaner. Back to top';
body[624]='09-046.htm';
dai[624]='CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM';
bun[624]='CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUMCLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM Overview If black lines lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder, use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the photoconductive drum. If cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum does not solve the problem, pull the knob out and push it back three more times.When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.Operation Open the front cover. Release the toner collection container.Press up the toner collection container release lever.The toner collection container will fall forward as shown. Gently support the container with your hands as you let it fall forward as far as it will go. Clean the main charger. Gently pull the charger cleaner all the way up, and gently push it in. Push the toner collection container into the machine. Push the container in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. Back to top ';
body[625]='09-048.htm';
dai[625]='CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER';
bun[625]='CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLERCLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur whenfeeding envelopes or heavy paperthrough the bypass tray, wipe thesurface of the feed roller with a cleansoft cloth moistened with water or aneutral detergent. Back to top ';
body[626]='09-051.htm';
dai[626]='REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE';
bun[626]='REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGEREPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGEOverview When toner is running low, the message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears.You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out. Replacement messageWhen toner is running low, the message "Toner Low (Do not replace cartridge until requested)" appears. When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement.When the amount of toner decreases further, the message "Ready to scan for copy. (Change the toner cartridge.)" appears.When this message appears, replace the toner cartridge.When the toner runs out, printing is stopped and the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears. If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge, the following message will appear. Once the machine enters this state, printing cannot be carried out until the toner cartridge is replaced.Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children.If a toner cartridge is stored on end, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side.If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge. Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become light or the image blurred. Keep used toner cartridges in a plastic bag (do not discard them). Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges. To view the approximate amount of toner remaining (indicated in %), hold down the [Home Screen] button during printing or in standby mode. When toner runs out while the home screen is displayed, the [Toner Empty] message appears in the upper right corner of the screen.Operation Open the front cover. Pull the toner cartridge toward you. Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine. Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times. Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level. A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour. Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in place. Keep pushing in the cartridge until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is occurring. Back to top ';
body[627]='09-052.htm';
dai[627]='REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER';
bun[627]='REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINERREPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER Overview The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container becomes full, "Replace used toner container." will appear. Do not throw the toner collection container into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.Store the toner collection container out of the reach of small children. Operation Open the front cover.Release the used toner collection container. Press up the toner collection container release lever. The toner collection container will fall forward as shown below. Wait until the container comes to a stop. Remove the toner collection container. Hold the toner collection container by both hands and lift it up slowly. Place the toner collection container on a flat surface. Place a sheet of paper such as newspaper on the surface before placing the toner collection container. Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out.Remote the cover that is attached to the side of the toner collection box. Remove carefully, taking care that toner does not spill. Attach the cover that was removed in step 5 to the toner collection opening. When attaching the cover, take care that your clothes are not soiled by toner. Install a new toner collection container. Insert the container from above at a slant. (In the direction opposite to the direction you removed it in.) Push the toner collection container into the machine. Push the container in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. Back to top ';
body[628]='09-053.htm';
dai[628]='REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE';
bun[628]='REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGEREPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE Overview If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace the stamp cartridge (AR-SV1). Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 Operation Open the automatic document feeder. Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder.Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass. Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out. Remove the stamp cartridge (A). Install a new stamp cartridge. Push the stamp unit back in.Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet.When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder. Make sure that the document backplate sheet is firmly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feeder.If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached, remove the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again to firmly attach the sheet. Back to top ';
